System

Programming

TRACER SUMMIT™
Critical Control System

BMTX SVP02A-EN
System
Programming

Tracer Summit™
Critical Control System

Tracer Summit Critical Control System BMTX-SVP02A-EN

July 2004
BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Tracer Summit System Programming

This guide and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and shall not be used or reproduced in whole or in part,
except as intended, without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Trane, a division of American Standard, Inc., has a
policy of continuous product improvement and reserves the right to change design and specification without notice.

Use of the software contained in this package is provided under a software license agreement. Unauthorized use of the software or
related materials discussed in this manual can result in civil damages and criminal penalties. The terms of this license are included
with the compact disk. Please read them thoroughly.

Although Trane has tested the described in this guide, no guarantee is offered that the system and software are error free.

Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any per-
son of such revision or change.

Trane may have patents or pending patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document, Trane does not
imply giving license to these patents.

™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of American Standard Inc.: IntelliPak, TCM, Tracer Summit, Trane,
Voyager, Tracer, UCP2, CenTraVac, ICS, VariTrac, VariTrane, Horizon, Rover, and Tracker.

™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: Adobe and Acrobat
from Adobe Systems Incorporated; ARCNET from Datapoint Corporation; AutoCAD from Autodesk; BACnet from ASHRAE;
CorelDRAW from Corel Corporation; LonTalk, LonMark, and Neuron from Echelon Corporation; Modbus from Schneider
Electric; Paintshop Pro from Jasc Software, Inc.; Windows, Internet Explorer, SQL database, and Microsoft are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Printed in the U.S.A.

© 2004 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN
NOTICE:
Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully:

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices

CAUTION
Indicates a situation that may result in equipment damage or property damage.

The following format and symbol conventions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual:

IMPORTANT
Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to
operate improperly but will not likely result in potential for damage.

Note:
A note may be used to make the reader aware of useful information, to clarify a point, or to describe
options or alternatives.

X This symbol precedes a procedure that consists of only a single step.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Important Things to Know Before Using this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
For More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Chapter 2 Compliance Authorization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Authorizing the Creation of an Object or a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Authorizing the Creation of Multiple Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Authorizing Property Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Authorizing Alarm Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 3 Programming Order Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Setting Up a PC Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting Up Tracer Summit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Setting Up Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Setting Up Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Backing Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Chapter 4 Online and Offline Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Information Flow in Tracer Summit Critical Control System . . . . . . . . 13
Online Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Offline Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Updating an Existing Site with Offline Programming Changes . . . . . . 16

Chapter 5 Setting Up a Virtual Private Network . . . . . . . . . . 17

Test VPN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

BMTX-SVP02A-EN i
Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Using Referencer Edit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Referencer Edit Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Constant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Referencer Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
When a Referencer Fails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Not Used Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 7 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Viewing an Object’s Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Viewing System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 8 Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites. . . . . . . . . 41

Creating a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Creating a New Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Uploading a Site via a Dedicated ARCNET
or Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Uploading a Site via a BACnet/IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Uploading a Site via Modem/Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Restoring a Site from the Site Creation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copying a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting a Site to Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Configuring a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Selecting Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Adding Device Options: Modem, I/O Module,
Operator Display, BCU Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing a BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Deleting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Creating, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Non-Trane BACnet Devices . . . . . . 76
Creating and Deleting UCMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuring Communication Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selecting the BCU Version to Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Defining Billing Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Defining Security Class Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ii BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Setting Up Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setting Up Control Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting the Time and Date for the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Deleting a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chapter 9 Comm5 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Differences Between BCUs Regarding Discovery and
Database Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW) . . . . 100
Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX
or High Capacity BMTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Assigning Neuron IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW). . . . . . . . . 107
Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for
Standard Capacity BMTW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Clearing RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Assigning Neuron IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Adding a New UCM to an Existing Comm5 Link
(BMTX or High Capacity BMTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Adding New UCMs to an Existing Comm5 Link
(Standard Capacity BMTW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Replacing a Comm5 UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for
a High Capacity BMTW BCU that has had its
Software Image Upgraded to Version 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Replacing an Existing BCU
(Standard or High Capacity BMTW) with a BMTX BCU . . . . . . . . . . 125

Chapter 10 Setting Up Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Setting Up a Security Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting Up a New User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Entering User Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Assigning Access to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Assigning Access to Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Assigning Access to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Assigning Access to Security Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

BMTX-SVP02A-EN iii
Table of Contents

Modifying a User Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Defining Access for Users Not Logged On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Editing Authority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Setting Up Operator Display Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Changing a User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Chapter 11 Archive Audit Trail Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Installing the Archive Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Accessing the Archive Utility Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Archiving Audit Trail Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using the Scheduling Option to Archive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Archiving to Current Archive SQL Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Backing Up and Archiving to New Archive SQL Database . . . . . . 143

Chapter 12 Restoring an Archived Database Backup File . . 145

Chapter 13 Using UCM Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Accessing a UCM Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Creating a New UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Setting Up a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Configuring a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Setting Overrides for a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Overriding the Present Value of a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Releasing Control of a UCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Overriding Other Values in a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 159
Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deleting a UCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Chapter 14 Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers . . . . 161

Setting Up Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adding a Printer in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Up and Selecting the Events Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Selecting Other Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Up Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Adding a Workstation Modem in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

iv BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Creating a New Workstation Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Setting Up a Workstation Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setting Up the BCU Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Accessing the BCU Modem Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Creating a New BCU Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting Security Access for a BCU Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setting Up Pagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Accessing the Pager Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Creating a New Pager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Setting Up a Pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting Security Access for a Pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Chapter 15 Creating Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Creating an Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Naming an Input and Defining the Referencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting Up Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting
an Alarm Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Creating a Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Naming an Input and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Setting Up Alarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting
an Alarm Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Creating an Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Naming the Output and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Entering a Control Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Creating a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Naming the Output and Defining the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Entering a Control Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs . . . . . . . 198
Modifying an Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Overriding an Analog or Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Releasing Control to Another Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing the Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Setting Security Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Deleting an Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

BMTX-SVP02A-EN v
Table of Contents

Chapter 16 Message Forwarding and

Call Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
What is a Call Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Background Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Previewing the Message Forwarding Setup Process. . . . . . . . . . . 208
Preliminary Issues to Consider before Creating a Call Center . . . 210
Accessing the Message Forwarding Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Registering E-Mail Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Creating a Call Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Creating a Message Forwarding Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting a Holiday Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Selecting Alarm Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Modifying Call Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Deleting a Call Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Chapter 17 BCU Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

BMTX Binary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Pulse Meter Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
BMTW I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Creating the BCU I/O Module Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Setting Up Universal Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Accessing the BCU I/O Module Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Setting Up the BCU I/O Module UIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Setting Up System Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Up Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Up Pulse Metered Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Up Binary Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Setting Up a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Setting Security Access for the BCU I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Chapter 18 Chiller Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Accessing the Chiller Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Creating a New Chiller Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting Up the Chiller Plant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Modifying Startup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Modifying Subtract Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

vi BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Chiller UCM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 244
Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Deleting a Chiller Plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Chapter 19 Area Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Using Area Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Area Mode/Member Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Timed Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Accessing the Area Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Assigning Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Setting Air Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Setting Setpoints and Differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Setting Up Timed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Setting Up Night Economizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Assigning Event Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Setting Security Access for the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Overriding an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Overriding the Present Value and Lighting Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Making a Timed Override Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Deleting an Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 20 Using the Calculations Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

About Calculation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Cool Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Heat Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Minimum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Meter Totalization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Peak for X Minute Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Total Cooling Degree Days (CDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Total Heating Degree Days (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Total Run Hours/Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

BMTX-SVP02A-EN vii
Table of Contents

Accessing the Calculations Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Creating a New Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Setting Up a Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Clearing Calculation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting Security Access for a Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Deleting a Calculation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Chapter 21 Comm5 VAV Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Accessing the VAS Comm5 Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Creating a VAS Comm5 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Assigning VAS Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Assigning Common Space VAVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Setting up Global References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Balancing Air and Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Autocommissioning VAVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Chapter 22 Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems. . . . . . . . . . . 295

Accessing the VAV Air System Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Creating a VAV Air System Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Assigning VAS Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Resetting the Votes List for VAV Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Setting Up a VAV Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Modifying Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Modifying Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . 305
Defining Alarm and Event Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Deleting a VAS Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

viii BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 23 Heat Pump Loop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Accessing the Heat Pump Loop Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Assigning a Loop Controller Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Assigning a Water Source Heat Pump Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Setting Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Chapter 24 Custom Programming Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Opening and Closing the CPL Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Creating or Editing a CPL Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating a CPL Text File From a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Assigning Objects and Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Assigning Enumerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Using Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Using Saved Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Compiling a CPL Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Creating a CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Creating a New CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Replacing an Existing CPL Object in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Testing a CPL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
CPL Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Chapter 25 Time of Day Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Accessing the Scheduling Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Creating a New Daily Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Adding an Event to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Removing an Event from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Changing a Schedule Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Adding a Member to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

BMTX-SVP02A-EN ix
Table of Contents

Removing a Member from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Setting or Modifying Offsets for Schedule Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Save Events as a Normal Schedule to Weekdays,
Weekends, and Holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Adding event information to the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Chapter 26 Using the Navigation Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

The Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Different Types of Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Using the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Accessing the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using the Tree Menu and Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Accessing Sites and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Connecting to a Site from the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Disconnecting from a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Closing a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Refreshing the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Creating Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Basic Considerations in Moving Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Cutting and Pasting Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Dragging and Dropping Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Creating Nodes that Belong to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Creating Nodes Inside Site Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Grouping Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Finding a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Modifying the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Assigning Graphics to Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Editing the Graphic of a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Removing Node(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Adding Back a Removed Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Chapter 27 Using the Graphics Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

About Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Accessing the Graphics Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using the Graphics Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using the Graphics Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Using the Grid to Organize Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Editing Graphic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

x BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Changing the Background of a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Using the Locate Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Viewing a Graphic’s File Name and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Setting Up Security for a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Creating and Editing Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Inserting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Accessing the Graphic Field Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Selecting a Property Reference for Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Editing Setup Information for a Graphic Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Setup Information for Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Selecting the Destination for Target Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Selecting the Context Object for Target Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Creating Graphic Links to External Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Organizing Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Selecting a Graphic Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Selecting Multiple Fields at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Moving a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Resizing a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Cutting and Pasting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Copying a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Aligning Graphic Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Making Graphic Fields the Same Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Moving Graphic Field Layers Forward or Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Deleting a Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Saving Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name . . . . . 401
Saving Edited Standard Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Restoring an Original Standard Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
About Site and Global Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Creating Images for Use in Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Saving Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Window and Image Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Opening a Blank Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Building a Custom Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Saving Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Creating Expanded Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Inserting a Template Field on a Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

BMTX-SVP02A-EN xi
Table of Contents

Saving a Graphic with Template Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Editing a Graphic With Template Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Putting Permanent Information into Template Fields
on a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Deleting a Graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Using the Graphing Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Live Property Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Historical Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Accessing the Graphing Control Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Selecting Graph Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Selecting the Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Setting up Graph Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Chapter 28 Using the Trend Editor in CCS

Compliance-Enabled Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Historical Trend Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Mean Kinetic Temperature Trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Accessing the Trend Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating a Historical Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic Temperature Trends. . . . . . . . . 434
Enabling Historical Trending for a New Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing
Single-Member Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing
Multiple-Member Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Enabling MKT Trending for a New Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Enabling MKT Trending for an Existing Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Reverting from MKT Trending to Historical Trending . . . . . . . . . . 440
Setting Up Historical Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Setting Up Security Class for a Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Viewing the Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Chapter 29 Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit

BCUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Accessing the Trend Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Creating a New Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Setting the Members of a Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Setting Up Trend Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

xii BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Setting Security Access for a Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Viewing the Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Saving a Trend Object to a BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Archiving Trend Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Chapter 30 Reporting for Compliant Environments . . . . . . . 457

Audit Trail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Historical Trend Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Mean Kinetic Temperature Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Running Tracer Summit CCS Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Chapter 31 Designing Reports for Tracer Summit

BCU Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Report Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Live Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Trend Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Running a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Accessing the Report Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Selecting a Standard Live Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Selecting a Custom Live or Custom Trend Report . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Designing or Editing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Editing the Name or Orientation of the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Defining Report Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Defining the Members of a Standard Live Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Defining the Members of a Custom Live Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Defining the Members of a Custom Trend Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Changing the Report Member Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Adding a Blank Row in the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Entering Titles and Formatting the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Entering and Formatting the Report Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Entering and Formatting the Column Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Formatting the Body Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Entering and Formatting the Report Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Scheduling a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Selecting a Reporting Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Setting Up Daily Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Setting Up Weekly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Setting Up Monthly Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

BMTX-SVP02A-EN xiii
Table of Contents

Setting Up Annual Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Setting Output Options for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Saving the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Chapter 32 Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Changing the Home Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding,
and Event Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Setting Up the Events Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Setting up Message Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Setting Up Event Log Automatic Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Changing Default File Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Changing Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Changing the Workstation Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Selecting Whether Object and Device IDs Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting Connection Features of the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Chapter 33 The BCU Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Accessing the BCU Operator Display Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Creating a New BCU Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Setting Up the BCU Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Operator Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Selecting a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Removing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Selecting Individual Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Removing Individual Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Selecting Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Removing Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Customizing the Operator Display Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Setup Options for the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Enabling Security at the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Disabling Security at the Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Operator Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Disabling Non-Critical Confirmation Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Disable Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Enabling Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Enabling the Quick-Select Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Selecting Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Deleting Saved Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

xiv BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Chapter 34 Using the Custom Screen Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

About Custom Screen Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Accessing the Operator Display Custom Screen Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Creating Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Creating a Custom Screen from Another Custom Screen . . . . . . 518
Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
The Custom Screen Toolbar and Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Using the Custom Screens Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Displaying the Custom Screen Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Configuring and Using the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Adding Status Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint
Control Field(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Inserting an Override Control Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Inserting a Static Text Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Linking a Target Button Field to a Custom
or Standard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Saving Custom Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Organizing Custom Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Centering a Bitmap or Field Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Centering a Bitmap or Field Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Editing Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Selecting a Custom Screen to Edit When You Have
Another Screen Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Selecting a Bitmap or Field to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Changing the Custom Screen Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Creating and Importing Bitmaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Closing a Custom Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Chapter 35 Using Rover in Tracer Summit Critical Control

System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Starting Rover in Tracer Summit CCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Accessing Rover Configuration Screens from UCM Editors. . . . . . . . 536
Setting up Security for Rover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
About Using Rover in Tracer Summit Critical Control System . . . . . . 537
Do I need Rover to manage my building automation system? . . 537
Who can access Rover from Tracer Summit CCS? . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

BMTX-SVP02A-EN xv
Table of Contents

Chapter 36 Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices . . . . . . . . 539

Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Offline Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Setting Up Control Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Selecting Control Priority Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Modifying the Control Application for a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Modifying the Name for a Priority Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Providing Information to Other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Communication Flow Between Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Configuring the Modem for an EIA-232 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Defining Input/Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Running a Report of BACnet Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Chapter 37 Restoring into the Tracer Summit

Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Restoring a Site and CPL Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Restoring Global Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Restoring Site Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Restoring a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Restoring Operator Display Custom Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Chapter 38 Deleting Objects and Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Selecting Objects to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Searching for Referencers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Opening and Editing the Referencing Object Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Deleting the Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Deleting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Deleting a Site You Are Currently Logged Onto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Deleting a Site You Are Not Logged Onto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Chapter 39 Resetting a BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Software Method to Reset BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Hardware Method for Resetting BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Clear BCU RAM and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

xvi BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Table of Contents

Clear Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Clear Comm5 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Reader Response Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

BMTX-SVP02A-EN xvii
Table of Contents

xviii BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 1

Introduction

Congratulations on your purchase of the Tracer Summit Critical Control

System (CCS). Tracer Summit CCS is an enhanced version of Tracer
Summit that provides complete environment management for all FDA-
regulated areas, from research to distribution.
This programming guide provides a reference for setting up and configur-
ing the Tracer Summit Critical Control System software to automate
your building. Here you will find background information and step-by-
step procedures describing how to perform these activities.

Important Things to Know Before Using

this Guide
The following list describes important prerequisite knowledge or skills
that you should have available when programming Tracer Summit soft-
ware. This list is not exhaustive and serves to remind you of things that
Trane installation engineers have learned from years of implementing
Tracer Summit at client sites.
• Facilities—Know your facility. Know its needs and the different pro-
grammable inputs/outputs it uses, as well as the equipment that you
will be controlling.
• Infrastructure—Understand what telecommunication and local
area network/wide area network (LAN/WAN) that your facility has in
place. What are its current needs and what are its future needs? Do
you have a pager service? What are your mail server requirements?
• Users and Security—If you are managing sites with various levels
of users, know who they are and what requirements Tracer Summit
Critical Control System can fulfill for them. You do not want to find
yourself at a critical moment with users whose security levels are too
low or too high.
• Knowledge of Various Trane Products—If you are connecting to
a BCU operator display, it is recommended that you have the installa-
tion and set-up guides handy to consult.
• Interaction with Other Software—To use certain features Tracer
Summit CCS makes use of other software platforms. These include
various Microsoft operating systems, Microsoft SQL Server data-
bases, and mail servers. Have the documentation for these other sys-
tems available.
• Naming Conventions—Spend some time thinking about how you
want to name objects in your site. Then use those names appropri-
ately and consistently throughout the system.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 1
Introduction

For More Information

Use this guide in conjunction with the online Help system and the online
library. Descriptions of all of the fields that you will see on Tracer Summit
Critical Control System screens are in Tracer Summit Online Help. Press
F1 on any screen to access online Help.
For information on how to maintain and operate Tracer Summit Critical
Control System sites on a daily basis see the Tracer Summit Critical Con-
trol Daily Operations guide. See the Daily Operations guide for more
information on event logs.
Multi-use database sharing is also an advanced feature that is discussed
in engineering bulletin BAS-PRB011-EN, Tracer Summit Best Practices.
Read the Release Notes. This is strongly recommended because this docu-
mentation has all the up-to-date information about Tracer Summit Criti-
cal Control System. Any new information about Tracer Summit
programming not contained in this guide is in the release notes.
For a definition of important terms and acronyms used in this guide, see
the “Glossary” on page 583.
To fully learn about the capabilities of Tracer Summit Critical Control
System and how they can benefit you, consider enrolling in Tracer Sum-
mit training classes. For more information about these classes, see the
course descriptions at http://www.trane.com/commercial/training/train-
bas.asp#fifteen.
Tracer Summit
• Tracer Summit for Windows and Ethernet (BAS-EB-70)
• Commissioning Tracer Summit BACnet Projects (BAS-PRB002-EN)
• Tracer Summit Connections to LonTalk Devices (BAS-PRB003-EN)
• Tracer Summit BACnet/IP Network Installations (BAS-PRB004-EN)
• Building Control Unit Sizing for Tracer Summit Systems (BAS-
PRB005-EN)
• Tracer Summit Chiller Plant Control (BAS-EB-64)
• Tracer Summit Software Versions (BAS-PRB-006-EN)
• Tracer Summit Multisite Best Practices (BAS-PRB011-EN)

2 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 2

Compliance Authorization

Tracer Summit Critical Control System includes rules and information

that define how the system operates to remain compliant with US Food
and Drug Administration (FDA) 21 CFR Part 11. Examples of these rules
and information include the following:
• Rules for determining if a property can be edited, an action can be
performed, or an alarm can be acknowledged
• Rules for determining what signatures and/or information are
required before the property editing or action is allowed or the alarm
is acknowledged
• Information about which property edits, alarms, events, and other
actions, including what signatures should be logged in the audit trail
The majority of user operations, such as setpoint changes and operator
overrides, are automatically logged with the user’s name in the audit
trail. But for other changes, such as creating a new user or object, editing
properties, and acknowledging alarms, an electronic signature must be
submitted with the action so that authorization can be given and the
action can be logged with the appropriate signature.
For more information about the audit trail and running an audit trail
report, see the Tracer Summit Critical Control System Daily Operations
guide.
In determining the appropriate action, Tracer Summit system also con-
siders the permissions on that site for the user performing the property
editing, action, or alarm acknowledgment and the connection status of
the site to which the user is currently logged on.

Authorizing the Creation of an Object or

a User
System authorization must be given to create an object or user so that the
new object or user name is placed in the audit trail database. When
attempting to complete one of these actions, the Specify Authorizing Sig-
nature dialog box is displayed (see Figure 1 on page 4).
To authorize the creation of an object or a user:
1. Type your Tracer Summit user name and password.
2. Click OK.
If the user name and password are valid for the site affected by the
action, the new object or user is created, and the action is logged to
the audit trail database with the new object or user name.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 3
Compliance Authorization

Figure 1. Specify Authorizing Signature Dialog Box

Authorizing the Creation of Multiple

Objects
When attempting to create multiple objects, the Specify Authorizing Sig-
nature (multiple events) dialog box displays (see Figure 2).

Figure 2. Specify Authorizing Signature (Multiple Events) Dialog Box

To authorize the creation of multiple objects:

1. In the Objects list, review the actions you are approving to verify that
they are your changes.

4 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Authorizing Property Edits

2. Type your Tracer Summit user name and password.

3. Click OK.
If your user name and password are valid for the site affected by the
actions and you have editing permission, the actions occur, and they
are logged to the audit trail database.

Authorizing Property Edits

Tracer Summit Critical Control System logs the values of object and user
properties. If an object value cannot be logged, authorization for the
change must be given, for example when saving edits of object and user
properties. The property values are not logged in the audit trail database
but the action is. By authorizing these edits, you are recognizing that the
property values will not be logged in the audit trail and that you still
want to proceed (see Figure 3).

Note:
As part of the standard operating procedure, write down the
exact property edits you made with your name and the date and
time.

Figure 3. Specify Authorizing Signature (Property Edit) Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 5
Compliance Authorization

To authorize property edits:

1. In the Properties list, review the edits you are approving to verify
they are your changes.
2. Type your Tracer Summit user name and password.
3. Click OK.
If your user name and password are valid for the site affected by the
actions and you have editing permission, the actions occur, and they
are logged to the audit trail database without the old and new values.

Authorizing Alarm Acknowledgement

Alarm acknowledgement must be authorized through the Tracer Summit
Critical Control System (see Figure 4).

Figure 4. Specifying Authorizing Signature And Reason Dialog Box

To authorize alarm acknowledgement:

1. In the Alarms list, review the alarms for which you are approving
acknowledgement.
2. Type your Tracer Summit user name and password.

6 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Authorizing Alarm Acknowledgement

3. In the Reason field, click the down-arrow and select a reason for the
alarm acknowledgement.
4. In the Comment field, type additional information about the alarm
acknowledgement.

Note:
You must either select a reason, type a comment, or do both for
alarm acknowledgement.

5. Click OK.
If the user name and password are valid for the site affected by the
action and you have editing permission, the alarms are acknowl-
edged, and the action is logged to the audit trail database.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 7
Compliance Authorization

8 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 3

Programming Order Checklist

This chapter describes the recommended programming order. It also pro-

vides a checklist for setting up the Tracer Summit Critical Control Sys-
tem.

Setting Up a PC Workstation
(Refer to Tracer Summit Critical Control System Hardware and Software
Installation guide.)
1. Install the following operating system: Windows XP (SP1 or greater)
2. Install Tracer Summit Critical Control System software using the
CD.
3. Install Ethernet related hardware and software.
4. Have the building owner set up TCP/IP support to the BCU, PC work-
station, and SQL server.

Setting Up a Site
1. Use the Site Creation/Connection Wizard to create, upload, or connect
to a site. (See Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”)
2. Define units of measure. (See Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit
BCU Sites.”)
3. Define devices (PC workstations, BCUs and non-Trane devices). (See
Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”)

Note:
Back up the Tracer Summit system periodically during this
process.

4. Create UCM links and addresses.

5. Set up time and date and synchronize with connected devices.
6. Set up site control priorities as follows:
• BACnet defaults. (See Chapter 36, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane
Devices.”)
• Tracer Summit defaults. (See Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer
Summit BCU Sites”)
7. Set up site security access. (See Chapter 10, “Setting Up Security”)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 9
Programming Order Checklist

8. Route alarms and events. (See Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Sum-

mit BCU Sites.”)
9. Set up printers in the following order:
• Set up operating system printer
• Set up Tracer Summit printer (See Chapter 14, “Setting Up Print-
ers, Modems, and Pagers.”)
10. Set up modems and pagers (if used). (See Chapter 14, “Setting Up
Printers, Modems, and Pagers.”)
11. Use binary and analog input/output objects to customize the system.
(See Chapter 15, “Creating Inputs/Outputs.”)
12. Configure the communication settings for the site. (See Chapter 8,
“Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”)

Setting Up Tracer Summit Applications

1. Set up Chiller Plant Control, if applicable. (See Chapter 18, “Chiller
Plant Control.”)
2. Set up Area Control for HVAC, lighting, and equipment: See Chapter
19, “Area Control Application.”
3. Set up variable air volume (VAV) system, if applicable. (See Chapter
22, “Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems.” and Chapter 21, “Comm5
VAV Air Systems”)
4. Set up Time of Day Scheduling:
• Events
• Exceptions
• Holidays
(See Chapter 25, “Time of Day Scheduling.”)
5. Write custom programs. (See Chapter 24, “Custom Programming
Language.”)

10 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Graphics

Setting Up Graphics
1. Create graphics. (See Chapter 27, “Using the Graphics Editor.”)
2. Set up the navigation tree. (See Chapter 26, “Using the Navigation
Tree.”)

Setting Up Reports
1. Set up trends.
• For a Tracer Summit Critical Control System trend, see Chapter
28, “Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites.”
• For a normal Tracer Summit BCU trend, see Chapter 29, “Using
the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs.”
2. Set up calculations. (See Chapter 20, “Using the Calculations Editor.”)
3. Design reports. (See Chapter 31, “Designing Reports for Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites.”)

Backing Up the System

1. Back up the Tracer Summit site database. (See the Tracer Summit
Critical Control System Daily Operations guide.)
2. Back up reports. (See the Tracer Summit Critical Control System
Daily Operations guide.)
3. Move files between PC workstations.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 11
Programming Order Checklist

12 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 4

Online and Offline

Programming

Information Flow in Tracer Summit

Critical Control System
The Tracer Summit Critical Control System (CCS) uses a Microsoft struc-
tured query language (SQL) server database to store information tracked
by an audit trail.
The PC workstations are connected to the SQL server on the local area
network (LAN). Certain critical data, including all operator actions, all
events and alarms and all historical trend data are harvested from the
PC workstations at regular intervals and secured in the SQL audit trail
database. In addition, the Tracer Summit Site Configuration database is
stored on the SQL server.
Figure 5 on page 14 shows the flow of information in a Tracer Summit
Critical Control System.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 13
Online and Offline Programming

Figure 5. Information flow in a Tracer Summit CCS

SQL Server–Audit Trail Database

PC Workstation PC Workstation

Building Control
Unit
Water Source Heat
Pump with Unit
Control Module

Other Equipment

Vari Trane VAV Unit

with Unit Control
Module
Fan Coil/Unit Ventilator
with Unit Control Module

IP Local Area Network—PC workstations to SQL server

BACnet IP, ARCNET or Ethernet Local Area Network—BCU to PC workstations

UCM Communication Links to BCU

14 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Online Programming

Online Programming
Due to audit compliance requirements, you need to be online to make
changes that must be tracked. When online, the majority of user opera-
tions, such as setpoint changes and operator overrides, are automatically
logged with the user’s name in the audit trail. Other changes, such as cre-
ating a new user or object, editing properties, and acknowledging alarms,
an electronic signature must be submitted with the action so that autho-
rization can be given and the action can be logged with the appropriate
signature (for further details see “Compliance Authorization” on page 3).
Keep the following in mind when editing a site:
• To add a new BCU to the site, the PC workstation must be online
with the existing site and all existing BCUs must be online.
• To add or change PC workstation information, all BCUs must be
online.
• To add and configure a UCM, the PC workstation must be online.

Offline Programming
In the compliance-enabled mode, offline programming capability is
restricted. When offline, you can change:
• Run and edit graphics
• Run, edit, and view reports
• Change Communication tab settings in Site Configuration
• Change job title and user name in Site Security
You should test any setup functions performed with offline programming
after the BCUs and PC workstations are online and the database has
been downloaded.
When performing offline programming, note the following constraints
and suggestions:
• Using additional workstations for graphics setup. If time con-
straints require that two or more PC workstations be used to set up
the system, dedicate one workstation for site configuration and data-
base setup. Use the other workstations to create background graphics
files. These items can be transferred easily between workstations
with a floppy disk or other media. Set up one workstation completely
before you connect other workstations to the Tracer Summit Critical
Control System.
• Dynamic values show as “???”. When you create graphics on a PC
workstation that is not online, dynamic values do not show up on the
graphic until the PC workstation is online. In place of the value, “???”
displays.
• Applications cannot be tested. You can not set up application pro-
grams offline. Nor can you test them. For example, custom program-
ming routines can be written and compiled offline, but you must test
each routine when BCUs are online.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 15
Online and Offline Programming

• UCM-resident information cannot be accessed. Some informa-

tion, such as PCM setup information, is UCM-resident only and can
only be accessed when the BCU is online.

Updating an Existing Site with Offline

Programming Changes
1. Reconnect the offline workstation to the site and achieve database
synchronization. You may observe database synchronization status by
running the Tracer Summit System Status utility described in Chap-
ter 7, “Utilities.” Be certain that all of the BCUs are communicating
while observing database synchronization status.
2. Restore graphics (objects, HTML files, and images) and reports, if cre-
ated or modified offline.

16 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 5

Setting Up a Virtual Private

Network

Because dialing-in directly to a BCU modem is discouraged in a compli-

ance-enabled environment and access to a SQL Server database is neces-
sary for audit trail tracking, use a virtual private networking (VPN) to
remotely connect to a Tracer Summit Critical Control System (CCS) site.
Note the following:
• The information technology (IT) administrator must enable the
Tracer Summit CCS, Microsoft’s Windows 2000/SQL server with VPN
access.
• The remote workstation must be installed and registered with Tracer
Summit CCS.
• Before VPN is enabled, the BCU, PC workstation, and SQL server
must support TCP/IP communications.
To Set up a VPN:
1. Open the VPN setup utility from Windows (see Figure 6).
2. Select Make New Connection. The Network Connection Wizard dialog
box displays.

Figure 6. Selecting the Virtual Private Network Connection

3. Choose the VPN option, see (Figure 7 on page 18).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 17
Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 7. Network Connection Type Dialog Box

Step 3

4. Make sure the next subsequent dialog boxes look like below:

Figure 8. Public Network Dialog Box

Step 5

Figure 9. IP Address Dialog Box

Step 6

18 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 10. Connection Availability Dialog Box

Step 7

Figure 11. Completing the Network Connection Wizard

Step 8

Figure 12. Virtual Private Connection Dialog Box

Step 9

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 19
Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 13. Virtual Private Connection—General Tab

Step 10

Figure 14. Virtual Private Connection—Options Tab

Step 11

20 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 15. Virtual Private Connection—Security Tab

Step 13
Click to set
up MS-
CHAP

Step 12

Figure 16. Advanced Security Settings Dialog Box

Step 14

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 21
Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 17. Virtual Private Connections—Networking Tab

Step 15

Step 16

Figure 18. Virtual Private Connections—Sharing Tab

Step 17

22 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Test VPN Connection

Test VPN Connection

1. Dial-up your modem and make sure you are connected to a public net-
work such as the Internet.
2. Open your VPN connection. From the Start button, highlight Set-
tings, then Network and Dial-up Connections. Then, click Virtual Pri-
vate Connection (see Figure 19).

Figure 19. Connect Virtual Private Connection Dialog Box

3. Click the Connect button. You should see a message box, which indi-
cates a successful connection (see Figure 20).

Figure 20. Successful Connection Dialog Box

4. Set up Tracer Summit database connection to use this VPN. After

obtaining the name of the SQL Server or its IP address and SQL
Server instance name, open the Tracer Summit Database Setup util-
ity from Start > Programs > Tracer Summit > Advanced > Database
Setup Utility (see Figure 21 on page 24). In our example, the IP
address of the SQL Server is 10.1.3.21 and the Tracer Summit data-
bases reside under a Named Instance called “Compliance Area”. You
will also need to obtain the “sa” username and password from your IT
or DB administrator.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 23
Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

Figure 21. Database Setup Dialog Box

5. Test your Tracer Summit connection to the SQL database server.

Open the Tracer Summit Database Test Connection utility from Start
> Programs > Tracer Summit > Advanced > Database Test Connec-
tion Utility (see Figure 22).
6. Click the Test Connection button for each database . You should see a
successful message (see Figure 23 on page 25).

Figure 22. Database Test Connection Dialog Box

24 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Best Practices

Figure 23. Successful Connection Dialog Box

7. Finally, you open Tracer Summit and configure your communication

settings to the BCU. Open the Start menu> Programs > Tracer Sum-
mit. Login with your username and password. You must have edit
permissions to Site Configuration.
8. In Site Configuration, navigate to the Communications tab and set up
your communication as BACnet/IP and BBMD. Enter the BCU IP
address and UDP port.
9. Click Save and close the Site Configuration editor. Tracer Summit
should automatically connect to the BCU. If it does not, click the Con-
nect button on the toolbar.

Best Practices
1. Be patient. Tracer Summit communications to a SQL Server over 50k
phone-modem connection will be slow. It is preferable you travel to
the site if you need to do heavy troubleshooting or look at a lot of
information.
2. The presence of a corporate network adapter or another network
adapter may prevent the dial-up VPN from working. To avoid this,
disable the other network adapter by right-clicking that network
adapter under “Dial-up and Networking Connections” and selecting
“Disable”. You can Enable later on after you are done with the VPN
connection.
3. You can also connect via high-speed link such as DSL or corporate IT
network instead of phone-modem. Work with your IT Network
Administrator to resolve any firewall issues to ensure a smooth con-
nection. The procedure to connect via high speed internet is the same
as described above expect that you don't have to dial-up a modem
first.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 25
Setting Up a Virtual Private Network

26 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 6

Using Referencer Edit

Controls

Referencer edit control fields (sometimes called referencers) are used

throughout the Tracer Summit system to allow you to set the value of one
property equal to the value of another property. They are commonly used
for setpoints and other types of system information where you may need
to make one value dependent on another value in the system.
For example, you may want the chilled water setpoint of a chiller to use
an analog output object that can be controlled from a graphic (see Chap-
ter 27, “Using the Graphics Editor”).
Referencer edit controls are identified by the mode button located on the
left side of the field (see Figure 24).

Figure 24. Referencer Edit Control Field

Mode button

Note:
For more information on objects and properties, refer to Chap-
ter 7, “Utilities”.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 27
Using Referencer Edit Controls

Referencer Edit Control Modes

Referencer edit controls have up to three primary modes through which
you can toggle by clicking on the mode button (see Figure 24 on page 27).
The three modes are:
• Constant
• Referencer
• Not Used (if available)
Depending on which mode you choose and the current state of system
communications, one of these values displays in the referencer edit con-
trol field:
• A constant numerical analog value or binary value (92, 10.5, On/Off,
Open/Closed, etc.)
• The value of the referenced property
• ??? (referencer failed)
• Not Used (if available)
Referencer edit control modes are described in the following sections.

Constant Mode
This mode allows you to either:
• Input a constant numerical value to control the field for analog fields.
(The decimal place does not display if an integer is expected.)
• Select a constant value from a pull-down list (On/Off, Enable/Disable)
if it is a binary or a multi-state field (see Figure 25).

Figure 25. Constant Mode

28 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Referencer Edit Control Modes

Referencer Mode
This mode allows you to reference another system property to control the
field. Until you have selected a valid property in the referencer mode, the
referencer edit control field is left blank. Once you have chosen a valid
property, the property’s value displays in the referencer edit control field.
You can get to the referencer mode by clicking the mode button until the
referencer button (...) is available on the right side of the field (see
Figure 26).

Note:
Tracer Summit retains the selected property reference informa-
tion even when the mode is changed to a constant or to the Not
Used mode, but the value of the property will come from the
most recently selected mode. This affects your ability to delete
the object that contains the referenced property.

Figure 26. Referencer Mode

Mode button Referencer button

To reference a property:
1. Click the mode button in the referencer edit control field to toggle
through the referencer edit modes until the referencer mode displays
(see Figure 27).

Figure 27. Mode and Referencer Buttons

Referencer button
Mode button

2. Click the referencer button. The Select Property Reference dialog box
displays (see Figure 28).

Figure 28. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 29
Using Referencer Edit Controls

3. Select the object type you would like to reference from the Type drop-
down list.
4. Select the object you would like to reference from the Name drop-
down list. The list contains only objects of the type you have chosen.
5. Select the property that will control the field from the Property list
box. Only those properties belonging to the particular object you
chose are available in this box. Depending on the type of field you are
working with, the system automatically filters property types that
are not appropriate. For example, if you are in a field that requires an
analog entry, the dialog box displays with only analog properties to
choose from.
6. Click OK when you have made your selections. To exit without saving,
click Cancel.
Until you select a property reference, the referencer mode in the ref-
erencer edit control field is left blank. After you choose a valid prop-
erty, the property’s value displays in the referencer edit control field.
If “???” displays in the referencer edit control field, the referencer has
failed and the system cannot access the referenced property.

When a Referencer Fails

If you choose the referencer mode and the system is unable to resolve the
referenced property, “???” displays in the referencer edit control field. The
UCM continues to use the last valid value it obtained (see Figure 29).

Figure 29. Failed Referenced Property

Referencers fail when Tracer Summit cannot get the referenced value
back from the object where the property resides. This occurs when the
communications between the PC workstation and BCU are down, or
when you reference a property that is offline.

Not Used Mode

This option is available in a very limited number of fields in Tracer Sum-
mit. If this option is available and selected, Tracer Summit does not send
a value to the UCM for this field. The UCM will derive the value from an
algorithm, if appropriate (see Figure 30).

Figure 30. Not Used Mode

30 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Referencer Edit Control Modes

For example, if Not Used is selected for the occupied cooling setpoint in a
VAV UCM, the system calculates the setpoint by adding the differential
to the occupied heating setpoint.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 31
Using Referencer Edit Controls

32 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 7

Utilities

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic Library
• Viewing an object’s properties
• Viewing the system connection status

Viewing the Tracer Summit Electronic

Library
Tracer Summit software includes an electronic library that contains the
following reference information:
• Object and property definitions for all UCMs and applications
• Standard graphics for UCMs and applications
• Sample reports
• Sample Custom Programming Language (CPL) files
The electronic library is located on the Tracer Summit Software Installa-
tion CD.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 33
Utilities

To view the Tracer Summit electronic library:

1. Click the Windows Start button, select Programs, then select Tracer
Summit. The list of Tracer Summit applications displays.
2. Select Library. The electronic library displays in Internet Explorer
(see Figure 31).

Figure 31. Viewing the Electronic Library in Internet Explorer

3. Click a selection in the left pane to view the reference information.

34 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Viewing an Object’s Properties

Viewing an Object’s Properties

Tracer Summit uses objects as the basic elements of the system. Objects
include input and output points, UCMs, and applications. When you cre-
ate an object, you set up the object’s properties, or characteristic informa-
tion. For diagnostic purposes, you can view this property information
through the Setup menu’s Objects and Properties command.
You can also view each object’s properties from its applicable editor (for
example, to view the properties of an analog input, you can access the
Analog Input editor). However, viewing the properties with the Objects
and Properties command allows you to view and compare several objects
at once.
To view an object’s properties:
1. From the Status menu, select Objects and Properties. The Object and
Properties Selection dialog box displays (see Figure 32).

Figure 32. Object and Properties Selection Dialog Box

2. In the Site field, select the site name.

3. In the Type field, select the object type to be viewed. The Name field
updates to include object names for the selected type.
4. In the Name field, select the object name.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 35
Utilities

5. Select a property from the Properties list. To select multiple proper-

ties:
• For properties listed consecutively, click the first property that
you want, then hold down the Shift key and click the last property
that you want.
• For properties not listed consecutively, click the first property
that you want, then hold down the Ctrl key and click on each
additional property.
6. Click the Add button to add the selected properties to the Selected
Properties list.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for each object’s properties you want to view.

Note:
If you have selected and added several properties and then you
select a different object name (keeping the object type the
same), those same properties are selected for the new object
name. You can simply click the Add button to add them to the
Selected Properties list. This can also be done for different
object types and site names, allowing a broad variety of infor-
mation to be displayed at one time.

8. To remove any properties, select the properties in the Selected Prop-

erties list, then click the Remove button. You can also click the
Remove All button to remove all properties from the list.
9. After you have selected the properties you want to view, click OK. The
Tracer Summit window displays the value of each property you
selected (see Figure 33).

Figure 33. Example Objects and Properties Display

10. To print the display, from the File menu, select Print. At the Print
dialog box, click OK.

Note:
The objects and properties cannot be edited or saved from the
display. To edit objects or properties, you must display the
appropriate editor from the Tracer Summit Setup menu.

11. When you are finished viewing the properties, from the File menu,
select Close Graphic.

36 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Viewing System Status

Viewing System Status

You can view Tracer Summit’s system status to determine:
• The connection status of the PC workstation
• Whether the database of the PC workstation has been synchronized
with (or is the same as) the databases of all BCUs connected to a site
• How many alarms have not yet been acknowledged for a site
To view system status:
1. Make sure Tracer Summit is displayed on the screen. If it is mini-
mized, click the Tracer Summit button in the Windows task bar.
2. From the Windows task bar, double-click the Tracer Summit System
Status icon (see Figure 34). The Tracer Summit System Status win-
dow displays (see Figure 35 on page 38).

Figure 34. Tracer Summit System Status Icon

Tracer Summit System

Status Icon

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 37
Utilities

Figure 35. Tracer Summit System Status Window

The status fields include the following:

• Site Name: Lists defined sites with a connection status.
• Connection Status: Indicates the connection status of the PC worksta-
tion to the site. Table 1 on page 39 describes the connection status
options.
• Database Sync: Indicates whether the database for the PC worksta-
tion has been synchronized with (or is the same as) the databases of
all BCUs connected to the site.
• Unacknowledged Alarms: Lists how many alarms requiring acknowl-
edgment have not yet been acknowledged in the event log. (For more
information, refer to the Tracer Summit Critical Control Daily Opera-
tions guide.)

Note:
The only sites that appear in the system status window are
those sites that the workstation is communicating with or is
attempting to communicate with.

IMPORTANT
Disconnecting without synchronizing the PC workstation and BCU
databases may cause an incomplete database, resulting in improper
system control.

38 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Viewing System Status

Table 1. System Connection Status

Connection
Status Description

Not Connected There is no connection or pending connection with a

BCU.
ARCNET The PC workstation has an active ARCNET connection
to the site.
Ethernet The PC workstation has an active Ethernet connection
to the site.
BACnet/IP The PC workstation has an active BACnet/IP connection
to the site.
EIA-232 The PC workstation has an active EIA-232 connection to
the site.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 39
Utilities

40 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 8

Configuring Tracer Summit

BCU Sites

A site defines boundaries for communication and control within the

Tracer Summit system. A site consists of the BCUs and PC workstations
assigned to the site, the UCMs attached to the BCUs, and other equip-
ment that communicates with the BCUs.
Tracer Summit Critical Control System supports multiple sites. If you
have a single site on the system, it automatically becomes the default site
and opens when you start Tracer Summit. If you have multiple sites, you
can define a default site to open at start up.
The Site Configuration editor allows you to:
• Select units of measure (upon initial site configuration only)
• Create, edit, and delete BCUs, PC workstations, and non-Trane BAC-
net devices
• Select a BCU version for downloading (to support existing Tracer
Summit installations)
• Create UCMs and assign them to BCUs
• Define billing periods
• Define security class names for the site
• Set up event routing
• Set up control priorities
• Set time and date options
• Synchronize time and date for all devices
• Configure communication settings to define PC workstation connec-
tions to BCU

Note:
To set up a site with a BMTW panel, refer to the Tracer Summit
System Programming guide, version 16.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 41
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating a Site
Tracer Summit’s (CCS) Site Creation/Connection Wizard allows you to
create and configure a site entirely from your PC workstation. You can
also upload. restore, or copy an existing site with a LAN (BACnet/IP,
Ethernet, or ARCNET), modem, or direct connection.
As a part of the site creation process, the Site Creation Wizard automati-
cally takes you to the Site Configuration editor, where you finish configur-
ing your site.
This section covers:
• Creating a site
• Uploading a site
• Restoring a site
• Copying a site

Creating a New Site

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 36).

Figure 36. Select Site Dialog Box

42 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 37).

Figure 37. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Create.
4. Enter a name in the Site Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of eight characters.

Note:
After you save this site configuration, the site name cannot be
modified in the Site Configuration editor. Use the backup and
restore functions, to restore the site under a new name (see
Chapter 37, “Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation”).

5. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 38).

Figure 38. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 43
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

6. Click the type of connection for your site. Only one network connec-
tion type can be defined.
7. Click Next. Depending on the type of connection you selected, a con-
figuration dialog box specific to that connection is displayed.

Site Connection via dedicated Ethernet or ARCNET

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select Ethernet or ARCNET as the
site connection type.
2. Click Next to display the appropriate Ethernet or ARCNET Configu-
ration dialog box (see Figure 39).

Figure 39. Ethernet Configuration Dialog Box

3. Select the Ethernet or ARCNET card to be used for communicating

with the site.
4. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
Ethernet or ARCNET each time you start Tracer Summit.
5. Click Finish to display the Site Configuration editor.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see “Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 64 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 72).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

44 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Site Connection via BACnet/IP

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select BACnet/IP as the site con-
nection type.
2. Click Next to display the BACnet/IP Configuration dialog box (see
Figure 40).

Figure 40. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click:
• Use Local Connection if your workstation is on an IP subnet that
has a BCU.
• Use BBMD if your workstation is on a subnet that does not have a
BCU.

Note:
This dialog box helps Tracer Summit determine how to connect
to the site. It allows you to connect to a BCU on a local subnet,
or connect to a remote part of the facility, or connect to another
building. The building owner’s information systems (IS) staff
can tell you if the PC workstation and the BCU are on the same
subnet.
BACnet broadcast management devices (BBMDs) are used to
facilitate low level communications. On most sites the BCU
serves as a BBMD. However, it is possible for other BACnet
devices, such as, a BACnet IP router to fill this function.

4. Click Next:
• If you selected the Use Local Connection option, the Network
Adapter Selection dialog box displays (see Figure 41 on page 46
below).
• If you selected the Use BBMD option, the BBMD Configuration
dialog box displays (see Figure 42 on page 47).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 45
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

The Select Network Adapter field displays the available network adapt-
ers on the workstation that are bound to the TCP/IP protocol (see
Figure 41). Use one of these adapters to communicate with the site.

Figure 41. Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

1. Select the network adapter. Note that the IP address shown is the
address of this Workstation adapter.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. This will typically be
47808.
3. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish. The Site Configuration editor is displayed.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see“Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 64 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 72).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

46 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

The BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

The BBMD IP address is used to connect to a site (see Figure 42).

Figure 42. BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

1. Type the IP address of the BCU (or other BACnet device acting as a
BBMD) in the BBMD Address field.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. The other address is pro-
vided by the building owner’s IS staff.
3. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish the Site Configuration editor is displayed.
When you create a new site you must designate units of measure for
the site, and assign at least one BCU before you can save the new site
(see “Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 64 and “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations” on page 72).

Note:
Tracer Summit menus are unavailable until you save the site
or cancel the site.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 47
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Site Connection by Modem or Hardwired

1. From the Site Connection Wizard, select Modem or Hardwired as the
site connection type. Figure 43 shows the Modem option button
selected.

Figure 43. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

2. Click finish. The Site Configuration editor displays.

Uploading a Site via a Dedicated ARCNET or Ethernet

Connection
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 44).

Figure 44. Select Site Dialog Box

48 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 45).

Figure 45. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 46).

Figure 46. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click ARCNET or Ethernet.

6. Click Next to display the ARCNET or Ethernet Configuration dialog
box (see Figure 47 on page 50).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 49
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 47. ARCNET Configuration Dialog Box

7. Select the ARCNET or Ethernet card to be used for communicating

with the site.
8. The Open On Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
ARCNET or Ethernet each time you start Tracer Summit.
9. Click Finish.
10. Once connected, the system checks to see if your user name (the one
you used to log onto the current site) is defined on the site to be
uploaded:
• If your user name is not defined on the site to be uploaded, follow
steps 11–14.
• If your user name is defined on the site to be uploaded, proceed to
step 15.
11. If your user name is not defined on the site to be uploaded, the Logon
to Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 48). You must log on so
the system can verify you have the security access to upload the site.

Figure 48. Logon to Upload Site Dialog Box

12. In the User Name field, type your user name.

13. Press Tab to place the cursor in the Password field, then type your
password.

50 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

14. Click OK.

15. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 49). Click
Yes to continue the upload.

Figure 49. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 50).

Figure 50. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

Uploading a Site via a BACnet/IP Connection

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 51).

Figure 51. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 52 on page 52).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 51
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 52. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 53).

Figure 53. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click BACnet/IP.
6. Click Next to display the BACnet/IP Configuration dialog box (see
Figure 54 on page 53).

52 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 54. BACnet/IP Configuration Dialog Box

7. Click:
• Use Local Connection if your workstation is on an IP subnet that
has a BCU.
• Click Use BBMD if your workstation is on a subnet that does not
have a BCU.

Note:
This dialog box helps Tracer Summit determine how to connect
to the site. It allows you to connect to a BCU on a local subnet,
or connect to a remote part of the facility, or connect to another
building. The building owner’s information systems (IS) staff
can tell you if the PC workstation and the BCU are on the same
subnet.
BACnet broadcast management devices (BBMDs) are used to
facilitate low level communications. On most sites the BCU
serves as a BBMD. However, it is possible for other BACnet
devices, such as, a BACnet IP router to fill this function.

8. Click Next:
• If you selected the Use Local Connection option, the Network
Adapter box displays (see Figure 55 on page 54).
• If you selected the Use BBMD option, the BBMD Configuration
dialog box displays (see Figure 58 on page 55).

Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

The Network Adapter field displays the available network adapters on
the workstation bound to the TCP/IP protocol (see Figure 55 on page 54).
Use one of these adapters to communicate with the site.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 53
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 55. Network Adapter Selection Dialog Box

1. Select the network adapter.

2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. This will typically be
47808.
3. The Open on Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish.

Note:
The system checks to see if your user name (the one you used to
log onto the current site) is defined on the site you are trying to
upload.

5. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 56). Click
Yes to continue the upload.

Figure 56. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 57 on page 55).

54 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 57. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

The BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

The BBMD IP address is used to communicate with the site (see
Figure 58).

Figure 58. BBMD Configuration Dialog Box

1. Type the IP address of the BCU (or other BACnet device acting as a
BBMD) in the BBMD Address field.
2. Type the UDP port number in the Port field. The other address is pro-
vided by the building owner’s IS staff.
3. The Open on Startup check box is checked by default. Leave this box
checked if you want the workstation to communicate to the site via
BACnet/IP each time you start Tracer Summit.
4. Click Finish. Tracer Summit begins to upload the site (refer to steps
four and five of the IP Address Configuration Dialog Box section).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 55
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Uploading a Site via Modem/Direct Connect

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 59).

Figure 59. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click New. The Site Creation Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 60).

Figure 60. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click Upload.
4. Click Next to display the Site Connection Wizard dialog box (see
Figure 61 on page 57).

56 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 61. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

5. Click Modem, then click Finish:

• For a new system with no sites configured, you will need to add a
PC workstation modem to Tracer Summit. Proceed to step 6.
• If your site already has a modem, proceed to step 8.
6. At the Modem Configuration dialog box, type the modem name in the
Workstation Modem Name field (see Figure 62).
7. In the Connect By field, click down arrow to select the modem type.
Selecting the modem type should fill in the rest of the information,
except for the modem name.

Figure 62. Modem Configuration

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 57
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

8. Click OK. The Connection Manager dialog box displays (see

Figure 63).

Figure 63. Connection Manager Dialog Box

9. In the Connect Using field, select a modem or port to use.

Note:
If there is a modem that is being used for another site, click
Current Connections. At the Current Connections dialog box,
select the site currently using the modem/port and click Discon-
nect. When the site has disconnected, click OK to return to the
Connection Manager.

10. In the Phone Number field, select the telephone number for the
remote connection.
11. If there is no phone number, add one in the Phone Book. Click the
Phone Book button to display the Phone Book dialog box (see
Figure 64 on page 59).

58 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Figure 64. Phone Book Dialog Box

12. Click the Add Phone Number button to display the Add Phone Num-
bers dialog box (see Figure 65).

Figure 65. Add Phone Numbers

13. Enter a phone number in the Phone Number field and select the Use
Dialing Prefix or Use Calling Card # check box as necessary.
14. Click OK to close the Add Phone Numbers dialog box, then click OK
to return to the Connection Manager dialog box.
15. In the Connection Manager dialog box, click OK. The system dials
and connects to the site.

Note:
The system checks to see if your user name (the one you used to
log onto the current site) is defined on the site you are trying to
be upload.

16. The Confirm Upload Site dialog box displays (see Figure 66 on
page 60).
17. Click Yes to continue the upload.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 59
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 66. Confirm Upload Site Dialog Box

The Upload Status dialog box displays with the current status of the con-
nection and the upload (see Figure 67).

Figure 67. Upload Status Dialog Box

When the upload is complete, you are returned to the Tracer Summit
main window. The new site is now the active site.

Restoring a Site from the Site Creation Wizard

Select the Restore button when you want to restore a site, instead of cre-
ating or uploading one (see Figure 68). This option is only available when
the Tracer Summit database has no sites in it.
◆ From the Site Creation Wizard, click Restore, then click Finish. The
Restore Location dialog box displays. (For instructions on how to
restore a site, see Chapter 37, “Restoring into the Tracer Summit
Workstation.”)

Figure 68. Site Creation Wizard Dialog Box

60 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Site

Copying a Site
Copy Site helps you create sites that are similar or identical to each other.
If you have a large number of sites, Copy Site can eliminate much of the
repetitive work that goes into configuring sites that have more similari-
ties than differences.
Copy Site reproduces objects from an original BCU site and transfers
them to a new site of the same type. Copy Site functions like the Restore
function (see “Restoring a Site and CPL Files” on page 557), except that
with Copy Site you can copy BCU graphic objects and report objects to a
new site.
Copy Site does not copy workstation or global objects from the original
site. This means that the new site will have the same information as the
original from which it was copied but not the following items:
• Workstation modem objects
• Message forwarding objects
• Global graphics
• Sample values in calculation objects (samples are cleared in the new
objects)
• Sample values in trend objects (samples are cleared in the new
objects)
• CPL text files
• Report text files (*.rpt files)
• User-defined standard live reports

Copying a Tracer Summit BCU Site

1. From the Tools menu, select Copy Site. The Copy Site dialog box
appears (see Figure 69 on page 62).
2. Type the name of the new site in the Name of New Site field.
The new site name must be unique, one that does not exist in the
database.
3. Select BCU from the Site Type to Copy list.
4. Click Site to Copy. The list displays the name of all the BCU sites in
the database.
5. Select whether or not to copy graphics and report files:
• If you want to copy graphics and reports from the original site,
click OK. The default is to copy these objects, so Copy Graphics
and Copy Reports are already selected.
• If you do not want to copy graphics and reports, click to clear the
Copy Graphics and Copy Reports check boxes and click OK.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 61
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 69. Copy Site Dialog Box

Tracer Summit copies the information that you selected from the orig-
inal site. The new BCU site node appears in the navigation tree.

Selecting a Site to Configure

If your Tracer Summit system has a single site, it is the default site and
will open when you start Tracer Summit. If you have multiple sites, you
can select the site to open at log on. When you select Site Configuration
from the Setup menu, the current site is highlighted in the Select Site
dialog box.
To select a site:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 70).

Figure 70. Select Site Dialog Box

2. Click the site you wish to edit.

3. Click OK to display the Site Configuration editor for the selected site
(see “Configuring a Site” on page 63).

62 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Configuring a Site

Configuring a Site
To configure a new site on your PC workstation or to modify parameters
of an existing site, follow the steps in this section.

Note:
When you create a new site, the Site Configuration editor opens
with the Units screen active. You can select units of measure
only when you are creating a new site. Once the site is saved,
the Units screen becomes status only.

Selecting Units of Measure

1. When creating a new site, the Units screen is automatically displayed
after completing the Site Connection Wizard (see Figure 71).

Figure 71. Site Configuration Editor Units Screen

2. In the Setup Options field, select the units of measure for the site.
3. If you select Customize from I-P or Customize from SI, click the first
item in the Physical Quantity list that you wish to customize. A choice
of units for that item is displayed in the Units list.
4. Click the desired unit in the Units field.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each item in the Physical Quantity field you
wish to customize.
6. Follow the instruction in the section “Creating, Editing, and Deleting
Devices” to add a BCU and a PC workstation to the new site before
you can save it.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 63
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

When creating a new site you must create at least one device before you
can save the site. Once a device is created, you can edit or delete the
device.

Creating a Device
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 72).

Figure 72. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the Create Device button to display the Create New Device dia-
log box (see Figure 73 on page 65).

64 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 73. Create New Device Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the Device Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
4. Select a device number in the Device ID field.

▲IMPORTANT
Once you save the site configuration Device ID field is fixed and you
cannot change it. Additionally, once you save the site configuration you
can not delete the Device in site configuration. Use the Delete Object
function from the Tools menu.

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default device ID. The first BCU cre-
ated is ID 1. Each additional BCU is given the next available
ID. To change the suggested ID, type a new ID number in the
field.

5. Leave the network number at the default value of 1.

Note:
The network number for the device is edited only when there
are multiple networks on a site, typically on a BACnet job with
non-Trane equipment. Contact Trane GCC Product Support for
details.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 65
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

6. From the Panel Type list box, select a device type: Enhanced BCU
(BMTX), Modular BCU (BMTW) or BCU (BMTS).
• For the standard capacity BMTW, select capacity cards; 1 for
standard and 2 for high.
• For the BMTX the communication links are fixed, for example,
the comm5 link can only be set up as comm5 or Undefined (not
used), it can not be changed to comm4 or comm3 (see Figure 74).

Figure 74. BMTX Communication Links

7. For the BMTW, if you select Comm5 as a communication link, two

Comm5 mode options become available: Install a new link and Add to
or discover existing link.
• Select Install new link to enable the auto-install mode to commis-
sion Comm5 devices. In this mode, the BCU discovers Comm5
devices. Select this option if you know that a service tool (Rover,
for example) has not been used to bind devices (custom bindings)
together. This option is faster than the Add to or discover existing
link option.
• Select Add to or discover existing link for existing Comm5 or Lon-
Talk networks. Initial installation takes longer with this option.
However, all existing (custom) bindings and link information are
preserved.

IMPORTANT
Selecting the Install new link option for a network that has existing
device bindings will result in removing those device bindings.

66 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Adding Device Options: Modem, I/O Module, Operator

Display, BCU Event log

Adding a BCU Modem

1. If the device has a modem, click Add button in the Modem box to dis-
play the Create New Modem dialog box (see Figure 75).
For the BMTW or BMTS only, if the BCU will use an EIA-232 BACnet
connection, you must add a BCU modem, which will later be config-
ured as hardwired. Note that for the BMTW or BMTS, the BCU may
not have both a modem and and an EIA-232 BACnet connection.

Figure 75. Create New Modem Dialog Box

2. Type a name in the Modem Name field. Make the name as informa-
tive as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
3. To change the default security access for the modem, click Security
Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on
page 97).
4. Click OK to close the Modem dialog box.

Adding a BCU I/O Module object

◆ Refer to Chapter 17, “BCU Inputs and Outputs.”

Adding an Operator Display object

◆ Refer to Chapter 33, “The BCU Operator Display.”

Adding a BCU Event Log object

The BCU Event Log stores up to 5,000 events in the BCU. Add a BCU
event log object to:
• Dial up a BCU remotely to view alarms and events (refer to Tracer
Summit Daily Operations guide, “Viewing the BCU Event Log”)
• View alarms and events at the BCU operator display.

Note:
To view alarms and events at the operator display, you must
save the BCU event log object to the same device as the opera-
tor display object.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 67
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

To Add a BCU Event Log

1. Click the Add button in the BCU Event Log box. The BCU Event Log
dialog box displays (see Figure 76).

Figure 76. BCU Event Log Dialog Box

2. Type a name in the event log name field. Make the name as informa-
tive as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
3. To change the default security access for the BCU Event Log, click
Security Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on
page 97).
4. Click OK to close the BCU Event Log dialog box and to return to the
Create Devices dialog box.

Note:
The BCU Event Log object is not created until you click Save on
the Devices screen.

5. From the Events Routing tab, set up event receiver routing for the
newly created event log object. Alarms in the event log object show up
in the newly created operator display (see “Setting Up Event Routing”
on page 88).

Editing a BCU
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 77 on page 69).

68 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 77. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device you wish to edit in the Devices list.
3. Click Edit Device to display the Edit Device dialog box (see
Figure 78).

Figure 78. Edit Device Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 69
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

4. Modify the Device name, the network number, or the communication

links, as desired. The Device ID cannot be changed at this point (after
the device configuration has been saved).

Note:
Once you add a UCM on a selected communication link on the
BMTW, the link designation cannot be changed: You cannot
modify the link when it is in use. To change the link type, you
must first delete all UCMs on the link. On the BMTX BCU each
of the links is predefined and can’t be changed except to set it
“Undefined” (not used).

5. If you have a BMTW and select Comm5 as a communication link, two

Comm5 mode options become available (only applies to standard
capacity BMTWs):
• Select discover existing link or Add to have the BCU discover all
Comm5 devices on the link, along with their custom bindings the
next time RAM is cleared in the BCU.

Note:
Select this option to preserve any custom bindings.

• Select Install a new link to have the BCU discover all Comm5
devices on the link but to ignore their custom bindings the next
time RAM is cleared in the BCU.

Note:
• Select this option if you know that there are no custom
bindings on the link, or if you wish to remove all of the cus-
tom bindings on the link.

IMPORTANT
Selecting the Install new link option for a network that has existing
device bindings (custom bindings) will result in removing those device
bindings.

6. In the Modem group, click the Add button to display the Create New
Modem dialog box (see Figure 79).
7. If a modem was previously added to the device, the Add button
becomes unavailable, and the Edit button is now available. Click the
Edit button to display the Edit Modem dialog box. (See Figure 79.)

70 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 79. Create New Modem and Edit Modem Dialog Boxes

8. To modify the modem name, type a new name in the Modem Name
field.
9. Click OK to display the Edit Device dialog box.
10. To delete the modem, click Delete.
11. Add or Edit the BCU I/O Module, the Operator Display or the BCU
Event Log by the same procedure described above for the Modem.
12. To modify the security classes for the Device, click Security Classes
(see “Changing Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 17).
13. Click OK to close the Edit Device dialog box and display the Devices
screen.

Deleting a Device
Note:
If the device has been saved in site configuration, you cannot
delete the device from the Site Configuration editor (the Delete
Device button is unavailable). Instead, use the Delete Object
utility from the Tools menu to delete a Device (see Chapter 38,
“Deleting Objects and Sites”).

To delete a Device during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 80 on page 72).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 71
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 80. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device in the Devices list that you wish to
delete.
3. If the Device has not yet been saved and no UCMs have been created,
the Delete button will be highlighted, Click Delete Device.

Note:
Once the Device has been saved it can only be deleted using the
Deleted Object function from the Tools menu.

Creating, Editing, and Deleting PC Workstations

Creating a PC Workstation
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 81 on page 73).

72 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 81. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click Create Workstation to display the Create New Workstation dia-

log box (see Figure 82).

Figure 82. Create New Workstation Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the Workstation Name field.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 73
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

4. Select a device number in the Workstation Device ID field. Once you

save the site configuration, the Workstation Device ID field becomes
status only and you cannot change it.

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default Workstation Device ID based
on the number assigned during the software installation. Gen-
erally, the first workstation created is ID 80. Each additional
workstation number is increased in increments of one. To
change the default ID, enter a new ID number in the field.
Typical workstation addressing is as follows:
• 80 – 100 for on-site workstations
• 101 – 120 for remote workstations
• 121 – 140 Trane-reserved addressing

5. To change the default security classes settings for the workstation,

click Security Classes (see “Setting Security Access for Objects in a
Site” on page 97).
6. Click OK to close the Create New Workstation dialog box and display
the Devices screen. The name of the workstation you just created
appears in the Workstations list.

Editing a PC Workstation
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 83).

Figure 83. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

74 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

2. Click the name of the workstation you wish to edit in the Worksta-
tions list.
3. Click Edit Workstation to display the Edit Workstation dialog box
(see Figure 84).

Figure 84. Edit Workstation Dialog Box

4. Modify the workstation name, if desired.

5. To modify the security classes, click Security Classes (see “Setting
Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 97).
6. Click OK to close the Edit Workstation dialog box and display the
Devices screen.

Deleting a PC Workstation

Note:
If the workstation has been saved in site configuration, you
cannot delete the workstation from the Site Configuration edi-
tor (the Delete Workstation button is unavailable). Instead, use
the Delete Object utility from the Tools menu to delete a Device
(see Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

To Delete a PC Workstation during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 85 on page 76).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 75
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 85. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the workstation in the Workstations list that you
want to delete.
3. Click the Delete Workstation button.

Creating, Editing, and Deleting Non-Trane BACnet

Devices
Tracer Summit has the ability to communicate with non-Trane devices
using standard BACnet protocols. When the non-Trane device is operat-
ing in a client application (providing data to Tracer Summit), you must
create the device in the Site Configuration editor (see Chapter 36, “Using
BACnet for Non-Trane Devices”).

Creating a Non-Trane BACnet Device

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 86 on page 77).

76 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 86. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click Create Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Create New

Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 87).

Figure 87. Create New Non-Trane BACnet Device Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 77
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

3. Type the name and the device ID for the BACnet device.

Note:
The device ID is provided by the device manufacturer. Each
device on a network must have a unique device ID. Contact the
manufacturer for instructions, if necessary.

4. Select the object type from the Object Types field. The default selec-
tion is All Types.
5. Click the Scan button to display a list of all the available objects in
the non-Trane device.
6. From the Available Objects list, select the objects that you want to
view. Then, click the Add button to add the items to the Selected
Objects list.
7. Click Okay to save the changes and return to the Devices tab.
8. Click the Communications tab and check the Disable Automatic
Updates box (see Figure 88).

Figure 88. Disable Automatic Update

Editing a Non-Trane BACnet Device

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 89).

Figure 89. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the non-Trane BACnet device you wish to edit in
the Non-Trane BACnet Devices box.
3. Click Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Edit Non-Trane
BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 90 on page 79).

78 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 90. Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device Dialog Box

4. Modify the the name and object type. Or, manually add new objects, if
desired.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box and
display the Devices screen.

Deleting a Non-Trane BACnet Device

Note:
If the non-Trane BACnet device has been saved in site configu-
ration, you cannot delete the device from the Site Configuration
editor (the Delete Non-Trane BACnet Device button is unavail-
able). Instead, use the Delete Object utility from the Tools
menu to delete the device (see Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects
and Sites”).

To delete a non-Trane BACnet device during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 91 on page 80).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 79
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 91. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the non-Trane BACnet device in the Non-Trane

BACnet Devices list that you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete Non-Trane BACnet Device button.

Creating and Deleting UCMs

After you create a device, create the UCMs you wish to assign to the
device. You can create multiple UCMs of a particular type simultaneously.
To modify a UCM after you create it, use the UCM editor to change the
settings.

Note:
The UCMs in Selected Device list can be sorted alphabetically
by each column. To sort the list, click the column header.

80 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Creating UCMs
1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 92).

Figure 92. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

2. Click the name of the device in the Devices list to which you wish to
assign UCMs.
3. Click Create UCM to display the Create UCMs dialog box for the
selected device (see Figure 93 on page 82).

Note:
Tracer Summit communication links and devices have a limit
to the number of UCMs they can support. Tracer Summit
checks the number of UCMs per link and per device and allows
you to enter only the appropriate number of UCMs.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 81
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 93. Create UCMs Dialog Box

4. In the BCU Link field, click the type of communication link the UCMs
will use.

Note:
The BCU Link field displays the names of the links you defined
in the BCU setup. To add a new communication link, see “Edit-
ing a BCU” on page 68.

5. Click the arrow to the right of the UCM Type field to select from a list
of available UCM types for the particular communication link
selected in the BCU Link field.
6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit will use the
name you enter as the base name followed by numbers for the
communication link and the address. For example if you enter
Rooftop Unit as the name for three UCMs on Link 1, the system
would name the units Rooftop Unit-01-033, Rooftop Unit-01-
034, and Rooftop Unit-01-035.

7. Click the arrow to the right of the Address field to select an address
for the UCM from the list of available addresses. If you are creating
multiple UCMs, the address you select will be the first address
assigned. The address for each additional UCM will increase in incre-
ments of one.

82 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

8. Enter the number of UCMs of the particular type that you wish to
create in the Number to Create field.
9. To modify the security access to the UCMs, click Security Classes (see
“Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site” on page 97).
10. Click Create to create the UCMs. The Create UCM dialog box closes
and the Devices screen displays. The name of the new UCMs appear
in the UCMs in Selected Device list.

Deleting a UCM

Note:
If you have created the UCM but have not saved it in site con-
figuration, clicking Delete UCM clears the UCM from the site.
If the UCM has been saved in the site, you cannot delete the
UCM in the Site Configuration editor. Instead, use the Delete
Object utility in the Tools menu to delete the UCM. (See Chap-
ter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”)

To delete a UCM during Site Configuration:

1. Click the Devices tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Devices screen (see Figure 94).

Figure 94. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 83
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

2. Click the name of the UCM in the UCMs in Selected Device list that
you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete UCM button.

Configuring Communication Settings

The Communications editor allows you to configure a site’s connection
type after a site has been created. If the No Connection option was
selected during site creation or an incorrect connection type was defined,
use this editor to define the appropriate site connection type.

To Configure a Connection Type:

1. Click the Communications tab from the Site Configuration editor to
display the Communications screen (see Figure 95).

Figure 95. Communications Screen

2. Click the Configure button to display the Connection Wizard dialog

box (see Figure 96 on page 85).

84 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 96. Site Connection Wizard Dialog Box

3. To change connection type, follow the instructions for connecting to

the following sites:
• “Site Connection via dedicated Ethernet or ARCNET” on page 44
• “Site Connection via BACnet/IP” on page 45
• “Site Connection by Modem or Hardwired” on page 48

Note:
The BMTX does not Support ARCNET communications.

4. After you are finished defining the connection for the site, Tracer
Summit returns you to the Communications screen, where current
network settings are displayed in the Current Communications Set-
tings fields.

Selecting the BCU Version to Download

Tracer Summit stores several versions of BCU software code on the PC
workstation. When a BCU is connected to a workstation and requests
code, the workstation sends the code to the BCU based on the version
selected in site configuration.
To select the BCU version:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 97 on page 86).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 85
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 97. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

2. Click the arrow to the right of the Enhanced BCU (BMTX) Version
field or the Modular BCU (BMTW) Version field to select the version
for downloading.

Note:
On sites containing a mix of different model BCUs:
• BMTS BCUs must be at image 6.11
• BMTW BCUs (when mixed with BMTX BCUs) must be at
Version 16.00 or higher.

Defining Billing Periods

Tracer Summit allows you to define billing period names and switches for
calculation objects. For example, calculations for power consumption,
water consumption, and gas consumption are tied to the utility company’s
billing signal so that the Tracer Summit calculations are reset simulta-
neously as the utility company’s.
To define the billing period:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 98 on page 87).

86 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 98. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

2. Type the name for the first end of billing switch in the End of Billing
1 name field.
3. Select a referencer in the Switch field. For detailed information on
referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols.”
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for End of Billing 2 and End of Billing 3, if
desired.

Defining Security Class Names

You define names for the security classes used throughout the site in the
Site Configuration editor. The security classes allow you to control which
operators have access on an object-by-object basis. Each user’s level of
access is set in Site Security editor. See
To define security class names:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Site Configuration editor to display the
Setup screen (see Figure 99 on page 88).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 87
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 99. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

2. Type the name for the first class in the Class 1 field.
3. Repeat the previous step for each class you wish to name.

Setting Up Event Routing

Event routing allows you to define alarming options for each event class
and to set the workstations, pagers, non-Trane devices, and BCU local
event log to which alarms and events are sent.
Define the following for each class:
• If a workstation will beep when an event is received
• If the operator must acknowledge that an event message has been
received
• The number of minutes delay between the time an event message is
generated and acknowledgment must be received before the message
is forwarded to another event class
• The event class to which an event is forwarded if it is not acknowl-
edged
The event receiver switch can be used to determine whether an event is
sent to an event receiver or not. You can set the switch to a constant (true
or false) or it can be controlled by a binary value in the system. For each
event receiver defined in the site, set whether each alarm class will be

88 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

received always, only when event receiver switch is true, or only when
event receiver switch is false.

Note:
In the Event Routing screen of the Site Configuration editor,
only the Always, True, and False columns change when the
Event Receiver field changes.

Table 2 describes predefined event classes and shows recommended noti-

fications.

Table 2. Predefined Event Classes and Recommended Notifications

Audible Acknowledgment
Event Class Event and Alarm Types Beep Required

System Print None No No

System Log Power Failure, Operator Log On/Off, UCM Diagnostic No No
Alarm*, UCM Diagnostic Alarm Restore*
System Alarm UCM Communication Failure*, UCM Communication Yes No
Restore*
System Critical BCU Communication Failure, BCU Communication Yes Yes
Alarm Restore, Watchdog Time-Out
Comm5 NVM File Corrupted Yes Yes
BACnet Comm5 Database Mismatch Yes Yes
* If the alarm class is set to “No Notification” in the UCM editor.

Example of User-Defined Event Classes

Figure 100 on page 90 shows an example of user-defined event classes.
Class 5 is named Chiller Alarm, Class 6 is named Temperature Alarm,
and Class 7 is named Pager Alarm. When an event using the Chiller
Alarm is received, the system beeps and requires acknowledgment within
30 minutes or the alarm is re-routed to the Pager Alarm class. The PC
workstation receives all events.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 89
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 100. Example of User-Defined Event Classes

To set up alarm routing for event classes and event receivers:

1. Click the Event Routing tab from the Site Configuration editor to dis-
play the Event Routing screen (see Figure 101 on page 91).

90 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Figure 101. Site Configuration Editor Event Routing Screen

2. Click the arrow to the right of the Event Receiver Switch field to
select True or False, or enter a referencer (see Chapter 6, “Using Ref-
erencer Edit Controls”).
3. Click the Event Class field to Select the field.
4. Enter a label for the class in the Event Class field.

Note:
Labels for event classes one through four are pre-defined and
cannot be altered.

5. To make the receivers beep when an event of that class is received,

click the Beep check box.
6. To require acknowledgment of event messages, click the Ack Reqd
check box.
7. To set the delay before an event is forwarded if it is not acknowledged,
change the value in the Delay Minutes field to increase or decrease
the delay.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 91
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

8. Click the Forward To Event field to display an arrow to the right of

the field. (See Figure 102.)

Figure 102. Event Routing Screen Forward To Event Field

9. Click the selection arrow to display a list of event classes.

10. Select an event class from the list to forward the event message to.

Note:
Every workstation, pager, and BCU local event log defined in
the site appears in the Event Receiver list. To set up alarm
routing for each receiver, select the receiver in the Event
Receiver field, then select Always, True, or False for each event
class.

11. Click the arrow to the right of the Event Receiver field to select an
event receiver.
12. For each event receiver selected, click Always, True, or False for each
class to select the conditions under which an event message is sent.
13. Click the alarm count checkbox (bottom left of screen) to display the
active alarm count in the status bar.

92 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Setting Up Control Priorities

Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit applications
control an object. Normally, control priorities are set to the Tracer Sum-
mit defaults. For information on setting up control priorities for non-
Trane BACnet devices, see Chapter 36, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane
Devices.”

Setting the Time and Date for the Site

The time and date options in the Site Configuration editor allow you to:
• Set the workstation time
• Synchronize all devices on the site to the workstation time
• Synchronize all devices on the site to another device
• Automate daylight savings start and stop in the BCUs

Setting the Workstation Time and Zone

1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 103).

Figure 103. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. Click Adjust Date/Time to display the Date/Time Properties dialog

box (see Figure 104 on page 94). The Date & Time tab displays.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 93
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 104. Date/Time Properties Dialog Box

3. Click the arrow to the right of the month field to select the month.
4. Click the arrows to the right of the year field to select the year.
5. Click the date in the calendar.
6. To set the time, click the hour, minute, or second field and then click
the arrows up or down to adjust the time.
7. To set the time zone, click the Time Zone tab to display the Time Zone
screen (see Figure 105).

Figure 105. Time Zone Screen

8. Click the arrow to the right of the time zone field to select the correct
time zone.
9. To change the default setting, click the Automatically Adjust Clock
for Daylight Saving Changes box.
10. Click OK to close the Date/Time Properties dialog box and display the
Date/Time screen.

94 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Setting Site Daylight Savings/Standard Time

1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 106).

Figure 106. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. Click the Configure button to display the Site Daylight Savings Time
dialog box (see Figure 107).

Figure 107. Site Daylight Savings Time Dialog Box

3. If the Site Daylight Savings Time fields are unavailable, click the
Enable Daylight Savings Time check box to enable the fields.
4. In the Daylight Savings Time Start fields, click the week of the month
and the day of the week on which you want daylight savings time to
start.
5. Click the arrow to the right of the Month field to select the month in
which you want daylight savings time to start.
6. In the Standard Time Start fields, click the week of the month and
the day of the week on which you want daylight savings time to end.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 95
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

7. Click the arrow to the right of the Month field to select the month in
which you want daylight savings time to end.

Note:
Only the BCU selected as the time synchronization device
should implement Daylight Savings Time adjustment.

Setting Device Time Synchronization

Tracer Summit automatically synchronizes the time on all devices from a
master device at 2 a.m. each day. Typically, a BCU is chosen as the master
device because a PC workstation may be turned off from time to time. You
can also force synchronization of time to a PC workstation by using the
Synchronize Now button at the Site Configuration editor’s Date/Time
screen.
To set device time synchronization:
1. Click the Date/Time tab from the Site Configuration editor to display
the Date/Time screen (see Figure 108).

Figure 108. Site Configuration Editor Date/Time Screen

2. To automatically align the time of all BCUs on the site with a particu-
lar device, click the Automatic Time Synchronization Enabled check
box.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Time Synchronization Device field
to select a device to which you want to synchronize all other units.
The current time on this device will be used for synchronization when
you select Automatic Time Synchronization Enabled.
4. To synchronize devices immediately, click Synchronize Now to set all
times on the BCUs on the site (if they are communicating) to the
workstation time. A dialog box displays showing devices that have
been synchronized (see Figure 109).

96 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Devices

Note:
Automatic time synchronization is conducted in the early morn-
ing each day. If you want to force synchronization immediately,
click the Synchronize Now button. This process will not, how-
ever, set the time of other workstations on the site. You must
set the time for the workstation individually.

Figure 109. Synchronization Status Dialog Box.

Setting Security Access for Objects in a Site

The default security access for any object allows access for all classes. You
can change the default security access settings for any object you create
in a site. To change access, click the Security Classes button from the dia-
log box of the object for which you want to change access. For a complete
discussion of security classes, see Chapter 10, “Setting Up Security.”
To change security class access to an object:
1. Click Security Classes from the dialog box for the object you wish to
modify to display the Change Security Classes dialog box (see
Figure 110).

Figure 110. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 97
Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites

2. Click the access check boxes to allow or deny access to the object. The
security class names are defined in the Setup screen of Site Configu-
ration editor (see “Defining Security Class Names” on page 87).
3. Click OK to close the Security Classes dialog box and display the pre-
vious screen.

Deleting a Site
A site cannot be deleted from the Site Configuration editor. Use the
Delete Object utility in the Tools menu to delete a site object. (See Chap-
ter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”)

98 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 9

Comm5 Links

This chapter describes how to:

• Install a new Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit building control unit
(BCU).
For a BMTX BCU or a high capacity BMTW BCU, see page 100. For a
standard capacity BMTW BCU, see page 107.
• Add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit BCU.
For a BMTX BCU or a high capacity BMTW BCU, see page 114. For a
standard capacity BMTW BCU, see page 116.
• Replace a UCM on an existing Comm5 link on a Tracer Summit BCU
(see page 118).
• Upgrade Comm5 database storage in a high capacity BMTW BCU
that has had its software image upgraded to Version 16 (see
page 121).
• Replace an existing BCU (standard or high capacity BMTW) with a
BMTX BCU (see page 125).

Differences Between BCUs Regarding

Discovery and Database Storage
BMTX BCUs and high capacity BMTWs are different from a standard
capacity BMTW BCU in terms of:
• Comm5 link discovery
• Comm5 database storage in non-volatile memory (Flash)
The BMTX BCU and the high capacity BMTW BCU do not automatically
discover the Comm5 link. While setting up a site, a user will discover the
Neuron ID and the bindings on a Comm5 network by using Site Configu-
ration. When Site Configuration is completed, the Comm5 database is
saved into non-volatile memory (Flash). The BMTX BCU and high capac-
ity BMTW BCU use this Comm5 database after a power failure, reset,
clear RAM, clear database, and clear code.
The standard capacity BMTW BCU discovers its Comm5 link automati-
cally on initial power-up of the BCU or after a clear RAM. The Comm5
database is stored in volatile memory (RAM). If RAM is cleared, this
database is recreated from the devices the BCU finds on the link. The
Comm5 database is not stored in non-volatile memory.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 99
Comm5 Links

Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or

High Capacity BMTW)
Before getting started, use the Rover service tool to verify that all devices
on the Comm5 link have been configured and operation verified. Then
remove the Rover service tool from the link and follow this procedure:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, then Site Configu-
ration.

Note:
If this is a new site, choose the correct units, add your BCU and
PC workstation, and then save your site (see “Creating, Edit-
ing, and Deleting Devices” on page 64). Then proceed to step 2.

2. Select the Devices tab.

3. Highlight the BCU that you want to add devices to. Then, click the
Edit Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 111 on page 101).
If the BCU is a BMTX, proceed to step 5.

Note:
After migrating from either a BMTS or BMTW to a BMTX, you
must download the database to the BMTX before the PC Work-
station will allow you to do anything to either Comm5 link or
UCMs.

4. For a high capacity BMTW BCU, in the Communication Links group,

choose a link and use the drop-down arrow to access the list of com-
munication links. Select the Comm5 link. (The BMTW BCU can have
only one Comm5 link.)
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Devices tab.
6. Click Save and create Comm5 UCMs as described in “Creating
Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High Capacity BMTW” on
page 101.

100 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

Figure 111. Edit Device Dialog Box

Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High

Capacity BMTW
1. In Site Configuration, select the Devices tab.
2. Highlight the BCU that has the Comm5 link.
3. Click the Create UCM button. The Create UCMs dialog box displays
(see Figure 112 on page 102).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 101
Comm5 Links

Figure 112. Create UCMs Dialog Box

4. Select the option next to the Comm5 link (Link 4 in Figure 112).
5. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the type of UCM you want
to add.
6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit software will use
the name you enter as the base name and follow it with the communi-
cation link number and the device number. For example, if you use
the default name “SCC” as the name for three UCMs on Link 4, the
system would name the units SCC-1-4-1, SCC-1-4-2, and SCC-1-4-3.
When doing assignments later, use the default base name if you plan
to use the location label of the device (that was set up using Rover
service tool) as the UCM object name.

7. In the Number to Create field, type the number of UCMs you want to
create.
8. Click the Create button to create the UCMs and return to the Devices
tab.
This step creates one UCM object for each of the Comm5 devices. The
list of UCMs in the UCMs in Selected Device window shows all of the
UCM objects (Figure 113). In this example, six SCC were created.
Ultimately, each UCM object will be connected to a Comm5 UCM
through assigning a Neuron ID.

102 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

Figure 113. UCMs in Selected Device Window

9. Click the Create UCM button to add other Comm5 UCMs.

10. When you are finished, click Save to add these new objects to the
Tracer Summit database.

Assigning Neuron IDs

Follow this procedure to discover Comm5 devices and bindings and to
assign Neuron IDs to the UCM objects. Automatic discovery is initiated in
standard capacity BMTWs (for more information, see “Differences
Between BCUs Regarding Discovery and Database Storage” on page 99).

Note:
BMTX and high capacity BMTW BCUs will preserve bindings
only under the following conditions:
• Comm5 devices have not been installed on this BCU.
• All of the devices which have custom bindings were
either wired together at the time the bindings were
made, have always been wired together when communi-
cating with Rover since the bindings were made, and
are now all wired to the BCU.

1. In Site Configuration, click the Devices tab.

2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 103
Comm5 Links

Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-

ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.
3. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list of Neuron IDs
Unassigned to UCM Objects.

Note:
Before proceeding, look at the Comm5 Object and Neuron
ID Summary on the right side of the dialog box to confirm
that the BCU found devices (Figure 114 on page 105).

4. Click the Discover Binding button, only if bindings exist on the site.
(Since this phase of discovery can take time on a large link, it is more
efficient to omit this step if bindings don’t exist.)
In this phase of discovery, the BCU discovers bindings, verifies that
all devices have unique network addresses, and determines that there
are no critical link errors. After discovery is complete, the Comm5
Status field changes to the Normal mode and the dialog is activated.

Note:
The Discover Bindings button is available only during initial
installation. If devices are added later to the existing link, their
bindings must be recreated using the Rover service tool, after
they are installed on the BCU.

104 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

Figure 114. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery of Neuron

IDs

5. The Discovery Details window will automatically appear after discov-

ery is complete (Figure 115 on page 106). To view the window again
after closing it, click the Discovery Details button. If errors exist,
detailed information about them will appear in the Discovery Details
window.

Note:
All errors must be resolved before installation to ensure
that bindings are saved. Suggestions for how to resolve
them can be found by using Help for this window.
If errors existed and were fixed, you will have to run the
discoveries again. After viewing the Discovery Details win-
dow, proceed to the next step.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 105
Comm5 Links

Figure 115. Discovery Details—Without Errors

6. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
7. After all Neuron IDs are found and errors corrected, you can begin
assigning Neuron IDs to UCM objects. From the UCM Type drop-
down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog box, select the appropriate
UCM type.
8. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.

Note:
If you are using the location label as the object name, use the
default name that appears in the Unassigned UCM Object
Name field. For example, Figure 114 on page 105 shows
SCC-4-4-1 as the object name.

9. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
10. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
11. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list.
12. Repeat the process for the other UCM objects.
13. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
14. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU

106 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-

stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard

Capacity BMTW)
Before getting started, use the Rover service tool to verify that all devices
on the Comm5 link have been configured and operation verified. Then
remove the Rover service tool from the link and follow this procedure:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, then Site Configu-
ration.

Note:
If this is a new installation, choose the correct units, add your
BCU and PC workstation, and then save your site (see “Creat-
ing, Editing, and Deleting Devices” on page 64). Then proceed
to step 2.

2. Select the Devices tab.

3. Highlight the BMTW that you want to add devices to. Then, click the
Edit Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 116).

Figure 116. Edit Device Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 107
Comm5 Links

4. In the Communication Links group, choose a link and use the drop-
down arrow to access the list of communication cards. Select the
Comm5 card. (The BCU can have only one Comm5 card in any com-
munication link slot.)
5. Select a Comm5 Mode option:
• Install a new link—Select this option if you don’t have custom
bindings or don’t care if they are destroyed.
• Add to or discover existing link—Select this option if you want to
preserve custom binding.

Note:
The standard capacity BMTW BCU will preserve bindings only
under the following conditions:
• Comm5 devices have not been installed on this BCU.
• The Comm5 Mode is set to Add to or Discover existing
link.
• All of the devices which have custom bindings were
either wired together at the time the bindings were
made, have always been wired together when communi-
cating with Rover since the bindings were made, and
are now all wired to the BCU.
• RAM is cleared prior to clicking the Discover button on
the Assign Neuron ID dialog box, or pressing a service
pin on one of the new devices. Existing custom bindings
are only discovered on a RAM clear. Trane recommends
clearing RAM immediately after configuring the BCU
(see “Clearing RAM” on page 110).

6. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Devices tab.
7. Click Save and create Comm5 UCMs as described in Creating Comm5
UCMs Objects below.

Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for Standard Capacity

BMTW
1. In Site Configuration, select the Devices tab.
2. Highlight the BMTW BCU that has the Comm5 link.
3. Click the Create button. The Create UCMs dialog box displays (see
Figure 117 on page 109).
4. Select the option next to the Comm5 link (Link 4 in Figure 117 on
page 109).
5. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the type of UCM you want
to add.

108 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

Figure 117. Create UCMs Dialog Box

6. Type a name in the UCM Address Name field.

Note:
If you are creating multiple UCMs, Tracer Summit software
will use the name you enter as the base name and follow it with
the communication link number and the device number. For
example, if you use the default name “SCC” as the name for
three UCMs on Link 4, the system would name the units SCC-
1-4-1, SCC-1-4-2, and SCC-1-4-3.
When doing assignments later, use the default base name if you
plan to use the location label of the device (that was set up
using Rover service tool) as the UCM object name.

7. In the Number to Create field, type the number of UCMs you want to
create.
8. Click the Create button to create the UCMs and return to the Devices
tab.
This step creates one UCM object for each of the Comm5 devices. The
list of UCMs in the UCMs in Selected Device window shows all of the
UCM objects (see Figure 118 on page 110). In this example, six SCCs
were created. Ultimately, each UCM object will be connected to a
Comm5 UCM through assigning a Neuron ID.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 109
Comm5 Links

Figure 118. UCMs in Selected Device Window

9. Click the Create UCM button to add other Comm5 UCMs.

10. When you are finished, click Save to add these new objects to the
Tracer Summit database.
11. Click Close to exit Site Configuration.

Clearing RAM
In order to initiate discovery by the BCU of the devices on the link and
their bindings, you need to clear RAM. Bindings will be preserved only if:
• These are the first Comm5 devices installed on the BCU.
• The Comm5 Mode in the Edit Devices dialog box is set to Add to or
discover existing link (Figure 116 on page 107).
• RAM is cleared after connecting the Comm5 link wire to the BCU.

To clear RAM:
1. From the main menu, select Tools.
2. Choose BCU Reset/Restore (see Figure 119 on page 111).
3. Choose the BCU with the Comm5 card.
4. Choose Clear Ram and Reset.
5. Click the Reset button.

110 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

Figure 119. BCU Reset/Restore Dialog Box

Assigning Neuron IDs

After a clear RAM and reset, allow the BCU about 60 seconds to finish
resetting.
1. From the Setup menu, open Site Configuration and click the Devices
tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation performs discovery of
Comm5 devices. When there is Comm5 activity, a progress bar dis-
plays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper right-hand corner of
the dialog box.
As a result of clearing RAM, discovery is automatically initiated.
There are two phases to discovery:
• Phase 1: the BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a
device list.
• Phase 2: the BCU discovers bindings and verifies Comm5 net-
work configuration. A phase 2 discovery only occurs after a clear
RAM.
When all activity ends, the command buttons are available again, and
devices that have been discovered appear in the Neuron IDs Unas-
signed to UCMs Objects window (Figure 120 on page 112). If devices
do not show up on the list, you can click Discover Neuron IDs to ini-
tiate a discovery.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 111
Comm5 Links

Figure 120. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery

3. To view the Discovery Details window to see if errors exist, click the
Discovery Details button (see Figure 121). If errors exist, detailed
information about them will appear in this window.

Note:
All errors must be resolved before installation to ensure
that bindings are saved. Suggestions for how to resolve
them can be found by using Help for this window.
If errors existed and were fixed, you will have to run the
discoveries again. After viewing the Discovery Details win-
dow, proceed to the next step.

Figure 121. Discovery Details—Without Errors

112 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Installing a New Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

4. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
5. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
6. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name give an unassigned Neuron ID to.

Note:
If you are using the location label as the object name, use the
default name that appears in the Unassigned UCM Object
Name field. For example, Figure 120 on page 112 shows SCC-4-
4-1 as the object name.

7. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
8. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
9. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list.
10. Repeat the process for the other UCM objects.
11. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
12. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 113
Comm5 Links

Adding a New UCM to an Existing

Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity
BMTW)
To add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link:

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added. Then remove the Rover service tool
from the link and follow this procedure.

1. Start your installation at the new UCM. Configure and verify opera-
tion of the new device in stand-alone mode, without the communica-
tion link connected, using the Rover service tool.
If this device was previously installed, push the service pin for 15 sec-
onds until the red service LED flashes.
2. Connect the UCM to the communication link on the BCU. Move ter-
mination resistors, if necessary.
3. At the PC workstation select Setup from the Tracer Summit main
menu and open Site Configuration.
4. From the Devices tab, click the Create UCM button. Then follow the
procedure for “Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for BMTX or High
Capacity BMTW” on page 101. If you created the UCMs during the
initial installation, you can skip this step.

Note:
Unassigned UCMs show up in the UCMs list on the Devices
tab with the default name and no Neuron ID assigned.

5. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether
Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-
ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.
6. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list that appears in
the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects. Confirmation that the
BCU found devices also appears in the Comm5 Object and Neuron ID
Summary on the left side of the dialog box.

114 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Adding a New UCM to an Existing Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)

7. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
8. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.
9. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
object name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
10. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the Neuron
ID that you want associated with the UCM object displayed in the
Unassigned UCM Object Name field.
11. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list (see
Figure 122).

Figure 122. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Adding a New Comm5 UCM

to an Existing Link

12. Repeat the process if there are more UCM objects to assign.
13. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCM objects in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
14. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 115
Comm5 Links

Adding New UCMs to an Existing

Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity
BMTW)
To add a new UCM to an existing Comm5 link:

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added. Then remove the Rover service tool
from the link and follow this procedure.

1. Start your installation at the new Comm5 device. Configure and ver-
ify operation of the new device in stand-alone mode, without the com-
munication link connected, using the Rover service tool.
If this device was previously installed, push the service pin for 15 sec-
onds until the red service LED flashes.
2. Connect the UCM to the communication link on the BCU. Move ter-
mination resistors, if necessary.
3. When you have completed the installation of the new units on the
link, push the service pin on all of the units. This broadcasts the Neu-
ron ID of the new devices on the link. The BCU will discover only the
new devices on the link.
4. At the PC workstation select Setup from the Tracer Summit main
menu and open Site Configuration.
5. From the Devices tab, click the Create UCM button. Then follow the
procedure for “Creating Comm5 UCMs Objects for Standard Capacity
BMTW” on page 108. If you created the UCMs during the initial
installation, you can skip this step.

Note:
Unassigned UCMs show up in the UCMs list on the Devices
tab with the default name and no Neuron ID assigned.

6. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation performs discovery of
Comm5 devices. When there is Comm5 activity, a progress bar dis-
plays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper right-hand corner of
the dialog box.
After the BCU checks for Comm5 activity, it conducts a phase 1 dis-
covery. In phase 1, the BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a

116 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Adding New UCMs to an Existing Comm5 Link (Standard Capacity BMTW)

device list. You will not see a phase 2 discovery because you are not
preserving any bindings.
Once discovery is complete the command buttons become available
again and new devices will show up on the Neuron IDs Unassigned to
UCM Objects list. If devices do not show up on the list, you can click
Discover Neuron IDs to initiate a discovery.
7. From the UCM Type drop-down list in the Assign Neuron ID dialog
box, select the appropriate UCM type.
8. From the Unassigned UCM Object Name drop-down list, select an
Unassigned UCM Object Name to give an unassigned Neuron ID to.
9. If you do not want to use the Neuron ID location label as the UCM
object name, clear the Assign Location Label checkbox.
10. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects field, select the Neu-
ron ID that you want associated with the UCM displayed in the Unas-
signed UCM Object Name field.
11. Click the Assign button to give the Neuron ID to the unassigned UCM
object and move it to the Neuron ID Assigned to UCM Objects list (see
Figure 123).

Figure 123. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Adding a New Comm5 UCM

to an Existing Link

12. Repeat the process if there are more UCM objects to assign.
13. Click OK to return to the Devices tab. Notice that the UCMs in
Selected Device list now have Neuron IDs assigned to them.
14. Click Save and close Site Configuration.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 117
Comm5 Links

You can see communication established with your newly installed

devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

Replacing a Comm5 UCM

The most obvious reason to replace a UCM is because of circuit board fail-
ure. But boards are also commonly replaced as a troubleshooting tech-
nique, to determine if the problem is with the controller.

Note:
When you add a device to an existing link, you will not be able
to preserve bindings between any of the new devices that are
added. You will, however, be able to preserve existing bindings.
If additional bindings are required, create them using the
Rover service tool or Rover in Tracer Summit software, after
the device has been added.

Begin the process at the Tracer Summit PC workstation. First you need
to remove the UCM that is being replaced from the assignments list in
the BCU. This tells the BCU not to look for this UCM on its Comm5 link.
To replace a Comm5 UCM:
1. Select Setup from the Tracer Summit main menu, open Site Configu-
ration and click the Devices tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button. The Assign
Neuron ID dialog box displays (see Figure 124 on page 119).

118 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Replacing a Comm5 UCM

Figure 124. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box Showing Assigned UCMs

3. From the Neuron IDs Assigned to UCM objects list, choose the UCM
that is to be replaced.
4. Click the Unassign button. The UCM appears in the unassigned list
(see Figure 125).

Figure 125. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box Showing the UCM to be

Replaced in the Unassigned List

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 119
Comm5 Links

5. Click OK. Tracer Summit returns to the Devices tab.

On the Devices tab, the UCM object shows all zeros for the associated
Neuron ID.
6. Save and close Site Configuration.
7. After the yellow communication LED stops flashing, disconnect the
comm link from the UCM. Also, remove any other wiring.
8. Replace board, rewire inputs and outputs, and connect power. Do not
connect your communication wires yet.
9. Connect with Rover and configure the UCM.
10. Remove Rover from the UCM.
• If the UCM has been on another link, you will need to unconfigure
its network configurations, go to step 11.
• If this is a new UCM from the factory, go to step 12.
11. Hold the service pin down for at least 15 seconds. The red service
LED flashes, signaling the UCM is unconfigured.
12. Reconnect the communication link to the UCM.
13. Return to the PC workstation to complete the replacement.
14. Re-open Site Configuration, Devices tab, and the Assign Neuron ID
window.
15. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. Discovery of Neuron IDs is ini-
tiated.
16. From the UCM Type drop-down list, select the UCM type. The unas-
signed UCM displays in the Unassigned UCMs field.
17. In the Neuron IDs Unassigned to UCM Objects list, select the new
Neuron ID.
18. Click the Assign button to assign the Neuron ID to the unassigned
UCM.
19. Click OK. Tracer Summit returns to the Devices tab.
20. In the UCMs in Selected Device window, verify that new Neuron ID is
in the list.
21. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

120 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that has

Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage

for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that
has had its Software Image Upgraded
to Version 16
A high capacity BMTW BCU must have its software image upgraded to
version 16 in order to store its Comm5 database in non-volatile (Flash)
memory rather than volatile memory (RAM).
You must create and save the Comm5 database to the non-volatile mem-
ory in your Version 16 BCU before you can add new devices to the existing
link. Perform the upgrade first to keep Neuron ID assignments. Then
install the new devices as instructed in “Adding a New UCM to an Exist-
ing Comm5 Link (BMTX or High Capacity BMTW)” on page 114.

Note:
This upgrade procedure does not apply to a standard capacity
BMTW BCU, because it can store its Comm5 database only in
RAM.

If the software image has been upgraded, you will be prompted to redis-
cover the Comm5 network Neuron IDs and bindings when you log on the
PC Workstation (see Figure 126).

Figure 126. Prompt to Rediscover the Comm5 Network after Upgrading

BCU Software Image

1. From the Setup menu, open Site Configuration and click the Devices
tab.
2. On the Devices tab, click the Assign Neuron ID button to open the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 121
Comm5 Links

When the Assign Neuron ID dialog box opens, all command buttons
are unavailable while the PC workstation determines whether
Comm5 activity is occurring in the BCU. When there is Comm5 activ-
ity, a progress bar displays in the Comm5 Status group in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog box. When all activity ends, the com-
mand buttons are available again.

Note:
Figure 127 shows the Neuron IDs Assigned to UCM Objects list
populated. The location label column is blank because the BCU
has not discovered the actual devices on the link yet and cannot
associate the correct location label with the Neuron ID and
UCM object name. After the discovery of Neuron IDs and bind-
ings is initiated, the appropriate Neuron ID location labels will
appear.

Figure 127. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—Before Discovery of Devices

Step 3

Note that no
location labels
Step 7 are assigned.

3. Click the Discover Neuron IDs button. In this phase of discovery, the
BCU discovers devices on the link and builds a list of Neuron IDs
Unassigned to UCM Objects. Confirmation that the BCU found
devices also appears in the Comm5 Object and Neuron ID Summary
on the left side of the dialog box (Figure 120 on page 112).
4. Click the Discover Bindings button, even if you have no bindings on
the site. In this phase of discovery, the BCU will find old BCU bind-
ings, and re-establish assignments to Neuron IDs found on the link.

122 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity BMTW BCU that has

Notice that the location labels now appear in the Neuron IDs
Assigned to UCM Objects list (see Figure 128).

Figure 128. Assign Neuron ID Dialog Box—After Discovery of Devices

Step 4

Note that location

labels are now
assigned.

5. The Discovery Details window will automatically appear after discov-

ery is complete (see Figure 129 on page 124). To view the window
again after closing it, click the Discovery Details button. If errors
exist, detailed information about them will appear in the Discovery
Details window.

Note:
All errors must be resolved before installation to ensure
that bindings are saved. Suggestions for how to resolve
them can be found by using Help for this window.
If errors existed and were fixed, you will have to run the
discoveries again. After viewing the Discovery Details win-
dow, proceed to the next step.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 123
Comm5 Links

Figure 129. Discovery Details—Without Errors

6. Click Save to File to save the report to a file for future reference, or
click Close to exit the Discover Details window and return to the
Assign Neuron ID dialog box.
7. Click OK to install the devices on the BCU.
8. Click Save and close Site Configuration.
You can see communication established with your newly installed
devices by looking at the UCM editors. (If power is lost to the BCU
before communication is established, the devices will have to be rein-
stalled.)

Note:
Do not begin working on the link with the Rover service tool
until you have verified that all devices are communicating with
the BCU.

124 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Replacing an Existing BCU (Standard or High Capacity BMTW) with a BMTX BCU

Replacing an Existing BCU (Standard or

High Capacity BMTW) with a BMTX
BCU
For cases in which a BMTS or BMTW are replaced by a BMTX, you must
create a Comm5 database in the BMTX. To do this, use the procedure
given for “Upgrading Comm5 Database Storage for a High Capacity
BMTW BCU that has had its Software Image Upgraded to Version 16” on
page 121.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 125
Comm5 Links

126 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 10

Setting Up Security

The Tracer Summit Critical Control System (CCS) provides sophisticated

security to protect against unauthorized access. The operator enters a
user name and password to log on to the system.
Your security supervisor assigns passwords and access levels for each
operator. The security supervisor also controls which operators have
access to functions, applications, and objects within the Critical Control
System. For most elements of the system, the supervisor can assign three
levels of access:
• No access (the operator cannot see the information)
• View only (information can be seen, but not changed)
• View and edit (information can be seen and changed)
You can define which classes have access to an object when you create it
(see Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”).

Setting Up a Security Supervisor

The Tracer Summit (CCS) includes a predefined user (User Name: tracer;
password: summit) that allows you to log on the system before you define
a security supervisor. To set up security access for a security supervisor,
follow the steps for setting up a new user (see “Setting Up a New User” on
page 128). Be sure to select Security Supervisor in the User Info screen
options to allow the security supervisor access to the Security editor and
the Authority Level editor.
After you define security access for the security supervisor, delete the
tracer user name to prevent unauthorized access (see Chapter 38, “Delet-
ing Objects and Sites”.)

Note:
If you are registered with a Critical Control System Authoriza-
tion Code, you can delete the tracer user name only after a secu-
rity supervisor has been created on the system and that
supervisor has logged on.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 127
Setting Up Security

Setting Up a New User

You must set up a user profile for each operator who will use the Critical
Control System. You can assign to a new user a predefined authority
level, you can customize the predefined authority level for the user if you
wish, or you can copy an authority level from a previously defined user to
assign to a new user.

Notes:
For information about setting up new or customized authority
levels that can be saved and applied to users or groups of users,
see “Editing Authority Levels” on page 135.
For information about setting up security for the operator dis-
play, see “Setting Up Operator Display Security” on page 137.
The steps to set up a user are:
1. Assign an authority level to the user.
2. Enter user information.
3. If you want to make the security access different from what is pre-
defined for the authority level you assigned to the user, you can:
• Change which functions the operator can access.
• Change which applications the operator can view only or view/
edit.
• Change which objects the operator can access.
• Change which security classes the operator can view only and
view/edit.
The Critical Control System has four authority levels with predefined
security access (see Table 3 on page 129).

128 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a New User

Table 3. Predefined Authority Levels

Level of Security Example Operators Security Access

Access

Authority Level 1 Occasional operators, such as • View alarms, graphics, and schedules.
security guards
Authority Level 2 Daily operators Same as Authority Level 1, plus:
• View chiller plant control, chiller plant status,
reports, schedules, and trends.
• Backup site, graphics, and reports.
• Make timed override request.
• Create schedules.
• Edit low setpoints.
• Edit chiller plant control status and schedule.
Authority Level 3 Advanced daily operators Same as Authority Level 2, plus:
• Edit chiller plant control, expanded messages,
graphics, reports, and trends, event log,
message forwarding, operator display with
custom screen.
Authority Level 4 System supervisor Complete access to everything.

Entering User Information

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Security, and then click Users. The
Select Security dialog box displays (see Figure 130).

Figure 130. Select Security Dialog Box

2. Click New. The User Setup dialog box displays (see Figure 131).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 129
Setting Up Security

Figure 131. User Setup Dialog Box

3. Enter a name of 5–8 alphanumeric characters in the User Name field.

4. Select an option:
• If you wish to use a predefined authority level profile or customize
a predefined authority level profile for security access, click an
authority level in the Selected Profile box, then click OK to dis-
play the Security editor User Info screen (see Figure 133 on page
131). Proceed to step 8.
• If you wish to copy the authority level profile of an existing user,
click Copy From to display the Copy From dialog box (see
Figure 132). Proceed to step 5.

Figure 132. Copy From Dialog Box

5. Click the user name you wish to copy.

6. Click OK to display the User Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK to display the Security editor User Info screen (see Figure
133 on page 131).

130 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a New User

Figure 133. Security Editor User Info Screen

8. At the Security editor User Info screen, type a First name in the First
Name field and a Last Name in the Last Name field. Entries in the
Middle field and Job Title field are optional.
9. Under Tracer Summit Workstation Security, in the Options field,
click the following to select or deselect the option:
• Security Supervisor
• Match Upper & Lower Case
• Disconnect Remote Connection at Log Off
• Account Disabled—prevents user from logging onto the system
10. In the Minutes field, type the number of minutes of non-activity
before the system logs off the user.
11. In the Password Lockout field, type the number of times (1–999) you
want the user to be able to fail logging on before being locked out.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 131
Setting Up Security

12. Click the Reset Password checkbox. The grayed out Temporary Pass-
word field will become available. Type in a password for the user to
enter the first time the user logs on.

Note:
The password characters display as asterisks (*) unless you
click Show. When creating the password for the first time,
click Show to verify the password entry. After checking for
mistakes, deselect Show to convert the password back to
asterisks (*).

13. If you want to give the user access to a BCU operator display, see
“Setting Up Operator Display Security” on page 137.
14. In the Password History field, type in 0–24 for the number of user
passwords you want to be saved in password history.
15. In the Password Expiration field, type the number of days (0–999)
until you want the user’s password to expire. Enter the number of
days (0–999) before password expiration that you want the warning to
appear.

Assigning Access to Functions

1. From the Security editor, click the Functions tab to display the Func-
tions screen (see Figure 134).

Figure 134. Security Editor Functions Screen

2. Click the check box in the Access column to grant or deny access for
each function.

132 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a New User

Assigning Access to Applications

1. From the Security editor, click the Applications tab to display the
Applications screen (see Figure 135).

Figure 135. Security Editor Applications Screen

2. Click the check box in the View Only column or in the View/Edit col-
umn for each application to grant or deny access to that application.

Assigning Access to Objects

1. From the Security editor, click the Objects tab to display the Objects
screen (see Figure 136).

Figure 136. Security Editor Objects Screen

2. Click the check box in the Access column to grant or deny access for
each object.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 133
Setting Up Security

Assigning Access to Security Classes

1. From the Security editor, click the Classes tab to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 137).
2. Click the check box in the Read Only column or in the Read/Write col-
umn for each class to grant or deny access to that class.

Figure 137. Security Editor Classes Screen

Modifying a User Setup

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Security, then highlight Users and
click it. The Select Security dialog box displays.
2. Click the name of the user setup you wish to modify.
3. Click OK to display the Security editor (see Figure 133 on page 131).
4. Use the Security editor screens to select user options and to modify
access to functions, applications, objects, and classes. See “Setting Up
a New User” on page 128.

Defining Access for Users Not Logged

On
When no user is logged on the Tracer Summit system, the system oper-
ates on a predefined user profile called Nobody Logged On. The default
settings for Nobody Logged On deny the operator access to all functions,
applications, and objects. There may be instances where you want opera-
tors to have limited access to general information, such as a main floor
plan or a graphic display screen, without logging on to a site. You can do
so by modifying the Nobody Logged On user profile.

134 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Editing Authority Levels

To modify the Nobody Logged On user profile:

1. From the Setup menu, select Security. The Select Security dialog box
displays (see Figure 138 on page 135).

Figure 138. Select Security Dialog Box

2. Click Nobody Logged On.

3. Click OK to display the Security editor (see Figure 133 on page 131).
4. Use the Security editor screens to select user options and to modify
access to View Only in the Applications tab. See “Setting Up a New
User” on page 128.

Editing Authority Levels

You can customize any of the four predefined authority levels. The
changes you make to an authority level will affect only new users that are
assigned to that level. They will not affect existing users that were previ-
ously created and assigned to that level.
To edit an authority level:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Security, and then click Authority
Levels. The Select Authority Level dialog box displays (see
Figure 130).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 135
Setting Up Security

Figure 139. Select Authority Level Dialog Box

2. Highlight an authority level and click OK. The Authority Level editor
Authority Level Info screen displays and the authority level you
clicked appears in the Name field (see Figure 140).

Figure 140. Authority Level Editor

3. In the User Name field, you can change the name of the authority
level if you wish (1-24 characters).
4. In the Options field, click the following to select or deselect the option:
• Security Supervisor
• Match Upper & Lower Case
• Disconnect Remote Connection at Log Off
5. In the Minutes field, type the number of minutes of non-activity
before the system logs off the user assigned to that authority level.
6. To continue modifying security access for this authority level, use the
tabs on the Authority Level editor and follow the procedures given for
the Security editor:
• For functions, see “Assigning Access to Functions” on page 132.
• For applications, see “Assigning Access to Applications” on
page 133.
• For objects, “Assigning Access to Objects” on page 133.

136 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Operator Display Security

• For security classes, see “Assigning Access to Security Classes” on

page 134.
7. Click Save. If you are registered with a Critical Control System
Authorization Code, a compliance dialog box displays. Enter your
user name and password to authorize the creation of the new author-
ity level (Figure 141). Click OK to save the new authority level.

Figure 141. Specify Authorizing Signature Dialog Box

Setting Up Operator Display Security

Use the following procedure to set up operator display passwords. Use
this field only to enable security at the operator display.

Note:
Operator changes at the operator display are not automatically
tracked in the audit trail. The operator must follow the facility’s
standard operating procedures to track changes at the operator
display.

To set up security for the operator display:

1. Log on to a site that has a BCU operator display.
2. From the Setup menu, select Site Security, and then click Users. The
Select Security dialog box displays (see Figure 142 on page 138).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 137
Setting Up Security

Figure 142. Select Security Dialog Box

3. If you have already set up the user security profile, highlight the user
name and press OK. The Security editor displays with the User Info
tab opened (see Figure 143).
If you haven’t set up the user security profile of the user, go to “Set-
ting Up a New User” on page 128.

Figure 143: Security Editor User Info Screen

4. In the Operator Display Security group on the right, type a password.

138 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting a User

The password must be numeric only (4-8 digits). The password can be
the same as or different from the Tracer Summit log-in password.

Note:
The password characters display as asterisks (*) unless you
click Show. When creating the password for the first time,
click Show to verify the password entry. After checking for
mistakes, deselect Show to convert the password back to
asterisks (*).

5. Select the Allow Edit Access options that apply.

• Click Alarms to enable acknowledgement and deletion of alarms.
If the field is not selected, you can view alarms at the operator
display but cannot acknowledge or delete them.
• Click Schedule to allow the modification of existing schedules. If
the field is not selected, you can view schedules at the operator
display but cannot modify them.
• Click Set Points to allow modification of setpoints. If the field is
not selected, you can view setpoints at the operator display but
cannot modify them.
• Click Overrides to allow overrides. If the field is not selected, you
can view properties that can be overridden (manual controls) but
you cannot modify them.
• Click Setup to allow setup activities at the operator display. If the
field is not selected, you can view the Operator Display settings
but cannot modify them.
• Click Timed Override to allow timed overrides of areas. If the
field is not selected, you can view the timed override status of an
area but cannot modify it.

Note:
Some of the setup activities are always available.

6. Click Save.
7. To further enable security at the operator display, perform the steps
in “Enabling Security at the Operator Display” on page 507.

Deleting a User
You cannot delete a user from the Security editor. To delete a user, use the
Delete Object utility in the Tools menu. (See Chapter 38, “Deleting
Objects and Sites”.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 139
Setting Up Security

Changing a User Password

Users can change their passwords by the following procedure:
1. From the Setup menu, select Change Password. The Change Pass-
word dialog box displays (see Figure 130).
2. Type old password in the Old Password field, then the new password
in both the New Password and Confirm New Password fields. Click
OK.

Figure 144: Change Password Dialog Box

140 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 11

Archive Audit Trail Utility

The archive audit trail utility removes older data from the live audit trail
database and stores it in the currently archived database. It also backs up
data from the currently archived database to a backup file (.bak) located
at the SQL server installation data directory path. You can run the
archive process immediately or schedule a task to run on a predefined
schedule. The archive utility archives data older than 30, 60, 90,180 and
365 days or all data up to the current date. This utility is only available
with the Tracer Summit Critical Control System.

Note:
The utility can be only run from the server.

Installing the Archive Utility

1. Log on to the Windows server as a server administrator.
2. Copy the FDA_ArchiveTool folder from the Tracer Summit CD-ROM
to the SQL server hard disk.

Accessing the Archive Utility Screen

1. From the FDA_ArchiveTool folder, locate the ArchiveUtil.exe file.
2. Double-click the file to run the utility. The utility login screen dis-
plays (see Figure 145).

Figure 145. Archive Utility Login Screen

3. From the SQL Server field, use the down-arrow and select an SQL
server.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 141
Archive Audit Trail Utility

4. Identify the group you are in:

• If you are a member of the TracerSummitAdmin group in Win-
dows NT Security, check the Use NT Authentication checkbox.
• If you are a member of the sysadmin group in SQL Server secu-
rity, type your user name and password.
5. Click the OK button to display the Audit Trail Archival Utility screen
(see Figure 146).

Figure 146. Archive Utility Screen

Archiving Audit Trail Data

The archive utility provides you with the following options for archiving
audit trail data:
• Archive by schedule
• Archive to current audit trail archive SQL database
• Backup and archive to new audit trail archive database
Whatever option you choose, you will need to indicate which records get
archived and which records do not. You indicate this by putting a value in
the Archive records older than field (see Figure 146).

142 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Archiving Audit Trail Data

Using the Scheduling Option to Archive Data

The scheduling option enables you to archive audit trail data on a weekly
or monthly basis using pre-defined schedules in the SQL server sched-
uler.
To archive by schedule:
1. Click the Schedule Archival checkbox to enable the scheduler. A
checkmark appears in the box and the schedule option buttons and
the Save button are enable.
2. Select a schedule option.
3. In the Archive records older than field, select a value from the drop-
down list.

Note:
Audit trail data older than this value will be moved from the
audit trail database to the audit trail archive database when
the schedule is run.

4. Click the Save Schedule button to save the schedule to the SQL server
as a scheduled job.

Archiving to Current Archive SQL Database

1. In the Select Archive Location group, click the Archive to current
option.
2. In the Archive records older than field, select a value from the drop-
down list.

Note:
Audit trail data older than this value will be moved from the
audit trail database to the audit trail archive database when
the Archive utility is run.

3. Click the Run Archive Now button to archive audit trail data.

Backing Up and Archiving to New Archive SQL

Database
1. In the Select Archive Location group, click the Backup and archive
option.
2. In the Archive records older than field, select a value from the drop-
down list.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 143
Archive Audit Trail Utility

3. Click the Run Archive Now button to archive audit trail data.

Note:
The system backs up the existing audit trail archive database
onto the SQL server where its installed and creates a blank
audit trail archive database. All the records selected (based on
the value you chose) are moved from the audit trail database to
the new blank audit trail archive database. When archiving is
completed, a success message dialog box displays.

4. Click the OK button to close the archive utility screen.

To restore this backup later, see Chapter 12, “Restoring an Archived
Database Backup File.”

144 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

Chapter 12
Restoring an Archived Database Backup
File

To run audit trail reports against an old backup of the archive database,
you will need to restore a backup file (.bak) onto the SQL server as the
database. This makes the archive database accessible to the audit trail
reports module. The archive database must be restored on the server with
the specific name AuditTrailPreviousArchive as its database name.
To restore an archived backup file (using Enterprise Manager):
1. From Microsoft Explorer, click Microsoft SQL Servers to expand the
group as shown in Figure 147.

Figure 147. SQL Server Enterprise Manager

2. Click on a server name to expand the list of servers (see Figure 148 on
page 146).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 145
Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

Figure 148. List of Servers

3. Right-mouse click on the Databases folder.

4. Select All tasks, and then Restore Databases. The Restore Database
dialog box displays (see Figure 148).

Figure 149. Restore Database Dialog Box

5. In the Restore as database field, type the name: AuditTrailPrevi-

ousArchive as the name of the database to restore. Specifying a new

146 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

name for the database automatically determines the new names for
the database files restored from the database backup.
The backup of old archive databases must be restored on the
Microsoft SQL server with a specific name, such as, “AuditTrailPrevi-
ousArchive” as its database name.
6. Click the From device option.
7. Click the Select Devices button. The Choose Restore Devices dialog
box displays (see Figure 150).

Figure 150. Choose Restore Devices Dialog Box

8. Click Disk or Tape. (Choose Tape if the

AuditTrailArchive_yyyymmdd.bak file is on a Tape.)
9. In the Devices name list box, select a device from which to restore.

Note:
If no devices appear, click Add to add an existing backup device
or to create a new one.

10. Click OK. The Choose Restore Destination dialog box displays (see
Figure 151 on page 148).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 147
Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

Figure 151. Choose Restore Destination Dialog Box

11. Click the File name option. Then, click the ellipse (...) button to dis-
play the Backup Device Location dialog box (see Figure 152).

Figure 152. Backup Device Location Dialog Box

12. Browse for the AuditTrailArchive_yyyymmdd.bak file and select the

file. The file name appears in the File name box, and the path name
appears just below it on the line that says Selected file.
13. Click OK. The Choose Restore Destination dialog box displays.
14. Click OK. The Restore database dialog box displays (see Figure 153
on page 149).
If you know the backup set to restore, type the backup set number in
the Backup number field.

Note:
This option, scans the backup set for the backup content infor-
mation and can be time consuming, especially when using tape
devices.

148 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

Figure 153. Restore Database Dialog Box

Database
Complete option

15. If you don’t know the backup set number, select the Database–com-
plete option (The Restore backup set option is selected by default.)
16. Click the Options tab (see Figure 154).

Figure 154. Options tab

17. Choose the option, Leave database operational, if no further transaction

log backups are to be applied.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 149
Restoring an Archived Database Backup File

18. Click the OK button. The Restore Progress dialog box appears showing
the progress of the restoration. It may take few minutes depending upon
the size of the backup file.
19. After the system has restored the database a message dialog appears.
Click the OK button.

150 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 13

Using UCM Editors

Each unit control module (UCM) supported in the Tracer Summit system
has an editor that allows you to create or to modify the UCM’s setup. You
access the UCM editors through the Unit Controllers menu item of the
Setup menu.
You can use UCM editors to perform these tasks:
• Create, set up, and configure a UCM on the Tracer Summit system
• View the status of a UCM
• Troubleshoot a UCM
UCM editors share common layouts and functions. This chapter describes
the typical editing tasks you can perform in UCM editors.

Note:
For detailed information about each UCM editor, refer to
Tracer Summit online help (from any UCM editor, click the
Help button or press the F1 key).

Accessing a UCM Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers. The list of unit control-
lers displays.
2. Select the name of the unit controller that you want to edit. The
Select dialog box displays, listing each UCM of the type you selected.
Figure 155 shows a Select dialog box for a Voyager Rooftop.

Figure 155. Select Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 151
Using UCM Editors

3. Click on the name of the unit controller you wish to edit.

4. Click OK to display the UCM editor. Figure 156 shows the editor for a
Voyager Rooftop. For all editors, the Status screen displays when the
editor is first opened. You can view this screen to monitor the UCM’s
status.

Figure 156. Voyager Rooftop Editor

152 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New UCM

Creating a New UCM

To create a new UCM, you perform these tasks:
• If no UCMs of the appropriate type are defined yet, set up the new
UCM type (as described in this section)
• Name and set the address of the new UCM (as described in this sec-
tion)
• Set up the UCM (see “Setting Up a UCM” on page 155)
• Configure the UCM, if appropriate (see “Configuring a UCM” on
page 156)
• Set overrides for the UCM, if appropriate (see “Setting Overrides for a
UCM” on page 157)
• Route alarms and events and define security access (see “Routing
Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access” on page 159)
The following steps show you how to create a new UCM using the Setup
menu’s Unit Controllers option. You can also create a new UCM while
configuring a site. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”
To create a new UCM:
1. From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers. The list of defined
UCM types displays.
2. Make a selection:
• If the appropriate UCM type is listed, select it. The Select dialog
box displays. Then click New.
• If the appropriate UCM type is not listed, select New UCM Type.
The Select New UCM Type dialog box displays, listing UCM types
that have not yet been defined in the site (see Figure 157). Click
the appropriate UCM type, then click OK.

Figure 157. Select New UCM Type Dialog Box

For both options, the New UCM Name/Address dialog box displays
(see Figure 158 on page 154).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 153
Using UCM Editors

Figure 158. New UCM Name/Address Dialog Box

3. In the UCM Name field, enter a unique name for the UCM. Make the
name as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
You must enter a name before you can save the new UCM. You can
modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of the UCM edi-
tor.
4. In the BCU field, select a BCU. Only BCUs with compatible links are
listed.
5. In the Comm. Link field, select a communication link. Only compati-
ble links are listed.
6. In the Address field, select an address for this UCM. Only valid,
unused addresses are listed.
7. Click OK. The UCM editor specific to the UCM type you have selected
displays.
8. Set up the new UCM (see “Setting Up a UCM” on page 155).

Note:
You can not create a UCM in excess of the links capacity.

154 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a UCM

Setting Up a UCM
The tasks for setting up a UCM vary depending upon the UCM type. In
general, you can:
• Change the name of the UCM
• Control UCM setpoints
• Change the UCM link and address
• Select or change other setup information
You can make these changes from the UCM editor’s Setup screen. This
screen contains the fields necessary for Tracer Summit to control the
UCM. Depending on the type of UCM, there may be other dedicated
Setup tabs for specific UCM functions. For detailed information on the
fields of the Setup screen, click the Help button.
To set up a UCM:
1. From the UCM editor, click the Setup tab. Figure 159 shows an exam-
ple Setup screen. The fields vary depending upon the UCM type.

Figure 159. Example Setup Screen

2. Edit the setup information as necessary.

3. To change the UCM link or address, click the Change Address button.
Make your changes and click OK.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 155
Using UCM Editors

Configuring a UCM
Most UCM editors have a Configuration screen where you can set UCM
configuration information. Because this information is stored locally in
the UCM, you cannot edit the information on the Configuration screen
when the UCM is offline. For detailed information on the fields of the
Configuration screen, click the Help button.
To configure a UCM:
1. From the UCM editor, click the Configuration tab. Figure 160 shows
an example Configuration screen. The fields vary depending upon the
UCM type.

Figure 160. Example Configuration Screen

2. Edit the configuration information as necessary.

156 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Overrides for a UCM

Setting Overrides for a UCM

All UCM editors have an Overrides screen where you can set override
information, including overriding a UCM or releasing override control of
a UCM. For detailed information on the fields of the Overrides screen,
click the Help button.

Overriding the Present Value of a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab. Figure 161 shows an
example Overrides screen. All UCM editors have an Override button.
The remaining fields vary depending upon the UCM type.

Figure 161. Example Overrides Screen

2. Click the Override button. The Override dialog box displays with
Change Value To selected (see Figure 162 on page 158).

Note:
If you need help with overrides, click the Tutorial button (see
Figure 162 on page 158) to open the Tracer Summit Daily Oper-
ations Tutorial.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 157
Using UCM Editors

Figure 162. Override Dialog Box

3. In the Change Value To list box, select the desired value. For a UCM,
the available values are: Unoccupied, Optimal Stop, Occupied, Opti-
mal Start, Demand Limit, Duty Cycle, Priority Shutdown, Night
Economize, and Night Heat/Cool.
4. Click the At Priority list box to select a priority.
5. Click Apply to perform the override. The Priority Array list updates.
6. Click OK to close the Override dialog box.

Releasing Control of a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab.
2. Click the Override button. The Override dialog box displays.
3. Click the Release Control button. The Change Value To button
becomes inactive and the system selects the highest priority from the
At Priority list box.
4. Click Apply to release control at the selected priority level. The Prior-
ity Array list updates, or click OK to apply the changes and close the
dialog box.

Overriding Other Values in a UCM

1. From the UCM editor, click the Override tab.
2. Edit the override fields as necessary.
3. Click Apply to release control at the selected priority level. The Prior-
ity Array list updates, or click OK to apply the changes and close the
dialog box.

158 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
All UCM editors have a Classes screen where you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for a UCM.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the UCM editor, click the Classes tab. Figure 163 shows an
example Classes screen.

Figure 163. Example Classes Screen

2. In the Control Class field, select a control class. The control class
defines the event class that will receive an event message when the
present value of the UCM changes.
3. In each diagnostic field in the Alarm Classes group, select an appro-
priate event class for routing alarms.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 159
Using UCM Editors

Setting Security Access

1. From the UCM editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 164).

Figure 164. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a UCM
You cannot delete a UCM from a UCM editor. Use the Delete Object func-
tion from the Tools menu to delete a UCM (see Chapter 38, “Deleting
Objects and Sites”).

160 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 14

Setting Up Printers, Modems,

and Pagers

Tracer Summit Critical Control System software supports the following

features:
• Printing of graphics, reports, Custom Programming Language (CPL)
programs, the event log, and individual alarms and events as they
occur
• Communications between a BCU modem and a pager
This chapter describes the steps in setting up each of these options.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 161
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Setting Up Printers
In Tracer Summit, you can print graphics, reports and CPL programs, as
well as the event log and alarms and events as they occur. For graphics,
reports, CPL programs, and the entire event log, you can select the File
menu’s Print item to print the displayed information. These items use
page printing, which prints a page at a time to a printer. For page print-
ing, you can use any standard printer (such as a laser or inkjet printer).
You set up and use the printer just as you do from any Windows program.
Event and alarm printing is handled differently. Tracer Summit prints
alarms and events to a selected events printer one line at a time as they
occur. A tractor-feed (or line-feed) printer works best as the events printer
so that you can view the events as they are generated and printed. If you
select a page printer, you do not see the events until a complete page is
printed. Typically, the events printer is connected directly to the PC
Workstation (on the LPT1: port). However, the printer can also be con-
nected through a network.
To print the entire event log, you can use any printer. The events printer
is only for printing alarms and events one at a time as they occur.
Whether you are setting up the events printer or any other printers, you
need to first add the printer in the Windows operating system.

Adding a Printer in Windows

Before you can select a printer in Tracer Summit, you need to add the
printer to the Windows operating system using the Add Printer applica-
tion.
To access the Add Printer application:
1. From the Windows desktop, double click on the My Computer icon,
then double click on the Printers icon.
2. At the Printers window, double click on Add Printer. The Add Printer
Wizard displays and will guide you through the installation of a
printer.

Setting Up and Selecting the Events Printer

After you have added a printer to the Windows operating system, you can
select that printer as your events printer. To set up the events printer, you
access the System Options editor (from the Tools menu, select Options).
For detailed information on setting up the events printer, refer to Chapter
32, “Setting System Options”.

Selecting Other Printers

For printing graphics, reports, CPL programs, and the entire event log,
you can use a printer you added to the Windows operating system. With
the graphic, report, CPL program, or event log displayed, on the File
menu select Print. At the Print Setup dialog box, select the printer.

162 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Setting Up Modems
Tracer Summit software supports modem communications between a
BCU and a remote PC Workstation. Once the BCU and PC Workstation
modems are installed, you can set up and configure both modems in
Tracer Summit using the Workstation or BCU Modem editor.

Notes
Because dialing-in directly to a BCU modem is discouraged in a
compliance-enabled environment and access to a SQL Server data-
base is necessary for audit trail tracking, use a virtual private net-
working (VPN) to remotely connect to a Tracer Summit Critical
Control System (CCS) site. See, “Setting Up a Virtual Private Net-
work” on page 17.

IMPORTANT
If modem communication from within Tracer Summit is abso-
lutely needed, then any changes that you make using a non-
compliance or non-CCS PC workstation version will need to be
tracked through the facility’s standard operating procedure
(SOP).

You add BCU modems during site configuration (see “Adding a BCU
Modem” on page 67). Once a BCU modem is configured, you can then
modify the modem through the modem editor.
You add and configure workstation modems for BCU sites through the
modem editor.

Accessing the Workstation Modem Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Worksta-
tion Modem. The Select Workstation Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 165 on page 164) Select Workstation Modem Dialog Box.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 163
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 165. Select Workstation Modem Dialog Box

2. Select a modem and click OK. The Workstation Modem editor dis-
plays (see Figure 166).

Figure 166. Workstation Modem Editor

Adding a Workstation Modem in Windows

Before you can create a modem object in Tracer Summit, you need to add
a modem to the Windows operating system. The Windows Modems appli-
cation program is found in the Windows Control Panel.
To access the Modems application program:
1. From the Windows desktop, double click the My Computer icon, then
double click the Control Panel icon. The Control Panel displays (see
Figure 167 on page 165).
2. Double click the Modems icon. For further instructions on adding a
modem, refer to the Windows operating system manual.

164 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Modems

Figure 167. Windows Modem Icon

Modems Icon

Creating a New Workstation Modem

A workstation modem is a modem that is installed in your PC. In Tracer
Summit, you must configure your modem to communicate with BCU
sites.
The modem editor will only allow you to create workstation modems for
the type of Tracer Summit package that you have on your workstation.
The Tracer Summit standard software allows you to add workstation
modems for BCU sites.
To create a Tracer Summit local workstation modem, you perform
these tasks:
1. Add a modem to the Windows operating system (see “Adding a Work-
station Modem in Windows” on page 164).
2. Configure and set up a workstation modem using the Modem editor.
You need to:
• Open and name a new modem object (as described in this section)
• Choose which modem in Windows that your workstation will use
(see “Setting Up a Workstation Modem” on page 168).
• Define how the modem will be used.
• Add phone numbers to the Phone Book.
• Verify the defaults for the comm port and the configuration
strings
• Save the modem object
To create a workstation modem object:
1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Worksta-
tion Modem. The Select Workstation Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 168 on page 166).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 165
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 168. Select Workstation Modem Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Modem Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 169).

Figure 169. New Modem Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Modem Name field. Use a maximum of 32 char-

acters. You must enter a name before you can save the new worksta-
tion modem object. (You can modify the name from the Setup screen
of the Modem editor.)
4. Click OK. The Workstation Modem editor displays (see Figure 170).

Figure 170. Workstation Modem Editor Status Screen

166 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Modems

5. Proceed with configuring and setting up the new workstation modem

(see “Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites” on page 167
and “Setting Up a Workstation Modem” on page 168).

Configuring a Workstation Modem for BCU Sites

The following screen gives you a way to view and append the maximum
speed of the comm port for the workstation modem, as well as the stan-
dard configuration strings that the Windows operating system provides
for the modem.

Note:
The comm port in the BMTS BCU has a fixed speed of 9600
baud. The BMTW BCU has an adjustable speed up to 38400
baud. So, depending on what type of BCU you are calling, as
well as the quality of the phone line, you might be able to use
the higher baud rate.

To configure a workstation modem for BCU sites:

1. From the Workstation Modem editor, click the Configuration (BCU
Sites) tab to display the Configuration (BCU Sites) screen (see
Figure 171).

Figure 171. Workstation Modem Configuration (BCU Sites) Screen

2. Select the baud rate from the Workstation Comm Port Maximum
Speed list.

Note:
The Configuration Strings fields display default modem com-
mand strings. However, you can edit the fields to accommodate
specific modem requirements. For information about changing
default settings, refer to the Tracer Summit online Help.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 167
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Setting Up a Workstation Modem

Use the following procedure to:
• Rename the workstation modem
• Define what modem in Windows that the Tracer Summit workstation
modem object should use
• Define comm port the modem is on
• Define whether the modem can accept incoming and/or outgoing calls
To set up the workstation modem:
1. From the Workstation Modem editor, click the Setup tab to display
the Setup screen (see Figure 172).

Figure 172. Workstation Modem Editor Setup Screen

2. In the Workstation Modem Name field, modify the name of the

modem if necessary.
3. From the Connect By list, select what modem in Windows the Tracer
Summit workstation modem object should use.
4. In the Comm Port field, check the communication port default value
for the workstation modem. If necessary, enter the new communica-
tion port number.

Note:
• You will not be able to select a communications port that is
being used by another workstation modem.
• If you edit this field for an existing workstation modem,
Tracer Summit continues to use the previous value until
you restart Tracer Summit.

5. From the Modem Usage list, select the option that best fits how the
modem is to be used. For information on making your selection, see
Table 4 on page 169.

168 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Modem

Table 4. How to Determine Modem Usage

Modem Result
Usage

Outgoing • Can dial BCU sites.

calls only • No incoming calls accepted. See note.
Outgoing • Can dial BCU sites
calls only • No incoming calls accepted. See note.
Incoming • Can take incoming calls from BCU sites.
calls only • No outgoing calls allowed. See note.
Incoming • Can take incoming calls from BCU sites,
calls only • No outgoing calls allowed.
Both incom- • Can dial and take incoming calls from
ing and out- BCU sites.
going calls
Both incom- • Can dial and take incoming calls from
ing and out- BCU sites, See note
going calls

Note:
There is no setting to exclude BCU sites from using the
modem. However, to exclude incoming calls, consult your
manufacurer’s.guide for instructions.

Setting Up the BCU Modem

You add BCU modems during site configuration (see “Adding a BCU
Modem” on page 67). Once a BCU modem is configured, you can then
modify the modem through the modem editor.

Accessing the BCU Modem Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select BCU
Modem. The Select BCU Modem dialog box displays (see Figure 173
on page 170).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 169
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 173. Select BCU Modem Dialog Box

2. Select a modem and click OK. The BCU Modem editor displays (see
Figure 174).

Figure 174. BCU Modem Editor

170 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Modem

Creating a New BCU Modem

Create a new BCU modem using Tracer Summit’s Site Configuration
Utility (see “Adding a BCU Modem” on page 67). After creating the new
modem, you can edit its configuration with the BCU Modem editor.
With the BCU Modem editor, you perform these tasks:
• Choose which model of modem you have installed in the BCU (see
“Configuring a BCU Modem” on page 172) This does not apply to the
BMTX BCU which has only one model of modem available.
• Set the number of dialing attempts (see “Setting Up a BCU Modem”
on page 171)
• For modems in BMTW and BMTX BCUs, set the BCU comm port
maximum baud rate
• Verify the defaults for the configuration strings
• Add phone numbers to the Phone Book (see “Setting Up the Phone
Books” on page 173)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for a BCU
Modem” on page 175)
• Save the modem object

Note:
You can also set up the BCU modem to ignore incoming calls.
Consult your modem manufacturer’s user guide for instruc-
tions.

Setting Up a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen (see Figure 175).

Figure 175. BCU Editor Setup Screen

2. Select model of modem you have installed in the BCU from the Con-
nect By list. This does not apply to the BMTX because there is only
one model of modem available.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 171
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

3. In the Maximum Dialing Attempts field, enter the number of times

the BCU will attempt to connect with a remote PC workstation or
pager.

Note:
If the number of dialing attempts is greater than one, the BCU
will wait five minutes before each attempt to dial the number
again.

Configuring a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Configuration tab (see
Figure 176).

Figure 176. BCU Modem Editor Configuration Screen

2. From the BMTW BCU Comm Port Maximum Speed list, select the
baud rate that best matches the speed of the modem you have
installed in the BCU.
The comm port in the BMTX and BMTW BCU has an adjustable
speed setting. This is because modems are gaining in speed and phone
lines are clearer, so the speeds at which a workstation or BCU modem
can connect is increasing as well. To maximize the rate that data can
be transferred between the BCU modem and the BCU, set the speed
of the comm port to its maximum value.

Note:
For CE certification, special initialization strings must be used
based on the international location. See online help for specific
configuration information.
The Configuration Strings fields display default modem com-
mand strings. However, you can edit the fields to accommodate
specific modem requirements.

172 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Modem

Setting Up the Phone Books

Use the Phone Book screen to enter and store phone numbers. The work-
station needs phone numbers in the workstation modem editor for remote
sites. The BCU needs phone numbers in the BCU modem editor for rout-
ing alarms to remote workstations and pagers.
The Phone Book screen allows you to:
• Edit existing phone numbers
• Add new phone numbers
• Remove phone numbers

Editing Existing Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the phone book tab to display the
Phone Book screen. Figure 177 shows the BCU Modem editor’s Phone
Book screen.

Figure 177. BCU Modem Editor Phone Book Screen

2. In the Phone Number field, make changes as necessary to the phone

number.
3. Make sure the Use Dialing Prefix and Use Calling Card # check boxes
are set as desired.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 173
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

4. In the Dialing Prefix field, enter a dialing prefix to be used with all
phone numbers defined in the phone book (if applicable).

Note:
When dialing out on the modem, the total combined character
lengths of the dialing string cannot exceed the manufacturer’s
recommended maximum length. The dialing string for worksta-
tions is comprised of the dialing command (ATDT), the dialing
prefix, phone number, and calling card number. The dialing
string for BCUs is the same as the workstations except that the
BCU might also have a numeric message for digital (numeric)
pagers. The sequence in which the dial string is sent in the
order listed above.

5. In the Calling Card field, enter a long distance calling card number
that can be used with the defined phone number.

Note:
Depending on the calling card, a short pause or second dial tone
may be required before dialing the calling card number. Use
commas to define a pause (for example: ,,,821-163-2288-6576)
Use a W to make the modem wait for a second dial tone (for
example: W 825-163-2288-6576).

Adding Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU editor, click the Phone Book tab to display the Phone
Book screen.
2. Click the Add Phone Number button. The Add Phone Number dialog
box displays (see Figure 178).

Figure 178. BCU Modem Add Phone Number Dialog Box

3. For BCU modems:

• In the Type field, select the object type the BCU needs to call.
• In the Name field, select the name of the object.
• In the Phone Number field, enter the phone number you want the
BCU modem to dial when attempting to connect with the selected
object type (workstation or pager).

174 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Modem

4. For Workstation modems, in the Phone Number field, enter the phone
number you want the modem to dial.
5. If you defined a dialing prefix on the Phone Book screen, click the Use
Dialing Prefix check box to have Tracer Summit send that dialing
prefix.
6. If you defined a calling card on the Phone Book screen, click the Use
Calling Card # check box to have Tracer Summit send that calling
card number.
7. Click OK.

Removing Phone Numbers

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Phone Book tab to display the
Phone Book screen.
2. In the Phone Book field, click the left-most column of the number that
you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove Phone Number button.

Setting Security Access for a BCU Modem

1. From the BCU Modem editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 179).

Figure 179. BCU Modem Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 180 on page 176).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 175
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 180. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

Setting Up Pagers
Tracer Summit software supports communication between a BCU and a
pager. The BCU (equipped with a modem) sends messages to the pager
using a paging service. Tracer Summit uses paging to notify you of alarms
in the system.

Note:
See Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”, for
details on how to assign a pager as an event receiver

Accessing the Pager Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Pager. The
Select Pager dialog box displays (see Figure 181 on page 177).

176 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Pagers

Figure 181. Select Pager Dialog Box

2. Select a pager and click OK. The Pager editor Setup screen displays
(see Figure 182).

Figure 182. Pager Editor Setup Screen

Creating a New Pager Object

1. From the Setup menu, select Communications, then select Pager. The
Select Pager dialog box displays (see Figure 183 on page 178).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 177
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 183. Select Pager Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Pager Name dialog box displays (see Figure 184).

Figure 184. New Pager Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Pager Name field. Use a maximum of 32 charac-

ters. You must enter a name before you can save the new pager object.
(You can modify the name from the Setup screen of the Pager editor.)
4. Click OK. The Pager editor displays (see Figure 185).

Figure 185. Pager Editor

5. Set up the new pager (see “Setting Up a Pager” on page 179).

178 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Pagers

Setting Up a Pager
1. From the Pager editor, display the Setup screen (see Figure 185 on
page 178).
2. In the Pager Protocol field, select the type of pager format the BCU
will use to dial out alarms (either Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP” or Digital
‘Numeric Only’).

Note:
If you select Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP, the paging service must sup-
port the TAP communications protocol.

3. Make a selection:
• If the Alpha-Numeric ‘TAP’ button is selected, enter the telephone
number of the pager in the Pager ID (PIN) field.
• If the Digital ‘Numeric Only’ button is selected, enter a numeric
code in the Message field. The code should be meaningful to the
receiver.

Setting Security Access for a Pager

1. From the Pager editor, click the Classes tab to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 186).

Figure 186. Pager Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 187 on page 180).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 179
Setting Up Printers, Modems, and Pagers

Figure 187. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

180 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 15

Creating Inputs/Outputs

Input objects are used to generate alarms. Output objects are used to con-
trol devices and maintain calculated values for CPL routines. There are
four types of input/output (I/O) objects:
• Analog input
• Binary input
• Analog output
• Binary output
The Tracer Summit system can simultaneously monitor hundreds of ana-
log and binary inputs and outputs from every part of a facility.

Note:
Properties of objects can be viewed and controlled directly from
a graphic or other application without the use of an I/O object.
I/O objects are used for:
• Alarming
• Tracking changes in the Event Log
• Sharing data with other BACnet devices.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 181
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Creating an Analog Input

An analog input is a value such as a room temperature or an airflow pres-
sure generated by a sensor or device on the Tracer Summit system.

Naming an Input and Defining the Referencer

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Analog Input. The Select Analog Input dialog box displays (see
Figure 188).

Figure 188. Select Analog Input Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Analog Input Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 189).

Figure 189. New Analog Input Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the input. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK. The Analog Input editor displays (see Figure 190 on page
183).

182 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating an Analog Input

Figure 190. Analog Input Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 191).

Figure 191. Analog Input Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the input. For detailed information on

referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols.”
8. Enter values for these Scaling fields:
• Multiplier
• Offset
9. Select a unit designator from the Units list.
10. Continue using the editor to set up alarming (see the section “Setting
Up Alarming” below) and to route alarms and to set security classes
(see the section “Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an
Alarm Message” on page 185).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 183
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Setting Up Alarming
You can set up four types of alarm scenarios for an analog input:
• Off Alarm Limits. The analog input causes an alarm based on the Off
Alarm Limits you enter. This is the default setting.
• On Alarm Limits. The analog input causes an alarm based on the On
Alarm Limits you enter.
• Referencer control of On or Off Alarm Limits. A referencer controls
the use of on or off limits.
• Disabled for no alarming.
The present value of an analog input is either inside or outside a range of
normal values that you define. If the present value is outside the range of
normal values, the analog input is either in a warning or alarm state. To
direct the system to ignore a warning or alarm state, disable the alarm.
The alarming limit setup can be based on a binary property status. For
example, you may want to allow a static pressure sensor input to alarm
only when the associated fan is running. In this case, you would set up
the fan status as the referencer for on/off alarm limits and set limits for
on and off conditions appropriately.
To prevent nuisance alarms on start up of equipment, use the On Delay
for Referencer field to set up a delay time before issuing an alarm on a
change in status from off to on.
To set up an alarm:
1. Click the Alarming tab from the Analog Input editor to display the
Alarming screen (see Figure 192).

Figure 192. Analog Input Editor Alarming Screen

2. Click Enable Alarming to make the rest of the fields on the screen
available for editing.

184 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating an Analog Input

3. Select On or Off from the On or Off Alarm Limits list, or select a prop-
erty reference (for detailed information on referencing a property, see
Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Controls”).
4. If you selected On or Off Alarm Limits:
On Alarm Limits: Enter High Alarm, Low Alarm, High Warning,
Low Warning values in the On Alarm Limits Setup fields.
Off Alarm Limits: Enter High Alarm and Low Alarm values in the
Off Alarm Limits Setup fields.
5. If you referenced a property, enter values in these fields:
• High Alarm and Low Alarm (off limits)
• High Alarm and Low Alarm, High Warning and Low Warning (on
limits)
• On Delay for Referencer
6. Enter a Return to Normal Deadband value.
7. Enter a Minimum Time in Alarm Before Notification value.
8. Select a CPL Program to run from the program list (optional).

Note:
A CPL routine is called by an entry into alarm and a return out
of alarm.

Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an Alarm

Message
To select where alarms and warnings are routed, set the entry/exit classes
using the Classes screen. You can also select an expanded message to dis-
play when an input enters an alarm state. (For information on expanded
messages, see Chapter 27, “Using the Graphics Editor.”)
To route an alarm or warning and select an alarm message:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Analog Input editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 193 on page 186).
The fields available on the classes screen depend upon your selection
in the On or Off Alarm Limits field on the Alarming screen. If you use
a referencer to determine the input state, both the Off Alarm Limits
and the On Alarm Limits fields are available.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 185
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Figure 193. Analog Input Editor Classes Screen

2. Select an entry routing class for each type of alarm or warning.

3. Select an expanded message for each type of alarm or warning
(optional). (See Chapter 27, “Using the Graphics Editor”, for details
on creating expanded messages.)
4. Select an exit routing class for each type of alarm or warning.
5. Click the Security Classes button if you want to limit access to this
object using security classes. (See “Setting Security Classes” on
page 204.)

186 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Binary Input

Creating a Binary Input

Binary inputs are two-state inputs, such as on/off or alarm/normal. The
inputs are generated by momentary switches or standard (maintained)
switching devices.

Naming an Input and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Binary Input. The Select Binary Input dialog box displays (see
Figure 194).

Figure 194. Select Binary Input Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Binary Input Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 195).

Figure 195. New Binary Input Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the input. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK to display the Binary Input editor (see Figure 196 on page
188).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 187
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Figure 196. Binary Input Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 197).

Figure 197. Binary Input Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the input. For detailed information on

referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Con-
trols”.
8. Enter text in the On State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
9. Enter text in the Off State Label field (close contact = On). Use up to
eight characters.
10. Click on Normal or Reversed to select the polarity for the input (close
contact = Off).
11. Continue using the editor to set up alarming (see the section “Setting
Up Alarming” below), to route alarms and warnings, and to set secu-

188 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Binary Input

rity classes, if desired (see the section “Routing an Alarm or Warning

and Selecting an Alarm Message” on page 185).

Setting Up Alarming
You can set up three types of alarm scenarios for a binary input:
• Alarming always enabled
• Enable/disable via referencer
• Feedback referencing
Binary inputs have two states. They can either be active (on) or inactive
(off). You define which of these states is the alarm state. You can also
choose to disable the alarm state. If you only want to process alarms
under certain conditions, select a binary referencer to determine whether
alarms are enabled or disabled.
If you want alarm processing to occur and the normal state of the binary
input can change dynamically (sometimes active is normal, sometimes
inactive is normal), specify a feedback reference to determine if the
binary input is in alarm. A feedback reference is a binary property in the
system that mirrors the state of the referenced property of the binary
input. If the present value of the binary input and the current value of the
feedback reference do not match, the binary input is in alarm.
For example, choose the binary output command for fan start/stop as a
feedback referencer for the fan status. If the two states do not match, an
alarm is generated.
To set up an alarm:
1. Click the Alarming tab from the Binary Input editor to display the
Alarming screen (see Figure 198 on page 190).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 189
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Figure 198. Binary Input Editor Alarming Screen

2. Click Enable Alarming to make the rest of the fields on the screen
available for editing.
3. Select Alarming Always Enabled, Enable/Disable Follows Referencer,
or Feedback Referencing.
• If you selected Alarming Always Enabled, select On or Off in the
Input Alarm State.
• If you selected Enable/Disable Follows Referencer or Feedback
Referencing, select a property reference. For detailed information
on referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit
Controls”.
• If you selected Enable/Disable Follows Referencer, enter the num-
ber of minutes to delay in the Delay for Enable/Disable Refer-
encer field.
4. Enter a Minimum Time in Alarm Before Notification value.
5. Select a CPL Program to run from the program list (optional).

Note:
A CPL routine runs whenever the state changes. The routing
must determine the state in order to provide the necessary con-
trol.

190 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Binary Input

Routing an Alarm or Warning and Selecting an Alarm

Message
To select where alarms and warnings are routed, set the entry/exit rout-
ing classes using the Classes screen in the Binary Input editor. You can
also select an expanded message to display when an input enters an
alarm state.
To route an alarm or warning:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Binary Input editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 199).

Figure 199. Binary Input Editor Classes Screen

2. Select a routing class in the Entry Class field.

3. Select an expanded message in the Entry Message field (optional).
(See Chapter 27, “Using the Graphics Editor”, for details on creating
expanded messages.)
4. Select a routing class in the Exit Class field.
5. Click the Security Classes button if you want to limit access to this
object using security classes. (See “Setting Security Classes” on
page 204.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 191
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Creating an Analog Output

Analog outputs control devices on the Tracer Summit system, such as a
damper actuator or a water valve. The most common use of analog out-
puts is to provide setpoints for control of end devices. For example you can
send the same setpoint to all air handling units (AHUs) using a global
reference of the analog output object value.
Analog output values are generated either by application programs or are
entered manually.

Naming the Output and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Analog Output. The Select Analog Output dialog box displays
(see Figure 200).

Figure 200. Select Analog Output Dialog Box

3. Click New. The New Analog Output Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 201).

Figure 201. New Analog Output Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the output. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.

192 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating an Analog Output

5. Click OK to display the Analog Output editor (see Figure 202).

Figure 202. Analog Output Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 203).

Figure 203. Analog Output Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the output (using a referencer is

optional). For detailed information on referencing a property, see
Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Controls.”
8. Enter values for these Scaling fields:
• Multiplier
• Offset
9. Enter values for these Output Range fields (the Minimum and Maxi-
mum values are interactive):
• Minimum
• Maximum
10. Select a unit designator from the Units list.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 193
Creating Inputs/Outputs

11. Click Save. If you use a referencer, the analog output is automatically
saved to the BCU where the referencer resides. If not, the Save dialog
box displays. Click the name of a BCU to save the output to.
After saving the analog output, you can save global references (see
“Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs” on
page 198).
12. Continue using the editor to enter overrides, to enter a control class,
or to set security classes, if desired (see the section “Entering a Con-
trol Class” on page 194).

Entering a Control Class

To specify where change of state control notification is routed, set the con-
trol class in the Classes screen of the Analog Output editor.
To enter a new control class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Analog Output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 204).

Figure 204. Analog Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Select a routing class in the Control Class field.

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button. (See “Setting Security Classes” on page 204.)

194 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Binary Output

Creating a Binary Output

Tracer Summit uses binary outputs to turn devices on and off or to send a
calculated binary output. Typically, a binary output is used as an inter-
lock on enable/disable. Follow the steps in this section to control UCM
outputs or to maintain calculated output values within the system.

Naming the Output and Defining the Reference

1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select Binary Output. The Select Binary Output dialog box displays
(see Figure 205).

Figure 205. Select Binary Output Dialog Box

3. Click New to display the New Binary Output Name dialog box (see
Figure 206).

Figure 206. New Binary Output Name Dialog Box

4. Enter a name for the output. Make the name as informative as possi-
ble. Use a maximum of 32 characters.
5. Click OK to display the Binary Output editor (see Figure 207 on page
196).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 195
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Figure 207. Binary Output Editor

6. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 208).

Figure 208. Binary Output Editor Setup Screen

7. Select a property reference for the output (optional). For detailed

information on referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Refer-
encer Edit Controls”.
8. Enter text in the On State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
9. Enter text in the Off State Label field. Use up to eight characters.
10. Select On or Off in the Default Value field.
11. Click Normal or Reversed to select the polarity for the output.
12. Enter number of minutes in these On/Off Time fields to avoid exces-
sive cycling of equipment:

196 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Binary Output

• Minimum On Time
• Minimum Off Time
13. Click Save. If you used a referencer, the binary output is automati-
cally saved to the BCU where the referencer resides. If not, the Save
dialog box displays. Click on the name of a BCU to save the output to.
After saving the binary output, you can save global references (see
“Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs” on
page 198).
14. Continue using the editor to enter overrides, to enter a control class,
or to set security classes, if desired (see the section “Entering a Con-
trol Class” on page 197).

Entering a Control Class

To specify where change of state control notification is routed, set the con-
trol class in the Classes screen of the Binary Output editor.
To enter a new control class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the Binary Output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 209).

Figure 209. Binary Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Select a routing class in the Control Class field.

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button. (See “Setting Security Classes” on page 204.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 197
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Setting Up Global References for

Analog or Binary Outputs
Use global references to assign an analog or binary output to multiple
objects on the system at one time. For example, you can send the same
occupied setpoint to all air handlers in the system or enable/disable the
economizer for the units.
To set up global references:
1. Click the Setup tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor to dis-
play the Setup screen (see Figure 210).

Figure 210. Analog Output Editor Setup Screen

Note:
The Global Referencers button is not available until the analog
or binary output has been saved (click the Save button).

2. Click Global References to display the Global Referencers dialog box

(see Figure 211 on page 199).

198 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Global References for Analog or Binary Outputs

Figure 211. Global Referencers Dialog Box

3. In the Object Type field, select the type of object. Select only one
object type.
4. In the Property field, select the property you want this object to con-
trol.
5. In the Available Names field, select the name(s) of specific object(s).
6. Click Save Selections. The Global References dialog box closes and
the Setup screen displays.
Note:
Once a global reference has been set up it can not be deleted from this edi-
tor. In order to delete the reference you must go the editor for each object
that has been referenced to this point.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 199
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Modifying an Input/Output
You can modify any parameter of an input or output at any time.
To modify an input/output:
1. From the Setup menu, select Inputs/Outputs. The list of inputs and
outputs displays.
2. Select the type of input or output you wish to modify. The Select Input
dialog box (specific to the item you chose) displays.
3. Click the name of the input or output you want to modify.
4. Click OK. The editor for the selected input or output displays.
5. Click the appropriate tab at the top of the editor to display the screen
that you want to modify.

Note:
Be careful when changing the name of an input or output. A
name change will affect any CPL routine that uses the input or
output. (See Chapter 24, “Custom Programming Language”.)

200 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

You can override the present value of an analog or binary output from the
Overrides screen. You can:
• Release control at the specific priority
• Change the present value at a specific priority

Note:
Priority control ranges from 1 (highest) to 16 (lowest). The com-
mand with the highest priority controls the object. To take con-
trol off, you must select the Release Control button at the
Override dialog box. Then the next highest priority commands
the object.

See the following sections for details.

Releasing Control to Another Object

1. Click the Overrides tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor to
display the Overrides screen (see Figure 212).

Figure 212. Binary Output Editor Overrides Screen

2. Click Override to display the Override dialog box (see Figure 213 on
page 202).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 201
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Figure 213. Override Dialog Box

3. Click Release Control.

4. Select the priority level at which you wish to release control in the At
Priority field. (See Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU
Sites.”)
5. Click the Apply button to apply the override and view the results, or
click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

202 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Overriding an Analog or Binary Output

Changing the Present Value

1. Click the Overrides tab from the Analog or Binary Output editor to
display the Overrides screen.
2. Click Override to display the Override dialog box (see Figure 214).

Figure 214. Override Dialog Box

3. Click Change Value To.

4. For an analog output, enter a new value in the Change Value To field.
For a binary output, select a new value from the list provided.
5. Select the priority level to which you want to give control in the At
Priority field.
6. Click OK to apply the override and view the results, or click OK to
apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Note:
The Priority Array list shows all the applications and priorities
that are currently commanding the object. The Present Value
field shows what the object is controlled to, when it was con-
trolled last, and what application or user is controlling it.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 203
Creating Inputs/Outputs

Setting Security Classes

Tracer Summit has 20 security classes you can set up to segment a site,
based on whatever parameters you want. For example, a class might
define a building, a floor, a chiller plant, inside, or outside. The class des-
ignations are used to group objects for security control. (See Chapter 10,
“Setting Up Security”). The Security Classes button on the Classes screen
in the input/output editors allows you to control which classes have access
to the input or output you are creating or modifying.
To set security classes:
1. Click the Classes tab from the input or output editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 215).

Figure 215. Binary Output Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog

box (see Figure 216).

Figure 216. Security Classes Dialog Box

204 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting an Input/Output

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to allow or deny access. A
check in the field allows access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

Deleting an Input/Output
To delete an input or output, use the Delete Object utility in the Tools
menu (see Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 205
Creating Inputs/Outputs

206 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 16

Message Forwarding and

Call Centers

Message forwarding enables a Tracer Summit PC workstation to forward

alarms at scheduled times to a group of e-mail addresses or to individu-
als. Recipients who are on-call can receive the e-mails on their PCs or on
e-mail enabled pagers and cell phones.
The basic features of message forwarding are set up in System Options
(see “Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log
Settings” on page 483). .

Note:
Once set up, message forwarding and call centers work in the
background. Message forwarding will send out alarm messages
even when you are not logged onto a site, but, Tracer Summit
must be running, and your PC must be logged in to your com-
pany’s mail server.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 207
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

What is a Call Center

A call center is a group of e-mail recipients. To better visualize how a call
center works, think of a call center as a control room with Tracer Summit
PC workstations, an operator, and one or more BAS recipients who are
on- or off-site.
When working with call centers and message forwarding, remember the
following:
• Message forwarding works with valid e-mail programs that support
Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) profiles. For
example, a valid e-mail program is Microsoft Outlook but not
Microsoft Outlook Express.
• The Tracer Summit PC workstation program communicates with a
mail server. This server must be a LAN server.

Background Considerations
Important issues you should remember when setting up message for-
warding and call centers for Tracer Summit Critical Control System
(CCS) sites are the set up processes for message forwarding and call cen-
ters, as well as preliminary setup issues.

Previewing the Message Forwarding Setup Process

There are two main stages to setting up the forwarding of alarms by
means of e-mail. Figure 217 on page 210 provides an overview of the mes-
sage-forwarding setup process.
• Set up e-mail services—This is the responsibility of your informa-
tion services (IS) department. The IS person sets up a mailbox on a
mail server used by the Tracer Summit CCS software. The mailbox
resides on the server.
Every valid user of the Tracer Summit CCS message forwarding
application must have access to this mailbox. Also, the IS person
must set up client-side access to this mailbox e-mail account profile in
the Tracer Summit PC workstation.
A user profile is a group of settings that define how a mailbox is set
up for a particular user. For example, a profile may include access to a
mailbox on Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the Outlook
Address Book appear in the Address Book dialog box. A profile can
contain any number of information services.
Generally, you only need one user profile. If you sometimes need to
work with a different set of information services, it may be helpful to
create an additional profile to use those services. If more than one
person uses the same computer, each person should have a separate
profile to keep personal items secure. Tracer Summit CCS uses the
profile to send alarms to the mail server.

208 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Background Considerations

• Set up e-mail message forwarding—This includes setting up the

call center and recipient in the Tracer Summit CCS software. While
the facility is unattended, you can send pager alarms that originate
from sites as e-mails to on-call recipients.
• The call center forwarding schedule displays the times when the
call center forwards alarms to various recipients by means of
their e-mail addresses. A typical schedule for alarm forwarding is
between 5 p.m. to 8 a.m., Monday to Friday, and all day on week-
ends and holidays.
• The recipient on-call schedule is the time when an on-call recipi-
ent receives the e-mails. In a typical work situation, recipients
are on-call on a rotating basis. When setting up a call center,
make sure that the unattended hours of the facilities are covered.
• In Figure 217 on page 210, the Select Sites/Groups and Event
Classes/Priorities boxes represent steps in which you specify
which sites or groups and what alarms need to be forwarded.
Besides sites and groups, you can schedule alarms for BCU event
classes.

IMPORTANT
Your workstation must be set up as an event receiver in BCU sites, and
other requirements for alarms must be satisfied, as described in Chap-
ter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 209
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Figure 217. Setting Up Message Forwarding Flowchart

Set Up Set up mailbox on server

E-mail Set up e-mail account profile on client
Services (Tracer Summit workstation)

Set Up Set up call center’s recipient schedule

Schedules Set up recipient on-call schedule

Select Sites/
Groups

Select Alarm
Priorities

Setup
Complete

Preliminary Issues to Consider before Creating a Call

Center
Before creating message-forwarding call centers, review the following
information:
• Each call center has its own forwarding schedule. Therefore, you
must create multiple call centers when the same recipient needs to
receive alarms from specific event classes or priorities on different
schedules.
• When you route e-mails to a pager service, the length of the message
might be truncated to meet the specifications of the pager. The Tracer
Summit CCS software sends the message in such a way that the most
important information is carried in the first part of the message. How
the message is truncated depends on the pager company and its poli-
cies.
For example, the following message: “TRANEBAS: 12/31/01
11:59AM, 1234567890, Ack Reqd, UCM Diagnostic, Ipak-1”

210 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Background Considerations

might be truncated to: “TRANEBAS: 12/31/01 11:59AM,

1234567890.”
• Message forwarding information is stored only in the workstation
where you create it. This information never goes to the BCU or to
other workstations on the site. Therefore, configure each workstation
with its own alarm forwarding schedules.
• Some mail servers require that you be logged in to the client worksta-
tion operating system to communicate with the server. If your mail
server requires this, then you must meet this requirement before and
after setting up the message forwarding application.
To access message forwarding and call center features, your security set-
tings must include the following:
• You have security access to the System Options editor to select an e-
mail profile.
• In client and server side e-mail services you have an e-mail profile set
up. This profile is related to the address that appears in the From
field in your e-mails.
• You have security access to the Message Forwarding editor (see
“Assigning Access to Applications” on page 133).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 211
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Accessing the Message Forwarding

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays (see Figure 218).

Figure 218. Select Call Center Dialog Box

2. Select the desired call center.

3. Click OK. The Message Forwarding editor displays (see Figure 219).

Figure 219. Message Forwarding Editor Screen Recipient Schedule

Screen

212 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Setting Up Call Centers and Message

Forwarding
To create a call center you:
• Add recipients and schedule when they should receive e-mails on the
Recipient Schedule screen
• Schedule the on-call hours of the facility on the Forward Schedule
screen
• Define the sites and/or groups for which the e-mails should be sent on
the Sites screen
• Define the alarm classes for which you want e-mails sent to recipients
on the Event Classes screen

Registering E-Mail Profiles

When you first access message forwarding, you must register your user
profile. A user profile is a group of settings that define how the mail
server is set up for a particular user. For example, a profile may include
access to a mailbox on Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the
Outlook Address Book appears in the Address Book dialog box.
To register e-mail profiles:
1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Profile
dialog box appears. One or more user profiles display in the Profile
list box.
If the Tracer Summit CCS software does not detect an already exist-
ing user profile, an error dialog box appears. If a profile is loaded but
no profile is registered, the software prompts you to select a profile.
2. Select a profile.
3. Click OK. The Select Call Center dialog box appears.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 213
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Creating a Call Center

When you create a call center you add recipients who will receive alarm
e-mails during on-call hours. On the Recipient Schedule screen you spec-
ify the days and dates when each recipient should receive e-mails from
Tracer Summit.

Note:
To save a call center you must first add recipients and schedule
when they should receive e-mails.

To create a call center:

1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays.
2. Click New.
3. Type the call center name in the Select Call Center dialog box.
4. Click OK. The Message Forwarding editor launches. The name of the
call center displays at the top of the screen.
5. To add recipient(s), click the Recipient Schedule tab. The Recipient
Schedule screen appears (see Figure 220).
6. Click Add. The address book of the e-mail program, such as an Out-
look Address Book, displays.
7. Select one or more e-mail addresses to which to send alarms.
8. Click OK. The names of the recipients display in the list on the Recip-
ient Schedule screen (see Figure 220).

Figure 220. Recipient Schedule Screen

214 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Scheduling When Recipients Receive E-mails

Next, schedule when recipients receive e-mails. Each recipient can have a
different schedule when they are on-call.
To schedule when recipients receive e-mails:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select the name of a recipient in the list.
3. Click the Schedule button. The Recipient Schedule dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 221).
4. Select the schedule start date, how often the e-mail should be sent
(once or daily), and how often the schedule should occur (weekly, daily
or monthly).
For example, in Figure 221 the recipient schedule is set up to: specify
May 27, 2003 as the Start Date; indicate the day of the week the e-
mail is sent; repeat every two weeks.

Figure 221. Recipient Schedule

5. Click OK to save the schedule. The recipient’s name, e-mail address,

start date, and schedule display in the recipients Schedule screen.
6. Click Save to store the recipients and their e-mail schedules to the
database.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 215
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Testing E-mail Forwarding

Use this procedure to verify that Tracer Summit CCS can send an e-mail
to the recipients selected in the list of the current call center.
To send the e-mail, the Tracer Summit CCS software:
• Uses the profile that is registered with Tracer Summit CCS
• Uses the mailbox that is set up on the mail server. IT sets up the pro-
file to access this mailbox
To test e-mail forwarding:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select the recipient(s) that you want to receive the test e-mail.
3. Click the Test Email button. The Tracer Summit software sends the
test e-mail.
The e-mail contains the following message: “This is a test of the Test
Email button.”
4. Verify with the recipients that they received an e-mail message from
Tracer Summit.

Checking the Schedule of Existing Recipients

Use this procedure to check the e-mail forwarding schedules of recipients.
You can also use it to make sure that a date for receiving e-mails is cov-
ered by one or more recipients.
To check the schedule for existing recipients:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Recipient Schedule
tab.
2. Select one or more recipients in the grid whose message forwarding
schedules you want to check.
3. Click the Check Schedule arrow next to the Check Schedule button
and select the date you want from the calendar (see Figure 222).

Figure 222. Check Schedule Calendar

216 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

4. Click the Check Schedule button. A dialog box displays indicating if

the selected recipient receives e-mail on the date you specified in step
3.
5. Click OK.

Creating a Message Forwarding Schedule

You can regard the Forward Schedule as representing the times when a
facility is open and not open. When the facility is not open, you want to
forward alarm messages to on-call recipients.
On the Forward Schedule screen, specify the operating hours of the call
center. Define the start time when e-mails should be sent and the end
time.
For example, a normal work day is from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. These are the
times when people are on-site. After-hours is from 5 p.m. to 8 a.m. During
after-hours, the individuals designated to receive e-mails on the Recipient
Schedule screen will receive any alarm messages generated.
To schedule when e-mails are sent:
1. From the Message Forwarding Editor, click the Forward Schedule tab.
2. In the schedule, click the cell that corresponds to the time and day
you want the e-mail forwarding schedule to start. Select Set Start
from the pop-up menu.
3. Click in the cell when you want the schedule to end and select Set
End (see Figure 223 on page 218).
The cell set as Set Start is bright green and is labeled Start. The cell
set as Set End is red and is labeled End. The cells in between these
two cells are blue.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 217
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Figure 223. Forward Schedule Screen

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to complete the schedule for any remaining

weekdays and weekends.
5. Click Save.

Setting a Holiday Schedule

Setting up a holiday schedule is a two-step process. First, add holiday
dates to the Selected Dates list box. Then, go into each call center and
check the Send e-mail checkbox (see Figure 224 on page 219).
To add holidays:
1. Click the Edit button to display the Select Dates dialog box.
2. Select the holiday date from the calendar.
3. Click the Add Date button to add the date to Selected Dates list.
4. Click Save to save the holiday date to the list.
5. Click Okay to return to the editor.

Note:
It doesn’t matter which call center you are in when you add
dates to the list, the date will become a holiday for all call cen-
ters. However, each call center can decide whether to observe
the holiday dates or not, depending on whether the Send e-mail
checkbox is checked or unchecked.

218 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Call Centers and Message Forwarding

Figure 224. Holiday Calendar

Send e-mail checkbox

To remove holidays
1. Click the Edit button to display the Select Dates dialog box.
2. From the Selected Dates list, select the holiday you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove Date button to delete the date.
4. Click Save to save your changes.
5. Click Okay to return to the editor.

Note:
The holiday date is removed from all call centers.

To send e-mail on holidays:

◆ To have e-mail automatically sent on holidays, check the send e-mail
check box (See Figure 224).

Note:
If you check this box, the call center will send e-mail on all holi-
days displayed in the list box. If you leave this box unchecked,
no e-mail will be sent on any of the holidays.

To disable sending e-mail on holidays:

◆ Clear the send e-mail checkbox. The holiday schedule is disabled.

Note:
Disabling the holidays only applies to the currently open call
center. To disable holidays for other call centers, open each one
individually and repeat step 1 above.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 219
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

Forwarding Alarms at All Times

You can have e-mails for alarm events sent at all hours of the day. This
may prove useful when you need to override the call center schedule.
To forward alarms at all times:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Forward Schedule tab.
2. Click the Forward At All Times check box (see Figure 225).

Figure 225. Forward at All Times Check Box

When alarms are forwarded at all times:

• Any previously specified forwarding schedule is overridden and
e-mails are sent 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• The schedule grid is unavailable.
• The Call Center Holiday list box is unavailable.
3. Click Save.

Selecting Alarm Event Classes

Use this procedure to select the alarm event classes for which you want
e-mails sent to recipients.
To select alarm event classes:
1. From the Message Forwarding editor, click the Event Classes tab (see
Figure 226 on page 221).
2. Click the alarm class check boxes for which you want Tracer Summit
to send an e-mail to recipients.

IMPORTANT
The event class names in the Event Classes screen do not update to
match the event class names that you might have entered in site con-
figuration (see “Example of User-Defined Event Classes” on page 89).

3. Click the Tracer Priority alarms.

220 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Modifying Call Centers

Figure 226. Event Classes Screen

Modifying Call Centers

Use the following procedures to modify call centers and their schedules.

Note:
Tracer and Tracker Priority group boxes are not applicable to
Tracer Summit Critical Control System.

Deleting a Call Center

1. From the Setup menu, select Message Forwarding. The Select Call
Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a call center. The Message Forwarding editor displays.
3. From the File menu, select Delete Call Center. The Select Call Center
dialog box displays.
4. Select the call center you want to delete.

Note:
If you try to delete a call center that is currently open, a warn-
ing message displays. It explains that the editor will shut down
if you delete the call center.

5. Click OK. The call center is deleted from the database.

6. Click Save.
7. Click Save.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 221
Message Forwarding and Call Centers

222 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 17

BCU Inputs and Outputs

This chapter describes input and output options available for the model
BMTX and the model BMTW BCUs.

BMTX Binary Inputs

The BMTX BCU has two binary inputs hardwired onto the main board.
You can use these inputs for:
• Timed override inputs
• Failure inputs
• Latching inputs
• Pulse meter inputs.
These properties can be referenced from the Select Properties dialog box
by selecting Type, Name, and Property (see Figure 227).

Figure 227. Select Property dialog box

referenced property

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 223
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Each of the two binary inputs has four properties with different functions:
• Binary Input [01] —Timed override (TOV). You can use this property
as a TOV trigger for the TOV Application or a TOV CPL routine. This
property is on if the Binary Input has been closed at any time in the
last two minutes.
• Binary Input [02]—Fail. You can use this property to monitor status
for alarms. This property is on if the Binary Input has not been closed
at any time the last two minutes.
• Binary Input [03]—Latch. This property will be on if the Binary Input
has been closed any time in the last two minutes. You can monitor
momentary inputs with this property.
• Binary Input [04]—Status. This property shows the current state of
the Binary input point. The input must remain continuously on or off
for at least two seconds before the property will change.

Pulse Meter Input

You can use the BMTX binary input for a pulse meter input. The inputs
have analog properties even though they are binary inputs. These analog
properties, typically used in calculation objects for Energy Management,
can be referenced by choosing Type, Name, and Property (see Figure 228).

Figure 228. Referencing Analog Properties

referenced property

Each input has four analog properties with different functions:

• Analog Input [01]—Rate. This is the rate of pulses per minute. The
BCU calculates the rate by looking at the last ten pulses and averag-
ing the time between pulses for all the pulses that occurred within
the last minute. Pulses older than one minute are ignored.

224 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 BMTW I/O Module

• Analog Input [02]—Pulse count since last read. Note that each time
you read this property from the Tracer Summit Workstation the BCU
resets it to zero.
• Analog Input [03]—Pulse Total. This is the number of pulses since the
last power reset on the BMTX. This property has a maximum value of
999,999,999, if it exceeds this number it reverts to 0.
• Analog Iput [04]—Not Used. This property has a value of 0.

BMTW I/O Module

The BMTW BCU uses the input/output (I/O) module which is an optional
board on the BCU that facilitates connection of common points by adding
five universal inputs (UIPs) and one binary output (BOP) to the BMTW
BCU.
The I/O module’s inputs are referenced by analog input (AIP) and binary
input (BIP) objects for alarm processing and limit checking. The one
binary output can be used to control equipment or provide status infor-
mation, such as an alarm condition.
The I/O module is supported by a BCU I/O module object that you create
in Tracer Summit. Each I/O module object has an editor that allows you
to configure the UIP type to match the hardware jumper selection. Both
hardware jumper selection and software configuration set the UIP type.
This section covers the following tasks:
• Creating a BCU I/O module object
• Configuring UIPs
• Setting up alarm and security classes
• Creating analog and binary input/output objects
These tasks must be performed in order to create and set up the neces-
sary objects that will provide units, calculation, and alarming to the
desired input.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 225
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Creating the BCU I/O Module Object

The following steps show you how to create a BCU I/O module object from
the Setup menu’s Site Configuration option. You can create a BCU I/O
module object while configuring a site, or you can add it to a specified
BCU.

Note:
The BCU I/O module buttons are only selectable for standard
and high capacity BCUs.

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration (see Chapter 8, “Con-
figuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”).
2. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 229):

Figure 229. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

• If the appropriate BCU is listed, select it. Then click the Edit
Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 230 on page 227).
• If the appropriate BCU is not listed, click the Create Device but-
ton. The Create New Device dialog box displays (see “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites” on page 41).

226 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating the BCU I/O Module Object

Figure 230. Edit Device Dialog Box

3. Click the BCU I/O module Add button to display the Create New BCU
I/O module dialog box (see Figure 231).

Figure 231. Create New BCU I/O Module Dialog Box

4. In the Name field, enter a name for the BCU I/O module. Use a maxi-
mum of 32 characters.
You must enter a name before you can save the new BCU I/O module
object. You can modify the name at any time from the Edit BCU I/O
module dialog box. You can access the dialog box from the BCU I/O
module Edit button. Click OK to return to the main screen.
5. To define security access, click the Security Classes button to display
the Security Classes dialog box (see “Setting Security Access for the
BCU I/O Module” on page 232).
6. Click OK to return to the dialog box.
7. Click OK to the Devices screen, then click Save.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 227
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Setting Up Universal Inputs

After creating the BCU I/O module object in Site Configuration, set up
the universal inputs (UIPs). The UIPs are set up in two places: on the
BCU I/O module board on the BCU and in the Tracer Summit software.
Both hardware jumper selection and software configuration selection set
the UIP function type.

Accessing the BCU I/O Module Editor

1. From the Setup menu select Unit Controllers, then select BCU I/O
Module. The BCU I/O module editor displays (see Figure 232).

Figure 232. BCU I/O Module Editor

228 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Universal Inputs

Setting Up the BCU I/O Module UIPs

Note:
After setup is complete, it is necessary to create and set up sys-
tem objects to reference the inputs, see “Setting Up System
Objects” on page 230.

1. From the BCU I/O Module editor, click the Setup tab to display the
Setup tab screen (see Figure 233).

Figure 233. BCU I/O Module Editor Setup Screen

2. Configure the input Type fields (1-5) to match the BCU I/O module
board UIP jumper settings.
If the device is a pulse meter, enter the correction factor in the Pulse
Multiplier field (see “Calculating the Pulse Multiplier” on page 230).
This field is unavailable for other input types.
If the device is an analog type (voltage, current, or thermistor), the
Disable Analog Failure check box is available:
• Check this box to disable the alarm within 2% of the range end
points.
• Leave this box unchecked to alarm on endpoint conditions.

Note:
Verify input type settings with the BCU I/O module UIP jump-
ers.

3. See “Setting Up System Objects” on page 230 for creating and setting
up system objects to reference the inputs.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 229
BCU Inputs and Outputs

Calculating the Pulse Multiplier

The pulse multiplier value is the desired consumption amount per contact
closure. This value is a constant scaling factor that is applied to both the
accumulator count and rate calculation. The multiplier is used only in
constant consumption applications, such as, water and electricity. Under
constant pressure and temperature conditions, a constant pulse multi-
plier value may be used for gas consumption. Refer to the manufacturer’s
equipment specification for the proper value on consumption amount per
pulse. The desired consumption amount is the consumption amount per
pulse multiplied by a conversion factor (desire units/manufacturer’s
equipment units).

Setting Up System Objects

After setting up the UIPs in the BCU I/O Module editor, create analog
input (AIP) and binary input (BIP) objects that reference the BCU I/O
module’s input object properties. The AIP and BIP objects read and
manipulate raw data from the BCU I/O module, providing real values
that are used in alarm processing and other applications (for example,
CPL programming, graphics, reports, and calculations).

Note:
The AIP and BIP objects must be saved in the same BCU as the
BCU I/O module object.

Setting Up Analog Inputs

Creating an analog input object is the only way to handle conversions,
alarms, and CPL triggers for analog and pulse accumulator values.
To create an analog input object, see “Creating Inputs/Outputs” on
page 181. Also refer to the steps below.
On the Analog Input editor Setup screen:
1. Select a property reference for the input.
2. Enter the multiplier and offset scaling values (for thermistor type
inputs, use the default value).
3. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Analog Input editor Alarming screen:
◆ Set up alarm limits.

Setting Up Pulse Metered Inputs

Setting up pulse metering inputs involve creating a Meter Totalization
calculation object and alarm limits that reference the BCU I/O module’s
pulse accumulator input.

230 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up System Objects

Creating a Calculation Object

In order to create a calculation object, you must first define the calcula-
tion type. Select Meter Totalization for the calculation type.
To create a new calculation object, see Chapter 20, “Using the Calcula-
tions Editor.” Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Calculation editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Pulse Accumula-
tor, Since Last[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Set the Conversion Factor field to 1.

Alarming on Metered Inputs

Alarming on metered inputs is accomplished by creating an analog input
object. (See Chapter 15, “Creating Inputs/Outputs.”) Also, refer to the
steps below.
On the Analog Input editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Pulse Accum-
rate[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Analog Input Alarming tab:
◆ Set the On Delay For Referencer field to more than one minute.

Setting Up Binary Inputs

Binary input objects are used for polarity, units, and alarming assign-
ment for UIPs. To create a binary input object, see Chapter 15, “Creating
Inputs/Outputs.” Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Binary Input editor Setup screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Binary In[x] or
Momentary Binary In[x], where x is the input number for the UIP.
2. Enter the Polarity.
3. Select the correct unit designator.
On the Binary Input editor Alarming tab:
◆ Set up the alarm limits.

Setting Up a Binary Output

Creating a binary output object (BOP) is the only way to control the BCU
I/O module’s binary output. To create a binary output object, see Chapter
15, “Creating Inputs/Outputs”. Also, refer to the steps below.
On the Binary Output editor screen:
1. Set the Property Reference field to: BCU I/O module/Binary Output.
2. Enter the Polarity.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 231
BCU Inputs and Outputs

3. Select the correct unit designator.

Setting Security Access for the BCU I/O Module

To specify where the BCU I/O module’s alarm messages are routed, set
the Alarm Class in the Classes screen.
To enter a new alarm class:
1. Click the Classes tab from the BCU I/O module editor to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 234).
2. Select an event class in the Alarm Class field.

Figure 234. BCU I/O Module Editor Classes Screen

3. To set security access for this object and define class access, click the
Security Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (See Figure 235).

Figure 235. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

232 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up System Objects

4. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
5. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 233
BCU Inputs and Outputs

234 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 18

Chiller Plant Control

Chiller Plant Control is used to coordinate chillers and provide system

chilled water control. The program performs four main functions:
• It controls leaving water temperature by adding chillers as the build-
ing cooling load increases. It also calculates the chilled water setpoint
for each chiller.
• It recovers from failures by starting the next chiller in the sequence
immediately after a chiller is marked failed.
• It optimizes energy use by subtracting chillers when the cooling load
does not require them to be enabled. It also matches chillers to the
load.
• It equalizes runtime and wear on each chiller by using different rota-
tion schemes. It also provides a more reliable chiller plant by periodi-
cally exercising all of its components.
You can use the Chiller Plant editor or the Chiller Plant Control Status
displays to perform these functions. For information on the Chiller Plant
Control Status displays, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Operations
guide and the Tracer Summit Chiller Plant Control Application Program,
BAS-EB-64.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 235
Chiller Plant Control

Accessing the Chiller Plant Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Click Chiller Plant Control. The Select
Chiller Plant dialog box displays (see Figure 236).

Figure 236. Select Chiller Plant Dialog Box

2. Select a chiller plant.

3. Click OK. The Chiller Plant editor displays (see Figure 237).

Figure 237. Chiller Plant Editor

236 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Chiller Plant

Creating a New Chiller Plant

To create a new chiller plant, you follow these steps:
• Create chiller objects in the Site Configuration editor (for more infor-
mation, refer to Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites”)
• Open and name a new chiller plant (as described in this section)
• Set up the chiller plant system (see “Setting Up the Chiller Plant Sys-
tem” on page 238)
• Modify startup settings (see “Modifying Startup Settings” on
page 239)
• Modify subtract settings (see “Modifying Subtract Settings” on
page 240)
• Add and set up chiller objects (see “Adding Chiller Objects to the
Chiller Plant” on page 241 and “Setting Up Individual Chiller
Objects” on page 243)
• Set up the chiller UCM objects (see “Chiller UCM Setup” on page 244)
• Set up security for the chiller plant (see “Routing Alarms and Events
and Setting Security Access” on page 244)

Note:
The settings described for the Chiller Plant editor screens are
required entries. (For more information, refer to Tracer Summit
online help.) Verify that default entries on all screens of the edi-
tor are correct for the chiller plant.

To create a new chiller plant:

1. From the Setup menu, select Chiller Plant Control. The Select Chiller
Plant dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New Chiller Plant Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 238).

Figure 238. New Chiller Plant Name Dialog Box

3. Enter the name of the Chiller Plant. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new chiller plant. You can modify the name at
any time from the System screen of the Chiller Plant editor.
4. Click OK. The Chiller Plant editor displays.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 237
Chiller Plant Control

Setting Up the Chiller Plant System

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the System tab (see Figure 239).

Figure 239. Chiller Plant Editor System Screen

2. Reference the system Enable binary output object (refer to Chapter

15, “Creating Inputs/Outputs”), or set the Chiller Plant Enable refer-
encer to On for continuous Chiller Plant operation.
3. Use the Supply Temperature referencer edit control to reference the
property for the system chilled water supply temperature.
4. Use the Return Temperature referencer edit control to reference the
property for the system chilled water return temperature.

238 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Modifying Startup Settings

Modifying Startup Settings

The Startup screen of the Chiller Plant editor allows you to enable Ambi-
ent Temperature Lockout.
To modify startup settings:
1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Startup tab (see Figure 240).

Figure 240. Chiller Plant Editor Startup Screen

2. Click Enable to select Ambient Temperature Lockout.

3. Use the Sensor referencer edit control to reference the property for
the outside air temperature.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 239
Chiller Plant Control

Modifying Subtract Settings

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Subtract tab (see Figure 241).
The temperature-based subtract method is the default selection.

Figure 241. Chiller Plant Editor Subtract Screen—Temperature Method

2. Make a selection:
• To use the temperature-based subtract method, verify that the
Design Delta Temperature is correct for the Chiller Plant (the
system default is 10.0ºF).
• To use the flow-based subtract method, click Flow (see
Figure 242). Then use the Bypass Pipe Flow referencer edit con-
trol to reference the property for the Bypass Pipe Flow.

Figure 242. Chiller Plant Editor Subtract Screen—Flow Method

240 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller Plant

Adding Chiller Objects to the Chiller

Plant
1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Chillers tab (see Figure 243).

Figure 243. Chiller Plant Editor Chillers Screen

2. In the Chiller Type list box, select the type of chiller to be added.
3. In the Chiller Name list, select the chiller name to be added.
4. Click Add to add the chiller object to the Chiller Plant Control mem-
ber’s list. The Add Chiller dialog box displays (see Figure 244).

Figure 244. Add Chiller Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 241
Chiller Plant Control

5. In the Index field, select the array index used to display individual
chillers. Use the default index number for the Chiller object.
6. In the Sequence Type field, select the chiller sequence type: Normal,
Base, Peak, or Swing.
Normal chillers rotate in a round-robin fashion (the last on is the first
off). A base chiller is always the first chiller on and the last chiller off.
A peak chiller is always the last chiller to run and the first chiller off.
A swing chiller is the first on and then alternates after that (see Table
5 on page 242 for an example of how a system having chillers of each
type are stepped on and off).

Note:
The PC Workstation validates these settings to eliminate dupli-
cate types for base, peak, or swing. One of each may be defined.
After a base, peak or swing chiller has been chosen, it is
removed from the drop-down list of member choices. There is no
limit to the number of normal chillers allowed.

Table 5. Chiller Sequence Type

Step Chiller 1 Chiller 3 Chiller 4 Chiller 5 Chiller 2

(Base) (Swing) (#1) (#2) (Peak)

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
3 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON ON ON

7. Click OK to save the entry and to return to the Chillers screen.

242 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects

Setting Up Individual Chiller Objects

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Chillers tab (see Figure 245).

Figure 245. Chiller Plant Editor Chillers Screen

2. In the member’s list, click the Index number of the chiller you want to
set up.
3. Click the Chiller Setup button to display the Chiller Setup dialog box
(see Figure 246).
Figure 246. Chiller Setup Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 243
Chiller Plant Control

4. If the temperature-based subtract method was selected on the Sub-

tract screen, highlight Chiller Design Capacity. If the Flow-based sub-
tract method was selected on the Subtract screen, highlight the
Chiller Design Flow.
5. Type a valid value in the Value field.
6. Click OK to save the entry and return to the Chillers screen.

Note:
Be sure all chillers in this Chiller Plant use the same units for
capacity (for example, tons, KWH, etc.), or flow (for example,
gpm, l/s, etc.).

Chiller UCM Setup

After the Chiller Plant Control application is set up, go to the UCM editor
for each of the chillers that were selected to be part of the chiller plant.
(From the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers.) For more information on
UCM editors, refer to Chapter 13, “Using UCM Editors”.
To set up a chiller UCM from the UCM editor:
1. Make sure the chilled water setpoint for each chiller references the
chiller chilled water setpoint property in the Chiller Plant Control
object. By editing the chilled water setpoint appropriately, you ensure
that each chiller is getting its chilled water setpoint from the Chiller
Plant Control object.
2. Make sure the current limit setpoint for each chiller references the
chiller current limit setpoint property in the Chiller Plant Control
object. By editing the current limit setpoint appropriately, you ensure
that each chiller is getting its current limit setpoint from the Chiller
Plant Control object.
3. Make sure the minimum On and Off time of each chiller is less than
the control feed back delay time. Under certain circumstances, mini-
mum On and Off times longer than the control feedback delay time
can cause the chiller to be needlessly marked as failed.

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
At the Chiller Plant editor’s Classes screen, you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for a chiller plant.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Classes tab (see Figure 247 on
page 245).

244 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

Figure 247. Chiller Plant Editor Classes Screen

2. In the Event Class field, select an appropriate class for routing

events.
3. In the Alarm Class field, select an appropriate class for routing
alarms.

Setting Security Access

1. From the Chiller Plant editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 248).

Figure 248. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 245
Chiller Plant Control

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a Chiller Plant

To delete a chiller plant, use the Delete Objects utility from the Tools
menu. For more information, see Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and
Sites”.

246 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 19

Area Control Application

Area control allows you to define the components and parameters of an

area so that the same comfort level can be maintained throughout the
defined space. An area may consist of a single office, a group of offices, a
large open warehouse, a manufacturing space, or any grouping you wish
to define.

Using Area Control

Use area control to perform these functions:
• Coordinate equipment operations, such as heating, cooling, ventila-
tion, and lighting within an area
• Integrate into time of day scheduling to allow for optimal start/stop,
night economizing, and lighting events
• Facilitate night heating and cooling operations
• Give a common look and feel to all parts of a defined area, regardless
of the equipment that serves it
Area control works in combination with the time of day scheduling, VAV
air systems, custom programming language applications, and timed over-
ride to perform the following functions:
• Optimal Start/Stop: Area Control calculates optimal start/stop val-
ues that control the startup and shutdown times of heating and cool-
ing devices so they run only as long as necessary to meet the required
temperature setpoints for the intended occupancy. You set the target
start/stop times in Time of Day Scheduling. Area Control calculates
the actual start/stop times required to meet the set targets.
• Night Heat/Cool: Area Control monitors the temperature of an area
when it is unoccupied and starts or stops heating or cooling to keep
the space within a pre-defined temperature range.
• Night Economizing: Area Control works with Time of Day Schedul-
ing to initiate the Night Economizing operation. Night Economizing
brings cool nighttime air inside the building to pre-cool the area
before occupancy starts. Using cool outside air to help cool a building
can reduce the load on the mechanical cooling equipment. Time of
Day Scheduling provides the window of opportunity in which Area
Control can use the night economizing mode. Area Control then deter-
mines if the outside air is cool enough to provide effective cooling.
• Ventilation Coordination: Area Control coordinates ventilation
with heating and cooling functions during hours of occupancy.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 247
Area Control Application

• Lighting Control: Area Control works with Time of Day Scheduling

to control lighting on and lighting off times to minimize operating
costs.
• Custom Programming Language: You can create Custom Pro-
gramming Language (CPL) routines that work with Area Control to
control such system activities as Priority Shutdowns and Demand
Limiting.
• Timed Override (TOV): Area control monitors the status of the On
and Cancel thermostat buttons of Trane SCC, VAV, and Voyager
equipment. Upon seeing a timed override request from a Trane zone
temperature sensor, Tracer Summit PC Workstation, or BCU opera-
tor display the area will change from its current state to occupied.

Area Mode/Member Modes

Table 6 on page 249 shows the standard operating behavior for binary
output members and UCM members for each area control operating
mode. For numeric entries (1, 2, 3, or 4), refer to the corresponding note.

248 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using Area Control

Table 6. Area Mode/Member Mode Chart

Binary Output Members UCM/CPL Members

Cool Heat Cool Heat

Area Mode Only Only H/C Vent Light Only Only H/C Vent Light
Heat Off 1 1 On 3 Occupy Occupy Occupy Occupy 3,5
Occupy

Cool 1 Off 1 On 3

Heat Off Off Off Off 3 Unoc- Unoc- Unoc- Unoc- 3,5
Unoccupy
cupy cupy cupy cupy
Cool Off Off Off Off 3

Heat Off On On Off 3 Unoc- Night Night Unoc- 3,5

*Night
H/C cupy H/C H/C cupy

Cool On Off On Off 3 Night Unoc-

H/C cupy
2 Off 2 Off 3 4 4 4 Unoc- 3,5
*Night Economize
cupy
Heat Off 1 1 Off 3 Opti- Opti- Opti- Opti- 3,5
Optimal
Start mal mal mal mal

Cool 1 Off 1 Off 3 Start Start Start Start

Heat Off Off Off On 3 Opti- Opti- Opti- Opti- 3,5

Optimal
Stop mal mal mal mal

Cool Off Off Off On 3 Stop Stop Stop Stop

Off Off Off Off 3 Priority Priority Priority Priority 3,5

Priority Shutdown Shut- Shut- Shut- Shut-
down down down down
Notes:
1 On if the occupied temperature control is disabled, otherwise follows the occupied temperature control logic.
2 On if checked for night economizing.
3 Lighting members are controlled based on lighting control events in the Time of Day Scheduling application Binary output
members will be on for lighting start events and off for lighting stop events. UCM/CPL lighting members will be occupied for
lighting start events and unoccupied for lighting stop events.
4 Night economize if checked for night economizer. Night economize events must be scheduled in the Time of Day Scheduling
application.
5 A timed override initiated by a UCM area member, the Area Editor Overrides tab, or the timed override toolbar button will over-
ride the present value of the area to occupied and the lighting value to On. The priority level will be Timed Override.
* Night Heat/Cool and Night Economizing are sub-modes of the area’s unoccupied present value. The area itself remains unoc-
cupied while its members are placed in these modes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 249
Area Control Application

Timed Override Control

Table 6 on page 249 does not show a timed override mode because timed
override only affects the present value of the area. When timed override is
in control, the present value shows “Occupied” at a priority level of timed
override.

Accessing the Area Control Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Area. The Select Area dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 249).

Figure 249. Select Area Dialog Box

2. Select an existing area you wish to edit.

3. Click OK to display the Area Control editor (see Figure 250).

Figure 250: Area Control Editor

250 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating an Area

Creating an Area
To create an area, you perform these tasks:
• Open and name the area (as described in this section)
• Assign members to the area (see “Assigning Members” on page 252)
• Define referencers for the indoor and outdoor air temperature sensor
fields (see “Setting Air Temperature Sensors” on page 254)
• Define parameters for night economizing (see “Setting Up Timed
Override” on page 257)
• Establish heating and cooling setpoints for the occupied and unoccu-
pied modes and occupied and unoccupied differentials (see “Setting
Setpoints and Differentials” on page 255)
• Assign event classes (see “Assigning Event Classes” on page 259)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for the Area” on
page 260)
• If necessary, enable and set duration for timed override members (see
“Setting Up Timed Override” on page 257).
After you create an area, you should assign the Area object to a time of
day schedule (see Chapter 25, “Time of Day Scheduling”). In the time of
day schedule, you must include a night economizing value and a lighting
value in addition to the present value if you intend to use those functions
in area control.
To create an area:
1. From the Setup menu, select Area. The Select Area dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 251).

Figure 251. Select Area Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Area Name dialog box displays (see Figure 252
on page 252).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 251
Area Control Application

Figure 252. New Area Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the Area Name field. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new area. You can modify the name at any
time from the Setup screen of the Area Control editor.
4. Click OK. The Area Control editor displays.
5. Click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save Area dialog
box displays (see Figure 253).

Figure 253. Save Area Dialog Box

6. Click the name of the BCU in which you want the area to reside.
7. Click OK.

Assigning Members
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 254).

Figure 254. Area Control Editor Members Screen

252 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Assigning Members

2. Select the member type from the Type list.

3. In the Name list, click on the member names that you want to add to
the area.
4. Click Add. The Select Area Member Type dialog box displays (see
Figure 255). The dialog box displays for each member you have
selected.

Figure 255. Select Area Member Type

Note:
You can assign a member to only one area. If you try to add a
member that is already assigned to another area, a message
indicates that the member is currently assigned to another
area. Do not assign a member to an area that also is an AHU or
vent only member of a VAV Air System.

5. Click on the arrow to select the member type from the list in the
Member Type field. Member types include Heating, Cooling, Heating/
Cooling, Lighting, and Ventilation.
6. Click the Night Economize check box if you want to use this member
for night economizing. The only member types that you can check for
night economizing are Cooling Only and Heating/Cooling.
7. Click the Timed Override (TOV) initiator checkbox to allow timed
override requests to be initiated from Trane SCC (except for very
early versions of the ZN510/511), VAV and Voyager members. Timed
override requests for these members can be generated from a Trane
zone sensor, a Tracer Summit PC Workstation, or a BCU operator dis-
play.

Note:
The Enable Timed Override checkbox on the Setup tab also has
to be checked in order for the area to process requests and can-
cels from TOV members (see “Setting Up Timed Override” on
page 257).

8. Click OK to add the member to the Area Members list (see Figure 256
on page 254).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 253
Area Control Application

Figure 256. Area Members List

Setting Air Temperature Sensors

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 257).

Note:
The Heat/Cool Input field should generally be set to Auto. For
details, see Tracer Summit online help.

Figure 257. Area Control Editor Setup Screen

2. Enter a referencer in the Sensors Space Temperature field. Area Con-

trol uses the space temperature value, along with heating and cooling
setpoints, to determine the heating/cooling mode (provided the Heat/
Cool Input field is set to Auto). For detailed information on using ref-
erences, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit Controls.”
3. Enter a referencer in the Sensors Outdoor Air Temperature field.
Area Control uses the outdoor air temperature sensor for its Night
Economizing and Optimal Start/Stop operations.

254 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Setpoints and Differentials

Setting Setpoints and Differentials

Area Control uses occupied setpoints to:
• Calculate optimal Start/Stop rates for Time of Day Scheduling
• Determine whether the area should be in heating or cooling mode
• Maintain occupied temperature control (Binary Output heating or
cooling members only)
Area Control uses unoccupied setpoints to:
• Maintain unoccupied heating/cooling control
The differential values prevent equipment from cycling on and off too
quickly. Occupied differentials affect only Binary Output members that
are actively using the areas occupied heating/cooling setpoints. Unoccu-
pied differentials affect both Binary Output and UCM members that are
actively using the area’s unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints.
To set setpoints and differentials:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 258).

Figure 258. Area Control Editor Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 255
Area Control Application

2. To change the default setpoint values, enter referencers or new con-

stants in the following fields:
• Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint
• Occupied Cooling Setpoint
• Occupied Heating Setpoint
• Unoccupied Heating Setpoint
3. To change the default differential values, enter new constants in the
following fields:
• Occupied Differential
• Unoccupied Differential

256 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Timed Override

Setting Up Timed Override

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen. (see Figure 259).

Figure 259: Area-Setup Screen

2. Make sure the Enable Timed Override checkbox is checked to enable

timed override. The default setting for this checkbox is enabled.
3. In the Duration field, type the number of minutes you want timed
override active after someone makes a timed override request. Timed
override will remain active but not in control if:
• Another application controls the Area to occupied, such as a
schedule.
• Another application at a higher priority level controls the Area to
any mode.

Note:
You can edit this field when timed override is active, but the
change will not take effect until the next timed override start
request.

4. Use the Optional Request Source referencer to allow a timed override

request from a binary property. (For an example of how to use this
field, see the online help for the Area Editor–Setup tab.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 257
Area Control Application

5. Click Save.

Note:
Area members in the member list on the Members tab must be
set up for timed override in order for the area to process
requests and cancels from TOV members (see, “Assigning Mem-
bers” on page 252).

Setting Up Night Economizing

To set up night economizing use the Area Control and the Time of Day
Scheduling (see Chapter 25, “Time of Day Scheduling”).
To enable or disable Night Economizing in Area Control:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the OSS - Night Econ. tab (see
Figure 260).

Figure 260. OSS - Night Economizing Screen

2. Use the Night Economizing Input field to enable or disable Night

Economizing manually, or select a referencer that will control the
enabling and disabling of Night Economizing. For detailed informa-
tion on referencing a property, see Chapter 6, “Using Referencer Edit
Controls.”
3. Enter a value in the Minimum Indoor/Outdoor Temperature Differen-
tial field. For Night Economizing to occur, the actual temperature dif-
ferential between the indoor and outdoor temperatures must be
greater than this number.

258 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Assigning Event Classes

Assigning Event Classes

From the Classes screen, you can assign event classes for Control Class
events and Timed Override Events (see Figure 261). An event class is an
alarm category (system critical alarms, system log, no notification, etc.)
that receives an event message.
For control class events, Tracer Summit will generate messages to notify
the daily operator when the present value of the area changes state (for
example, changes from unoccupied to occupied).
For timed override events, Tracer Summit will generate messages to
notify the daily operator when a timed override has been requested, can-
celled, or expired for the area.
Assigning an event class categorizes the type of event message that is
routed to an event receiver (workstation, pager, BCU event log, etc.).

Note:
In the Site Configuration editor, you can choose which event
receiver (workstation, pager, BCU event log, etc.) gets messages
from an event class. For more information on choosing an event
receiver, see “Setting Up Event Routing” on page 88.

To assign an event class:

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Classes tab.

Figure 261. Area Control Editor Classes Screen

2. Click the Control Class or Timed Override Class arrow to select an

event class.
3. Click Save.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 259
Area Control Application

Setting Security Access for the Area

1. From the Area Control editor, click the Classes tab (see Figure 261 on
page 259).
2. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (see Figure 262).

Figure 262. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.

260 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Overriding an Area

Overriding an Area
The Override function enables you to manually override the present value
and lighting value of an area. It also allows you to make a timed override
request if timed override is enabled for the area.

Overriding the Present Value and Lighting Value

Use the Override dialog box to release control from a particular applica-
tion or to pass control to a priority level you select.
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Overrides tab (see
Figure 263).

Figure 263. Area Control Editor Overrides Screen

2. Click Override. The Override dialog box displays (see Figure 264).

Figure 264. Override Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 261
Area Control Application

Releasing Control to Another Priority

1. From the Override dialog box, click Release Control in the Request To
box.
2. Select the priority level where you wish to release control in the At
Priority field (see Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU
Sites”).
3. Click Apply to perform the release.
4. Click OK to close the Overrides screen.

Changing the Present Value

1. From the Override dialog box, click Change Value To in the Request
To box.
2. Select the new present value from the drop-down list.
3. Select the priority level to which you wish to give control in the At
Priority field (see Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU
Sites”).
4. Click Apply to perform the override.
5. Click OK to close the Overrides screen.

Making a Timed Override Request

After timed override is set up for an area, you can initiate or cancel a
timed override request. (For setting up timed override for an area, see
“Setting Up Timed Override” on page 257.) Timed override must be
enabled in order for Area Control to process a request.
To start or cancel a timed override request:
1. From the Area Control editor, click the Overrides tab (see Figure 263
on page 261).
2. Click the TOV button to display the Timed Override dialog box (see
Figure 265)

Figure 265. Timed Override Dialog Box

262 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting an Area

3. In the Timed Override Request box, click the desired option.

4. Click OK to close the Timed Override screen and begin the request.

Note:
You can also get to this dialog box by clicking on the TOV but-
ton on the toolbar.

Deleting an Area
An area cannot be deleted from the Area Control editor. Use the Delete
Object function from the Tools menu to delete an Area object (see Chapter
38, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 263
Area Control Application

264 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 20

Using the Calculations Editor

You can create calculation objects that perform calculations based on

selected system data, such as the information provided in property refer-
encer edit controls. Calculations can be performed and saved for a time
period that you define. The resulting calculated data can then be used in
trends, graphic displays, and alarms.
You create and edit calculations using the Calculations editor. The follow-
ing section describes the calculation types and their formulas.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 265
Using the Calculations Editor

About Calculation Types

Tracer Summit includes the following calculation types:
• Average
• Cool Flow Rate
• Heat Flow Rate
• Maximum
• Minimum
• Meter Totalization
• Peak for X Minute Intervals (X = 5, 15, 30, or 60)
• Total Cooling Degree Days
• Total Heating Degree Days
• Total Run Hours/Starts
These calculation types and their respective calculation formulas are
defined as in the sections that follow.

Average
The Average calculation returns the average value for the current day
and the current billing period.
Today’s Avg = A / N

A = Running total
N = Counter for number of samples
Today’s Avg = New Average

Processing: Once per minute. If the enable referencer is on, the refer-
enced analog value is added to the running total (A), and the counter (N)
is incremented. The running total (A) is divided by the counter (N) to
obtain the average. Calculated values are saved for the current and previ-
ous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Cool Flow Rate

The Cool Flow Rate calculation typically measures the total energy
required to provide cooling to a building or area. This calculation looks at
two factors: the flow rate of the fluid (air or water) and the temperature
differential across the process.
Total = Total + (Flow Rate x Conv x (Temp 2 - Temp 1))

Flow Rate = Measured Flow Rate

Conv = Edited Conversion Factor
Temp 2 = Entering Temperature
Temp 1 = Leaving Temperature

266 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Calculation Types

Note:
The Cool Flow Rate calculation requires a conversion factor to
scale the flow measurement device and account for the heat
content of the fluid. If the calculation is for a constant volume
process, you must assign an analog output with a default value
of the volume for the Flow Rate referencer.

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and temperature 2 (Temp 2) is

greater than temperature 1 (Temp 1), the cool flow value (Flow Rate x
Conv x [Temp 2 - Temp 1]) is added to the total cool flow value (Total). The
calculation is evaluated each minute, provided the temperature differen-
tial (Temp 2 - Temp 1) remains positive. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: You can use Cool Flow Rate calculations to accu-
mulate the BTU output of chillers, VAV boxes, fan coils, air handling
units, and so on. You can use the calculated results for energy reports or
tenant billing. The following illustrations demonstrate some typical appli-
cations.

For air flowing through a Coil

coil:
Air Flow
Temp 2 = 1 1 4

Temp 1 = 4

For coil water: 2 3

Temp 2 = 3
Temp 1 = 2 Water
Flow

For condenser water:

Temp 2 = 3 From
4 3
To
Tower Tower
Temp 1 = 4

For chilled water:

Temp 2 = 1 From
1 2
To
Load Load
Temp 1 = 2

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 267
Using the Calculations Editor

Heat Flow Rate

The Heat Flow Rate calculation typically measures the total energy
required to provide heating to a building or area. This calculation looks at
two factors: the flow rate of the fluid (air, water, or steam) and the tem-
perature differential across the process.
Total = Total + (Flow Rate x Conv x (Temp 1 - Temp 2)

Flow Rate = Measured Flow Rate

Conv = Edited Conversion Factor
Temp 2 = Entering Temperature
Temp 1 = Leaving Temperature

Note:
The Heat Flow Rate calculation requires a conversion factor to
scale the flow measurement device and account for the heat
content of the fluid. If the calculation is for a constant volume
process, you should assign an analog output with a default
value of the volume for the Flow Rate referencer.

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and temperature 1 (Temp 1) is

greater than temperature 2 (Temp 2), the heat flow value (Flow Rate x
Conv x [Temp 1 - Temp 2) is added to the total heat flow value (Total). The
calculation is evaluated each minute, provided the temperature differen-
tial (Temp 1 - Temp 2) remains positive. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: You can use Heat Flow Rate calculations to accu-
mulate the BTU output of boilers, fan coils, or air handling units. You can
use the calculated results can be used for energy reports or tenant billing.
The following illustrations demonstrate some typical applications.
For air flowing through a Coil
coil:
Air Flow
Temp 2 = 1 1 4

Temp 1 = 4

For coil water: 2 3

Temp 2 = 3
Temp 1 = 2 Water
Flow

For a boiler:
Temp 2 = 1
Temp 1 = 2 Return Boiler Supply
Hot Water 1 2 Hot Water

268 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Calculation Types

Maximum
The Maximum calculation returns the highest value for the current day
and current billing period.
Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the current analog value is
compared to the present maximum value. If the current analog value is
greater than the present maximum value, then the current analog value
is saved as the new maximum value. Calculated values are saved for the
current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Note:
If the current analog value is equal to the present maximum
value, the current value is not saved as the new maximum
value.

Typical Application: The Maximum calculation typically determines

the highest space temperature that has occurred in a tenant space.

Minimum
The Minimum calculation returns the lowest values that have occurred
during the current day and current billing period.
Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the current analog value is
compared to the present minimum value. If the current analog value is
less than the present minimum value, the current analog value is saved
as the new minimum value. Calculated values are saved for the current
and previous day, and for the current and previous billing period.

Note:
If the current analog value is equal to the present minimum
value, the current value is not saved as the new minimum
value.

Typical Application: The Minimum calculation typically determines

the lowest temperature that has occurred in a space overnight.

Meter Totalization
The Meter Totalization calculation totals metered flow rates, such as gas,
electric, and water.
Total = Total + (Meter Value x Conv)

Total = Meter Total

Meter Value = Referenced Value
Conv = Edited Conversion Factor

Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the meter value conversion

factor (Meter Value x Conv) is added to the meter total (Total). The refer-
enced value (Meter Value) is added to the total (Total) each minute. Calcu-

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 269
Using the Calculations Editor

lated values are saved for the current and previous day and the current
and previous billing period.

Note:
To set up this calculation, you must connect a metered input
(pulse or analog) to a BCU I/O Module, PCM, UPCM, or
MP580/581. You need to know the operating specifics, such as
type or scaling for the selected meter, to determine the appro-
priate conversion factor (Conv). A typical pulse meter input, for
example, is attached to a PCM binary input and configured to
measure electrical usage in KW. This rate (in KW) is stored in
the PCM object as a Pulse Accumulator property and is refer-
enced by the Meter Totalization calculation object. To total this
in KW, the conversion factor is 0.01667, or KW/60 samples per
hour.

Typical Application: The Meter Totalization calculation typically totals

quantities that are metered by utilities, such as gas, electric, or water.

Peak for X Minute Interval

The Peak for X Minute Interval calculations combine a maximum and an
average to determine the highest value that has occurred over a specified
interval. An average value is collected over the specified time interval and
compared to an existing maximum. If the sampled average is greater
than the existing maximum, it becomes the new peak value. Peaks are
calculated for the current day and current billing period.
Temp Peak = Sum X - Sum X + New Value
X
X

X = Number of Minutes in the Selected Interval

Sum X = Sum of Last X Values
New Value = New Value To Be Averaged
Temp Peak = Temporary Peak Value

Processing: If the enable referencer is on, the temporary peak (Temp

Peak) calculation is performed. If the calculated temporary peak value
(Temp Peak) is greater than the present peak value, the peak value is set
equal to the temporary peak value (Temp Peak). If the temporary peak
value (Temp Peak) is less than or equal to the peak value, the peak value
retains its current value and is not reset. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Application: Peak calculations typically record the maximum
electrical usage in kilowatts. The logic used in the Peak calculation mim-

270 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Calculation Types

ics the logic that electrical utilities use to bill customers for electrical
usage over a shifting time frame.

Note:
Electrical meters are typically pulse meters. If brought into a
PCM, UPCM, or MP580/581, the controller can calculate a
KWH rate that the calculation object can reference.

Total Cooling Degree Days (CDD)

Cooling degree days indicate the external environmental conditions and
measure the amount of time in a day that the outside air temperature
was warmer than the base temperature. The Total Cooling Degree Days
calculation compares the outside air temperature to a base temperature
each minute and increments the cooling degree days value when the out-
side air temperature is above that base temperature. Typically, 65°F is
the base temperature, but the break-even temperature of the building
may be a better value for calculating cooling degree days.
OAT - Base Temp
CDD = Deg Total + 24 Hours x 60 Min

Deg Total = Total Degrees Cool Today

Base Temp = Edited Base Temperature
OAT = Outside Air Temperature

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and the base temperature

(Base Temp) is less than the outdoor air temperature (OAT), the differ-
ence of the outdoor air temperature and base temperature (OAT - Base
Temp) is divided by the total cooling minutes (24 Hours x 60 Min). The
resulting value is then added to the degree total (Deg Total) for that day
and the degree total for the billing period. Calculated values are saved for
the current and previous day, and for the current and previous billing
period.
Typical Applications: Cooling Degree Day calculations compare
weather conditions. They are valuable as a means of accounting for
changes in the cooling load from one year to the next.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 271
Using the Calculations Editor

Total Heating Degree Days (HDD)

Heating degree days indicate the external environmental conditions and
measure the amount of time that the outside air temperature was cooler
than the base temperature. The Total Heating Degree Days calculation
compares the outside air temperature to a base temperature each minute
and increments the heating degree day value when the outside air tem-
perature is below that base temperature. Typically, 65°F is the base tem-
perature, but the break-even temperature of the building may be a better
value for calculating heating degree days.
Base Temp - OAT
HDD = Deg Total + 24 Hours x 60 Min

Deg Total = Total Degrees Heat Today

Base Temp = Edited Base Temperature
OAT = Outside Air Temperature

Processing: If the enable referencer is on and the value of the outdoor

air temperature (OAT) is less than the base temperature (Base Temp), the
difference of the base temperature and outdoor air temperature (Base
Temp - OAT) is divided by the total heating minutes (24 Hours x 60 Min).
The resulting value is then added to the degree total (Deg Total) for that
day. Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day, and for
the current and previous billing period.
Typical Applications: Heating Degree Day calculations compare
weather conditions. They are valuable in energy reporting to account for
changes in the heating load from one year to the next.

272 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Calculation Types

Total Run Hours/Starts

The Total Run Hours/Starts calculation monitors the value of a binary
referencer and accumulates Run time when the referenced input is on.
Whenever the referenced input changes from off to on, a Start is accumu-
lated.
N=N+1
T = T + 1/60

N = Number of Starts
T = Total Number of Run Hours

Processing for Starts: If the enable referencer is on and the binary ref-
erencer transitions from Off to On, the number of starts (N) is incre-
mented. Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day,
and for the current and previous billing period.
Processing for Run Hours: If the enable referencer is on and the prop-
erty referencer is on, the total number of run hours (T) is incremented.
Calculated values are saved for the current and previous day, and for the
current and previous billing period.
Typical Application 1: Run hours and starts typically determine equip-
ment maintenance schedule.

Note:
For typical application 1, you should not clear run hour and
start calculations at the end of the billing period. These calcula-
tions typically reference an analog input, which generates an
alarm when a defined run hour limit or starts limit has been
exceeded. For example, a chiller might be set to generate an
alarm when it has run for 100 hours, or when it has more than
200 starts.

Typical Application 2: Use the Run hours calculation to determine how

many hours an area has been in timed override. For this application the
property reference should be “Timed Override In Control” for an area.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 273
Using the Calculations Editor

Accessing the Calculations Editor

1. From the Setup menu, click Calculations. The Select Calculation dia-
log box displays (see Figure 266).

Figure 266. Select Calculation Dialog Box

2. Click the desired calculation object.

3. Click OK. The Calculations editor Status screen displays. Figure 267
shows the editor for the Heat Flow Rate calculation.

Figure 267. Calculations Editor for Heat Flow Rate

274 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Calculation Object

Creating a New Calculation Object

To create a new calculation object, you must:
• Open and name a new calculation object and choose a calculation type
(as described in this section)
• Set up the calculation object, including choosing whether the calcula-
tion will be controlled by a referencer and choosing whether to reset
the calculation at the end of the billing period (see “Setting Up a Cal-
culation Object” on page 277)
• Define security access (see “Setting Security Access for a Calculation
Object” on page 280)
• Save the calculation object
To create a new calculation object:
1. From the Setup menu, select Calculations. The Select Calculation
dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New Calculation Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 268).

Figure 268: New Calculation Name Dialog Box

3. In the Calculation Name field, enter a name. Use a maximum of 32

characters.

Note:
You must enter a name before you can save the new calculation
object. You can modify the name from the Setup screen of the
Calculations editor.

4. Click OK. The Select Calculation Type dialog box displays (see
Figure 269 on page 276).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 275
Using the Calculations Editor

Figure 269. Select Calculation Type Dialog Box

5. Select the type of calculation you want to create.

6. Click OK. The Calculations editor displays.
7. To set up the calculation, follow the steps in “Setting Up a Calculation
Object” on page 277.

276 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a Calculation Object

Setting Up a Calculation Object

When you set up a calculation object, you must select a property for each
referencer field. (For detailed information on using referencers, see Chap-
ter 3, Using Referencer Edit Controls).
To set up a calculation object:
1. From the Calculation editor, click the Setup tab to display the Setup
screen. Figure 270 shows the Calculation editor Setup screen for the
Heat Flow Rate calculation.

Figure 270. Calculation Editor Setup Screen

2. For each referencer field, click the referencer button (...) to the right of
the field. The Select Property Reference dialog box displays (see Fig-
ure 271 on page 278).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 277
Using the Calculations Editor

Figure 271. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

3. In the Type field, select the type of object.

4. In the Name field, select the object’s name.
5. In the Property field, select an analog property.
6. Click OK to return to the Setup screen. The referencer field now dis-
plays the name and property of the chosen referencer. The status of
the referenced property is now displayed.
7. In the Conversion Factor field, keep the default value or enter a new
conversion factor value for the calculation.
8. In the Enable field, choose whether the calculation will be enabled,
disabled, or controlled by a referencer.
To enable the calculation process:
• Select Enabled to allow the calculation process to continue.
To discontinue the calculation process:
• Select Disabled to stop the calculation process.
To control the calculation process by a referencer:
• Click the Mode button to the left of the Enabled/Disabled field.
The referencer field changes to “???.”
• To select a property referencer, click the referencer button (...).
The Select Property Reference dialog box displays. Select a binary
property and click OK.
• In the On Delay for Referencer field, specify the amount of time
the referencer must be on before analog property referencer data
is included in the calculation.
9. To reset the calculation object at the end of the billing period, select
the Reset at End of Billing Period check box.
10. In the Units field, select the units to display for the calculation.
11. Click Save.

278 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Clearing Calculation Data

Clearing Calculation Data

You should clear the historical information stored in a calculation object
after any property on the Setup screen is changed. The historical informa-
tion displays in the History group of the Status screen. The Status
screen’s Clear button is available whenever non-zero data is displayed.
To clear calculation data:
1. From the Calculations editor, click the Status tab to display the Sta-
tus screen.
2. Click Clear. The Clear Calculation Data dialog box displays (see
Figure 272).

Figure 272. Clear Calculation Data Dialog Box

3. Click the check box next to the quantities you want to clear.
4. Click OK to save and reset the quantities to 0.000.

Note:
Clearing of data occurs the next time the calculation is run.
This may occur as much as one minute following the clearing of
data.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 279
Using the Calculations Editor

Setting Security Access for a

Calculation Object
1. From the Calculations editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 273).

Figure 273. Calculations Editor Classes Screen

2. Click Security Classes. The Change Security Classes dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 274).

Figure 274. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
4. Click OK to display the Classes screen.
5. Click Save.

Deleting a Calculation Object

You cannot delete a calculation object from the Calculations editor. Use
the Delete Object function from the Tools menu to delete a calculation
object (see Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites”).

280 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 21

Comm5 VAV Air Systems

The Tracer Summit Comm5 VAV air system (VAS) coordinates a collec-
tion of variable-air-volume (VAV) boxes and an air-handling unit (AHU)
to create a coherent air system. VAS Comm5 provides the following
capabilities:
• Manages common space VAVs to prevent over-pressurization of the
ductwork.
• Controls the AHU to provide air when any VAV member is in the
occupied mode.
• Provides built-in ventilation and pressure optimization features.
• Provides air and water balancing features.
• Automates the commissioning and calibration of VAVs.
• Reports status information on a standard graphic, a standard report,
and the VAS Comm5 editor.
VAS Comm5 supports the following controllers:
• Tracer VV550 VAV controllers (recommended) and other controllers
that support the VAV object of the LonMark® Space Comfort Control-
ler (SCC) profile
• Tracer AH540/541 and MP580/581 controllers and other controllers
that support the LonMark® Discharge Air Controller (DAC) profile
To create a VAV air system for Comm3 and Comm4 controllers, refer to
Chapter 22, “Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems.”

Note:
The optimization features work only with Tracer VV550/551
controllers. If you use other controllers, additional features of
VAS Comm5 may not be available depending on how the con-
trollers implement the SCC profile.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 281
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Accessing the VAS Comm5 Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air Systems, then select VAS
Comm5. The Select VAS Comm5 dialog box displays (see Figure 275).

Figure 275. Select VAS Comm5 Dialog Box

2. Select an existing VAS object and click OK. The VAS Comm5 editor
displays (see Figure 276).

Figure 276. VAS Comm5 Editor Status Screen

282 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

To create a Comm5 VAV air system, follow these steps:
• Create the object (see “Creating a VAS Comm5 Object” on page 283)
• Assign VAS members (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 284)
• Assign common space VAVs (see “Assigning Common Space VAVs” on
page 286)
• Set up the VAV air system, including using duct pressure optimiza-
tion and ventilation optimization if necessary (see “Setting up a
Comm5 VAV Air System” on page 288)
• Set up global references if necessary (see “Setting up Global Refer-
ences” on page 290)
• Change security classes if necessary (see “Setting Security Access” on
page 291)

Creating a VAS Comm5 Object

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air Systems, then select VAS
Comm5. The Select VAS Comm5 dialog box displays.
2. Click New. The New VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name dialog box
displays (see Figure 277).

Figure 277. New VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name Dialog Box

3. Type a name in the VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Name field. Make
the name as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 charac-
ters. You can modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of
the VAV Air System editor.
4. Click OK. The Status screen of the VAS Comm5 editor displays.
5. You will not be able to save the VAS until you add at least one VAV
member (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 284). After you have
done so, click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save VAV
Air System dialog box displays (see Figure 278 on page 284).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 283
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Figure 278. Save VAV Air Systems (VAS Comm5) Dialog Box

6. Select the name of the BCU in which you want the VAV Air System to
reside.
7. Click OK.

Note:
To delete a VAS object, use the Delete Objects utility from the
Tools menu. Refer to Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”

Assigning VAS Members

You can assign two types of VAS members:
• One air-handler member per VAS, which can be a
Tracer AH540/541, a Tracer MP580/581, or other DAC device
• VAV members, usually Tracer VV550/551 VAV controllers (although
you can use other SCC devices, some features of VAS Comm5 work
only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers)

Note:
VAS Comm5 supports two types of air-handler objects: Tracer
MP580/581 objects and DAC objects. The air-handler controller
must be configured as a DAC device.

To assign members:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 279
on page 285).

284 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

Figure 279. VAS Comm5 Editor Members Screen

2. To add VAV Members, click the Add Members button in the VAV
Members area. The VAV Members dialog box displays (see
Figure 280).

Figure 280. VAV Members Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 285
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

3. Select the VAVs you want to add to the VAS. To add more than one
VAV, hold down the Ctrl key and click each VAV you want to add.
All available Space Comfort Controllers (SCCs) display in the avail-
able VAVs list. Make sure that you select only SCCs configured as
VAVs (VAS Comm5 does not check this for you).
4. Click the Add button. The VAVs you want to add display in the
Selected VAVs list.
5. When you are done adding VAV Members, click OK.
6. To add the AHU member, click the Add Member button in the AHU
Member area. The AHU Member dialog box displays (see Figure 281).

Figure 281. AHU Member Dialog Box

7. In the Type list, select the type of air handler you want to add to the
VAS.
8. In the Name list, select the air handler you want to add to the VAS.
9. Click OK.

Assigning Common Space VAVs

Common space VAVs act much like pressure relief valves—the VAS con-
trols common space VAVs to make sure that there is always someplace for
the air to escape when the AHU is on. Make sure that you assign enough
common space VAVs to avoid over-pressurizing the ducts. If you have
other ways to relieve duct pressure, you may not need to use common
space VAVs.
Typically, common space VAVs should serve common areas, such as lob-
bies, hallways, and restrooms. You can, however, designate any VAV as a
common space VAV.
Follow these guidelines when assigning common space VAVs:
• Because common space VAVs act as pressure relief valves, do not set
their minimum flow setpoints to zero.
• A VAV cannot be a common space VAV if it is already a member of an
Area object.

286 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Comm5 VAV Air System

• You cannot schedule common space VAVs because only the VAS can
control them. Common space VAVs still provide space temperature
control of the zone like any other VAV.
• If you decide to change a common space VAV back to a normal VAV,
you will have to manually release the priority level 9 control that VAS
has over the VAV. If you do not release the priority control, Area will
not be able control the VAV because it controls at a lower priority
level.
To assign common space VAVs:
1. In the VAV Members table on the Members screen, select the Com-
mon Space check boxes for the VAV members that you want to serve
as common space VAVs (see Figure 282).
2. Click Save to save your changes.

Figure 282. Assigning Common Space VAVs

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 287
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System

Use the Setup screen to configure your Comm5 VAV air system. Click the
Help button or press F1 to access the online Help, which contains detailed
descriptions of each field.
To set up a Comm5 VAV air system:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 283).

Figure 283. VAS Comm5 Editor Setup Screen

2. In the AHU Startup Delay field, type the number of minutes for the
VAS to wait before starting the AHU.
The AHU startup delay should be at least the amount of time it takes
for the air valves in the common space VAVs to open to an acceptable
position. The startup delay prevents the ductwork from over-
pressurizing.
3. In the Common Space VAV Shutdown Delay field, type the number of
minutes for the VAS to wait before shutting down common space
VAVs after the AHU enters the unoccupied mode.
The shutdown delay should be at least the amount of time it takes the
AHU to go from full speed to a complete stop. To prevent the duct-
work from over-pressurizing, VAS Comm5 prevents its common space
VAVs from entering the unoccupied mode during the shutdown delay.
Note that Tracer VV550/551 controllers have an automatic three-

288 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting up a Comm5 VAV Air System

minute shutdown delay, which begins after the VAS shutdown delay
is over.
4. In the VAV Calibration field, select Recalibrate if you want to initiate
a recalibration of VAV members. You can also set up a referencer to a
binary output to trigger recalibration (for example, you can reference
a binary output and assign a schedule to the output). The BCU stag-
gers the calibration requests to prevent the ductwork from over-pres-
surizing.
Because Tracer VV550/551 calibrate automatically when they transi-
tion from occupied to unoccupied, use the VAV Calibration field only
for VAVs that are continually occupied.
5. Select the Allow VAV Aux Heat at Night check box to allow VAV aux-
iliary heat at night.
If you want to disable auxiliary heat at night to reduce energy usage,
clear this check box. For this feature to work, you must also reference
the Auxiliary Heat Control property of all VAV members to the VAS
Aux Heat Control Request property (you can do this globally by click-
ing the Set VAV References button on the Members screen as
described in “Setting up Global References” on page 290).
6. Select the Enable Duct Pressure Optimization check box if you want
to use duct pressure optimization. Type new setpoints if necessary. In
most cases, use the default settings for best performance. (Press F1
for a description of each field.)
The duct pressure optimization feature determines the optimal duct
pressure based on VAV air-valve positions. This optimization reduces
energy costs by ensuring that the AHU is working just hard enough
to satisfy the most-open VAV air valve. Duct pressure optimization
works only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers.
7. Select the Enable Ventilation Optimization check box if you want to
use ventilation optimization. Type new setpoints or set up referencers
if necessary. In most cases, use the default setpoints for best perfor-
mance. (Press F1 for a description of each field.)
The ventilation optimization feature manages the outdoor air intake
system to meet ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62-2001: Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. This standard specifies minimum ven-
tilation rates and indoor air quality to minimize the potential for
adverse health effects for occupants. Ventilation optimization works
only with Tracer VV550/551 controllers.
8. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 289
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Setting up Global References

VAS Comm5 provides a way to set up references across the variable air
system. After you create the global references, you cannot undo them in
VAS Comm5. You can change the references only in the SCC editor for
each device (or globally in the Analog Output object editor).
To set up global references:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Members tab.
2. Click the Set VAV References button. The VAV References dialog box
displays (see Figure 284).
3. Select the global references you want to set up, then click OK. Some
options are not available until you assign an AHU member. (Click the
Help button or press F1 for a description of each option.)

Figure 284. VAV References Dialog Box

290 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Security Access

Setting Security Access

Use the Classes screen to set security access for VAS Comm5.
To set security access:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 285).

Figure 285. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Select the Access check box next to each class to grant or deny access
to the security class. A check in the field grants access.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.
5. Click the Save button to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 291
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Balancing Air and Water Flow

To assist with balancing air and water flow, use the system-wide over-
rides found on the Overrides tab (see Figure 286).
From the Overrides screen, you can apply the following overrides to the
air valves of all VAV members:
• Drive to minimum cooling flow setpoint
• Drive to maximum cooling flow setpoint
• Drive to a percentage of the maximum cooling flow setpoint
You can apply the following overrides to the water valves of all VAV mem-
bers:
• Drive open
• Drive closed

Figure 286. VAS Comm5 Editor Overrides Screen

To perform an override:
1. Select the appropriate option.
2. Click the Apply button to perform a system-wide override.

Note:
Use the Rover Air and Water Balancing tool if you need addi-
tional balancing features.

292 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Balancing Air and Water Flow

To Release an override:
◆ Click the Release Override Option to release the system-wide over-
ride.

Note:
If you do not release overrides from the VAS Comm5 editor,
they will release automatically in each VAV controller after a
certain period of time (by default, overrides to Tracer VV550/
551 controllers release automatically after 10 hours, though
this time can be changed in Rover Comm5).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 293
Comm5 VAV Air Systems

Autocommissioning VAVs
Autocommissioning is a special operating sequence that validates the
proper operation of all inputs and outputs of VAV members. Because air
valves are closed during parts of the autocommissioning test, the BCU
commissions the VAVs in several groups to avoid over-pressurization. The
BCU divides common space VAVs evenly among the groups.

Note:
Because the BCU staggers the VAVs being autocommissioned,
starting another staggered sequence will interrupt the current
sequence. For example, if a calibration sequence is initiated
while autocommissioning is in progress, autocommissioning
will stop and calibration will begin. Autocommissioning will not
resume after the calibration sequence finishes.

To autocommission VAVs:
1. From the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Setup tab.
2. If duct pressure optimization is enabled, clear the Enable Duct Pres-
sure Optimization check box, then click Save.
3. Click the Overrides tab.
4. In the VAV Autocommissioning Sequence area, select Start, then click
the Apply button.
5. Click OK to acknowledge the message that displays.
6. To check the progress of the autocommissioning sequence, open the
VAS graphic by double-clicking the VAS icon in the navigation tree.
While autocommissioning is in effect, the Mode: Active property of
each VAV member will report Test (see Figure 287). Autocommission-
ing should take no more than 90 minutes, regardless of the size of
your VAS.

Figure 287. VAV Graphic

7. After the autocommissioning sequence is done, re-enable duct pres-

sure optimization if you are using it in your VAS.
8. On the Status screen of the VAS Comm5 editor, click the Report but-
ton. The Select Standard Live Report dialog box displays.
9. Select VAS Comm5 Commissioning Report, then click OK. The VAV
Commissioning Report displays.
10. Print or save the report as needed, then click Close.

294 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 22

Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air

Systems

The variable air volume air system (VAS), usually referred to as the VAV
air system, is made up of variable air volume (VAV) boxes, the air-han-
dling equipment that supplies hot and cold air to those boxes, and ventila-
tion-only members. VAS works with Area Control and Time of Day
Scheduling to manage the air handling unit and the associated VAV
boxes.
Using the VAV air system, you can:
• Determine the heating or cooling control action of its VAV members
• Audit VAV member requests for Night Heat/Cool and Night Econo-
mize to verify that adequate demand exists before enabling the air
handler
• Total the minimum cooling flow setpoints and present value votes of
its VAV members to determine its own and the air handler’s present
value
• Control AHU startup and VAV shutdown delays during occupancy
transitions
• Provide an offset control value for VAV I members
Depending on the member characteristics, you can use these options:
• Drive VAV boxes to maximum airflow position when the VAS heat/
cool mode is heating
• Provide VAV airflow overrides for all VAV members
• Specify supply air setpoints for air handler reference
These tasks are all accomplished through the VAV Air System editor,
which is one of several editors in Tracer Summit that you use to set up,
define, and modify elements in the system.
To create a VAV air system for Comm5 controllers, refer to Chapter 21,
“Comm5 VAV Air Systems.”

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 295
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Accessing the VAV Air System Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System. The Select VAS dialog
box displays (see Figure 288).

Figure 288. Select VAS Dialog Box

2. Select an existing VAS object and click OK. The VAV Air System edi-
tor displays (see Figure 289).

Figure 289. VAV Air System Editor Status Screen

296 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a VAV Air System Object

Creating a VAV Air System Object

To create a VAV Air System object, you follow these steps:
• Open and name the object (as described in this section)
• Assign VAS members (see “Assigning VAS Members” on page 298)
• Set up the VAV Air System (see “Setting Up a VAV Air System” on
page 300)
• Modify setpoints (see “Modifying Setpoints” on page 303)
• Modify overrides, if necessary (see “Modifying Overrides” on
page 304)
• Change control and security classes (see “Routing Alarms and Events
and Setting Security Access” on page 305)
To create the VAV Air System object:
1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System. The Select VAS dialog
box displays.
2. Click New. The New VAV Air System Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 290).

Figure 290. New VAV Air System Name Dialog Box

3. Enter a name in the VAV Air System Name field. Make the name as
informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must
enter a name before you can save the new VAV Air System object. You
can modify the name at any time from the Setup screen of the VAV
Air System editor.
4. Click OK. The Status screen of the VAV Air System editor displays.
5. Click Save. The first time you save a new area, the Save VAV Air Sys-
tem dialog box displays (see Figure 291).

Figure 291. Save VAV Air System Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 297
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

6. Select the name of the BCU in which you want the VAV Air System to
reside.
7. Click OK.

Assigning VAS Members

Once the VAV Air System object is created, you must assign members.
There are three different types of VAS members:
• Air handlers
• VAV boxes
• Ventilation-only devices
To assign members:
1. At the VAV Air System editor, click the Members tab to display the
Members screen (see Figure 292).

Figure 292. VAV Air System Editor Members Screen

2. From the Category list box, select the category of the VAS members
you would like to add. There are three options:
• Air handler
• VAV
• Vent only
3. In the Type list box, select the type of Air Handler, VAV, or Vent Only
object from these options:
• Air handler: Binary Output, CPL Program, CSC, DAC, Intellipak,
PCM, TCM, UPCM, Voyager, Voyager (Comm3), MP580/581

298 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Assigning VAS Members

• VAV: VAV I, VAV II/III/IV

• Vent only: Binary Output, CPL Program
The Name field now displays a list of all of the objects that are of the
same object type selected in the Type list box.
4. Select the name of the object you want to add. You can select as many
members as you want.
5. Click Add to add the Selected members to the Current Members list
box.
To change the Current Members list, click Remove or Remove All
until the list displays only those members you want to add.

Resetting the Votes List for VAV Membership

The VAV Air System votes list keeps track of all its VAV members’
present values (for example, Occupied, Unoccupied, and Optimal Start)
and minimum cooling flow setpoints. When VAVs are removed from the
VAS membership list, the VAS retains votes from those VAVs that no
longer belong to that VAS, until the votes list is reset. The Reset Votes
button is used when VAV membership to the VAV Air System is altered.
To Reset the VAV Membership Votes List:
1. At the VAV Air System editor, click the Members tab to display the
Members screen (see Figure 292 on page 298).
2. If VAV membership has changed (removed members), save the
changes.
3. Click the Reset Votes button to remove votes no longer belonging to
this VAS.

Note:
The BCU must be online in order for the reset to work. How-
ever, the Reset Votes button is always enabled.

Example:
The site called STARPORT has two VAV Air Systems in it (VAS#1 and
VAS#2). Originally, each air system was set up with 20 VAV members
each, which is a mistake. VAS#1 really has 18 VAVs connected to it while
VAS#2 has 22 VAVs connected to it. To correct the situation, you must
first remove the two extra VAVs from VAS#1. Then after saving the
changes to VAS#1, you must click the Reset Votes button. The two extra
VAVs are then added to VAS#2. Changes to VAS#2 are saved.

Note:
It is not necessary to reset votes when VAVs are added to a
VAS, only when VAVs are removed.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 299
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Setting Up a VAV Air System

Once the VAV Air System object is created and members are assigned,
you can set up the VAS to suit the individual needs of the system. You use
the VAV Air System editor’s Setup screen to enter or modify setup infor-
mation.
To set up a VAV Air System:
1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 293).

Figure 293. VAV Air System Editor Setup Screen

2. To modify the VAS name, enter a new name in the VAS Name field.
3. To modify the VAS minimum flow value, enter the minimum amount
of air that the air handler members can deliver when the supply fan
is on in the VAS Minimum Flow field. You can obtain this number
from the air handler manufacturer.
4. To modify the heat/cool input, select one of these choices in the
required Heat/Cool Input field:
• To allow the VAS to automatically determine its own heat/cool
mode, select MWU Settings (morning warm up) from the list box.
The heat/cool mode of the VAS will change between heating and
cooling based on the values of the VAS morning warm up sensor,
setpoint, and differential.
• If the air handler is a heating only or a cooling only machine,
select either Heating or Cooling from the list box. Do not use a
referencer.

300 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up a VAV Air System

• Reference another heat/cool property in the Tracer Summit sys-

tem (perhaps the heat/cool mode of the Air Handler itself), using a
referencer edit control.
Although the Heat/Cool mode of the VAS can determine the heat/cool
mode of its Air Handler members, it does not automatically do so.
Typically, if the air handling unit is capable of making its own heat/
cool decision (as IntelliPak, Voyager, and CSC can), the air handling
unit’s mode will determine the heat/cool mode of the VAS.
5. If you want the VAS to use the supply air temperature, in the Supply
Air Temperature field enter a constant or assign a reference.

Note:
Only VAV II/III/IV members can use the VAS supply air tem-
perature. VAV I members do not use the VAS supply air tem-
perature even if a sensor is assigned to the entry field. VAV I
control action follows the heat/cool mode of the VAS.

The Supply Air Temperature specifies the active temperature of the

supply air feeding the VAV boxes of this system. Assigning a supply
air temperature allows VAV II/III/IV members to make their own
decision for heat/cool control action based on a comparison of supply
air temperature and zone temperature.
If you select Not Used for the Supply Air Temperature field, the heat/
cool control action VAV II/III/IV members follow the heat/cool mode of
the VAS.
6. To use the VAV Airflow Drive Max field, select the desired setting.

Note:
During an Airflow Drive Max override, parallel fans, electric
heat, and hot water heat are disabled for VAVs that have them.
The VAV Airflow Drive Max field appears twice in the editor;
once on the Setup screen and once on the Overrides screen.

• If you select Auto, the UCM uses its local control algorithms to
decide when to implement the Drive max function.
• If you use a referencer edit control, Auto displays in the entry
field when the referencer is in the zero (0) state. In the zero state,
the UCM can still locally decide to drive to maximum flow if it
needs to. When the referencer is in the one (1) state, Drive Max
appears in the entry field, and the Drive Max override is initiated
from the Tracer Summit system.
• Some air handler units (such as IntelliPak, Voyager, and CSC)
have properties that indicate when they are going into a constant
volume heating mode, and thus require that all downstream VAV
boxes open their air valves to maximum position. You must assign
the property from the Air Handling Unit as the referencer. For the
IntelliPak and Voyager, this property is called VAS Drive to Max.
• If your air handler does not have a predefined property for heat-
ing mode, click the Overrides tab. On the Overrides screen, check

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 301
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

the box for Drive VAVs to Max Flow if VAS is Heating. Click Save
and return to the Setup screen.

Note:
If you selected MWU Settings in the Heat/Cool input field, the
system uses the Morning Warmup fields to determine its heat/
cool mode. (These fields have no other bearing on control.)

7. To assign the morning warm up temperature, in the Temperature

field select a referencer (which will typically be a zone temperature
sensor in the system). Air handler members that are capable of a
morning warm up cycle might want to reference the VAS Morning
Warmup fields if they do not have their own. VAS does not automati-
cally determine the morning warm up settings for the air handling
unit members, but provides reference information.
Occupied mode: If the temperature reported from the morning
warm up sensor is less than or equal to the morning warm up setpoint
minus the differential, the VAS heat/cool mode is heating. If it is
greater than the morning warm up setpoint, the VAS heat/cool mode
is cooling.
Unoccupied mode: If the temperature falls below this setpoint, the
VAS heat/cool mode is heating. If it rises above it, the VAS heat/cool
mode is cooling. The differential is ignored when the VAS is unoccu-
pied.
8. To assign the morning warm up setpoint, in the Setpoint field select a
referencer (which will typically be a zone temperature setpoint in the
system). If the VAS heat/cool input is left in MWU Settings, the morn-
ing warm up setpoint determines the cutoff point at which the VAS
changes modes from heating to cooling or vice versa. (For a descrip-
tion of the occupied and unoccupied modes, see the previous step.)
9. To modify the morning warm up differential (the default is 2.0
degrees), enter a number in the Differential field. The morning warm
up differential value is the deadband used to keep VAS heat/cool
mode from cycling too quickly between occupied heating and occupied
cooling. You can set a 0.0°F to 10.0°F buffer that the temperature
must surpass before switching modes. The differential is ignored
when the VAS is unoccupied.

302 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Modifying Setpoints

Modifying Setpoints
The default values for the fields found on the VAV Air System editor’s Set-
points screen are what you would expect to find on most job sites. Occa-
sionally, however, you may need to change supply air setpoints,
changeover delay times, changeover votes, and the VAV I control offset.
To change setpoints:
1. From the Setup menu, select VAV Air System to display the Select
VAS dialog box. The dialog box lists all existing VAS objects.
2. From the list displayed in the Select VAS dialog box, select the one
you want to modify.
3. Click OK to display the VAV Air System editor. The Status window
becomes active and displays the settings and status of the object you
selected.
4. Click the Setpoints tab to display the Setpoints screen (see
Figure 294).

Figure 294. VAV Air System Editor Setpoints Screen

5. Change the desired values in the Supply Air group, Changeover

Delay Times group or the VAV I Control Offset field.
6. To change the values in the Changeover Votes group, refer to the sec-
tion “Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints” on page 304.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 303
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Modifying Changeover Vote Setpoints

The Present Value of the VAS is determined from the Present Value vot-
ing of the VAVs. A VAV box votes its Present Value to the VAS each time
the VAV’s Present Value changes. The Minimum On and Minimum Off
votes are the number of members required to vote for a change before the
VAS considers the transition. You can redefine the number of VAV
Present Value votes needed for Night Heat/Cool and Night Economize
operations in these fields.
To change the value:
1. Click the text box of the value you want to change to Select the cur-
rent value.
2. Enter a new value for the number of votes.
3. Click Save.

Modifying Overrides
The Overrides screen of the VAV Air System editor contains the fields
that override normal VAV box operation. To override the VAV terminal
units’ flow control you can assign a binary reference to the appropriate
flow override. You can also select the desired flow override from the list
box.
You can override the VAV unit flow control either from the VAV object edi-
tor (individually) or from the VAS to which the VAV unit belongs. The
VAV object editor source is the higher priority if there are overrides from
both sources.
To modify overrides:
1. Click the Overrides tab in the VAS editor to display the Overrides
screen (see Figure 295).

Figure 295. VAV Air System Editor Overrides Screen

2. Change the values in the desired fields by choosing a constant value,

or reference another property in the system to control the field.

304 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Routing Alarms and Events and Setting Security Access

3. To provide a VAV flow override to maximum if the VAS heat/cool

mode is heating, click the check box next to the field Drive VAVs to
Max Flow if VAS is Heating.

Routing Alarms and Events and Setting

Security Access
At the VAV Air System editor’s Classes screen, you can assign alarm and
event routing and set security access for the VAV Air System.

Defining Alarm and Event Routing

1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Classes tab (see
Figure 296).

Figure 296. VAV Air System Classes Screen

2. In the Control Class field, select a control class. The control class
defines the event class that will receive an event message when the
present value of the VAV Air System changes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 305
Comm3/Comm4 VAV Air Systems

Setting Security Access

1. From the VAV Air System editor, click the Classes tab.
2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 297).

Figure 297. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click on the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to
the security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked,
permission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Classes dialog box.

Deleting a VAS Object

To delete a VAS object, use the Delete Objects utility from the Tools
menu. Refer to Chapter 38, “Deleting Objects and Sites.”

306 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 23

Heat Pump Loop Control

The Heat Pump Loop Control (HPLC) application provides coordination

between a water-source heat pump (WSHP) with Space Comfort Control-
ler (SCC) profile UCM and a Tracer loop controller. A Tracer loop control-
ler controls for example, pumps, cooling towers, and boilers for the WSHP
water loop. The program performs two main functions:
• It enables or disables the compressors of WSHP members based on
the operation of the water loop. For example, if there is no flow in the
water loop, all WSHP compressors are disabled until flow is estab-
lished.
• It monitors the WSHP’s status and determines the proper water loop
operation needed.
Each WSHP should be placed in an area and the area should be sched-
uled as desired. When a WSHP goes into the occupied mode, the HPLC
application also goes occupied, and the Tracer loop controller is requested
to operate the loop. When all units go into the unoccupied mode, the
HPLC goes unoccupied, and the Tracer loop controller shuts down.

Note:
When in the unoccupied mode, the HPLC application monitors
the need for heating or cooling (represented by the terminal
load property) of all WSHP members in order to determine
when to go into the Night Heat/Cool mode. Each WSHP mem-
ber votes its need-to-run based on a terminal load that is
greater than 30% (a positive 30% for cooling and a negative
30% for heating). When enough WSHP members vote a need-to-
run, the HPLC application transitions from the unoccupied
mode to the Night Heat/Cool mode, enabling the Tracer loop
controller to run.
All WSHP members vote continually to the HPLC concerning
whether they have a need-to-run or not. The Need-to-Run
Threshold located on the Setup screen determines how many
WSHPs are needed to initiate Night Heat/Cool operation. In the
Night Heat/Cool mode, the HPLC application commands the
Tracer loop controller to run. In turn, the Tracer loop controller
monitors system water flow and enables the WSHP compres-
sors to run, allowing the units to reach their unoccupied set-
points. The HPLC transitions back to the unoccupied mode
when enough WSHP members fall within their unoccupied set-
points.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 307
Heat Pump Loop Control

Accessing the Heat Pump Loop Control

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Heat Pump Loop Control. The Select
Heat Pump Loop dialog box displays (see Figure 298).

Figure 298. Select Heat Pump Loop Dialog Box

2. Select a heat pump loop.

3. Click OK to display the Heat Pump Loop Control editor Status screen
(see Figure 299).

Figure 299. Heat Pump Loop Control Status Screen

308 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object

From the Status screen you can view the following occupancy status of
WSHP members:
• Tracer loop controller mode (as determined by the HPLC application)
• Current total heating and cooling loads for all WSHPs on this loop
• Compressor enable mode (as determined from the referencer on the
Setup screen)
• Need-to-Run Votes

Creating a New Heat Pump Loop Object

To create a new heat pump loop:
1. From the Setup menu, select Heat Pump Loop Control. The Select
Heat Pump dialog box displays (see Figure 298 on page 308).
2. Click New. The New Heat Pump Loop Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 300).

Figure 300. New Heat Pump Loop Name Dialog Box

3. Type the name of the heat pump loop. Make the name as informative
as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters. You must enter a name
before you can save the new heat pump loop. You can modify the
name at any time from the Setup screen of the Heat Pump Loop edi-
tor.
4. Click OK. The Heat Pump Loop editor Setup screen displays (see Fig-
ure 301 on page 310).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 309
Heat Pump Loop Control

Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control

Object
1. From the Heat Pump Loop Control editor, click the Setup tab (see
Figure 301).

Figure 301. Heat Pump Loop Control Setup Screen

2. In the Need-to-Run Threshold field, type the total number of need-to-

run votes needed from WSHP members before the HPLC transitions
from the unoccupied mode into the Night Heat/Cool mode. The
default number is 10 votes.
3. Set the Enable Startup field to a constant of Disable, or referenced to
a binary output object that is controlled by a Time of Day Schedule
(TOD) or CPL routine.

Note:
The Enable Startup referencer field allows you to have the loop
pre-heated or pre-cooled in advance of start up of the water
source heat pumps.

4. Check the Continuous Operation check box if you want the water loop
to operate continuously. If this is checked, the Tracer loop controller is
always in the occupied mode, regardless of individual WSHP sched-
ules or need-to-run.

310 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the Heat Pump Loop Control Object

5. Assign a referencer to the WSHP Compressor field.

Note:
The WSHP referencer is used to monitor water loop operation
and lock out compressor operation of the heat pumps when the
loop is not operating properly. When a Tracer loop controller is
used, the Compressor Control: Active property is automatically
referenced. When a PCM or UPCM is used as the loop control-
ler, an appropriate referencer needs to be assigned. This could
be a pump output, loop flow status, or a binary value that is set
once all loop operation, including pumps, boilers and towers are
proven.

Assigning a Loop Controller Member

1. In the HPLC Members Category field, select Loop Controller.
2. In the Type box, select the type of loop controller. This can be a Tracer
loop controller, a PCM, UPCM, MP580 or MP581.
3. In the Name box, the available devices are shown. Highlight the
name of the device you want to use as the loop controller.
4. Click the Add button to use this device as the loop controller.
5. To select an alternate loop controller follow steps 1–4, then click the
Replace button.

Assigning a Water Source Heat Pump Member

Note:
Only SCCs can be assigned to this application.

1. In the HPLC Members Category field, highlight Water Source Heat

Pump to select it.
2. In the Name field highlight the unit you want to add.
3. Click the Add button to add the heat pump to the application.

Removing HPLC Members

1. From the Current Member List dialog box, highlight the HPLC mem-
ber that you want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button. To remove all members of the HPLC, click
the Remove All button.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 311
Heat Pump Loop Control

Setting Security Access

1. From the Heat Pump Loop editor, click the Classes tab to display the
Classes screen (see Figure 302).

Figure 302. Heat Pump Loop Control Editor Classes Screen

2. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 303).

Figure 303. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

3. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access to the
security class. A check in the field grants access. If unchecked, per-
mission to the security class is denied.
4. Click OK to close the Change Security Class dialog box and display
the Classes screen.

312 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 24

Custom Programming
Language

Tracer Summit’s Custom Programming Language (CPL) allows you to

create custom programs to perform functions and calculations that can-
not be done by other applications in Tracer Summit.
The Tracer Summit PC Workstation is used to create CPL programs in
the Tracer Summit CPL editor. The process of creating a CPL program
begins with a CPL text file. The text file contains program logic state-
ments and comments. This chapter describes how to create, save, and
compile a CPL text file. Once this process is complete, the CPL program is
completed. This chapter also describes how the CPL program becomes an
object that is sent to the system database and stored in a specific BCU.

Note:
For detailed information on specific CPL statements, functions,
enumerations and so on, refer to Tracer Summit online help.
Tracer Summit includes a library of sample programs located
in the folder C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library.
You can also locate the sample programs in the Tracer Summit
electronic library on the Tracer Summit CD (for more informa-
tion, see Chapter 7, “Utilities”).

There are four basic steps used to successfully create and test a CPL pro-
gram object:
1. Create or Edit the CPL text file. CPL text files are created and
edited using the CPL editor and saved to the PC Workstation data-
base.
2. Compile the CPL text file. The compiler checks for any syntax
errors. After the syntax errors are corrected, you can compile the text
file again. This process is repeated until it successfully compiles, at
which point it is an executable CPL program.
3. Create the CPL Object in the Database. A successfully compiled
CPL program is used either to create a new CPL object or replace an
existing CPL object in the system database. During this step, a run
frequency (if any) and the BCU where this program executes are
assigned. The newly created CPL object is automatically sent to the
BCU when the workstation is online.
4. Test the CPL Program. Once the CPL object is sent to the BCU, use
the CPL editor to step through the program and test its logic.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 313
Custom Programming Language

The process of creating a CPL program may require repeated editing if

you have errors from the compile and/or test step. Once a step is repeated,
you must repeat each successive step to complete the process of creating a
successful CPL program. The steps to create a CPL program are
explained in greater detail in the following sections.

Opening and Closing the CPL Editor

You can open the CPL editor with a blank file or with an existing CPL file
displayed.
To open the CPL editor:
1. From the Setup menu, select Custom Programming. The Open dialog
box displays.
2. Make a selection:
• To select a CPL file to work with, select the file’s location and
name, then click Open.
• To display a blank text file, click Cancel.
The CPL editor displays.
To close the CPL editor:
◆ At the CPL editor main menu, click File. Then click Close CPL editor.
The Tracer Summit main window displays.

314 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

The structure of a CPL text file is similar to a C or BASIC program file.
You create this CPL text file using the Tracer Summit CPL editor because
it contains features specific to CPL. You can also look in the library direc-
tory (C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library) for templates that
you can adapt to suit your needs.
There are two ways to create a new CPL text file:
• Use a template (recommended). Follow the method in the section
titled “Creating a CPL Text File From a Template” on page 315.
• Use a blank text window. Follow the method in the section titled “Cre-
ating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window” on page 318.

Creating a CPL Text File From a Template

The general steps required to edit a CPL text file in the CPL editor are as
follows.
1. From the CPL editor File menu, select Open CPL Text File. The Open
dialog box displays.
2. Open the Library directory (C:\Program Files\Tracer Sum-
mit\cpl\library). See Figure 304.

Figure 304. Open Dialog Box (Library Directory)

3. Select the desired CPL file. For a new routine, you can use the
Header.cpl file, which has the recommended program structure.
4. Click Open to load the file into the CPL editor (see Figure 305 on page
316).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 315
Custom Programming Language

Figure 305. Header File in the CPL Editor

5. Add the program name and text to the comment lines to define your
program (see the section “Adding Comments” on page 318 for more
details).
6. If applicable, use the predefined place in the Header.cpl file to define
variables for the new program.
7. Using the Edit menu items for proper CPL syntax, insert the control
statements and calculations that the program will use (see
Figure 306 on page 317).

316 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 306. CPL Editor Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains the following options:

• Add Statement (see “Adding Statements” on page 318)
• Add Function (see “Adding Functions” on page 319)
• Add Object (see “Assigning Objects and Properties” on page 320)
• Add Obj&Property (see “Adding an Object and Property Refer-
ence” on page 322)
• Add Enum Bool (see “Assigning Enumerations” on page 323)
8. Leave the word END on the last line of the program to let Tracer
Summit know that the program is done.
9. From the CPL editor File menu, select Save CPL Text File As.
10. At the Save As dialog box, select the CPL\custom directory (do not
save in the CPL\library directory).
11. Type a new name for the program in the File Name field of the Save
As dialog box.

Note:
If special startup sequences are required after a power failure,
naming a CPL program object “STARTUP_1”, “STARTUP_2”,
etc., causes the program(s) to execute before all other applica-
tions execute after power is restored on the BCU.

12. Click OK to save your CPL file to the PC Workstation. Save the file
frequently during editing to avoid losing your work.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 317
Custom Programming Language

Creating a CPL Text File from a Blank Text Window

You can create a new CPL text file from a blank text window by inputting
all the elements of a CPL program manually. However, it is recommended
that you follow the method outlined in the section “Creating a CPL Text
File From a Template” on page 315 to make the process of creating a new
CPL text file easier.
If you are going to create the CPL text file from a blank text window, you
can review the CPL examples included with Tracer Summit for guidance
on recommended format. The library of sample programs is located in the
folder C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\cpl\library or the Tracer Sum-
mit electronic library (for more information, see Chapter 7, “Utilities”).
You can display a blank text window for the creation of a new CPL text
file in one of two ways:
• When you first enter the CPL editor (by selecting Setup, then Custom
Programming, at the Tracer Summit main menu), click Cancel at the
Open dialog box.
• At the CPL editor, from the File menu select New CPL Text File.
Once you have a blank text window in the CPL editor, create the program
using the proper syntax end program structure. For more information,
see “Creating a CPL Text File From a Template” on page 315.

Adding Comments
You must manually add comments to your CPL text file to explain the
program steps. Comments will help you and others understand and debug
the program later. There are two types of comments you can add:
• Comment lines beginning with /// use memory in the BCU.
Type /// at the beginning of comment lines that you want to save to the
BCU. These comments remain in the program after it is compiled and
sent to the BCU. You see the comments when you open the CPL
object.
• Comment lines beginning with // do not use BCU memory.
Type // at the beginning of comments lines that you want stored only
in the CPL text file. This saves space in the BCU since these com-
ments are removed when the program is created as an object.

Adding Statements
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays (see Figure 307 on page 319).

318 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 307. Add Statement Dialog Box

3. Select the statement you want to insert in your file.

4. Click OK.
5. Use the proper syntax to complete the statement you have chosen.

Adding Functions
1. Put your cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Function. The Add Function dialog
box displays (see Figure 308).

Figure 308. Add Function Dialog Box

3. Click on the function you want to add to your file.

4. Click OK.
5. Use the proper syntax to complete the function you have chosen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 319
Custom Programming Language

Assigning Objects and Properties

As a CPL programmer, you have access to a major subset of the objects
defined in the BCU. You can directly enter an object name or property
name. To avoid syntax errors use the CPL editor to reference objects and
properties.

Note:
The compiler will ignore spaces, tabs, and blank lines, but you
must avoid carriage returns or word wrap (where the editor
puts a dash mark to finish the word on the next line) when
denoting an object name or property name in your file. The
names of objects and properties used in the program must
exactly match the names in the database.

Adding an Object Reference

To assist you in specifying an object in your CPL program, the CPL editor
has an object selection dialog box that you can access from the CPL editor.
To add an object reference:
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Object. The Select Object dialog box
displays (see Figure 309).

Figure 309. Select Object Dialog Box

3. Select the object type and object name you want to insert.
4. Click OK to insert the object reference into your CPL text file.

Indirectly Referencing an Object

CPL provides an object pointer defined with a variable to reference an
object indirectly. These variables are useful for being passed to proce-
dures that process an object. When not pointing to an object, object point-
ers have a null value.

320 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

You define variables to use as a user-defined shorthand name for an

object. Once a variable has been defined, you can use it throughout the
program to make the program more readable.

Note:
Variable names are case sensitive. For example, the compiler
sees the names OAT and oat as different variables.

To indirectly reference an object:

1. Position the cursor in the Define Variables section of your CPL text
file.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays (see Figure 310).

Figure 310. Add Statement—DEFOBJ

3. Select the DEFOBJ statement.

4. Click OK to insert the DEFOBJ statement into the CPL text file.
Using the DEFOBJ statement adds two lines of code to the program:
the statement DEFOBJ {object name} to the first line of the program
and the object name at the cursor location.
5. In the CPL text file, type in a name for the variable defining the
object pointer. For example:
DEFOBJ RTU1
RTU1 = {FINANCE DEPT TCM}

When defining an object, do not add a property reference to the vari-

able:
RTU1 = {FINANCE DEPT TCM}.{PRESENT VALUE}

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 321
Custom Programming Language

Indirectly Referencing an Object and Property

CPL provides an object and property pointer defined with a variable to
reference an object and property indirectly. These variables are useful for
being passed to procedures that process an object and property.
There are four types of variables available:
• DEFINT defines integers
• DEFLNG defines long integers
• DEFFLT defines single floating point values
• DEFDBL defines double floating point values

Note:
Variable names are case sensitive. For example, the compiler
sees the names OAT and oat as different variables.

To indirectly reference an object and property:

1. Position the cursor in the Define Variables section of your CPL text
file.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement. The Add Statement dia-
log box displays.
3. Select the DEFINT, DEFLNG, DEFFLT, or DEFDBL statement and
click OK. The statement is inserted.
4. In the CPL text file, type in a name for the variable defining the
object and property pointer. For example:
DEFFLT ZONETEMP
ZONETEMP = {BCU#1 VAV-01-065}.{ZONE TEMPERATURE}

Adding an Object and Property Reference

To assist you in specifying an object and property in your CPL program,
the CPL editor has an object and property selection dialog box that you
can access from the CPL editor.
To add an object and property reference:
1. Position the cursor in the CPL text file where you want to insert the
statement.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Obj&Property. The Select Property
Reference dialog box displays (see Figure 311).

322 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Figure 311. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

3. Select the object type, name, and property you want to insert.
4. Click OK to insert the property reference into your CPL text file.

Assigning Enumerations
Tracer Summit treats all binary and multi-state properties as integers.
On is usually a 1 and Off is 0. These associations between words and inte-
gers are called enumerations. It is critical that the enumeration, once
defined, appear the same throughout the entire program (identical spell-
ing and capitalization).
To assign enumerations:
1. From the Edit menu, select Add Enum Bool. The Select Property Ref-
erence dialog box displays.
2. Select the desired property from the list.
3. Click OK. The Enumeration/Boolean dialog box displays (see
Figure 312).

Figure 312. Add Enumeration Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 323
Custom Programming Language

4. Select the desired enumeration.

The enumeration is automatically defined as an integer with the
proper syntax at the top of the CPL program. In this location, the
resulting DEFINT statement is a global variable. It can be moved to
another place in the program if desired.
5. Click OK.

Defining an Enumeration for Priority Shutdown

Say, for example, that you are writing a CPL program in which the
Present Value of a PCM (attached to AHU1) is controlled to priority shut-
down. You want to define an enumeration for priority shutdown. To do
this, you must perform the following steps (see “Example: Before Enu-
merated Booleans Program” on page 324 and “Example: After Enumer-
ated Booleans Program” on page 325 to see the effect of these steps).
To define an enumeration for priority shutdown:
1. Position the cursor at the location in the CPL program where the enu-
meration is to occur (for instance, at the location in the control state-
ment where the Present Value of the PCM is controlled).
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Enum Bool. The Select Property Ref-
erence dialog box displays.
3. Select the PCM object type, AHU1 object name, and PRESENT
VALUE object property. Then click OK. The Enumeration/Boolean
dialog box displays with the selectable enumerations listed.
4. Choose Priority Shutdown from the available list and click OK.
5. The program adds the words “Priority_Shutdown” where the cursor
was positioned.
The global variable is added to the top of the program where it auto-
matically defines Priority_Shutdown as an integer and sets it equal to
6 (6 is the integer recognized internally by the system as
Priority_Shutdown for the Present Value of the AHU1 PCM).

Example of Assigning Enumerated Booleans

The following two examples show the effect of assigning enumerated bool-
eans to a sample program.
Example: Before Enumerated Booleans Program
This is an example of a CPL text file before an enumeration is assigned.
Program AHU1_SHUTDOWN
// Written: December 15, 1992 by Ryan Smith
// Modifications:
// None
// Properties modified:
// {AHU1 PCM}.{Present Value}
/// This program is executed by Binary Input AHU1 ALARM;
/// therefore, the frequency should be set at 0 seconds.
/// This program turns the AHU Off anytime the binary input
/// AHU1 ALARM is turned On.

324 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

/// This CPL object uses the text file named AHU1SD.CPL
Defint
On = 1, // Define enumerations
Off = 0
If ({AHU1 ALARM}.{Present Value} = On) Then
// If alarm switch is turned On
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, 6, 2, SET)
// Turn the AHU Off
Else
// If alarm switch is turned Off
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, 6, 2, RELEASE)
// Release the AHU to normal control
End If
End
Example: After Enumerated Booleans Program
This is the same CPL text file after the CPL editor assigns the enumera-
tion (the changes are in boldface type).
Defint Priority_Shutdown = 6
Program AHU1_SHUTDOWN
// Written: December 15, 1992 by Ryan Smith
// Modifications:
// None
//
// Properties modified:
//{AHU1 PCM}.{Present Value}
/// This program is executed by Binary Input AHU1 ALARM;
/// therefore, the frequency should be set at 0 seconds.
/// This program turns the AHU Off anytime the binary input
/// AHU1 ALARM is turned On.
/// This CPL object uses the text file named AHU1SD.CPL
Defint
On = 1, // Define enumerations
Off = 0
IF ({AHU1 ALARM}.{Present Value} = On) Then
// If alarm switch is turned On
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, Priority_Shutdown, 2, SET)
// Turn the AHU Off
Else
// If alarm switch is turned Off
Control ({AHU1 PCM}, {Present Value}, Priority_Shutdown, 2, RELEASE)
// Release the AHU to normal control
End If
End

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 325
Custom Programming Language

Using Arrays
Tracer Summit CPL allows arrays of objects and/or properties to be cre-
ated to reduce the number of CPL statements needed for a CPL program.
Arrays also make it easier to edit a CPL program once it has been created
by arranging objects and properties in a specific order. Arrays are typi-
cally used in CPL programs where repetitive calculations are performed
(such as programs that use FOR...NEXT statements).
The syntax for defining an array that points to objects and their proper-
ties is:
Defint BIP[6]
BIP[1]={object A}.{property}
BIP[2]={object B}.{property}
BIP[3]={object C}.{property}
BIP[4]={object D}.{property}
BIP[5]={object E}.{property}
BIP[6]={object F}.{property}

The syntax for defining an array that points to objects is:

Defobj BOP[6]
BOP[1]={object A}
BOP[2]={object B}
BOP[3]={object C}
BOP[4]={object D}
BOP[5]={object E}
BOP[6]={object F}

Example Array Program

The following example is a program that looks at the status of binary
inputs (set up in an array), goes through this array, and matches a binary
output to the binary input. The binary output might be directed to a TCM
binary output that controls a lighting relay somewhere else in the facility.
PROGRAM Motion_Status_Lights
// Written 11/20/92, by Seymour Anderson
//
// Properties modified: (BOPs)
// {Area1 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area2 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area3 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area4 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area5 Status Light}.{Present Value}
// {Area6 Status Light}.{Present Value}
//
// Properties read: (BIPs)
// {Area1 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area2 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area3 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area4 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area5 Motion}.{Present Value}
// {Area6 Motion}.{Present Value}
/// This program monitors the status of several binary inputs
/// throughout the building and directly controls matching binary
/// outputs connected to the status light panel in the security station.

326 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

/// This program is executed anytime a binary input changes state.

/// This CPL object uses the text file named AREASTAT.CPL

DEFINT
Off = 0, // Enumeration for Off
On = 1, // Enumeration for On
NUMB = 6, // Define number of binary inputs and outputs
BIPS[NUMB], // Define array for binary inputs
i // Define index for FOR-NEXT statement

DEFOBJ
BOPS[NUMB]// Define array of binary outputs that will
// match the binary inputs

// Define the array of binary inputs

BIPS[1] = {Area1 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[2] = {Area2 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[3] = {Area3 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[4] = {Area4 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[5] = {Area5 Motion}.{Present Value}
BIPS[6] = {Area6 Motion}.{Present Value}

// Define the array of binary outputs

BOPS[1] = {Area1 Status Light}
BOPS[2] = {Area2 Status Light}
BOPS[3] = {Area3 Status Light}
BOPS[4] = {Area4 Status Light}
BOPS[5] = {Area5 Status Light}
BOPS[6] = {Area6 Status Light}

For i =1 to NUMB step 1

If (BIPS[i] = On)
Then
// Turn the light BOP ON
CONTROL(BOPS[i], {Present Value}, On, 5, SET)
Else
// Turn the light BOP OFF
CONTROL(BOPS[i], {Present Value}, Off, 5, SET)

End If
Next
End

Using Saved Values

Each CPL program has 16 properties called saved values. Saved values
can store variables in memory between CPL executions, share CPL vari-
ables with other CPL programs or applications within the Tracer Summit
system, or display on a graphic.
Typically you use a saved value when you want to save a calculation from
one execution to the next (such as a timer or counter). Saved values can
be either local (defined within the current program) or referenced from
another CPL program object.
CPL variables are initialized to zero and are not saved between CPL exe-
cutions. Therefore, CPL variables must be assigned a value at the start of

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 327
Custom Programming Language

the program or otherwise a new value must be calculated each time the
CPL program runs.
An analog or binary input can be set up to reference a CPL saved value
and alarm if it exceeds the alarm limits (refer to Chapter 15, “Creating
Inputs/Outputs”, for more information on setting up analog inputs).
To read or write a local saved value in your program:
1. Position the cursor where you want the saved value to reside.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Statement.
3. Select LOCAL.{SAVED VALUE}[ ]
4. Click OK to insert the following line into your program:
Local.{Saved Value}[ ]

5. Add a number within the square bracket to indicate the array num-
ber of the saved value (1-16).
To read or write a saved value from another CPL program:
1. Position the cursor where you want the saved value to reside.
2. From the Edit menu, select Add Obj&Property. The Select Property
Reference dialog box displays.
3. Select the CPL program object from the Type list.
4. Select the CPL program name from the Name list.
5. Select the Saved Value [#] you want to reference from the property
list (see Figure 313).

Figure 313. Select Property Reference Dialog Box—Saved Value

6. Click OK. The CPL editor will insert the statement. For example:
{Chiller_Control}.{Saved Value}[7]

328 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating or Editing a CPL Text File

Saved Value Program Example

In the following example, a timing function is performed, based on a local
saved value.
Program Exhaust_Fan1
// Written 3/22/97 by Eugene Jones
// Properties modified:
// {Exhaust Fan1}.{Present Value}
// Local.{Saved Value}[1]
// Properties read:
//{Warehouse Temperature}.{Present Value}
//{Warehouse Exhaust Fan Setpoint}.{Present Value}
/// This program controls the exhaust fan for the warehouse on
/// anytime the space temperature exceeds setpoint for 10 minutes.
/// This program is executed every minute to keep timers in sync.
/// This CPL object uses the text file named EXHAUST1.CPL

Defint
Off = 0,//Enumeration for Off
On = 1,//Enumeration for On
Timer_1
// If space temperature is 1 F above setpoint, start 10 minute timer
Timer_1 = Local.{Saved Value}[1]
If
({Warehouse Temperature}.{Present Value} > ({Warehouse Exhaust Fan Set-
point}.{Present Value} +1))
Then
Timer_1 = Timer_1 + 1
Else
Timer_1 = 0
End If
// Control the exhaust fan On or Off
If (Timer_1 > 10) Then
Control({Exhaust Fan1}, {Present Value}, On, 5, SET)
Else
Control({Exhaust Fan1}, {Present Value}, Off, 5, SET)
End If
// Store Timer value for the next execution
Local.{Saved Value}[1] = Timer_1
End

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 329
Custom Programming Language

Compiling a CPL Text File

Once the text file for the CPL program is created and saved as a CPL file,
your next step is to compile the program. The CPL editor analyzes the
currently loaded CPL text file for syntax errors and valid object and prop-
erty names. Compiling the text file also structures the information into a
CPL object format so that it can be sent to the Tracer Summit database.
To compile a CPL text file:
1. In the CPL editor, open the CPL text file you would like to compile.
2. From the Program menu, select Compile.
If there are syntax errors or errors in object or property names, the
Compile Report dialog box identifies each error, the type of error and
the line in the program where the compiler finds an error (see
Figure 314).

Figure 314. Compiler Report

3. Double click on the line listed in the Compile Report dialog box to go
to that line and fix the errors, or use the Go To Line command on the
Edit menu.
Depending on how the text file was edited, the line given as the loca-
tion of the syntax error may actually be the line after the location
where the error occurred. Therefore, look at the line indicated and the
lines before it when looking for syntax errors.
4. After you make your corrections, save the file.
5. Run the compile function again. Repeat this cycle (steps 2 - 4) until
the Compile Report dialog box displays “Successful Compile,” indicat-
ing that there are no errors (see Figure 315 on page 331).

330 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a CPL Object in the Database

Figure 315. Compiler Report—Successful Compile

Note:
In addition to errors, this dialog box also displays warnings. Pro-
grams can successfully compile when warnings are generated.
They fail if errors are generated.
6. After compiling successfully, click Close.
7. Save the CPL text file again. It is important to save the file after a
successful compile.

Creating a CPL Object in the Database

In this section, you will see how to use a successfully compiled CPL text
file to create a CPL object in the Tracer Summit database. The objective
is to send the compiled CPL program to be stored as an object in the
selected BCU. After the program is stored at the BCU, the BCU software
schedules the CPL program to execute at a selected frequency and per-
forms the program logic during each execution.
During this step, you will be selecting:
• The CPL object name
• The security classes
• The CPL program execution frequency (if any)
• The BCU where the CPL object will be stored
You can either create a new CPL object in the database or overwrite an
existing CPL object. To overwrite an existing CPL object see “Replacing
an Existing CPL Object in the Database” on page 333.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 331
Custom Programming Language

Creating a New CPL Object in the Database

When you have successfully compiled CPL text files saved on the PC
Workstation, the Create and Replace items on the Program menu are
available to allow you to create a CPL object in the Tracer Summit data-
base.
To create a new CPL object in the database:
1. Once you have successfully compiled the CPL text file, from the Pro-
gram menu select Create CPL Object. The CPL Program Creation
editor dialog box displays (see Figure 316).

Figure 316. CPL Program Creation Editor

The default name displays in the Program Name field. This is the
name from the program statement of the CPL text file. Do not change
the name.
2. From the BCU drop-down list, select the BCU where the CPL pro-
gram object will be stored. Store the CPL object in the same BCU that
most of the objects and properties referenced in the CPL program
reside.
3. Define the frequency with which the CPL program runs. To set this
frequency click the up/down arrows on the right side of each box. It is
recommended that CPL programs run no faster than once every 30
seconds. Normally, programs run every minute, every hour, every day,
or are event-driven, based on the functions performed in the CPL pro-
gram.
4. To assign security classes click Security Classes. (For more informa-
tion on assigning security classes, refer to Chapter 10, “Setting Up
Security.”)

332 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a CPL Object in the Database

5. On the CPL Program Creation editor dialog box, click Create to create
the CPL object and return to the CPL editor.
A Status dialog box displays stating whether sending the CPL object
to the BCU was successful. If the PC Workstation is online with the
BCU, a “Successful Operation Online” message displays. If the PC
Workstation is offline, the CPL editor sends the CPL object to the PC
Workstation database, and a “Successful Operation Offline” message
displays. When the PC Workstation goes online, it sends the CPL
object to the selected BCU.

Replacing an Existing CPL Object in the Database

When you have successfully compiled CPL files saved on the PC worksta-
tion, the Create and Replace items on the Program menu allow you to
replace a CPL object in the Tracer Summit database.
To replace an existing CPL object in the database:
1. Once you have successfully compiled the CPL text file, from the Pro-
gram menu select Replace CPL Object. The Select CPL Program dia-
log box displays (see Figure 317).

Figure 317. Select CPL Program Dialog Box

2. Select the CPL program object to be replaced and click OK.

3. The CPL Program Replacement editor dialog displays (see Figure 318
on page 334).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 333
Custom Programming Language

Figure 318. CPL Program Replacement Editor

Note:
• In the CPL Program Replacement editor dialog box, the BCU
field is unavailable, because the program is being replaced at
the BCU where the previous program object resides.
• The default name displays in the Program Name field which is
the name of the CPL object. Do not change the name.

4. Define the frequency with which the CPL program runs. To set the
frequency click the up/down arrows on the right side of each box. It is
recommended that CPL programs run no faster than once every 30
seconds. Normally, programs run every minute, every hour, every day,
or are event-driven, based on the functions performed in the CPL pro-
gram.
5. To assign security classes, click Security Classes. (For more informa-
tion on assigning security classes, refer to Chapter 10, “Setting Up
Security”.)
6. At the CPL Program Replacement editor, click OK to replace the CPL
object and return to the CPL editor.
A Status dialog box displays stating whether sending the CPL object
to the BCU was successful. If the PC Workstation is online with the
BCU, a “Successful Operation Online” message displays. If the PC
Workstation is offline, the CPL editor sends the CPL object to the PC
Workstation database and a “Successful Operation Offline” message
displays. When the PC Workstation goes online, it sends the CPL
object to the selected BCU.

334 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Testing a CPL Program

Testing a CPL Program

Testing (debugging) allows you to step through a specific CPL program to
view variables and properties, and to verify proper performance of the
program. You can perform CPL testing only when the PC Workstation is
online with the BCU containing the CPL object.

Note:
When a CPL program is in the debug mode, WAIT statements are
executed. For longer WAIT statements, it is recommended that
they temporarily be shortened or commented out (insert “//” or “///”
in front of the statement and recompile) before testing the CPL
program.

You will usually encounter two kinds of problems when testing a CPL pro-
gram:
• The program results in the wrong values for the program variables.
• The program halts because of a runtime error. Runtime errors are
errors that do not appear when a program is compiled, but do appear
when the program is executed.
Testing a CPL program will help you identify and resolve both types of
problems.
To test a CPL program:
1. From the Test menu, select Start Debug. The Select CPL Program
dialog box displays (see Figure 319).

Figure 319. Select CPL Program Menu

2. Select the program you want to test. Then click OK or double click the
desired program.
The background color of the CPL editor changes to cyan when the edi-
tor is in the debug (or test) mode. The first line of the program will be
highlighted, indicating that the test mode is ready to execute.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 335
Custom Programming Language

3. Select Inhibit DB Writes on the Test menu to prevent the program

outputs from being performed.

Note:
• When a CPL program is in the debug mode, the programmer is
manually running the CPL program. All outputs from the pro-
gram are performed unless the Inhibit DB Writes menu item
is selected.
• Inhibit DB Writes will prevent the program from writing to
the database, and prevent any control functions of the pro-
gram. The calculations contained in the program will be per-
formed as intended, but no outputs will be sent out.
4. If necessary, use the Set Breakpoint function on the Test menu to
manually enter a point in the program at which the program execu-
tion will stop.
A break is useful at a point in the program just before a problem area,
or for an area that you want to test more slowly by stepping through
line-by-line.
For example, to test a program you can insert a break just before a
problem area in the program. To begin the test, from the Test menu
select Run. When the program stops at the set break point, use the
Step function to execute the program line by line from that point.
5. Use the Run or Step items on the Test menu to execute the program
test.
If you click Step, only one line of the program executes. If you select
Run, the editor tries to execute the entire program until it hits a
Break or the End statement, or until a runtime error occurs.
6. From the Test menu, select View Variable. The Variable Viewer dialog
box displays (see Figure 320 on page 337).

336 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Testing a CPL Program

Figure 320. Variable Viewer Dialog Box

7. When you encounter a problem that involves editing the CPL pro-
gram, from the Test menu, select Stop Debug. If the program encoun-
ters a runtime error, see the section “CPL Error Codes” on page 338
for explanations of the error codes and possible solutions.
8. Load the original CPL text file back into the CPL editor. You should
not use the decompiled program used for the test to do your edits. The
original CPL text file contains the all the extra comment lines that
are not saved in the compiled program.
9. Edit the CPL text file to fix the problems encountered during the test.
10. Compile the program (see “Compiling a CPL Text File” on page 330).
11. Replace the CPL object in the database (see “Replacing an Existing
CPL Object in the Database” on page 333).
12. Test the new CPL program again. Repeat these steps for testing a
CPL program until the program runs properly and gives the desired
results.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 337
Custom Programming Language

CPL Error Codes

Table 7 shows the error codes that are displayed when you encounter a
problem during testing of a CPL program object. Use the Possible Cause
and Possible Solution columns of the table to help you fix your CPL pro-
gram when one of these errors is encountered. If problems persist contact
your local Trane representative.

Table 7. CPL Error Codes

Error Possible Cause Possible Solution

Error-30 Requested unit is down. The CPL object is trying to access a property in a BCU
that is currently not available.
Error-39 An invalid index was provided for The array of Local.{Saved Value} properties in each CPL
accessing an array element. object has only 16 elements. Trying to access element
17 or higher causes this error. For example, the follow-
ing compiles, but causes this error.
Num=21
For I=1 to Num step 1
Local.{Saved Value}[i]=VAV[i].{Zone Temperature}
Next
Error-103 The CPL program’s Get Property table The property referred to in the CPL routine could not be
entry call failed. found for that object.
Error-250 The CPL program has a bad symbol Recompile and replace the CPL object.
type.
Error-251 The CPL program has a bad expression A bad expression exists in the routine. A common error
stack. is to forget to add the property in a statement that is
intended for testing the property. For example,
If ({Area 1} = 2) Then
rather than
If ({Area 1}.{Present Value}= 2) Then
Error-252 CPL program has a bad program stack. Adjust the Context Size property of the CPL object. The
default context size is 624. Change the value from 624 to
1248. If the error still occurs, change the value to 1872. If
the routine then runs, change the value to 1560. Keep
adjusting the value to find the proper context size.
Error-253 CPL program has an invalid symbol Recompile and replace the CPL object.
stack offset.
Error-254 CPL program has a bad BCX_ITRP exe- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
cution queue or the entry was not found.
Error-255 The CPL program has an invalid/unsup- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
ported token operation.
Error-256 The CPL program has a general problem Recompile and replace the CPL object.
with a symbol.
Error-257 The CPL program has overflowed its P Adjust the Context Size property of the CPL object. The
stack or E stack. default context size is 624. Change the value from 624 to
1248. If the error still occurs, change the value to 1872. If
the routine then runs, change the value to 1560. Keep
adjusting the value to find the proper context size.

338 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 CPL Error Codes

Table 7. CPL Error Codes (Continued)

Error Possible Cause Possible Solution

Error-258 CPL program has an array index that is An array index is too big or too small. You may have
out of bounds. defined the array to have three elements, and then tried
to perform an operation on array element four. Also
remember that 0 is not a valid array index.
Error-259 The CPL program has a bad assignment Recompile and replace the CPL object.
(usually unequal types).
Error-260 The CPL program has an unknown Recompile and replace the CPL object.
token.
Error-261 The CPL program has a BCX_ITRP that Recompile and replace the CPL object.
had a problem looking up symbol (usu-
ally invalid type).
Error-262 The CPL program parameter and argu- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
ment types do not match.
Error-263 The CPL program has underflowed its Recompile and replace the CPL object.
expression evaluation stack.
Error-264 The CPL program has underflowed its Recompile and replace the CPL object.
program stack.
Error-265 The CPL program (or BCX_ITRP) has Recompile and replace the CPL object.
problem with nested If statements.
Error-266 The CPL program has attempted to Debug the routine to find where the divide by zero error
divide by zero. is occurring. Determine whether a variable is not being
initialized (variables are always 0 unless initialized to
another value). Question whether the MIN/MAX opera-
tors or an IF-THEN statement can be used to prevent the
variable in the denominator from going to 0.
Error-267 The CPL program has a bad storage Recompile and replace the CPL object.
address for symbol.
Error-268 The CPL program is too small to be cor- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
rect.
Error-269 The CPL context is too small to be cor- Recompile and replace the CPL object.
rect.
Error-307 An invalid property size was given. Debug the routine to find where the property size error
is occurring. A common error is controlling a binary
output to a value other than 0 or 1.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 339
Custom Programming Language

340 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 25

Time of Day Scheduling

Time of day scheduling in Tracer Summit Critical Control System

enables you to create and modify schedules that control HVAC equipment
and lighting. It also gives you the flexibility to create time of day schedule
reports from the scheduling screen (see “Creating Time of Day Schedule
Reports” on page 353).
Using the scheduling application, you can schedule equipment to start or
stop at specific times during the day. You can use optimal start and stop
times to turn equipment on as late as possible and turn it off as early as
possible, while maintaining the desired comfort level in a defined zone or
building.
You modify schedules using the Scheduling screen. A schedule is a set of
defined events that applies to an effective period of time for one or more of
the following:
• Areas
• UCMs
• Control points
• Set values
A schedule has a normal day defined for each day of the week. A normal
day applies unless you create a holiday or an exception. Holidays take
precedence over normal days, and exceptions take precedence over holi-
days and normal days.
You can define more than one set of events in a schedule for a site, and an
object can be a member of more than one event in a schedule. However, an
object cannot be active during two events simultaneously. For example, if
a UCM is a member of one event that starts at 8 a.m. and stops at 5 p.m.,
it cannot be a member of another event that would require it to start at
7 a.m. and stop at 4 p.m.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 341
Time of Day Scheduling

Accessing the Scheduling Screen

1. Click Schedule on the task bar. The Select TOD dialog box appears.
2. Select the schedule you want.
3. The Scheduling screen displays (see Figure 321).

Figure 321. Scheduling Screen

Indicates Optimal
Start/Occupied
schedule Occupied
period
Indicates Night
Economize Optimal
Start period
Indicates Lighting for
BCU sites

Indicates Set Analog

for BCU sites only

Note:
If you need help with time of day scheduling, refer to the Daily
Operations tutorial, Focus on Your System. (For information
about using the tutorial, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily
Operations guide.

4. Select a month and year.

Tracer Summit displays the schedule for the selected name, month,
and year.

342 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

Creating a New Daily Schedule

1. Open the site to which you want the new schedule to apply.
2. Click Schedule on the task bar. The Select TOD dialog box appears.
3. Click New. The first Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 322).

Figure 322. First Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

4. Type the name of the new schedule in the Schedule Name field.
5. Specify the Start Date using the up and down arrows. (The start date
defaults to the selected date.)
6. Leave the No End Date check box selected if you do not want to spec-
ify an end date.
To specify an end date, uncheck the box to activate the End Date field.
Then, use the up and down arrows to specify the end date.
7. Click Next. The second Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 323).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 343
Time of Day Scheduling

Figure 323. Second Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

8. Click the Member Types selection arrow to display the list of member
types.
9. Select the desired member type to display in the Available Members
list.
10. In the Available Members list, select the members to which you want
the schedule to apply.
11. Click Add to add the members to the Selected Members list. To add
all available members to the Selected Members list, click Add All.
12. Click Next. The Schedule Wizard—Select Events Schedule Responds
To dialog box displays (see Figure 324 on page 345).

344 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

Figure 324. Schedule Wizard—Select Events Schedule Responds to

Dialog Box

Note:
If a schedule contains a mixture of Normal and Optimal events
(such as an Optimal Start and Normal Stop), the members
must be set up as Normal and Optimal.

13. For each member in the Schedules column, define the schedule event
types by selecting the check boxes under the desired column head-
ings. See Table 8 for an explanation of the direct relationship between
schedule member types and event types.

Table 8. Scheduling Member Types

Schedule Member
Type Member Type Events

Normal Optimal Night Lighting Set Analog

Economize

Area* Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Analog Output and No No No No Yes
Analog Value
Binary Output and Yes No No No** No
Binary Value
CPL Yes No No No No
UCMs Yes No No No No
Notes:
*See Table 6 on page 249 for area mode/member mode behavior.
**To control a binary output (BOP) as a lighting member, the BOP must first be setup as a member of an area. This area is then
added into TOD as a lighting event.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 345
Time of Day Scheduling

14. Click Next. The Schedule Wizard—Set Default Event Times dialog
box displays (see Figure 325).

Figure 325. Schedule Wizard—Set Default Event Times Dialog Box

15. For Normal, Optimal, and Lighting events, click the desired check
boxes. Then, set the Start Event and Stop Event times, using the up
and down arrows.
16. To schedule a start time and duration for the Night Economize event,
click the Schedule Night Economize Events check box. Then, set the
start time using the up and down arrows and enter the length of the
event time in the Duration field.
17. To change the set analog start time, click the Set Analog Selected
check box. Then, set the start time using the up and down arrows and
enter the setpoint value in the Value field.
18. Click Next. The final Schedule Wizard dialog box displays (see
Figure 326 on page 347).

346 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Daily Schedule

Figure 326. Final Schedule Wizard Dialog Box

19. Click the check box for each day of the week on which you want the
schedule to be effective. The Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
and Friday boxes are checked as defaults.
20. Click Finish. The Save New Schedule dialog box displays (see
Figure 327).

Figure 327. Save New Schedule Dialog Box

21. Click the BCU Name selection arrow to display the list of available
BCUs.
22. Select the BCU to which you want to save the schedule.
23. Click OK to display the Scheduling screen and the new schedule.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 347
Time of Day Scheduling

Adding an Event to a Schedule

1. Display the schedule you want to change.
2. On the clock grid, right-click the mouse once to display a submenu of
events. The pop-up menu in Figure 328 appears for BCU sites.

Figure 328. List of Events for BCU Sites

3. Select the event you want to add. Depending on the event you select,
a dialog box appears for that event. For example, after you click one of
the time bars, a Change Event Times dialog box similar to the one in
Figure 329 appears. Depending on the event type that you choose to
add, the fields that display in the dialog box vary.

Figure 329. Change Event Times Dialog Box

4. Click the Enable Start Event box.

5. In the Event Starts At field, select the time at which the event will
start.
6. Click the Enable Stop Event box.
7. In the Event Ends At field, select the time when the event will end.
8. Click OK. The time bar for the new event displays in the clock grid.

348 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Removing an Event from a Schedule

Removing an Event from a Schedule

1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. On the time bar for the event you want to remove, click the right
mouse button once to display a list of tasks (see Figure 330).

Figure 330. Displaying a List of Tasks

3. Select Delete Event. The event is deleted.

Changing a Schedule Name

You can only change names for BCU sites.
To change a BCU site name:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. From the Edit menu, select Schedule Name. The Change Schedule
Name dialog box displays (see Figure 331).

Figure 331. Change Schedule Name Dialog Box

3. Enter the new schedule name in the New Name field.

4. Click OK.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 349
Time of Day Scheduling

Adding a Member to a Schedule

You can only perform this function for BCU sites.
To add a member to a schedule:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. In the Schedule Members list box, right-click the mouse to display a
pop-up menu (see Figure 332).

Figure 332. Pop-Up Menu

3. Select Add Members. The Add Members to Schedule dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 333).

Figure 333. Add Members to Schedule Dialog Box

4. Click the Member Types selection arrow to display the list of member
types.
5. Select the desired member type to display in the Available Members
list.
6. Select the member(s) you want to add to the schedule from the Avail-
able Members list.

350 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Removing a Member from a Schedule

7. Click Add to add the member(s) to the Selected Members list. To add
all available members to the Members to Add list, click Add All.
8. Click OK.

Removing a Member from a Schedule

1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. Select the member(s) from the Schedule Members list.
3. In the Schedule Members list box, right-click the mouse to display a
pop-up menu (see Figure 332 on page 350).
4. Select Remove Members. A dialog box displays warning you that you
will permanently remove the member from the schedule.
5. Click Yes to remove the member from the schedule.

Setting or Modifying Offsets for

Schedule Members
Offsets allow each member of a schedule to start before the defined occu-
pied start time and/or stop after the defined occupied stop time. Offsets
are typically used to avoid having all equipment start at the same time.
To set or modify offsets for schedule members:
1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. Select the member you want to offset in the Schedule Members list.
3. Right-click the mouse to display a pop-up menu (see Figure 332 on
page 350).
4. Select Set Member Offsets. The Set Member Offsets dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 334 on page 352).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 351
Time of Day Scheduling

Figure 334. Set Member Offsets Dialog Box

5. Set or modify the Start Advance time and Stop Delay time using the
up and down arrows.
6. Click OK.

Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period

1. On the Scheduling screen, display the schedule you want to change.
2. From the Edit menu, select Effective Period. The Effective Period dia-
log box displays (see Figure 335).

Figure 335. Effective Period Dialog Box

3. To change the Start Date, use the up and down arrows.

4. To change the end date, use the up and down arrows.
To specify no end date, click the No End Date check box.
5. Click OK.

352 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports

Save Events as a Normal Schedule to Weekdays,

Weekends, and Holidays
Use this procedure to save modified schedules to specific days of the week
(Sunday through Saturday) and/or save them as holidays. Before per-
forming the following steps, do the procedure described in one of the fol-
lowing:
• “Adding an Event to a Schedule” on page 348
• “Changing a Schedule’s Effective Period” on page 352
• “Removing an Event from a Schedule” on page 349
To save events as a normal schedule:
1. After you modify an event in the schedule, click Save.
2. The Save Normal Schedule dialog box appears.
3. Left-click the mouse on the days to which you want to save the sched-
ule. Options include:
• BCU Range—Sunday through Saturday
4. Click OK to save the changes for the selected days.

Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports

The schedule report provides information about time of day scheduling
activities over a period of time. You select what information goes into the
report (holidays, normal events, exceptions), the length of the reporting
period (one day, one week, one month, etc.), and how the schedules are
sorted in the report. You can create the report to include as many sched-
ules as you desire or just view the activities of one schedule over a report-
ing period.

Note:
This report is also available in the standard site reports. For
more information about standard site reports see “Designing
Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites” on page 461.

Figure 336 on page 354 shows an example of a time of day schedule report
containing information for multiple schedules. The report is sorted by
start date and has a duration of one year.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 353
Time of Day Scheduling

Figure 336. Time of Day Schedule Report

354 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating Time of Day Schedule Reports

To create a time of day schedule report:

1. From the Scheduling screen click the Report button. The Choose Sort-
ing Criteria and Report Period dialog box displays (Figure 337).
2. Select the option that you want the schedules sorted by.
3. Select the length of the reporting period.
4. Click the Next button to display the Select Schedules dialog box (see
Figure 338).

Figure 337. Sorting Criteria and Report Period Dialog Box

Figure 338. Select Schedules Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 355
Time of Day Scheduling

5. From the Available Schedules for Selected Period list, select the
schedules that you want to include in your report.
6. Click the Add button to add those schedules to the Selected Schedules
list.

Note:
To remove a schedule from the list click the Remove button.

7. Click the Finish button to create the time of day schedule report.

Adding event information to the report

Event information that you can add to the report is selected by default
(see Figure 339). If you don’t want to include an event on the report, click
on the checkbox to deselect it.

Figure 339. Scheduling information

356 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 26

Using the Navigation Tree

The navigation tree is a convenient and intuitive way for users to find and
display information in Tracer Summit. The navigation tree displays next
to the Tracer Summit application window. Daily operators can see where
they are in the system and where they can go. Daily operators can also
use the navigation tree to connect with sites or gather information about
their system. Connecting to BCU sites by double-clicking a node on the
navigation tree is available in Tracer Summit as a standard feature.
Each item on the tree is called a node. For a description of nodes and their
functions, see “Different Types of Nodes” on page 359. Nodes appear auto-
matically as you build sites and add objects. To make your navigation tree
logical and easy to use, arrange the tree to represent the way your organi-
zation is set up. For example, if sites are organized in geographical
regions, arrange nodes based on this geographical layout.
Depending on security level, users can:
• Rearrange an existing navigation tree using drag and drop and cut
and paste commands
• Connect to or disconnect from a site
• Add and remove nodes
• Change the graphic associated with a UCM, area, or site

Note:
Except for systems with shared databases, the navigation tree
is unique to each workstation. You cannot change a navigation
tree on one workstation and have these changes reflected auto-
matically on another workstation. To copy navigation tree
changes from one workstation to another, back up the site data-
base of the workstation where you made the changes and
restore it to the other workstation.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 357
Using the Navigation Tree

The Navigation Tree

The navigation tree graphically depicts where in the system you are and
where you can go. Think of the site node as a place where other sites or
nodes exist. Nodes outside the site node belong to the system. Nodes
inside the site node belong to the site (see Figure 340).
When a node has nodes inside it, a plus (+) symbol displays in front of the
node. Click the + symbol to expand the node and to display the nodes
inside it. After you expand a node, a minus (-) symbol displays in front of
the node. Click the - symbol to collapse the node.

Figure 340. Sample View of the Navigation Tree with Various Nodes

System node
Group of sites node

Panel node
Macro node
Tracer Summit BCU
site node

Custom site graphic

Area node

UCM nodes

Custom global
graphic node

358 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Different Types of Nodes

Different Types of Nodes

The ten types of nodes found on the navigation tree appear in Table 9. For
further information about nodes, see “Basic Considerations in Moving
Nodes” on page 362.

Note:
In the following paragraphs, we refer to connecting to a site by
double-clicking a site node on the navigation tree. Connecting
to sites automatically when you double-click on them is set up
in the System Options editor (see “Setting Connection Features
of the Navigation Tree” on page 492). For more information, see
“Connecting to a Site from the Tree” on page 361.

Table 9. Navigation Tree Nodes: Types, Icons, and Descriptions

Node Type Icon Description/Action

System The Tracer Summit system node belongs to the system. All other nodes are
inside the system node. The system node is the collection of all site nodes.

Tracer Summit A site node is any site in the system that belongs to the system. Site nodes
BCU Site display after you create, restore, or upload a site.
When you double-click on a site node, its linked graphic appears in the appli-
cation window. Double-click the site node again to connect to it or to program
off-line.

Group of Sites; The group of sites node is a collection of sites. It is a custom global graphic
also known as a node belonging to the system site. A group of sites node differs from a cus-
Custom Global tom global graphic node in the following way. A group of sites node has at
Graphic Without site least one site node inside it. The custom global graphic node has no site
nodes, nodes inside it. The group of sites node is not associated with groups.
appears as: When you double-click a group of sites node, its linked graphic displays in the
... application window.
Custom Site … The custom site graphic node is found inside a site node. When you double-
Graphic click a custom site graphic node, its linked graphic displays in the application
window. You can also double-click the node to connect to it or to program
off-line.
Area Node … An area node appears for each area defined in a BCU site. UCM and custom
site graphic nodes are commonly found inside area nodes. Double-click an
area node to see its linked graphic in the application window. If you are not
connected already, the Tracer Summit software also connects you to the site
to which the area node belongs.
UCM Node … A UCM node appears for each UCM defined in a BCU site. UCM nodes are
grouped together, most often inside area or custom site graphic nodes. Dou-
ble-click a UCM node to see its linked graphic in the application window. If
you are not connected already, the Tracer Summit software also connects
you to the site to which the UCM belongs.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 359
Using the Navigation Tree

Using the Navigation Tree

Use the navigation tree to access nodes, sites, equipment, and macros.

Accessing the Tree

◆ From the View menu, select Navigation Tree.
• To expand the entire tree, double-click the system node.
• To collapse the tree, double-click the system node.

Using the Tree Menu and Pop-up Menus

The selections that are available from the Tree menu or pop-up menus
depend on the type of node you have selected. Therefore, using the pop-up
menu is a convenient way to access actions such as Cut, Paste, Add/Edit/
Change/Remove Graphics, Connect Site, Add Macro, and so on.
To access a pop-up menu:
◆ Right-click the mouse on a node in the navigation tree to display a
pop-up menu specific to that type of node (see Figure 341).

Figure 341. Navigation Tree Pop-up Menu

360 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Navigation Tree

Accessing Sites and Equipment

◆ To access a node and its equipment, perform one of the following:
• Click the + symbol to expand a node to display nodes inside it.
• Click the - symbol to collapse a node when nodes inside it are dis-
played.
• Double-click a node to open it. This opens the site but does not
necessarily connect to it. See “Connecting to a Site from the Tree”
for more information on connecting to sites when you double-click
their nodes.

Connecting to a Site from the Tree

When you use the navigation tree to connect to a site, you can only use
the connection method you set up in site configuration in the Site Connec-
tion Wizard. For more information, see “Creating a New Site” on page 42.
You can configure the nodes on a workstation tree to automatically con-
nect to sites when you double-click site nodes or any node(s) inside them.
For more information about this procedure, see “Changing Advanced Set-
tings” on page 489.
◆ To automatically connect to a site, double-click the site node or any
node inside that site.

Note:
The advanced option for connecting automatically might not
work due to workstation hardware limitations. For example, if
your workstation does not have enough modems to communi-
cate simultaneously with every remote site, the system displays
an error message.

Disconnecting from a Site

◆ While connected to the site, from the Connect menu, select Discon-
nect. The site is disconnected from the workstation but stays open for
offline programming.

Closing a Site
◆ With the site open, from the Connect menu select Close Site.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 361
Using the Navigation Tree

Refreshing the Navigation Tree

The navigation tree can display up to 32,768 nodes. Any node created
afterwards does not display until you make room for it by closing other
nodes or sites. When you try to add node 32,769, for example, the naviga-
tion will not display the new node until you collapse a site. Collapsing and
expanding sites refreshes the tree.

Note:
Use the Refresh command as a quick way to collapse all nodes
in the tree.

Creating Nodes
There are several ways to create nodes. These include site configuration,
site uploads, site restorations, the Area editor, restoring graphics, and the
Graphics editor. Once you add nodes to the tree, you can further modify
them by cutting and pasting or dragging and dropping them inside other
nodes.

Basic Considerations in Moving Nodes

“Different Types of Nodes” on page 359 describes and explains the six
types of nodes. Note the difference between a system node and a site
node. You can move site nodes but not the system node. Table 10 lists
what nodes you can and cannot move.

Table 10. Moving Nodes

You can move You cannot move

Custom graphic nodes System nodes inside site nodes

Area nodes System nodes inside any of the
objects belonging to a site
UCM nodes Nodes that belong to a site outside of
that site

362 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating Nodes

Cutting and Pasting Nodes

1. Click the node that you want to cut and paste.
• For consecutive nodes, click on the first node, then hold down the
Shift key and click on the next node.
• Otherwise, click on the first node, then hold down the Ctrl key
and click on each additional node.
2. From the Tree menu, select Cut.
3. Click the node in which you want to paste the cut node.
4. From the Tree menu, select Paste.

Dragging and Dropping Nodes

For an example of dragging and dropping nodes, see “Grouping Nodes” on
page 364. You can also consult the procedure for dragging and dropping
nodes explained in the Daily Operations guide.

Creating Nodes that Belong to the System

Some nodes are associated with the system and some nodes are associ-
ated with specific sites. Site nodes and custom global graphics, for exam-
ple, belong to the system. Panel and macro nodes belong to specific sites.
All nodes are found inside the system icon. For more information, see
“Different Types of Nodes” on page 359.
Consult the following procedures for creating nodes that belong to the
system.
• You create site nodes during site configuration, uploads, and restora-
tions. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Configuring Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites.”
• To create custom global graphic nodes, access the Graphics editor. For
more information, see “About Site and Global Graphics” on page 407.
• To restore custom global graphics, see “Restoring Global Graphics” on
page 560.

Creating Nodes Inside Site Nodes

Consult the following procedures for creating nodes inside site nodes.
• To create custom site graphic nodes, use the Graphics editor. For more
information, see “About Site and Global Graphics” on page 407.
• To restore custom site graphics, see “Restoring Site Graphics” on
page 561.
• To create UCM nodes, use the UCM editor. For more information, see
“Creating a New UCM” on page 153.
• To create area nodes, use the Area editor. For more information, see
“Creating an Area” on page 251.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 363
Using the Navigation Tree

Grouping Nodes
Group nodes to better organize your site. For example, create a custom
site graphic titled UCMs and then group all UCMs under the graphic
node.
To group nodes:
1. Click the first node and left-click the mouse.
2. Drag it onto the second node.
3. Release the left mouse button. The first node moves inside the second
node.

Finding a Node
Use the following procedure to find a node. For example, if you want to
find a specific piece of equipment but have forgotten which site it belongs
to, use Find.
Tracer Summit does not search sites for which you do not have security
access. If you use Find to locate a node that is inside a site to which you do
not have access, then Tracer Summit will not find the node for you.
Any user, except Nobody Logged On, can find nodes outside the site level,
regardless of their security level. Nodes that exist outside the site level
include custom global graphic, group of sites, and site.
To find a node on the navigation tree:
1. From the Tree menu, select Find. The Find Item in Tree dialog box
displays.
2. Type the name of the node that you are looking for in the Look for
field. Use wildcards if you want. (See online Help for information on
wildcard search commands.)
3. Click Find. The Tracer Summit software searches for the node and
highlights it when found. Otherwise, a dialog box informs you that
the node was not found.
4. Click Close.

364 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Modifying the Tree

Modifying the Tree

The following procedures describe how to modify the navigation tree.
These procedures include removing nodes, adding back nodes you
removed, changing the graphic of a node, and modifying macro nodes.

Assigning Graphics to Nodes

You can assign the graphic for a Tracer Summit BCU site object, UCM
object, or area object on the tree. You cannot, however, assign the graphic
for a custom graphic object on the tree. This is because custom graphic
nodes always represent themselves.
The only types of nodes that do not have a graphic associated with them
are the system node, panels, and keyboard macros. You cannot assign
graphics to these nodes.
To change the graphic assigned to a node:
1. Select the desired node to modify.
2. From the Tree menu, select Change Graphic. The Change Graphic
dialog box appears (see Figure 342).

Figure 342. Change Graphic Dialog Box

3. Select the type of graphic that you want to use for the selected node:
• Click Standard for a list of available standard graphics.
• Click Site for a list of site-only graphics (graphics created just for
the site where the selected node resides).
• Click Global to display a list of available global standard and cus-
tom graphics.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 365
Using the Navigation Tree

4. From the Graphics list, select the graphic you want to assign to this
node.
5. Click OK to link the node to the selected graphic.

Editing the Graphic of a Node

1. Double-click the desired node to modify.
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics Editor. The Graphics editor
displays.
3. To edit the graphic, follow the procedures described in “Editing
Graphic Properties” on page 376.

Removing Node(s)
You can remove custom graphic, UCM, area, and macro objects from the
navigation tree. You cannot remove the system node or site nodes. To
remove these, use the Delete Object utility. For more information, see
“Deleting a Site” on page 572.
For example, if you remove a custom graphic node that has UCMs in it,
the UCM nodes under the custom graphic node will also be removed.
If you try to remove a site node that has a macro inside it, the macro node
cannot be removed. Therefore, it relocates inside a higher level site node
or inside the system node.
To remove a node from the navigation tree:
1. Click the node(s) that you want to remove.
2. From the Tree menu, select Remove Graphic/Remove Macro.
If the selected node has nodes inside it, the Node Removal Confirma-
tion dialog box appears asking you whether you are sure you want to
remove the node and all nodes under it.
3. Click OK on the Node Removal Confirmation dialog box. The nodes
are removed from the tree.

366 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Modifying the Tree

Adding Back a Removed Node

When you remove one or more nodes from the navigation tree, you can
later add them back to the tree without recreating their objects, as long as
the objects they reference have not been deleted from the system. The
nodes are added back to a site node or the Tracer Summit system node
(depending upon where they were located originally).

Note:
• A graphical node can only appear in the tree once.
• Any macro node can be shared between many sites, so it
might appear in several sites at a time.

To add a previously removed node:

1. Click in the tree where you want to add back a removed node:
• For previously removed custom graphic nodes that belong to the
system, click on any site or custom global graphic node.
• For previously removed custom graphic nodes that belong to spe-
cific site, click anywhere within that site.
2. From the Tree menu, select Add Graphic. The Add Graphics dialog
box appears. The dialog box displays the nodes that were previously
removed.
3. Select the node(s) you want to add back to the tree.
4. Click OK. The node appears back in the tree.

Note:
Since the tree automatically sorts nodes alphanumerically, the
node might not appear in the spot you wanted it. In that case,
drag and drop or cut and paste it where it belongs.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 367
Using the Navigation Tree

368 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 27

Using the Graphics Editor

One of the most powerful tools available in Tracer Summit for Windows is
the Graphics editor, which allows you to create and customize graphics
(also called graphic objects) for your system with specialized tools and
menus. Graphics in Tracer Summit are the primary way in which daily
operators check system status and perform operator overrides.
Operators rely on the graphics you create to display information quickly
and clearly. You can create graphics to:
• Provide real-time status information about a particular object, or
about the system
• Give users the ability to change an object’s state or setpoint
• Display an animated image
As an advanced user, you can build and adapt graphics to be displayed
when an item is clicked on the navigation tree, when a target is clicked
within a graphic, and when the Graphic button is clicked in a UCM editor.
Using Tracer Summit’s Graphics editor, you can:
• Edit the standard graphics provided with Tracer Summit to use on
one or more sites as custom graphics
• Create new graphics
• Customize the background, font, size and appearance of fields on a
graphic, as well as the background of the graphic itself
• Create expanded messages
• Create runtime graphs for either live properties or trended objects
• Create links to external sources
For descriptions and information about specific fields, toolbar buttons,
dialog boxes, and palette buttons in the Graphics editor, see Tracer Sum-
mit online help.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 369
Using the Graphics Editor

About Graphics
In Tracer Summit, you can create a graphic by adding graphic elements,
such as text (static or dynamic), images, target links to other graphics,
and controls, to a background image. A background image might be a
solid color or a floor plan of a site. You place layers of these graphic ele-
ments (also called fields) on the background to create a composite graphic.
You can also layer an animated image on top of another image, or place a
static text label on top of a control. Target fields layer over other images
to create links to other graphic objects. You can move intersecting layers
of images and other fields behind or in front of other layers. Figure 343
shows an example graphic.

Note:
• A graphic is linked to an object by its name. If you change
the name of an object that is referenced by a field on a
graphic, the graphic will be unable to display data for the
object. Instead, “Object Unavailable” will be displayed.
• All references to Windows folder names in this chapter
refer to subdirectories of the location where Tracer Sum-
mit is installed on your PC Workstation, which is typically
C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit. Subdirectories within
this folder include Graphics\Standard, Graphics\Custom
and Graphics\site name (where site name is the name of
the current site).

Figure 343. Example of a Graphic in the Graphics Editor

Target
Image

Target
Buttons

Static Fields Layered

Text Background
Over an Image With Grid On
Field

370 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Accessing the Graphics Editor

Accessing the Graphics Editor

1. Display the graphic you want to edit.
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor. The displayed graphic
view is transformed.

Using the Graphics Editor Tools

When the Graphics editor is open, two groups of tools display: a graphics
toolbar and a floating tool palette that you can move around the screen
using the mouse. Figure 344 shows these tools.

Figure 344. Graphics Editor Toolbar and Tool Palette

The Graphics editor palette allows you to select from among 17 types of
fields to insert. Table 11 on page 372 shows the types of fields that are
available for insertion and configuration. When you click a palette button
or select a field for editing, an editor displays that provides configuration
options for the corresponding field type. More information about these
editors is available in Tracer Summit online help.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 371
Using the Graphics Editor

Table 11. Graphic Field Types and Palette Buttons

Field Type Field Name Palette Description

Button

Status Status text Inserts text drawn from the property you specify.
Fields

Analog in 5 color Inserts a field that shows the viewer a color-coded update of
the alarm state of an analog property you specify.

Binary Inserts text drawn from the binary property you specify.

Binary animation Inserts images to create animation from multiple image files
that run when the binary property is in a state you specify.

Control Override control Inserts a button with a text label you provide. In the runtime
Fields view, clicking the resulting button displays the Override dia-
log box, allowing users to alter the system via the graphic.

Setpoint control Inserts a numeric text field. In the runtime view, the field
allows users to change settings of numerical data.

Binary Check Box control Inserts an unchecked check box. In the runtime view, users
can check the check box to change the state of the property
you specify.

Selection List control Inserts a drop-down list that contains entries linked to a
property. In the runtime view, users can select from this list
to change the state of the associated property.

Text or
Static text Inserts text that you specify.
Image
Fields

Image Inserts a graphic image (any BMP, GIF, or JPG file).

AVI movie Inserts an AVI movie that runs for as long as the graphic is
displayed or until the movie ends.

372 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Graphics Editor Tools

Table 11. Graphic Field Types and Palette Buttons (Continued)

Field Type Field Name Palette Description

Button

Target
Target text Inserts a line of text that links to another graphic.
Fields

Target image Inserts a graphic image that links to another graphic.

Target button Inserts a button that links to another graphic.

Target External Inserts a button that links to a Web site, a file, or an applica-
tion outside of Tracer Summit.

Graph field
Graphing Inserts a graph on the graphic.

Cursor
Default cursor Changes the cursor from an insertion point back to a selec-
tion cursor.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 373
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Graphics Pop-Up Menu

In the Graphics editor, you can select options from the menu bar or select
options from a pop-up menu. To display a pop-up menu, right-click on a
graphic field or on the graphic background. You can then click a selection.
If the mouse button is positioned over a field, the pop-up menu items are
specific to the field. Otherwise, the pop-up menu is specific to the entire
graphic.

Using the Grid to Organize Fields

When you edit a graphic in the Graphics editor, you can display a default
grid pattern of colored dots to assist in aligning graphic elements. You can
change the default settings of grid color (black) and spacing in pixels (15).
When the grid is on, an optional Snap to Grid feature automatically
aligns fields to the grid when you insert or move them.

Displaying the Grid on a Graphic

1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, from the Layout
menu, select Grid Options. The Grid Options sub-menu displays.
2. Click the On option to display the grid, which appears as a matrix of
dots (see Figure 345). To hide the grid, click the On option again.
When you save the graphic, the grid settings are saved with it.

Figure 345. Graphic with Grid On

374 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Graphics Editor Tools

Changing the Grid Color on a Graphic

The Graphics editor automatically chooses a contrasting grid color where
the grid overlaps any image.
To select a different color:
1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 374).
2. From the Layout menu, click Grid Options. The Grid Options sub-
menu displays.
3. Select Color and from the Color sub-menu, select Red, Blue, Green or
Black.
The grid options are saved with each graphic. The next time this graphic
is edited with the grid on, selections default to the same grid options.

Using the Snap To Grid Feature on a Graphic

The Graphics editor automatically enables the Snap To Grid feature
when the grid is turned on. This feature causes the upper left-hand cor-
ner of any field that is added to or moved on the graphic to be aligned
with the nearest upper left-hand grid intersection.
To disable the feature:
1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 374).
2. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options to display the Grid
Options sub-menu.
3. Click Snap To Grid.
To enable the feature:
◆ Repeat the steps above. When you click Snap To Grid and it has no
check mark, Tracer Summit inserts a check mark and re-enables the
feature.
The grid options are saved with each graphic. The next time this graphic
is edited with the grid on, the Snap To Grid selection defaults to the set-
ting you chose.

Configuring Grid Spacing

1. With the graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, make sure the grid
is turned on (see “Displaying the Grid on a Graphic” on page 374.)
2. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options to display the Grid
Options sub-menu.
3. Click Grid Spacing. The Grid Spacing dialog box displays (see
Figure 346 on page 376).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 375
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 346. Grid Spacing Dialog Box

4. Enter a number between 2 and 100. This is the number of pixels

between intersection points on the grid.
5. Click OK to display the Graphics editor and the grid with the spacing
you specified.
The grid configuration is saved with each graphic. The next time this
graphic is edited with the grid on, it defaults to the configuration you set
up.

Editing Graphic Properties

While you are in the Graphics editor, you can edit the following graphic
properties: the background image of the graphic, the security access to
the graphic, and the graphic’s context object (filters that set the site
name, object type and context of the object when it is launched). All these
properties are edited at the Graphic Properties dialog box. You can also
view the location and HTML file name of the graphic.

Changing the Background of a Graphic

1. Display the graphic whose background you want to change in the
Graphics editor. Do not select any fields.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays (see Figure 347 on page 377).

Note:
While you are in the Graphics editor, you can also access the
Graphic Properties dialog box from the graphics pop-up menu.
Move the mouse cursor so that it is not positioned over any
fields, then right-click to display the pop-up menu and select
Edit Properties.

376 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 347. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Background Image Screen

3. Click Browse to display the Locate Image dialog box (see Figure 348).

Figure 348. Locate Image Dialog Box

4. Select an image (see “Using the Locate Image Dialog Box” below).
5. Click OK to return to the Graphic Properties dialog box.
6. Click OK to return to the Graphics editor window.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 377
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Locate Image Dialog Box

1. Click Browse in the Graphic Properties dialog box or in the Setup
screen of the Insert Image dialog box. The Locate Image dialog box
displays (see Figure 348).
2. Select either Global Images or Current Site Images. If you select Glo-
bal Images, you can select an image available for the system. If you
select Current Site images, you can select only an image associated
with this particular site where you are logged in. The Image Files
field lists graphics according to the current check box selections.
3. If you selected Global Images, select either Standard or Custom to
specify the type of images you want this dialog box to list. Standard
images are included with Tracer Summit. Custom images are created
by editing a standard image or by starting with a blank image.
Images specified as Global Images are available to all sites on the sys-
tem.
4. Click the GIF, JPG, or BMP check box to display a particular graphic
file type in the Image Files field.
5. Select the image file name you want. The Sample field displays a pre-
view of the image. The Path text line identifies its location.
6. Click OK to insert the selected image in the current graphic.

Note:
If images are not displaying properly in the Graphics editor,
your workstation’s Display settings in Windows might need cor-
rection. Your workstation must be set up for a minimum of 16-
bit colors. To check display settings, click the Windows Start
button. Click Settings, then Control Panel. From the Control
Panel, select Display.

Viewing a Graphic’s File Name and Location

Sometimes you need to know the file name and location of a graphic, if,
for example, you want to copy or delete the graphic using Windows
Explorer.
To view a graphic’s file name and location:
1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab (see Figure 349). The graphic’s file
name and location displays in the HTML Path field.

378 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 349. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

Setting Up Security for a Graphic

You can specify whether users have access to a graphic.
To set up security for a graphic:
1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab (see Figure 350).

Figure 350. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 379
Using the Graphics Editor

4. Click the Security Classes button. The Change Security Classes dia-
log box displays (see Figure 351).

Figure 351. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

5. Click the Access field next to each class to grant or deny access. A
check in the field grants access. No check denies access.
6. Click OK to display the Classes screen.
7. Click Save.

Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic

When you create a new graphic object, you may give the graphic a con-
text. For example, if you have created a graphic of a floor plan, you might
specify its site and the area object that controls the floor displayed by the
graphic. When the floor plan graphic is displayed, the context allows the
user to display the appropriate schedule or report for the area entered as
the current object of the floor plan.

Note:
The context object also will be used to fill in template fields on a
graphic when it is displayed. For more information on template
graphics, see “Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template
Fields” on page 416.

To select the context object:

1. Display the graphic in the Graphics editor. Make sure no fields are
selected.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Context Object tab (see Figure 352).

380 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Editing Graphic Properties

Figure 352. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Context Object Screen

4. In the Site Name field, select the site. To select the active site, select
<default>.
• If you select <default> for the site name, the Object Type and
Object Name fields display <default> also.
• If you choose a specific site name, the Object Type and Object
Name fields display the first type and name defined on the site.
5. In the Object Type field, select from the list of object types defined for
the site you specified.
6. In the Object Name field, select from the list of objects defined for the
site and object type you specified.
7. Click OK.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 381
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

You may want to customize graphic objects for specific sites by adding
fields, changing the name displayed for fields, or by moving fields to dif-
ferent locations on the graphic background. (The changes are not saved to
the standard graphic; instead, your edited graphic is saved in the Graph-
ics/ Custom folder.)

Inserting a Graphic Field

1. In the Graphics editor, display the graphic in which you want to
insert the field.
2. Click the palette button associated with the type of field you want to
insert (see Table 11 on page 372). The cursor turns into an insert
prompt (see Figure 353).

Figure 353. Insert Prompt

3. Position the insert prompt at the location on the graphic where you
want to insert the field. Drag the prompt to define the shape and size
you want the field to be. The field is inserted and an editor appropri-
ate for the field type you selected displays.

Note:
For images and AVI movies, you can let Tracer Summit deter-
mine the field size based on the image size and proportion. Sim-
ply click once on the graphic to insert the field (rather than
dragging to define the field size). The field’s editor displays.

4. Complete the fields on the editor screens.

5. Click OK to return to the Graphics editor. (For field types that refer-
ence a specific property, the OK button is not available until you spec-
ify a property in the Property field.)

382 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Accessing the Graphic Field Editor

1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field to show that it is being edited (see Figure 354).

Figure 354. Field with Cross-Hatched Border

2. Click the right mouse button to display a pop-up menu, then select
Edit Properties. An editor displays that corresponds to this field type.
3. Make changes to the information as necessary. Your edits take effect
when you click OK.

Selecting a Property Reference for Graphic Fields

On the Property screen, you can specify the site name, object type, object
name, and property for the graphic.
To select a property reference for a graphic field:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. In the Site Name field, select the name of the site.
3. In the Object Type field, select an object type from the list of those
defined for the specified site. The selection will filter the Object Name
field to display only those property types and instances defined in the
site.
4. In the Object Name field, select the name of the object from the list of
those available.
5. In the Property Name field, select the property from the list of those
available. (You must complete this field to exit the screen.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 383
Using the Graphics Editor

Editing Setup Information for a Graphic Field

The setup information for a graphic field gives a name to the field for ref-
erence while you are in the Graphics editor. The name displays on the
graphic field for Static Text, Target Text, Target button fields, and Target
External button fields, but does not display on the graphic for other fields.
The Setup screen for other fields requires additional information (see
“Setup Information for Graphic Fields” on page 385 and “Creating
Graphic Links to External Sources” on page 394).
To edit a field’s setup information:
1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a pop-up menu, then select
Edit Properties. The graphic field editor for this field displays.
3. Click the Setup tab. Figure 355 shows the Setup screen for a status
text field.

Figure 355. Status Text Editor—Setup Screen

4. Edit the information as necessary. Refer to “Setup Information for

Graphic Fields” on page 385.
5. Click OK.

384 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Graphic Fields

The Setup screen of the graphic field editor changes based on the field
type selected. The following sections give detailed information on the
setup information for specific field types.

Setup Information for Status Text, Setpoint Control, Static Text,

and Target Text Fields, and Target Buttons
Setup information for Status text, Setpoint control, Static text, and Tar-
get text fields, as well as for target button fields, is similar. When you dis-
play the field’s editor and select the Setup tab, you can edit the Editor
Text field. This field indicates the text that displays on the graphic for
static text, target text, and target buttons. (For Target External setup
information, see “Creating Graphic Links to External Sources” on
page 394. When you display the Target External editor, select the Desti-
nation tab to edit the Display Text field.)
Figure 356 shows the Setup screen for a status text field.

Figure 356. Status Text Editor—Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 385
Using the Graphics Editor

Setup Information for Analog in 5 Color Fields

Figure 357 shows the Setup screen of the Analog in 5 Color editor.

Figure 357. Analog in 5 Color Editor—Setup Screen

Setup options include the following:

• For an analog input object, the alarm limit default settings are dis-
played. For other analog values, edit the alarm and warning settings
as desired.
• Click with the right mouse button on the field labels to change the col-
ors that display for each warning, if desired.

386 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Binary Text Fields

Figure 358 shows the Setup screen of the Binary Text editor.

Figure 358. Binary Text Editor—Setup Screen

:

Setup options include the following:

• Type a label for the graphic field in the Editor Text field. (This label
will not display on the graphic.)
• Edit the text displayed when the property is active in the Active Text
field, if desired.
• Edit the text displayed when the property is inactive in the Inactive
Text field, if desired.
• Click the Change button to select a different color displayed for the
Active Text and Inactive Text, if desired.
• Click the Change button to select a different background color behind
the text, if desired.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 387
Using the Graphics Editor

Setup Information for Binary Animation Fields

Figure 359 shows the Setup screen of the Binary Animation editor.

Figure 359. Binary Animation Editor—Setup Screen

Setup options include the following:

• Select whether you want to display the images for Active State or
Inactive State.
• For each state, click the Add button to select the image(s) needed to
create the animation from the Locate Image dialog box (see Figure
348 on page 377).

Note:
You can not change the state an image represents after it has
been added. If you add an image in one state and want to
change it to the other state, delete the image. Select the state
you want it added to, then add the image.

• Click the up or down arrow button to change the order the frames are
displayed, as desired.
• In the Frame Delay field, specify the number of milliseconds you want
the frames to display. (This number applies to all of the images for the
animation. A lower number makes the animation appear faster.)
• To test the effect of the animation, click the Test Animation button.

388 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Setup Information for Images, Target Images, and AVI Movies

Setup information for image fields and AVI movie fields is similar.
Figure 360 shows the editor Setup screen for an image field.

Figure 360. Image Editor—Setup Screen

To select an image, click the Browse button and select one from the
Locate Image dialog box (see Figure 348 on page 377).
After you have selected an image, a sample displays on the Setup screen.

Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields

For any graphic fields with text, including status text, setpoint, static
text, and target text fields, you can modify the text styles or borders of the
fields.
To edit text styles or borders:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. Click the Style tab. Figure 361 on page 390 shows the Style screen for
a status text field. A preview of the font displays in the Font area.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 389
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 361. Status Text Editor—Style Screen

3. In the Font field, select a font for the text.

Note:
Font styles and sizes vary by PC. You must ensure that the PC
Workstation that the graphic will be displayed on has the corre-
sponding font.

4. In the Size field, select a font size.

5. Check the appropriate boxes (if any) for bold or italic text.
6. To change the color of the text, in the Foreground Color field, click the
Change button and select a color.
7. To change the color of the text background, in the Background Color
field, click the Change button and select a color.
8. To change the number of decimal places for numbers, select a value in
the Digits Right of Decimal field.

Note:
The number you enter here will take effect only if the graphic
field will display numeric information.

9. Click the Border tab. Figure 362 on page 391 shows the Border screen
for a status text field.

390 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Figure 362. Status Text Editor—Border Screen

10. In the Width field, select the width of the border (in pixels).
11. In the Style field, select the border’s style (such as solid, dotted or
dashed).
12. To change the color of the border from black, in the Color field, click
the Change button and select a color.
13. Click OK when you are finished.

Selecting the Destination for Target Fields

One navigation method you can provide to daily operators is a target
field, which can be Target text, a Target image, a Target button, or a Tar-
get External button. When the user passes the mouse pointer over a tar-
get field, the pointer changes into a pointing finger. When the user clicks
on the target field, the view links to another graphic (called the target
field’s destination). By inserting target fields, you can provide access to
other graphics in the site—you can even insert target fields that link to
graphics at other sites. Target External buttons allow you to link to exter-
nal file sources (see “Creating Graphic Links to External Sources” on
page 394).
When you create the target field, you can choose whether you want the
destination graphic to replace the launching graphic or to appear in a sep-
arate window. The user is able to return to the launching graphic by click-
ing the Back button, or by closing the window containing the second
graphic (if displayed in a separate window).
If the user does not have access to the destination graphic, the cursor does
not change into a pointing finger.
To select the destination:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the graphic that has the target field
you want to edit.
2. Click on the target field to select it.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 391
Using the Graphics Editor

3. Click the right mouse button, then select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu. The graphic field editor displays for that target field.
Figure 363 shows the Target Text editor.

Figure 363. Target Text Editor—Destination Screen

4. At the Destination screen, click UCM/Application Objects or Graphic

Objects, depending on which graphic you want users to see after they
click this target field. The UCM or application destination displays a
graphic that is associated with the object.

Note:
If you select UCM/Application Objects, the context is supplied,
so the fields of the Context Object screen are not available. If
you select Graphic Objects, you need to select the context. See
“Selecting the Context Object for a Graphic” on page 380. On
the Context Object screen, make selections for the Site Name
and Object Name fields.

5. In the Site Name field, select the site that contains the UCM/Applica-
tion object or graphic you want users to see after they click this target
field in the current graphic.
6. In the Object Name field, select the name of the UCM or graphic you
want users to see after they click this target in the current graphic.

Note:
If you selected Graphic Objects in step 4, the Object Name field
changes to the Graphic Name field.

7. In the Editor Text field, select whether you want the target field to
display the destination object name or custom text.
8. If you want the second graphic to display in a separate window that
appears over the current graphic after the target field is clicked, click

392 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Open New Window. (Some users may not be able to make the selec-
tion to open a second graphic window due to their security level.)
9. Click OK when you are finished completing all the editor screens.

Selecting the Context Object for Target Fields

When you link to another graphic using a target field, the context infor-
mation is passed on to the Report and Scheduling editors, and to the new
graphic for use in template fields. See “Creating and Modifying Graphics
with Template Fields” on page 416.
To select the context object for a target field:
1. Display the graphic field editor for the field:
• When you insert a new field, the editor automatically displays.
• For existing fields, position the mouse pointer over the field, then
click the right mouse button and select Edit Properties from the
pop-up menu.
2. Click the Context Object tab. Figure 364 shows the Context Object
screen for a target text field.

Figure 364. Target Text Editor—Context Object Screen

3. In Site Name field, select <default>.

4. In the Site Name field, select the site. To select the active site, select
<default>.
• If you select <default> for the site name, the Object Type and
Object Name fields display <default> also.
• If you choose a specific site name, the Object Type and Object
Name fields display the first type and name defined on the site.
5. In the Object Type field, select from the list of object types defined for
the site you specified.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 393
Using the Graphics Editor

6. In the Object Name field, select from the list of objects defined for the
site and object type you specified.
7. Click OK.

Creating Graphic Links to External Sources

You can create graphic links to external sources using the Target Exter-
nal button. The Target External button behaves similarly to a shortcut
icon on a workstation desktop. It links the graphic to a source outside of
Tracer Summit, such as a Microsoft Word document, an Adobe Acrobat
file, or a Web site through Internet Explorer. The external application
opens in a separate window and runs independently of the Tracer Sum-
mit application.
The Target External button allows you to:
• Launch an application outside of Tracer Summit
• Open a file using an application outside of Tracer Summit, provided
the file is associated with an application
• Opens to a Web site using Internet Explorer
To create a graphic link to an external file:
1. In the Graphics editor, click the Target External button on the tool
palette. The cursor turns into an insert prompt.
2. Position the insert prompt at the location on the graphic where you
want the button to appear. Click to display the Target External editor.
Figure 365 shows the destination screen of the Target External editor.
3. In the Display Text field, enter the label you want the button to dis-
play.
4. In the Target field, create a link to an external application or file by
either typing the target path or clicking the Browse button to select
the application or file.
To create a link to a Web site, either type in the Web address or open
Internet Explorer and browse to select the site. Copy the Web site
address and paste it into the Display Text field.
The selected path or address will display in the Target field, as shown
in Figure 365 on page 395.

394 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Editing Graphic Fields

Figure 365. Target External Editor—Destination Screen

5. Use the Style tab if you want to change the appearance of the button
(see “Editing Text Styles and Borders for Graphic Fields” on
page 389).
6. Click OK when you are finished completing the editor screens. The
Target External button will appear at the point where you positioned
the insert prompt (see step 2).
7. To edit the button, right-click on the button and select Edit Properties
from the pop-up menu.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 395
Using the Graphics Editor

Organizing Graphic Fields

When you are creating new graphic fields or modifying existing fields, you
may want to:
• Move one or more fields to a different location on the graphic
• Resize one or more fields to be the same size
• Copy (or cut) fields and paste them on another graphic
• Align several fields along their top, bottom, left, or right edges

Selecting a Graphic Field

◆ Click once over the field. A cross-hatched border displays around the
field.

Selecting Multiple Fields at Once

1. Click the first field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field to show that it is the primary field.
When you perform actions requiring fields to match position, or size,
or alignment, this primary field is used as a model for the other fields.
(If you do not want this field to be the primary field, click Default Cur-
sor on the palette, then make a different selection.)
2. Holding down the Ctrl key, click one or more additional fields on the
same graphic. Fields do not need to be of the same type to be selected
at the same time.
A striped border displays around these subsequent items you select to
show that they are secondary fields (see Figure 366). When you per-
form actions requiring fields to match position, or size, or alignment,
these fields change to match the primary field.

Figure 366. Primary and Secondary Fields

Primary field with
cross-hatched border

Secondary fields with

striped borders

396 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Organizing Graphic Fields

Moving a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to move. (You can also move multiple selected
fields at once. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once” on page 396.)
After you select the field, the cursor turns into a movement cursor
(see Figure 367).

Figure 367. Movement Cursor

2. Drag the field to a new location within the graphic. All fields selected
with this field also move.
To move the field just one pixel at a time, press the left, right, up or
down arrow keys on your keyboard while the movement cursor is dis-
played.
When you release the mouse button, the default cursor returns.

Resizing a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field.
2. Use the mouse to grab one of the edges or corners of the field. The cur-
sor changes to directional arrows showing the direction in which the
field dimension can be changed.
3. Drag the field in the direction of the arrows to increase or decrease its
size. When you release the mouse button, the default cursor returns.

Cutting and Pasting a Graphic Field

1. Click the field you want to cut. A cross-hatched border displays
around the field. (You can also select multiple fields to cut simulta-
neously. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once” on page 396.)
2. Click Cut Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to remove
the field from the graphic (see Figure 368).

Figure 368. Cut Selected Field(s) Button

3. Place the cursor at the location where you want to paste the field you
removed. This can be a location on the same graphic or on a different
graphic.
4. Click Paste Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to insert
the field in the new location (see Figure 369). The field is inserted at
the new location.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 397
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 369. Paste Selected Field(s) Button

Copying a Graphic Field

1. Use the default cursor to click the field you want to edit. A cross-
hatched border displays around the field. (You can also select multiple
fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Multiple Fields at Once”
on page 396.)
2. Click Copy Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar (see
Figure 370).

Figure 370. Copy Selected Field(s) Button

3. Place the cursor at the location within the graphic where you want to
paste the field you copied. This can be a location on the same graphic
or on a different graphic.
4. Click Paste Selected Field(s) on the Graphics editor toolbar to insert
the field in the additional location (see Figure 369).
5. If additional configuration is required to distinguish the copied field
from the original field, complete this configuration.

Aligning Graphic Fields

You can use the Align buttons on the Graphics editor toolbar to align sec-
ondary graphic fields with the primary field you select.
To align graphic fields:
1. Click the field to which you want to align the other fields. A cross-
hatched border displays around this primary field.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the other fields that you want to
align to the primary field. A striped border displays around these sec-
ondary fields.
3. On the Graphics editor toolbar, click one of the following:
• Align Left, to align all of the secondary fields along the left of the
primary field
• Align Right, to align all of the secondary fields along the right of
the primary field
• Align Top, to align all of the secondary fields along the top of the
primary field
• Align Bottom, to align all of the secondary fields along the bottom
of the primary field
See Figure 371 on page 399.

398 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Organizing Graphic Fields

Figure 371. Align Buttons

Align
Left, Right, Top, Bottom

Making Graphic Fields the Same Size

You can use the Make Same buttons of the Graphic editor toolbar to make
several fields the same size as a primary field that you select.
To make graphic fields the same size:
1. Click the field which you want to use for the size of all selected fields.
A cross-hatched border displays around this primary field.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the other fields that you want to
make the same size as the primary field. A striped border displays
around these secondary fields.
3. On the Graphics editor toolbar, click one of the following:
• Make Same Height, to make all of the secondary fields the same
height as the primary field
• Make Same Width to make all of the secondary fields the same
width as the primary field
• Make Same Size to make all of the secondary fields the same size
as the primary field
See Figure 372.

Figure 372. Make Same Buttons

Make Same
Height, Width, Size

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 399
Using the Graphics Editor

Moving Graphic Field Layers Forward or Back

When you add graphic fields, they are layered on the background in the
order created. For example, if you create a Static Text label first, then add
a Target Image field, the Target Image will be a layer on (or in front of)
the label. You may want to move the label on top of the image.
For an example of fields layered over an image, see Figure 343 on page
370.
To move graphic field layers forward or back:
1. Select any field(s) you want to move forward or back (see “Selecting
Multiple Fields at Once” on page 396).
2. Click the right mouse button. From the pop-up menu, make a selec-
tion:
• Select Move Back by 1 to move the currently selected field(s)
behind one field.
• Select Move Forward by 1 to move the currently selected field(s)
forward one field.
• Select Move to Back to move the currently selected field(s) all the
way to the back. (You can also select the Move to Back button on
the Graphics editor toolbar.)
• Select Move to Front to move the currently selected field(s) in
front of other fields. (You can also select the Move to Front button
on the Graphics editor toolbar.)

Deleting a Graphic Field

1. Select all the fields you want to delete (see “Selecting Multiple Fields
at Once” on page 396).
2. From the Edit menu, select Delete. The selected fields are deleted.

400 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Saving Graphics

Saving Graphics
You can save a graphic using the Save Graphic button on the Graphics
editor toolbar or using the Save Graphic command from the File menu.
When saving a graphic, keep in mind the following:
• For custom graphics, your changes overwrite the current graphic file.
• For standard graphics, your changes do not overwrite the original
standard graphic. Instead, they are saved into a graphic file of the
same name in the Graphics\Custom folder, which will override the
standard graphic.
• To save a graphic file to a new name or a different location, you can
use the Save Graphic As command. For custom graphics, refer to
“Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name” below.
For standard graphics, refer to “Saving Edited Standard Graphics” on
page 402.
• The first time you save a custom graphic you created from a blank
graphic, you must specify the name and location of the graphic file.
Refer to “Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File Name”
below.
To save a graphic:
◆ On the Graphics editor toolbar, click Save (see Figure 373). The
graphic file is updated with your changes.

Figure 373. Save Button

Saving a Custom Graphic to a New Location or File

Name
To save a custom graphic to a new name or location, you can use the Save
Graphic As command. The steps are the same for the first time you save a
custom graphic created from a blank graphic, because you need to specify
the name and location of the graphic file.
To save a custom graphic to a new location or file name:
1. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. If this is your first time
saving a graphic, select Save Graphic. The Save As Graphic dialog
box displays (see Figure 374 on page 403).
2. In the Graphic Object Name field, enter a name for this graphic. The
name appears in the list of custom graphic objects and, possibly, on
the navigation tree. Do not use an object name that is already in the
system.
3. In the HTML File Name field, enter an HTML name for the graphic
file. Tracer Summit uses this file name to locate the graphic. Do not
use an HTM file name that is already in use. (If you do not type the
.HTM extension, Tracer Summit automatically adds it.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 401
Using the Graphics Editor

4. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics. If you select Global

Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graphics\Custom folder and is
available for assignment to any site. If you select Site Graphics, you
must also identify the particular site to which you want to assign this
graphic. This graphic is saved in the Graphics\site name folder and
cannot be used for any other site. If you are saving an existing site
graphic, you cannot change it to a global graphic or change to another
site.
5. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
6. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to create the graphic
object in the location you specified.
If the graphic has no template fields, it is added as a node on the
Tracer Summit root node (if you selected Global Graphics in step 4) or
below the site you identified (if you selected Site Graphics in step 4).

Saving Edited Standard Graphics

When you edit a standard graphic and use the Save Graphic command to
save it, the edited standard graphic is stored in the Graphics\Custom
folder (which makes the graphic a global graphic available to all sites).
Tracer Summit automatically displays this edited standard graphic when
you select its associated object. The next section “How Tracer Summit
Searches for and Displays Standard Graphics” explains how this works.
If you want to make the edited standard graphic a site graphic that is
available only to the current site, you need to use the Save Graphic As
command to save the edited graphic to the Graphics\site name folder.
Refer to “Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Site Graphic” on
page 403.
For information on saving an edited standard graphic to a new name (as a
custom graphic), refer to “Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Cus-
tom Graphic” on page 404.

How Tracer Summit Searches for and Displays Standard Graphics

When you click on an object in the navigation tree, Tracer Summit follows
a search sequence to locate the object’s graphic file. To have Tracer Sum-
mit use an edited version of a standard graphic, it is helpful to know how
Tracer Summit searches for standard graphics. The program looks for the
HTML file that matches the name of the original standard graphic and
searches in this order:
1. The Graphics\site name folder for the current site.
2. The Graphics\Custom folder.
3. The Graphics\Standard folder where graphics originally included
with Tracer Summit are stored.
Knowing this search sequence allows you to store graphics in locations
and with names so that Tracer Summit first finds the one you want to
display.

402 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Saving Graphics

For example, the original standard graphic for an area is called area.htm
and is stored in the Graphics\Standard folder. Let’s say you open this
graphic and modify it, then use the Save Graphic command to save it.
Tracer Summit automatically saves the modified graphic to a file called
area.htm (the same name) in the Graphics\Custom folder. Now, when you
display the standard graphic for an area on any site, Tracer Summit dis-
plays the modified version of the graphic because it looks in the Graph-
ics\Custom folder before it looks in the Graphics\Standard folder.
To save a modified standard graphic in the Graphics\site name folder,
you need to use the Save Graphic As command (as described in the next
section).

Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Site Graphic

1. Display the standard graphic in the Graphics editor and make the
necessary edits.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 374).
The Graphic Object Name and HTML File Name fields already con-
tain the appropriate names for the standard graphic. Do not change
the names or Tracer Summit will not locate the modified graphic’s file
at runtime.

Figure 374. Save As Graphic Dialog Box

3. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics:

• If you select Global Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graph-
ics\Custom folder and is available for assignment to any site.
(Selecting Global Graphics at the Save Graphic As dialog box has
the same effect as using the Save Graphic command.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 403
Using the Graphics Editor

• If you select Site Graphics, you must also identify the particular
site to which you want to assign this graphic. This graphic then
cannot be used for any other site.
4. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
5. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to save the graphic object
in the location you specified. (Do not check the Fill in Template Fields
check box.)

Saving an Edited Standard Graphic as a Custom Graphic

To create a custom graphic, you can edit a standard graphic (rather than
starting with a blank graphic). To save an edited standard graphic as a
custom graphic, you simply use the Save Graphic As command to change
its object and HTML file name. When you change the name of the edited
standard graphic, the graphic is no longer the standard graphic for the
specified object. The graphic can be used as a modified standard graphic
(it won’t appear in the navigation tree) or saved with no template fields (it
will appear as a node on the tree).
To save an edited standard graphic as a custom graphic:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the standard graphic for the UCM,
application, or site object and make the necessary edits.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 374 on page 403).
3. In the Graphic Object Name field, specify the name of the object. This
name may appear on the navigation tree.
4. In the HTML File name field, enter a new name for the custom
graphic.
5. Select either Global Graphics or Site Graphics:
• If you select Global Graphics, this graphic is saved to the Graph-
ics\Custom folder and is available for assignment in any site.
• If you select Site Graphics, you must also identify the particular
site to which you want to assign this graphic. This graphic will be
saved to the Graphics\site name folder for the selected site and
cannot be used for any other site.
6. To change the security access for this graphic, click the Security
Classes button to display the Change Security Classes dialog box.
7. At the Save As Graphic dialog box, click OK to save the custom
graphic in the location you specified.
• If the graphic is to be used as a modified standard graphic, do not
check the Fill in Template Fields check box.

404 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring an Original Standard Graphic

• If the graphic is to be used with no template fields, then check the

Fill in Template Fields check box.
If the graphic has no template fields, it is added as a node on the
Tracer Summit root node (if you selected Global Graphics in step 5) or
below the site you identified (if you selected Site Graphics in step 5).

Note:
When you save a graphic that contains template fields, the
graphic is not included on the navigation tree. See “Creating
and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields” on page 416 for
more information about template fields.

Restoring an Original Standard Graphic

A set of standard graphics are shipped with Tracer Summit. These origi-
nal standard graphics are stored in the Graphics\Standard folder. By
default, these standard graphics display when you click an item on the
navigation tree or click the Graphic button in a UCM editor.
When you edit a standard graphic, the edited version is automatically
saved as a global graphic in the Graphics\Custom folder, unless you use
the Save Graphic As command to save it as a site graphic in the
Graphics\site name folder specific to the current site. The file name is the
same as the original standard graphic.
As described in “How Tracer Summit Searches for and Displays Standard
Graphics” on page 402, Tracer Summit first looks for an object’s graphic
in the Graphics\site name folder, then in the Graphics\Custom folder,
and finally in the Graphics\Standard folder.
If you want to return to using an original standard graphic rather than
your edited version, you simply have to delete the edited versions in the
Graphics\site name and Graphics\Custom folders.
To restore an original standard graphic, you first identify the location of
the custom HTML file and then delete it.
To restore an original standard graphic:
1. In the Graphics editor, display the edited standard graphic that you
no longer want to use the object’s standard graphic.
2. From the Edit menu, select Properties. The Graphic Properties dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Graphic Information tab of the Graphic Properties dialog
box (see Figure 375 on page 406).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 405
Using the Graphics Editor

Figure 375. Graphic Properties Dialog Box—Graphic Information Screen

4. Note the file name and path to the file.

5. Using Windows Explorer, locate and delete the file.

Note:
You can also rename the HTML file, which has the same effect
as deleting the file because Tracer Summit will not be able to
locate it. You should rename a graphic file when you are not
sure whether you may need the custom graphic again in the
future.

6. In Tracer Summit, display the graphic for the object.

You may need to repeat these steps again if there was a copy of the
graphic file in both the Graphics\Custom and the
Graphics\site name folders. When the Graphics Information screen of
the Graphics Properties dialog box displays the graphic’s folder as
\Program Files\Tracer Summit\Graphics\Standard, then you have
restored the original standard graphic.

406 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Site and Global Graphics

About Site and Global Graphics

Tracer Summit classifies most graphics into two categories:
• Site graphics are specific to a site and are not available to be assigned
to other sites. These graphics are objects that reside in the site data-
base and initially have their corresponding HTML file stored in the
Graphics\site name folder.
• Global graphics are available to all sites. These graphics are objects
stored in the system site database and initially have their correspond-
ing HTML files stored in the Graphics\Custom folder.
Many customers have only one site on their Tracer Summit system and so
will usually save their custom graphics as site graphics.
Global graphics are most useful when you have multiple sites within your
Tracer Summit system and want to set up your own standard graphics or
have graphics appear above sites as group of sites nodes on the naviga-
tion tree. Group of sites nodes help you navigate when you have multiple
sites.
All graphics in a system are set up as either global graphics or site-spe-
cific graphics. If a graphic is set up to be a global graphic, it is stored at
the system site and is available for use at one or more additional sites. All
global graphics can be selected from the Open Graphic or Edit Graphic
dialog box with any active site. If a graphic is associated with a specific
site, then it may be accessed and edited only when you are logged onto the
appropriate site.
Within global graphics, there are two categories of existing graphics that
you may access using the Graphics editor: standard graphics and custom
graphics. All graphic objects have corresponding HTML files. Whenever
you save a graphic or save it under a new name, you create or update the
associated HTML file as well.
A standard graphic is a graphic that is shipped with Tracer Summit.
Tracer Summit provides these ready-made graphics stored in the system
site for many UCMs and applications. These standard graphics are for
your convenience, if you do not have the time or resources to invest in cre-
ating all new graphics for your system. Standard graphic HTML files are
always stored in the Graphics\Standard folder for the system. If a stan-
dard graphic is modified, the modified HTML file is stored in the Graph-
ics\Custom or Graphics\site name folder, depending upon the location
you choose in the Save As Graphic dialog box.
A custom graphic is a graphic that you have previously created in the
Graphics editor, or which you have created based on a standard graphic.
Custom graphic objects can be stored in either the global site or a specific
site. The corresponding HTML file is saved in the Graphics\Custom
folder (for the global location) or the Graphics\site name folder for the
site-specific location.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 407
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating Images for Use in Graphics

Using the Graphics editor, you can import images you create in other soft-
ware applications into graphics used in Tracer Summit. The file types
that Tracer Summit can import include the following:
• Graphics Interchange format (GIF)—version 89a is recommended
because version 87a does not support transparent colors
• JPEG File Interchange (JPG)—Hoffman compressed and progression
encoding
• Bitmap (BMP)—RGB encoded, RLE encoded
• Audio-Video Interleave (AVI)
To create these image files, you can use a variety of graphics packages,
including Paintshop Pro versions 5 and 6, AutoCAD, CorelDRAW, or Win-
dows Paint.

Saving Image Files

For optimal performance, save each image file in the same directory as
the HTML file that use the image. For site-specific images (used by only
one site), store the image files in the Graphics\site name folder. For
images used by more than one site, store the image files in the Graph-
ics\Custom folder.
Name image files using up to 32 characters. Choose a name that is as spe-
cific and informative as possible, especially if you may use this image sev-
eral times within a site or for other sites.

408 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic

Window and Image Sizes

Table 12 lists window sizes for different window options within Tracer
Summit. This information is helpful if you are designing images that you
want to cover the entire screen (such as background images). If you have
a background image set to the indicated height and width for the given
window display options, then no information will be hidden and require
scrolling to see.

Table 12. Image Sizes for Different Window Options

(Based on 800 x 600 display settings)

Window Display Options

Window or
Image Size
(Width x Height Navigation Summit Windows
in Pixels) Tree Status Bar Task Bar Task Bar
Displayed? Displayed? Displayed? Auto Hide
Enabled?

594 x 452 Yes Yes Yes No

594 x 480 Yes Yes Yes Yes
594 x 512 Yes Yes No No
594 x 540 Yes Yes No Yes
594 x 470 Yes No Yes No
594 x 498 Yes No Yes Yes
594 x 530 Yes No No No
594 x 558 Yes No No Yes
780 x 452 No Yes Yes No
780 x 480 No Yes Yes Yes
780 x 512 No Yes No No
780 x 540 No Yes No Yes
780 x 470 No No Yes No
780 x 498 No No Yes Yes
780 x 530 No No No No
780 x 558 No No No Yes

Creating a Custom Graphic from a

Blank Graphic
One way to create a custom graphic is to edit an existing graphic, then
use the Save Graphic As command to save it under a new name (see “Sav-
ing Graphics” on page 401).
Another way to create a custom graphic is to start with a blank graphic.
You may wish to do this if there is no standard graphic for the object you
want to illustrate, or if the standard graphic is so different from what you
need that it is more efficient to start with a blank graphic.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 409
Using the Graphics Editor

To create a custom graphic from a blank graphic, you must open the
blank graphic, build the custom graphic, then save it.

Opening a Blank Graphic

You can open a blank graphic from the Tracer Summit main menu or
from the Graphics editor.

Opening a Blank Graphic from the Main Menu

1. If your system includes multiple sites, make sure you are logged onto
the correct Tracer Summit site (so that graphics are saved to the
appropriate site).
2. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor. The Edit Graphic dialog
box displays (see Figure 376).

Figure 376. Edit Graphic Dialog Box

3. Click New to display a blank graphic in the Graphics editor (see Fig-
ure 377 on page 411).

410 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic

Figure 377. Graphics Editor—New Graphic Window

4. Insert fields, images and background as described in “Building a Cus-

tom Graphic” on page 411.

Opening a Blank Graphic from the Graphics Editor

◆ On the Graphics editor toolbar, click New Graphic (see Figure 378) to
display a blank graphic (see Figure 377).

Figure 378. New Graphic Button

Building a Custom Graphic

The first step in creating a new graphic is to add the main image(s) over
which you will add fields. There can be more than one image per graphic
object. For example, this image could be a floor plan or a drawing of a
chiller, or both.

Selecting the Background Image

The background image is an image that fills the entire graphic window.
Often, you may want to select the same background image for all custom
graphics you create to provide a standard look for all graphics. Typically,
this background image is simply a solid color screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 411
Using the Graphics Editor

To select a background image, refer to “Changing the Background of a

Graphic” on page 376.

Note:
This is the only image a grid displays over.

Inserting Other Images

1. Use a third-party graphics creation tool to generate a graphic in GIF,
JPG, or BMP format.
2. Save the image in the Graphics\Custom or Graphics\site name
folder.
3. With your custom graphic displayed in the Graphics editor, on the
Graphics editor palette, click Image (see Figure 379). The cursor
becomes an insert prompt.

Figure 379. Image Button

4. Make a selection:
• To create an image that keeps its proportion (or aspect ratio) the
same as you created it, click once on the graphic at the approxi-
mate place you want to insert the image.
• To create an image of a specific size, drag the insert cursor to cre-
ate a box where you will insert the image. Choosing this option
may distort the image’s aspect ratio (the image, for example, may
be stretched wider than it was when you created it). This may
adversely affect the quality of the image.
When you release the mouse button, the Image dialog box displays
(see Figure 380).

Figure 380. Image Dialog Box

412 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Custom Graphic from a Blank Graphic

5. Click Browse to select a file name and path of the image from the
Locate Image dialog box (see “Using the Locate Image Dialog Box” on
page 378).
6. At the Image dialog box, click OK. The graphic displays with the new
image inserted.
7. Change the size or position of the image as necessary. Follow the
directions for moving or sizing fields (see “Moving a Graphic Field” on
page 397 or “Resizing a Graphic Field” on page 397).

Inserting Fields
The task of inserting and configuring fields on a new custom graphic is
the same as on an existing standard graphic (see “Inserting a Graphic
Field” on page 382).

Saving Custom Graphics

Graphic objects in Tracer Summit are stored with corresponding HTML
files. You can save custom graphics as either global graphics or site
graphics:
• To make a graphic a site graphic that is available only to the current
site, choose the site as the location to save the graphic.
• To make a graphic a global graphic that you can assign to any site,
choose the global location to save the graphic.
Use the Save Graphic command or the Save Graphic As command to save
the graphic. For more information, refer to “Saving Graphics” on
page 401.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 413
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating Expanded Messages

An expanded message is a graphic object that you can assign an analog or
binary input. When the input goes into alarm, the alarm is displayed in
the event log with a small envelope to indicate it has an expanded mes-
sage. Users can click on the envelope to view the expanded message. You
can use an expanded message to give operators detailed information
about an alarm and show (in text or images) an action they should take.
To create an expanded message, you create a graphic with text and
images, just as you would for any graphic. When you save it, you save it
as an expanded message (an option at the Save Graphic As dialog box).
When you save the graphic with the expanded message option, Tracer
Summit saves both the HTML file for the graphic and an expanded mes-
sage object that links back to the graphic object. This graphic then dis-
plays when the expanded message object is viewed.
After you have created an expanded message, the expanded message
object is available to be assigned in the analog or binary input editors for
alarming and viewing in the event log.

Note:
A graphic that has template fields cannot be an expanded message.

You can use the same steps for creating an expanded message whether
you are working with a new graphic or an existing graphic.
To create an expanded message:
1. Display the Graphics editor and make a selection:
• Open an existing graphic that you want to use as an expanded
message.
• Create a graphic to use as the expanded message. Include text
fields and images as appropriate. You can create a custom graphic
from a blank graphic or edit a standard graphic.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. If you are saving the
graphic for the first time, select Save Graphic. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 381 on page 415).

414 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating Expanded Messages

Figure 381. Save As Graphic Dialog Box—Expanded Message

3. Click the Create Expanded Message dialog box.

4. Complete the other fields as appropriate (for more information, see
“Saving Graphics” on page 401).
5. Click OK. The graphic file is saved and the expanded message object
is created.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 415
Using the Graphics Editor

Creating and Modifying Graphics with

Template Fields
Template fields allow you to create your own standard graphics. They
look at the context of the graphic for the necessary information to display
data in the field. Because graphics containing template fields do not have
a fixed context object, they do not automatically appear on the navigation
tree. From within the Graphics editor, you can recognize a template field
because the Site Name and Object Name properties to which it refers are
listed as <default>.
Because template fields do not have a fixed context object, you can use
graphics with template fields in several places on the same site or on
other sites. The standard graphics included with Tracer Summit use tem-
plate fields.
Fields that can be used as template fields are:
• Status text
• Analog in 5 color
• Binary text
• Binary animation
• Target text
• Target image
• Target button
• Setpoint control
• Override control
• Binary check box control
• Selection list control
A target field set up as a template field will pass the context object of the
current graphic to the graphic being opened. Graphics with template
fields being launched from a target on another graphic must have the
appropriate context object passed via the target. For example, the system
will display “no such property” for all template fields on a graphic if those
templates were for VAV II/III/IV and the target context object was for an
IntelliPak Rooftop.

Note:
Graphics that were on the tree and were modified to include
template fields will no longer appear on the navigation tree.

To assign a graphic with template fields to a UCM or an application, use

the Navigation Tree editor (see Chapter 26, “Using the Navigation Tree”).

416 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields

Inserting a Template Field on a Graphic

1. Display the graphic to which you want to add a template field.
2. Make a selection:
• To insert a new field, click the appropriate button on the Graphics
editor palette and then click on the graphic (see “Inserting a
Graphic Field” on page 382). The editor for that field displays.
• To change an existing field into a template field, click on the field
and then click the right mouse button. Select Edit Properties from
the pop-up menu. The editor for that field displays.
3. Display the Property screen or the Context Object screen as appropri-
ate. Figure 382 shows the Property screen for the Status Text editor
and Figure 383 shows the Context Object screen for the Target Text
editor.

Figure 382. Status Text Editor—Property Screen

Figure 383. Target Text Editor—Context Object Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 417
Using the Graphics Editor

4. In the Site Name field, select <default>.

Note:
For the Property screen, the Object Name field is automatically
assigned a value of <default>. For the Context Object screen,
the Object Type and Object Name fields are assigned a value of
<default>.

5. Edit the information on the other screens as desired.

6. Click OK. The specified graphic field is created.

Saving a Graphic with Template Fields

Saving a graphic with template fields is the same as saving any graphic.
Use the Save Graphic or Save Graphic As command on the File menu. At
the Save Graphic As dialog box, make sure you do not select the Fill In
Templates check box, which hard codes the information and changes the
template fields back to regular fields. For detailed information on saving
graphics, refer to “Saving Graphics” on page 401.
When you save a graphic with template fields, the graphic object does not
appear on the navigation tree or in the Open Graphic dialog box. You can
assign the graphic to a UCM, application or site node on the navigation
tree using the Navigation Tree editor.
To edit a graphic with template fields, you must follow the steps in “Edit-
ing a Graphic With Template Fields” on page 419.

418 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating and Modifying Graphics with Template Fields

Editing a Graphic With Template Fields

If you have assigned a graphic with template fields to a UCM or applica-
tion using the navigation tree, then you can open the graphic for editing
as you would other graphics. See “Accessing the Graphics Editor” on
page 371.
If you have not assigned the graphic to the navigation tree, you must open
it from the Edit Graphic dialog box, as described in the following steps.
To edit a graphic with template fields:
1. From the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
• If you have a graphic currently displayed, then that graphic is
opened for editing. From the File menu, select Open Graphic. The
Edit Graphic dialog box displays.
• If no graphic was displayed, then the Edit Graphic dialog box dis-
plays.
See Figure 384.

Figure 384. Edit Graphic Dialog Box

2. Click the Template Graphics check box. The list updates to include all
template graphics.
3. Click the name of the graphic, then click Edit. The selected graphic
displays in the Graphics editor.
4. Edit and save the graphic.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 419
Using the Graphics Editor

Putting Permanent Information into Template Fields on

a Graphic
You may decide you no longer want a graphic to have template fields.
Instead, you want it to contain permanent information. You can have
Tracer Summit fill in the information based on the context from which
you launch the graphic.
To put permanent information into a graphic’s template fields:
1. Open the graphic that has template fields in the Graphics editor.
Make sure you choose the appropriate context from which to launch
the graphic:
• To launch from an object on the navigation tree, click on the object
in the navigation tree to display the graphic, then on the Setup
menu select Graphics editor.
• To launch from a UCM editor, display the editor for the associated
UCM (on the Setup menu, select Unit Controllers, then the UCM
type). At the UCM editor Status screen, click Graphic to display
the graphic. Then on the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
• To launch from a target field on other graphic, click on the target
field to display the associated graphic with template fields. Then
on the Setup menu, select Graphics editor.
2. From the File menu, select Save Graphic As. The Save As Graphic
dialog box displays (see Figure 385).

Figure 385. Save As Graphic Dialog Box—Fill In Template Fields

3. Complete the Object Name and HTML File Name fields with different
names for standard graphic objects. (Overriding a standard graphic
object with permanent information for template fields will do so for
all objects that use the same standard graphic object.)

420 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting a Graphic

4. Click the Fill In Template check box.

5. Click OK. The graphic is saved with the object name and HTML file
name provided. All of the template fields are hard-coded to the con-
text object of the graphic you launched in step 1. Because the graphic
no longer has template fields, Tracer Summit assigns it to the naviga-
tion tree. The graphic is also available at the Open Graphic dialog
box.
If the name of the graphic object was changed, you must use the Nav-
igation Tree editor to assign the new graphic to a UCM, application or
site node on the tree.

Deleting a Graphic
There are two steps to deleting a graphic:
• Deleting the graphic object
• Deleting the HTML file associated with it
To delete a graphic object:
Use the Delete Object utility on the Tools menu. See Chapter 38, “Delet-
ing Objects and Sites.”
To delete an HTML file associated with a file:
In Windows Explorer, use standard procedures to delete the associated
HTML file from the Graphics\site name folder or from Graphics\Custom
folder. When displaying the object, Tracer Summit will revert to the
graphic stored in the Graphics\Standard folder, if there is one. (If there is
no standard graphic file, the user will see an error message indicating
that the file does not exist or cannot be found.)

Note:
Renaming a graphic file to a name that is not called by Tracer
Summit has the same effect as deleting the HTML file. Tracer
Summit cannot find this file. Rename a graphic file only when
you are not sure whether you may need a custom graphic again
in the future.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 421
Using the Graphics Editor

Using the Graphing Control Editor

From the Graphing Control editor, you can create graphs for either live
properties or historical data trends from Tracer Summit. You can have as
many graphs on a graphic that you want and plot up to four properties
per graph.

Live Property Graphs

A live property graph shows the value of any property in Tracer Summit
in real time. The sampling of data starts when the graphic is opened and
stops when the graphic is closed. Using a right-mouse-click, you can
choose to start and stop sampling, as well as, change the style of the
graph or print it out. Live graphs are valuable for monitoring building
conditions in real time.

Historical Graphs
A historical graph shows values that have been stored by the BCU in a
trend object. Graphs that display trend objects are static since the data is
historical. Using a right-mouse-click, you can refresh the data, change the
style of the graph, or print it out.

Accessing the Graphing Control Editor

With the Graphics Control editor open, click the graphing symbol button
on the tool palette, then click anywhere in the Graphics editor. The
Graphing Control editor displays (see Figure 386).

Figure 386. Graphing Control Editor—Members Tab

422 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

Selecting Graph Members

From the Graphing Control Members tab, you can add items to the Graph
Members tree to create a live property or single trend object graph (see
Figure 387).

Figure 387. Graphing Control—Selecting Live Property members

To set the graph members for live properties:

1. With the Graphics Control editor open, click the graphing symbol but-
ton on the tool palette, then click anywhere in the Graphics editor.
The Graphing Control editor displays with the Members tab active.
2. In the Site box, select the site name. Once the name is selected, the
Type, Name, and Property fields are filtered to only display those
objects defined in the site.
3. In the Type list box, select the object type for the graph.
4. In the Name list box, select the name of the object.
5. In the Property list box, select the property to be sampled.
6. Click Add to add the selected property to the Graph Members tree.

Note:
You are only allowed to add up to four properties to the tree.
Then the Add button is not available. Clicking on the plus (+)
sign, expands the list to show the selected graph properties.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 423
Using the Graphics Editor

7. Repeat steps 2-6 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.
8. To remove properties from the Graph Members tree, highlight the
selection and click Remove.
9. To add a Trend member and select graph plot properties, see the fol-
lowing sections.
10. Click OK to create the graph and return to the Graphics editor’s main
screen, where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 389 on
page 425).
To set the graph members for a single Trend object:
1. In the Site box, select the site name.
2. In the Type list box, select a Trend (see Figure 388).

Figure 388. Graphing Control—Selecting Trend Object Members

3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object.

4. In the Property list box, select the property to be sampled. Only mem-
bers of the selected trend can be added to the graph.
5. Click Add to add the selected property to the Graph Members tree.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.
7. To remove properties from the Graph Members tree, highlight the
selection and click Remove.

424 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

8. To select graph plot properties, see “To select graph plot properties:”
on page 425
9. Click OK to create the graph and return to the Graphics editor’s main
screen, where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 389).

Figure 389. Graph Field

To select graph plot properties:

1. In the Graph Members tree, highlight the graph member property
name to assign color, Y1/Y2, and legend text.
2. In the Color list box, select a color for the graph and legend text. You
should select different colors for each item graphed. For pie and bar
charts, an automatic color generation is used to color each of the sam-
ples on the plot.
3. The Y1-axis is the default selection. Use Y1 for single trend items and
similarly grouped items. Use Y2 for dissimilar items that you need to
show resolution on.

Note:
Y2 items will always be a line drawn on the graph, except for
Area (3D). In Area (3D), Y2 selections are graphed against the
Y1-axis.

4. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,

where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 389).

Selecting the Graph Type

Select the graph type on the Graph Settings tab. There are six graph
types to choose from (line, pie, area, scatter, and bar).

Note:
All except the line graph can be viewed in two or three dimen-
sions.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 425
Using the Graphics Editor

To choose a graph type:

1. Open the Graphing Control editor.
2. Click the Graph Settings tab to display the graph types (see
Figure 390).
3. In the Graph Title field, type the title you want to appear above the
graph.

Figure 390. Graphing Control—Graph Settings Screen

4. In the Background Color field, select the background color that the
graph title, plot, and time stamps will appear on.
5. In the Refresh Rate field, select the sampling rate for the graphed
properties. The selected and plotted properties are all sampled at this
rate. The time stamp appears in military time.
6. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,
where the Graph field is displayed (see Figure 389 on page 425).

Note:
This tab can be accessed at any time in the runtime mode from
a pop-up menu item by right-clicking on the graph. This allows
you to quickly change graph types, while keeping the graphic
field open.

426 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Graphing Control Editor

Setting up Graph Samples

When setting up a graph, you can also set the axis labels of the object.
The default is to place ticks and time stamps on the graph once per sam-
ple. At this screen you can also assign a title to the X/Y-axis.
To assign titles and set up graph samples:
1. Open the Graphing Control editor.
2. Click the Axis tab to display the Axis screen (see Figure 391)

Figure 391. Graphing Control—Axis Screen

3. In the Y1 Title field type a title. The title is automatically centered to

the left of this axis. If you are also using the Y2-axis, type a title. The
title is automatically centered to the right of this axis.
4. In the X-axis Title field, type a title. The title is automatically cen-
tered below the X-axis.
5. In the Ticks Every field, type the number of samples to be counted
before a tick is placed on the graph.
6. In the Labels Every field, type the number of samples to be counted
before a label is placed on the graph. Labels are the sampled time
stamps in HH.MM.SS format.
7. Click OK to save the information and return to the Graphics editor,
where the Graphic field is displayed (see Figure 389 on page 425).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 427
Using the Graphics Editor

428 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 28

Using the Trend Editor in CCS

Compliance-Enabled Sites

The capabilities of the Trend editor have been enhanced for use in compli-
ant-enabled environments. These capabilities include specifying that his-
torical trend data be saved to an audit trail database, calculating the
mean kinetic temperature (MKT) for historical temperature trends, and
viewing historical trends and MKT trends in the form of a report.

Note:
You must be registered for the Tracer Summit Critical Control
System software.

You can also use the Trend editor to set up non-historical trends that you
want sampled and stored in the Tracer Summit BCU database (see,
Chapter 29, “Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs”). Trend
information can be compiled and presented in a regular or historical
trend report.
With Tracer Summit’s CCS Trend editor for compliant environments, you
can:
• Create a historical trend object or edit an existing one
• Create live trends saved to the audit trail database
• Run historical trend with MKT calculation
• Create a historical trend report
• Create a MKT report
• Save new and existing trends to the Tracer Summit BCU
• Add or remove members for a trend object
• Determine the trend interval
• Determine how or when sampling will start and stop
• Delay sampling during startup to allow the system to stabilize before
trending occurs
• Specify the number of samples you will allow the BCU and audit trail
database to store in memory, and clear any accumulated samples
• Set up security classes for a trend object

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 429
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

Historical Trend Data

Trend data that is critical to compliant-enabled environments or trends
that you wish to save permanently can be saved to the audit trail data-
base as historical trends. Historical trending is enabled in the Trend edi-
tor.
To upload historical trends from the audit trail database, you can run a
historical trend report (see, Tracer Summit Critical Control System Daily
Operations guide). Note that to run a historical trend report, at least one
trend must be enabled (see, “Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic Tem-
perature Trends” on page 434).

Mean Kinetic Temperature Trend

The mean kinetic temperature (MKT) function uses temperature samples
from a historical trend to calculate a weighted-average temperature
value. You can enable a historical trend for MKT calculation at the same
time you set up the trend object. MKT values are used by pharmaceutical
staff to determine the shelf-life of drugs.
To upload a MKT trend from the audit trail database, you can run a MKT
trend report. (see, Tracer Summit Critical Control System Daily Opera-
tions guide.) However, to run a MKT trend report at least one trend must
be enabled for MKT trending (see, “Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic
Temperature Trends” on page 434).

430 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Accessing the Trend Editor

Accessing the Trend Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 392).

Figure 392. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Select the name of the trend you want to edit.

3. Click OK. The Trend editor displays (see Figure 393).

Figure 393. Trend Editor

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 431
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

Creating a Historical Trend

To create a historical trend, you complete these tasks:
• Open and name the new trend object (as described in this section)
• Enable a trend object (see “Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic
Temperature Trends” on page 434)
• Set up the trend, including determining when sampling will start and
stop (see “In the Type list box, select the object type for the object
whose property you want this trend to sample.” on page 440)
• Set security access for the trend (see “Setting Up Security Class for a
Trend” on page 442)
To create a historical trend:
1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 394).

Figure 394. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Trend Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 395).

Figure 395. New Trend Name Dialog Box

3. In the Trend Name field, enter the name you want to give this trend.
The name can be up to 32 characters long.

432 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a Historical Trend

4. Click OK. The Status screen of the Trend editor displays (see
Figure 396).

Figure 396. Trend Editor—New Trend

5. Complete the remaining trend information as described in the follow-

ing sections.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 433
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic

Temperature Trends
The following procedures are given for the various situations in which you
would enable a historical trend, a mean kinetic temperature (MKT) trend
(MKT), or both types of trends:
• Enabling Historical Trending for a New Trend (see page 435).
• Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing Single-Member Trend
(see page 437).
• Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing Multiple-Member Trend
(see page 438).
• Enable MKT Trending for a New Trend (see page 438).
• Reverting from MKT Trending to Historical Trending (see page 440).
When enabling historical and MKT trends, keep in mind the following
points:
• Trends have to be enabled for historical trending or MKT trending
• Historical trending is required for MKT trending
• MKT trending is used to find the weighted-average temperature for a
temperature trend
• MKT trending has to be enabled before it is available from the Mean
kinetic Temperature Report dialog box
• When you select MKT or historical trend, the snapshot feature is dis-
abled.

434 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic Temperature Trends

Enabling Historical Trending for a New Trend

1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397).

Figure 397. Trend Editor—Members Tab

2. In the Type list box, select the object type for the object whose prop-
erty you want this trend to sample.
3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object whose property you
want this trend to sample.
4. In the Property list box, select the property you want this trend to
sample.
5. Click Add to add this property to the Member List box.

Note:
Only one member-property is allowed. If more than one prop-
erty is added to the list, the Enable Historical Trending dialog
box is unavailable (grayed out).

6. Check the Enable Historical Trending checkbox.

7. Click Save. The Save Trend dialog box displays (see Figure 398).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 435
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

Figure 398. Save Trend Dialog Box

8. From the BCU Name drop-down list, select a BCU to save the trend
object to. Then, click OK. The Specify Authorizing Signature dialog
box displays (see Figure 399).

Figure 399. Authorizing Signature Dialog Box

9. Type your user name and password. Then, click OK to save the trend
object as a historical trend.

436 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic Temperature Trends

Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing Single-

Member Trend
1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397 on
page 435).
2. Verify that the desired member is selected in the Members List.

Note:
Only one member-property is allowed. If more than one prop-
erty is added to the list, the Enable Historical Trending dialog
box is unavailable (grayed out).
To remove a member from the Member List, select it. Then,
click the Remove button.

3. Place a check in the Enable Historical Trending checkbox.

4. Click Save. A warning dialog box displays.
5. Click the Accept button to accept your changes. The Specify Authoriz-
ing Signature dialog box displays (see Figure 400).

Note:
If you are making a change to a trend that affects a property
that cannot be audited (for example, a byte string) the Autho-
rizing Signature dialog box displays asking you to authorize
your change. Values that cannot be audited are not put into the
audit trail database. Any values that you change must be
written down in your facility’s standard operating pro-
cedure (SOP).

Figure 400. Authorizing a Change for Unaudited Properties

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 437
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

6. In the signature dialog box, type your user name and password. Then,
click OK to save the trend as a historical trend object.

Enabling Historical Trending for an Existing Multiple-

Member Trend
1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397 on
page 435).
2. In the Member List, remove all members except the one you want to
create a historical trend for.

Note:
To remove members from the Member List, select the members.
Then, click the Remove button.

3. Place a check in the Enable Historical Trending checkbox.

4. Click Save. A warning dialog box displays.
5. Click the Accept button to accept your changes. The Specify Authoriz-
ing Signature dialog box displays.

Note:
If you are making a change to a trend that affects a property
that cannot be audited (for example, a byte string) the Specify
Authorizing Signature dialog box displays asking you to autho-
rize your change. Values that cannot be audited are not put into
the audit trail database. Any values that you change must
be written down in your facility’s standard operating
procedure (SOP).

6. Type your user name and password. Then, click OK to save the trend
object as a historical trend.

Enabling MKT Trending for a New Trend

Use MKT trending to find the weighted-average temperature for a tem-
perature trend.

Note:
MKT trending for a historical temperature trend has to be
enabled before it is available from the Mean kinetic Tempera-
ture Report dialog box.

To enable MKT trending for a new trend:

1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397 on
page 435).
2. In the Type list box, select the object type for the object whose prop-
erty you want this trend to sample.

438 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Enabling Historical and Mean Kinetic Temperature Trends

3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object whose property you
want this trend to sample.
4. In the Property list box, select the property you want this trend to
sample.
5. Click Add to add this property to the Member List box.

Note:
Only one member-property is allowed. If more than one prop-
erty is added to the list, the Enable Historical Trending dialog
box becomes unavailable (grayed out).

6. Check the MKT checkbox to have the MKT value calculated for a tem-
perature trend.
7. Click Save. The Save Trend dialog box displays (see Figure 398 on
page 436).
8. From the BCU Name field, select the BCU to save the trend object to.
Then, click OK. The Specify Authorizing Signature dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 399 on page 436).
9. In the signature dialog box, type your user name and password. Then,
click OK to save the trend object as a historical trend with MKT
trending.

Enabling MKT Trending for an Existing Trend

1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397 on
page 435).
2. Verify that the desired member is selected in the Members List.

Note:
Only one member-property is allowed. If more than one prop-
erty is added to the list, historical trending and MKT trending
are not available.
To remove members from the Member List, select the members.
Then, click the Remove button. Or, click Remove All to clear the
entire list.

3. Check the MKT checkbox to have the MKT value calculated for a tem-
perature trend.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 439
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

4. Click Save. The Specify Authorizing Signature dialog box displays

(see Figure 399 on page 436).

Note:
If you are making a change to a trend that affects a property
that cannot be audited (for example, a byte string) the Specify
Authorizing Signature dialog box displays asking you to autho-
rize your change. Values that cannot be audited are not put into
the audit trail database. Any values that you change must
be written down in your facility’s standard operating
procedure (SOP).

5. Type your user name and password. Then, click OK to save the exist-
ing trend object as a historical trend with MKT trending.

Reverting from MKT Trending to Historical Trending

1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 397 on
page 435).
2. Uncheck the MKT checkbox to revert to just historical trending. The
historical trending checkbox becomes available and is enabled.
3. Click Save. A warning dialog box displays.
4. Click the Accept button to accept your changes. The Specify Authoriz-
ing Signature dialog box displays (see Figure 399 on page 436).
5. Type your user name and password. Then, click OK to save the trend
object with just the historical trend feature enabled.
6. In the Type list box, select the object type for the object whose prop-
erty you want this trend to sample.
7. In the Name list box, select the name of the object whose property you
want this trend to sample.
8. In the Property list box, select the property you want this trend to
sample.
9. Click Add to add this property to the Member List box.
10. Repeat steps 2-5 above to add other properties to the list of members
as necessary.
11. To remove a member from the Member List, select the member in the
Member List box, then click Remove to remove it from the list. Or,
click Remove All to clear the entire list.

440 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Historical Trend Sampling

Setting Up Historical Trend Sampling

When setting up a historical trend, you need to configure the sampling
parameters and sampling interval of the trend object. You can set up
trend sampling at the Trend editor’s Setup screen. At this screen you can
also change the name of the trend.

Note:
The number of possible samples that you can take with one his-
torical trend member is 244 samples.

To set up historical trend sampling:

1. From the Trend editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 401).

Figure 401. Trend Editor Setup Screen

2. If you want to change the trend’s name, in the Trend Name field,
enter a new name for this trend.
3. In the Sampling Enable referencer edit control, select a method for
determining whether sampling should occur. Select Enabled to turn
on sampling manually. Select Disabled to turn off sampling manually.
Select Referencer if you want sampling to be activated or deactivated
by the state of a referenced binary property.
4. If you selected Referencer in the Sampling Enable field, then the On
Delay for Referencer field becomes active. Type the minimum number
of minutes the binary property must be in On state before sampling
occurs. You can enter a number between 0 and 60. This feature allows
the system to stabilize before trending occurs.
5. In the Number of Samples field, select the number of samples you
want the BCU to retain in its memory. The number of possible sam-
ples that you can take with one historical trend member is 244 sam-
ples.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 441
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

6. In the Interval field, select the frequency with which you want the
members to be sampled. You can choose 1 Minute, 5 Minutes, 15 Min-
utes, 1 Hour, 8 Hours, 1 Day, 7 Days, or Billing Period.
7. If you selected 8 Hours or 1 Day in the Interval field, the Collect Sam-
ple at Time field displays. Type the time of day you want sampling to
begin.
8. If you selected 7 Days in the Interval field, the Collect Sample at
Time field and the Collect Sample on Day field are displayed. Com-
plete these fields with the time of day you want sampling to begin,
and the day of the week you want sampling to begin, respectively.
9. If you selected Billing Period in the Interval field, the following but-
tons are displayed:
• Use Last Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at
11:59 p.m. on the last day of every month.
• Define Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at 11:59
p.m. on the day of the month you specify in the related field.
• Use Billing Periods.
The last button is available only if you have set up billing periods in
Site Configuration. You can select to sample at the end of any one of
up to three billing periods, which you specify in the related field.

Setting Up Security Class for a Trend

The Trend editor’s Classes screen allows you to define the security class
setup for this trend.
To set security access:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Classes tab to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 402).

Note:
The Enable Snapshot functionality is disabled whenever histor-
ical or MKT checkboxes are checked.

Figure 402. Trend Editor Classes Screen

442 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Security Class for a Trend

2. If you wish to use the Snapshot Trends feature, click Enable Snap-
shot. When a snapshot is taken, sampling is disabled until the snap-
shot is reset. This allows you to analyze the data leading up to the
point in time when the snapshot occurred.
3. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Trigger On referencer edit con-
trol becomes active. In this field, specify the binary input referencer
or event state of an analog input object that serves as a trigger for a
snapshot to be taken. If you reference a binary property, that property
is monitored every minute, and if the state transitions from 0 to 1 for
more than two minutes, a snapshot is triggered.
If you reference the event state of an analog input object, that prop-
erty is monitored every minute. If the analog input object goes into a
Low Alarm or High Alarm for more than two minutes, a snapshot is
triggered (make sure the analog input object is not in an alarm state
when you initially assign the referencer). If you don’t make a selection
here, no snapshot is taken.
4. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Snapshot Notification Class field
becomes active. In this field, specify which Event Class will receive a
message of the snapshot occurrence when a snapshot actually hap-
pens.
5. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (see Figure 403).

Figure 403. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

6. For each security class, click to insert a check mark if you want users
of this class to have security access to this trend object.
7. Click OK to return to the Classes screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 443
Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites

Viewing the Status Screen

The Trend editor’s Status screen displays information about past and
present data sampling, and provides some controls for managing this
data. This screen displays when you first access the Trend editor.
To view the status screen:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Status tab to display the Status
screen (see Figure 393 on page 431).
2. View the Sampling Enabled field. Yes indicates that the system col-
lects samples regularly for this trend. (Click Report to view the sam-
ples.)
3. Click Clear Samples if you want to erase all accumulated data for this
trend.
4. View the Snapshot Taken field. Yes indicates that a change in state of
the referenced property triggered a snapshot, and that sampling has
been suspended.

Note:
The Enable Snapshot functionality is disabled whenever the
historical or MKT checkboxes are checked.

5. Click Reset Snapshot to resume sampling and to prepare the system

for the next snapshot event. This button is available only if the Snap-
shot Taken field contains a Yes.
6. View the remaining fields on this screen. These fields display:
• How frequently this historical trend is currently set up to take
samples, the number of samples stored in BCU memory
• The current number of members
• The percentage of BCU memory allocated to this historical trend
object that sample storage currently occupies
You can also identify the BCU name and the status of communica-
tions.
7. Click the report button to automatically generate a historical or MKT
trend report.

444 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 29

Using the Trend Editor—

Tracer Summit BCUs

A Tracer Summit trend (or trend object) is a sampling of data stored in

the Tracer Summit BCU database from specific objects and properties
taken at a specified sampling frequency. To upload trends from the Tracer
Summit BCU, you can run a standard or custom trend report (see Chap-
ter 31, “Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites”). These trends
provide information necessary to make decisions about building manage-
ment issues, including utility costs, equipment efficiency, and tenant bill-
ings.
Use the Tracer Summit Trend editor to define the data you want sampled
and stored in the Tracer Summit database. This trend information can
then be compiled and presented in a trend report at a later time.
Each trend object contains a list of members. These members are the
properties that the trend will sample. You set up and maintain the list of
members using the Trend editor.
With Tracer Summit’s Trend editor, you can:
• Create a new trend object or edit an existing one
• Add or remove members for a trend object
• Determine the trend interval
• Determine how or when sampling will start and stop
• Delay sampling during startup to allow the system to stabilize before
trending occurs
• Specify the number of samples you will allow the BCU to store in
memory, and clear any accumulated samples
• Set up a trigger and notification class for a snapshot, as well as reset
a snapshot after it has been taken
• Set up security classes for a trend object

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 445
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

Accessing the Trend Editor

1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 404).

Figure 404. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Select the name of the trend you want to edit.

3. Click OK. The Trend editor displays (see Figure 405.)

Figure 405. Trend Editor

446 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New Trend

Creating a New Trend

To create a new trend, you complete these tasks:
• Open and name the new trend object (as described in this section)
• Add members to the trend object (see “Setting the Members of a
Trend” on page 449)
• Set up the trend, including determining when sampling will start and
stop (see “Setting Up Trend Sampling” on page 450)
• Set security access for the trend (see “Setting Security Access for a
Trend” on page 453)
• Save the trend object (see “Saving a Trend Object to a BCU” on
page 455)
To create a new trend:
1. From the Setup menu, select Trends. The Select Trend dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 406).

Figure 406. Select Trend Dialog Box

2. Click New. The New Trend Name dialog box displays (see
Figure 407).

Figure 407. New Trend Name Dialog Box

3. In the Trend Name field, enter the name you want to give this trend.
The name can be up to 32 characters long.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 447
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

4. Click OK. The Status screen of the Trend editor displays (see
Figure 408).

Figure 408. Trend Editor—New Trend

5. Complete the remaining trend information as described in the follow-

ing sections.

448 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting the Members of a Trend

Setting the Members of a Trend

Members are sampled properties that will be monitored by a trend object.
The Members screen of the Trend editor allows you to add, delete and
view members of the trend object.
To set the members of a trend:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 409).

Figure 409. Trend Editor Members Screen

2. In the Type list box, select the object type for the object whose prop-
erty you want this trend to sample.
3. In the Name list box, select the name of the object whose property you
want this trend to sample.
4. In the Property list box, select the property you want this trend to
sample.
5. Click Add to add this property to the Member List box.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 above to add other properties to the list of members,
as necessary.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 449
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

7. To remove a member from the Member List, select the member in the
Member List box, then click Remove to delete it from the list. Or, click
Remove All to clear the entire list.

Note:
Trend objects may contain up to 64 members. Because of BCU
memory limitations, however, the more members you include,
the fewer samples you can take. If taking large numbers of
samples is a priority for you, consider creating multiple Trend
objects with limited membership to accomplish this. You can
later combine the Trend objects in a single report for compari-
son. (See Table 13 on page 451 to understand the relationship
between number of members and number of possible samples.)

Setting Up Trend Sampling

When setting up a trend, you need to configure the sampling parameters
and sampling interval of the trend object. You can set up trend sampling
at the Trend editor’s Setup screen. At this screen you can also change the
name of the trend.
To set up trend sampling:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 410).

Figure 410. Trend Editor Setup Screen

2. If you want to change the trend’s name, in the Trend Name field,
enter a new name for this trend.
3. In the Sampling Enable referencer edit control, select a method for
determining whether sampling should occur. Select Enabled to turn
on sampling manually. Select Disabled to turn off sampling manually.

450 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Trend Sampling

Select Referencer if you want sampling to be activated or deactivated

by the state of a referenced binary property.
4. If you selected Referencer in the Sampling Enable field, then the On
Delay for Referencer field becomes active. Type the minimum number
of minutes the binary property must be in On state before sampling
occurs. You can enter a number between 0 and 60. This feature allows
the system to stabilize before trending occurs.
5. In the Number of Samples field, select the number of samples you
want the BCU to retain in its memory. This number is limited by the
number of members you want the trend to sample. (See Table 13 to
understand the relationship between the number of members in this
trend and the number of samples it is possible to store.)
Table 13. Limits on Numbers of Samples Stored in BCU Memory

Number of Members Maximum Samples Stored

1 244
2 169
3 129
4 104
5 88
6 75
7 66
8 59
9 53
10 48
11 44
12 41
13 38
14 36
15 33
16 31
17 30
18 28
19 27
20 25
21 24
22 23
23 22
24 21
25–26 20
27 19
28–29 18

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 451
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

Table 13. Limits on Numbers of Samples Stored in BCU Memory

Number of Members Maximum Samples Stored

30–31 17
32–33 16
34–35 15
36–38 14
39–41 13
42–44 12
45–48 11
49–53 10
54–59 9
60–64 8

6. In the Interval field, select the frequency with which you want the
members to be sampled. You can choose 1 Minute, 5 Minutes, 15 Min-
utes, 1 Hour, 8 Hours, 1 Day, 7 Days, or Billing Period.
7. If you selected 8 Hours or 1 Day in the Interval field, the Collect Sam-
ple at Time field displays. Enter in this field the time of day you want
sampling to begin.
8. If you selected 7 Days in the Interval field, the Collect Sample at
Time field and the Collect Sample on Day field are displayed. Com-
plete these fields with the time of day you want sampling to begin,
and the day of the week you want sampling to begin, respectively.
9. If you selected Billing Period in the Interval field, the following but-
tons are displayed:
• Use Last Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at
11:59 p.m. on the last day of every month.
• Define Day of Month, which directs the system to sample at 11:59
p.m. on the day of the month you specify in the related field.
• Use Billing Periods.
The last button is available only if you have set up billing periods in
Site Configuration. You can select to sample at the end of any one of
up to three billing periods, which you specify in the related field.

452 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Security Access for a Trend

Setting Security Access for a Trend

The Trend editor’s Classes screen allows you to define the security class
setup for this trend. You also set up trend snapshots on this screen.
To set security access:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Classes tab to display the Classes
screen (see Figure 411).

Figure 411. Trend Editor Classes Screen

2. If you wish to use the Snapshot Trends feature, click Enable Snap-
shot. When a snapshot is taken, sampling is disabled until the snap-
shot is reset. This allows you to analyze the data leading up to the
point in time when the snapshot occurred.
3. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Trigger On referencer edit con-
trol becomes active. In this field, specify the binary input referencer
or event state of an analog input object that serves as a trigger for a
snapshot to be taken. If you reference a binary property, that property
is monitored every minute, and if the state transitions from 0 to 1 for
more than two minutes, a snapshot is triggered.
If you reference the event state of an analog input object, that prop-
erty is monitored every minute. If the analog input object goes into a
Low Alarm or High Alarm for more than two minutes, a snapshot is
triggered (make sure the analog input object is not in an alarm state
when you initially assign the referencer). If you don’t make a selection
here, no snapshot is taken.
4. If you selected Enable Snapshot, the Snapshot Notification Class field
becomes active. In this field, specify which Event Class will receive a
message of the snapshot occurrence when a snapshot actually hap-
pens.
5. Click Security Classes to display the Change Security Classes dialog
box (see Figure 412 on page 454).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 453
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

Figure 412. Change Security Classes Dialog Box

6. For each security class, click to insert a check mark if you want users
of this class to have security access to this trend object.
7. Click OK to return to the Classes screen.

Viewing the Status Screen

The Trend editor’s Status screen displays information about past and
present data sampling, and provides some controls for managing this
data. This screen displays when you first access the Trend editor.
To view the status screen:
1. From the Trend editor, click the Status tab to display the Status
screen (see Figure 405 on page 446).
2. View the Sampling Enabled field. Yes indicates that the system col-
lects samples regularly for this trend. (Click Report to view the sam-
ples.)
3. Click Clear Samples if you want to erase all accumulated data for this
trend.
4. View the Snapshot Taken field. Yes indicates that a change in state of
the referenced property triggered a snapshot, and that sampling has
been suspended.
5. Click Reset Snapshot to resume sampling and to prepare the system
for the next snapshot event. This button is available only if the Snap-
shot Taken field contains a Yes.
6. View the remaining fields on this screen. These fields display:
• How frequently this trend is currently set up to take samples, the
number of samples stored in BCU memory

454 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Saving a Trend Object to a BCU

• The current number of members

• The percentage of BCU memory allocated to this trend object that
sample storage currently occupies
You can also identify the BCU name and the status of communica-
tions.
7. Click Report to generate a standard trend report automatically.

Saving a Trend Object to a BCU

To access trends with the Trend editor or to save trends, Tracer Summit
must be communicating with a BCU.
New or existing trend objects cannot be saved to a BCU unless that BCU
is currently communicating with the PC Workstation. You can access an
existing trend to edit it only when your PC Workstation is online with the
BCU where the trend is saved. For new trends, you can access the editor
if there is at least one BCU online.

Archiving Trend Data

The BCU that is running the trend will not automatically archive trend
data to a PC Workstation’s hard drive. To accomplish this, you must use
Tracer Summit software to access the data accumulated in the BCU and
archive it to the workstation’s hard drive.
To manually archive trend data to the PC Workstation:
1. Access the Trend editor Status screen for the trend object whose data
you want to archive.
2. Click Report to access the Tracer Summit Report Viewer and auto-
matically run the standard trend report.
3. After the report has been run, you can save it to the workstation’s
hard drive.
To automatically archive trend data to the PC Workstation:
◆ See the section about scheduling reports in Chapter 31, “Designing
Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 455
Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit BCUs

456 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Reporting for Compliant Environments

Chapter 30

Reporting for Compliant

Environments

Reporting for compliant environments is a feature of the Tracer Summit

Critical Control System (CCS) for FDA compliant environments. You can
use this reporting feature to show that your facility complies with FDA
regulation CFR21, part 11. This reporting feature can be also used as a
troubleshooting tool to ensure that your facility’s environment stays in
compliance. The Tracer Summit CCS reporting feature consists of three
reports:
• Audit trail report
• Historical trending report
• Mean kinetic temperature (MKT) report

Audit Trail Report

The audit trail report allows you to view and print audit trail data saved
to the audit trail SQL database. The report can be configured to print out
changes made by a specific user, print out all changes made to the system
up to a certain point, or print out the entire history of changes made to
Tracer Summit. Items contained in the electronic signature are printed
on every report. Figure 413 on page 458 shows a sample report log.
For more information about running an Audit Trail report, see the Tracer
Summit Critical Control System Daily Operations guide.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 457
Reporting for Compliant Environments

Figure 413. Audit Trail Report Log

Items contained in the

electronic signature

Historical Trend Report

The historical trend report allows you to view and print historical trend
data stored in the audit trail database. Items contained in the electronic
signature are printed on every report (see Figure 414).

Figure 414. Sample Historical Trend report in Report viewer

Items contained
in the electronic
signature

458 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Mean Kinetic Temperature Report

A historical trend report can display data collected over multiple time
periods, such as a trend of space temperatures and relative humidity. The
date and time are displayed in the left column, and the value from the
selected trend in subsequent columns.
If a trend sample was unable to be collected, the report will display ques-
tion marks (“???”). To create a historical trend, see “Using the Trend Edi-
tor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites” on page 429.
For more information about running a Historical Trend report, see the
Tracer Summit Critical Control System Daily Operations guide.

Mean Kinetic Temperature Report

The mean kinetic temperature (MKT) feature uses temperature samples
from a historical trend to calculate a weighted-average temperature
value. A summary of the data and the results of the calculation are dis-
played in a report (see Figure 415).
A historical trend report has to be marked for MKT trending before you
can run an MKT report. To mark a historical trend report for MKT trend-
ing, see “Using the Trend Editor in CCS Compliance-Enabled Sites” on
page 429.
For more information about running an MKT report, see the Tracer Sum-
mit Critical Control System Daily Operations guide.

Figure 415. Mean Kinetic Temperature Report

Items contained in the

electronic signature

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 459
Reporting for Compliant Environments

Running Tracer Summit CCS Reports

You run Tracer Summit CCS reports using the Report Viewer, which you
can access by clicking the Reports icon button on the toolbar or selecting
Reports from the Status menu.
After running the report, you can print it, save it to a report (.rpt) file, or
export it to a tab delimited text file (.TXT). For more information about
running a Historical Trend report, see the Tracer Summit Critical Con-
trols Daily Operations guide.

460 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 31

Designing Reports for Tracer

Summit BCU Sites

The ability to create reports that are tailored to your facility is a key ben-
efit of the Tracer Summit system. Reports provide the information you
need to make decisions about building operations. Reports help you man-
age utility costs, equipment efficiency, and tenant billings.
The Report editor allows you to design easy-to-run, easy-to-read reports.
You can use any information available in Tracer Summit to create a
report. You can define report elements such as titles, footers, fonts, and
page orientation. You can also instruct the system to automatically gener-
ate custom reports at regular intervals. Automatically generated reports
can be printed and stored to disk for data archiving.
Use reports for:
• Record keeping and documentation
• Energy monitoring
• Troubleshooting
You run reports using the Reports Viewer, which is accessed from the Sta-
tus menu or from the Reports button on the toolbar. For instructions on
running reports, refer to the Tracer Summit Critical Control Daily Opera-
tions guide

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 461
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Report Types
Tracer Summit supports two types of reports—live and trend.
• Live Reports. Live reports display selected values at a particular
point in time (see Figure 416 on page 463).
• Trend Reports. Trend reports use trend objects to display historical
data obtained over a period of time (see Figure 417 on page 464).

Live Reports
Live reports display values of selected properties at the time the report is
run. Each line in a live report contains a row heading, followed by the cur-
rent value(s) for the property. A live report can display three types of
members:
• Any single displayable property in the system
• A calculation object with predefined properties
• A blank row
When a calculation object is used in a live report, the report displays data
based on the calculation type it is performing. The current value, today’s
value, yesterday’s value, current billing period’s value, and last billing
period’s value are displayed on the same row. See Figure 416 on page 463.

462 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Live Reports

Figure 416. Sample Live Report

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 463
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Trend Reports
Trend reports allow you to view, print, and save the historical data col-
lected in trend objects (see Figure 417). For information about setting up
a trend object, see Chapter 29, “Using the Trend Editor—Tracer Summit
BCUs”.

Figure 417. Sample Trend Report

A trend report can display data collected over multiple time periods, such
as a trend of space temperatures and relative humidity. It can also dis-
play multiple properties over the same time period, such as a 12-month
chiller summary report. A custom trend report may contain information
from multiple trend objects, even at different intervals.
A trend report displays the date and time in the left column, and values
from the selected trends in subsequent columns. You can use as many
trend members as you would like in a report. If a sample does not exist for
an object and property for a given time, the data cell is blank. For exam-
ple, a custom report contains a trend object with a five-minute interval,
and a trend object with a 30-minute interval. The trend object with the
five-minute interval displays data for each five-minute interval. The
trend object with the 30-minute interval displays data only at half-hour
intervals. The rows that contain five-minute intervals contain blank
areas. If a trend sample was unable to be collected, the report will display
“???”.

464 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Running a Report

Standard Reports
Tracer Summit includes a set of predefined standard live and standard
trend reports.
Standard live reports provide status information for a single object. Most
objects in the system have at least one associated standard live report.
You can create your own standard live reports. You can also edit pre-
defined standard live reports.
Standard trend reports (known as quick trend reports in previous ver-
sions of Tracer Summit) display a pre-formatted trend report containing
all the trend members in a trend object. Standard trend objects cannot be
edited. You can, however, create your own custom trend reports.

Running a Report
You run a report using the Report Viewer, which you can access by click-
ing the Reports button on the toolbar or selecting Reports from the Status
menu. You can also run a standard report from a UCM or application edi-
tor by clicking the Report button on the editor’s Status screen.
After you run the report, you can print it, saved it to a Report (.rpt) file, or
export it to a tab delimited text file (.TXT). For more information about
running a report, see the Tracer Summit Daily Operations guide

Accessing the Report Editor

When you design a new report or edit an existing report, Tracer Summit
allows you to select from three report types—standard live, custom live,
or custom trend. When you select a report type, you have access to all
existing reports of that type. You can open an existing report to edit it.
You can also use an existing report as a template for a new report or open
a blank report.
The procedures for selecting a standard live report and for selecting a cus-
tom live or custom trend report are slightly different. After you select the
report, the Report editor displays.

Selecting a Standard Live Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report Type
dialog box displays (see Figure 418 on page 466).

Note:
If you need help with reports, click the Tutorial button to open
the Tracer Summit Daily Operations Tutorial.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 465
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Figure 418. Select Report Type Dialog Box

2. Click Standard Live in the Report Type field.

3. Click OK to display the Select Standard Live Report dialog box (see
Figure 419).

Figure 419. Select Standard Live Report Dialog Box

4. Click the arrow to the right of the Standard Report Type field to
select a report type. The available reports that match the selected
type appear in the Report Name list.
5. In the Units field, select the units of measure (either Inch-Pound or
International System) for the report. The default selection is the units
of measure defined for the site in site configuration.
6. If you wish to open a blank report containing default selections, click
New to display the Report editor.
7. If you wish to edit an existing report or use an existing report as a
template for a new report, click the name of the report you wish use in
the Report Name list.
8. Click OK to display the Report editor for the selected report.
To edit the report, follow the instructions in “Designing or Editing a
Report” on page 468.

466 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Accessing the Report Editor

Selecting a Custom Live or Custom Trend Report

1. From the Setup menu, select Report editor. The Select Report Type
dialog box displays (see Figure 420).

Figure 420. Select Report Type Dialog Box

2. Click Custom Live or Custom Trend in the Report Type field.

3. Click OK to display the Select Report dialog box (see Figure 421).

Figure 421. Select Report Dialog Box

4. If you want to create a new report containing default selections, click

New to display the Report editor.
5. If you wish to edit an existing report or use an existing report as a
template for a new report, click the name of the report you wish to
use.
6. Click OK to display the Report editor for the selected report.
To edit the report, follow the instructions in “Designing or Editing a
Report” on page 468.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 467
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Designing or Editing a Report

When designing or editing a report, you can:
• Edit the report’s name or page orientation (see “Editing the Name or
Orientation of the Report” below.)
• Define the members to be included in the report (see “Defining Report
Members” on page 469)
• Format the layout of the report (see “Entering Titles and Formatting
the Report” on page 472)
• Specify when the report will run (see “Scheduling a Report” on
page 474)

Editing the Name or Orientation of the

Report
1. From the Report editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 422).

Figure 422. Report Editor Setup Screen

2. Enter a name for the report in the Report Name field. Make the name
as informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 alphanumeric char-
acters.
3. Choose the report’s page orientation (portrait or landscape).

468 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Defining Report Members

Defining Report Members

The information presented in the body of the report is defined in the
Members screen of the Report editor. You select the type of data and the
specific properties of the data that you want to include in the report. Your
selections become the report members. You define the row (for a live
report) or column headings (for a trend object), and the order in which the
data is displayed. You can also add blank rows between report members.
Blank rows add space between the data rows and make the report more
readable. Blank rows may also contain row headings, which are generally
used for section titles.
The procedures for defining the body of the report vary for a standard live
report, a custom live report, and a custom trend report.

Note:
There are a few membership rules unique to the standard live
report type. When you run a standard live report, you should
understand these rules:
• Standard live reports may contain properties from a single
object type.
• If a new report is created, the Type field will be available
until the first report member is defined.
• Subsequent report members must be the same object type.

Defining the Members of a Standard Live Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 423).

Figure 423. Report Editor Members Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 469
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

2. To insert a property to the Report Member list, click the member

immediately above where you want to add the new member.
3. Click the name of the property you wish to add in the Property list.
4. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
5. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Row Heading field. You can enter one or two row headings.
6. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 5
for each member you wish to add.

Defining the Members of a Custom Live Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 424).

Figure 424. Report Editor Members Screen

2. Click the object type in the Type list. Available objects of the selected
type are displayed in the Name list.
3. Click the object name in the Name list. Available properties of the
selected object are displayed in the Property list.
4. Click the name of the property in the Property list.
5. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
6. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Row Heading field. You can enter one or two row headings.
7. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 6
for each member.

470 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Defining Report Members

8. To add a calculation object to the Report Members, click Add Calcula-

tion.

Defining the Members of a Custom Trend Report

1. From the Report editor, click the Members tab (see Figure 425).

Figure 425. Report Editor Members Screen

2. Click the name of the trend in the Trend list. Available Trend mem-
bers for the selected trend are displayed in the Trend Members list.
3. Click the name of the member in the Trend Members list.
4. Click Add to add your selection to the Report Members list.
5. With the member you just added highlighted in the Report Members
list, enter the label you want the report to display for that member in
the Column Heading field. You can enter one or two column headings.
6. Continue to define the report members, repeating steps 2 through 5
for each member.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 471
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Changing the Report Member Order

When you run a report, the body of the report will display the member
data in the order that they appear in the Report Members list. You can
change the order using the Order arrow keys.
To change the report member order:
1. From the Report editor’s Members screen, click the member name you
wish to move in the Report Members list.
2. Click the up arrow in the Order field to move the member up one row.
Click the down arrow to move the member down one row.

Adding a Blank Row in the Report

1. From the Report editor’s Member screen, click the member name in
the Report Members list immediately before where you wish to add a
blank row.
2. Click Add Blank Row.
3. Provide a row heading for the blank row, if you wish.

Entering Titles and Formatting the

Report
Use the Layout screen of the Report editor to format the report, and to
prepare the report for display and printing. The Layout screen allows you
to enter titles, headings, and footers and format the fonts used in the
report. You can use special functions to insert the date, page number,
time, and security information in the report (see Table 14). You can enter
these functions in any cell in the Header, Column Headings, and Footer
fields of the Layout screen.

Table 14. Entering Date and Page Numbers in a Report

To Do This: Enter This:

Insert the current Date $D

Insert current report page $P
Insert total number of pages in $N
the report
Inserts the current time $T
Inserts the Security Information $S
(Site Name, User Name, and Job
Title

If you are editing an existing report or using an existing report as a tem-

plate, the current titles will appear in the Layout screen when you open
it. If you are creating a new report, the Tracer Summit default layout

472 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Entering Titles and Formatting the Report

selections will appear in the Layout screen. To change the existing set-
tings, select the cell contents and enter a new entry.
To set the page orientation (portrait or landscape) of the report, refer to
“Editing the Name or Orientation of the Report” on page 468.

Entering and Formatting the Report Titles

1. From the Report editor, click the Layout tab (see Figure 426).

Figure 426. Report Editor Layout Screen

2. Click the desired cells in the Header section and enter the titles you
want to display in the report.
3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Header section. The Font dialog box displays.
4. Select the font, font styles, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Entering and Formatting the Column Headings

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. Click the desired cells in the Column Headings section and enter the
column headings you want to display in the report.

Note:
Column headings 2 through 5—which are Today, Yesterday,
Last billing period, and Current billing period—only appear in
a custom live report that contains calculation report members.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 473
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Column Headings section. The Font dialog box dis-
plays.
4. Select the font, font style, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Formatting the Body Text

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. To change the font for the body text in the report, click the Font but-
ton to the right of the Body section. The Font dialog box displays.
3. Select the font, font style, and size.
4. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Entering and Formatting the Report Footer

1. Display the Report editor’s Layout screen.
2. Click the desired cells in the Footer section and enter the footer text
you want to display in the report.
3. To change the font for a cell, select the cell and click the Font button
to the right of the Footer section. The Font dialog box displays.
4. Select the font, font style, and size.
5. Click OK to close the Font dialog box and display the Layout screen.

Scheduling a Report
Tracer Summit allows you to instruct the system to run custom live and
custom trend reports automatically at specific times. You can schedule a
report to run daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. You schedule a report in
the Schedule screen of the Report editor.

Selecting a Reporting Interval

1. From the Report editor, click the Schedule tab. The Schedule screen
displays.
2. Click the Enable Auto Reporting check box. The rest of the fields on
the screen become active.

474 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Scheduling a Report

Setting Up Daily Reports

1. Click Daily in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the right
of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the time for
daily reports (see Figure 427).

Figure 427. Report Editor Daily Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Time 1 field to set a time for the
first daily report.
3. If you want to schedule times for more than one daily report, check
the associated check box and set a time in the Time 2, Time 3, and/or
Time 4 fields.

Setting Up Weekly Reports

1. Click Weekly in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for weekly reports (see Figure 428).

Figure 428. Report Editor Weekly Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
weekly report.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 475
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

3. Click the arrow to the right of the Day field to set a day for the weekly
report.

Setting Up Monthly Reports

1. Click Monthly in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for monthly reports (see Figure 429).

Figure 429. Report Editor Monthly Schedule Options

2. Click Use Last Day of Month or Define Day of Month.

3. If you select Define Day of Month, click the arrow to the right of the
day field to set a day for the monthly report.
4. Click the arrow to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
monthly report.

476 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Scheduling a Report

Setting Up Annual Reports

1. Click Annually in the Auto Schedule Interval field. The field to the
right of the Auto Schedule Interval displays options for setting the
time for annual reports (see Figure 430).

Figure 430. Report Editor Annual Schedule Options

2. Click the arrows to the right of the Month field to set a month for the
annual report.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Day of Month field to set a day for
the annual report.
4. Click the arrow to the right of the Time field to set a time for the
annual report.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 477
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

Setting Output Options for a Report

1. From the Report editor’s Schedule screen, click the Output To button.
The Output To dialog box displays (see Figure 431).

Figure 431. Output To Dialog Box

2. To direct the system to print the report automatically when it is run,

check Printer. The Printer Name field becomes active. The report will
be printed to the default Windows printer shown below the Printer
Name box.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Printer Name to select a different
printer.
4. To direct the system to save the report automatically when it is run,
check Output to File. The remaining Output to File fields become
active.
5. To change the default save directory, click Browse to display the
Browse for Folder dialog box.
6. Select the folder where you want the file saved and click OK. The
Output To dialog box displays again.
7. In the File Name field, select Auto Generated or Specified. Auto Gen-
erated report files are stored in the format YYMMDD0X, where YY is
the year, MM is the month, DD is the day, and 0X is the counter for
the report. For example, the first report generated on March 23, 1999,
is saved to the file name 99032301.
8. If you select Specified, enter the file name you want the system to
assign to the report in the field to the right of the Specified field. This
file is overwritten each time the scheduled report is generated.

478 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Saving the Report

9. To add a report to the end of a previous report, select Append to File.

10. To change the file type, select a new type in the Save as Type field.
11. Click OK to close the Output To dialog box and display the Schedule
screen.

Saving the Report

To save a report:
◆ To save your report, click Save at the bottom of the Report editor, or
select Save Report from the File menu.
To copy a report to a new report name:
◆ With the new report open in the Report editor, select Save Report As
from the File menu.

Deleting Reports
Occasionally, you may want to delete reports from the Tracer Summit sys-
tem. For example, you may want to delete specific reports you created for
site setup and troubleshooting.

Note:
After you delete reports from the system, you cannot recover
them unless you have a report backup file. Before deleting
reports, we recommend backing up all reports that you may
want to use again. See the Tracer Summit Daily Operations
Guide for information on backing up reports, or see Chapter 37,
“Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation”, of this guide
for information on restoring reports.

To delete reports:
1. Display the Report editor (see “Accessing the Report Editor” on
page 465).
2. From the File menu, select Delete Reports. The Delete Reports -
Select Site dialog box displays.
3. Select the site that contains the report you want to delete and click
OK. The Delete Reports dialog box displays.
4. In the Type field, select the type of the report you want to delete. You
can delete custom reports or user-defined standard reports. (Pre-
defined standard reports included with Tracer Summit may be edited,
but cannot be deleted.)
5. In the Existing Reports list, select the report names you want to
delete.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 479
Designing Reports for Tracer Summit BCU Sites

6. Click the Add button. The reports display in the Selected Reports to
Delete list. You can also click Add All to add all reports of the selected
type to the list of reports to delete.
7. To remove any reports from the Selected Reports to Delete list, select
the report name and click Remove. You can also click Remove All to
clear the list.
8. Click the Delete button. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
9. Click Yes. The selected reports are deleted.

480 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 32

Setting System Options

The System Options editor allows you to customize or change screen, file,
and print options to fit your preferences. The selected options affect only
the PC Workstation you are working on. Event log capacity settings, how-
ever, might affect the performance of multiple workstations in a shared
database.
The System Options editor allows you to
• Select the home graphic, which is the screen that displays when you
click Home
• Select the event log printer and alarm options
• Change the default file directories
• Change the workstation device ID for event routing
• Select whether object and property IDs are displayed throughout the
Tracer Summit system
• Set up basic e-mail message forwarding services
• Configure connection options for the navigation tree

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 481
Setting System Options

Changing the Home Graphic

The home graphic displays when you click Home in the Tracer Summit
toolbar.
To change the home graphic:
1. From the Tools menu, select Options to display the System Options
editor General screen (see Figure 432).

Figure 432. System Options Editor General Screen

482 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

2. Click Change to the right of the Home Graphic field to display the
Select Home Graphic dialog box (see Figure 433).

Figure 433. Select Home Graphic Dialog Box

3. In the Graphic Object Name list, click the name of the graphic you
wish to select.

Note:
The Select Home Graphic dialog box lists all available system
graphics stored in the C:\Program Files\Tracer
Summit\Graphics\Custom directory.

4. Click OK to select the graphic and display the General screen.

Setting Up the Events Printer, Message

Forwarding, and Event Log Settings
When Tracer Summit Critical Control System BCUs generate alarms and
events, you can have those alarms and events sent to a printer as well as
updated in the alarm and event log. Tracer Summit CCS uses printers
installed in the Windows operating system to print events.
The System Options editor allows you to select a default printer and
change settings related to event printing. The editor also allows you to
specify who should receive an alarm or event by means of e-mail or e-mail
enabled pager. Through the editor, you can also modify the size of the
event log.
For more information about alarms and events, refer to the Tracer Sum-
mit Critical Control System Daily Operations guide.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 483
Setting System Options

Setting Up the Events Printer

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 434).

Figure 434. System Options Editor

2. To change the events printer, in the Events group click Change. The
Print Setup dialog box displays (see Figure 435 on page 485).

Note:
The Print Setup dialog box varies depending upon the printer
selected.

484 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

Figure 435. Print Setup Dialog Box

3. In the Name field, select the printer that Tracer Summit CCS will use
to print events and alarms.

Note:
• Tracer Summit CCS sends alarm and event information to
the printer one line at a time. A tractor-feed (or line-feed)
printer works best as the events printer so that you can
view the events as they are generated and printed. If you
select a sheet-feed printer (such as a laser printer), you do
not see the events until a complete page is printed.
• Typically, the events printer is connected directly to the PC
Workstation (on the LPT1: port).

4. Select additional printer setup options as necessary. For more infor-

mation on setting printer options, see the instructions provided with
Microsoft Windows or with your printer.
5. Click OK. The System Options editor General tab displays.
6. To have events print to the printer, make sure Enable Event Printing
is selected.
7. If you want to be able to connect to a remote site when an incoming
alarm is received, select Show Connection Dialog on Incoming
Alarms.
8. If you want to have incoming alarms be silent (rather than sounding a
beep), select Disable Workstation Alarm.

IMPORTANT
Selecting Disable Workstation Alarm keeps the workstation from beep-
ing when an alarm comes in, regardless of how Alarm and Message
Routing is setup.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 485
Setting System Options

Setting up Message Forwarding

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 434 on page 484).
2. Select the alarm class from the list, and type an e-mail address in the
To email address field (see Figure 436).
When you select and save the Forward Alarm Class and To e-mail
address fields, alarms that match the selected alarm class from all
sites in the database are e-mailed.

Figure 436. Forward Alarm Class and To email address Fields

IMPORTANT
Your workstation must be set up as an event receiver in BCU sites, and
other requirements for alarms must be satisfied, as described in Chap-
ter 8, “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”

Setting Up Event Log Automatic Refresh

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays (see Figure 434 on page 484).
2. Click the Enable Auto Refresh check box (see Figure 437). Select the
refresh rate from the list.
For performance tuning, you can select a custom auto refresh inter-
val. This interval can range from 30 seconds to 5 minutes (see
Figure 437). If you are expecting a lot of alarms, set the refresh rate
to a higher value. If you are troubleshooting one piece of hardware,
and these are the only alarms you expect to see, set the refresh rate to
a lower value.

Note:
If you set the refresh rate value too low, the user may experi-
ence what appear to be screen lockups.

Figure 437. Enable Auto Refresh Rate Fields

486 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the Events Printer, Message Forwarding, and Event Log Settings

Note:
• The BCU event log and the error log viewers cannot be
automatically refreshed. Selecting Enable Auto Refresh has
no effect on these viewers.
• In a shared SQL database, workstations do not share this
setting. Each workstation has its own setting.
• If you change the database source from SQL to an existing
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the refresh rate
is restored to its previous value. However, when you change
the database source from SQL to a blank Microsoft Access
Tracer Summit database, the refresh rate is reset to its
default Microsoft Access value when Tracer Summit starts
up.

3. Select the event log capacity from the Event Log Capacity list.
For system performance and manageability, you can modify the stor-
age capacity of the event log with your selection of the Event Log
Capacity. The Tracer Summit CCS software will not allow the number
of events saved in the database to exceed this limit.
If you do insert a new event in the database that exceeds this limit,
the Tracer Summit CCS software deletes the oldest events in the
database until the number of events in the database comes within the
limit. The type of database that you are using determines the maxi-
mum limits

Note:
• If the new event log capacity value is less than the number
of existing events in the log, the following warning message
appears: You will lose events from your Event Log! It is rec-
ommended that you cancel and first back up the Event Log.
Continue with save and lose events? <Yes> <No>.
• If you click Yes, the new capacity value is saved, and
the log is truncated to the new value when a new event
is inserted in the log.
• If you click No, changes are not saved, and the capacity
is restored to the original value.
• In a shared SQL database, workstations share this setting.
Each workstation cannot have its own setting because the
database is shared.
• If you change the database source from SQL to an existing
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the event log
capacity value is restored to its previous value. However,
when you change the database source from SQL to a blank
Microsoft Access Tracer Summit database, the event log
capacity value is reset to its default Microsoft Access value
when Tracer Summit starts up.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 487
Setting System Options

4. From the BCU Event Log Capacity list, select the record size and
change it to the appropriate value.
When the new value is less than the number of existing records in the
log, a warning appears, as described in the note for step 3.
5. From the Error Log Capacity list, select the record size and change it
to the appropriate value.
When the new value is less than the number of existing records in the
log, a warning appears, as described in the note for step 3.
6. Click Save.

Changing Default File Directories

Tracer Summit CCS uses many directories or folders to store files. Typi-
cally, you will want to accept the system defaults. You can modify the
default locations to store graphic files on a common file server, for exam-
ple.

IMPORTANT
When you are using a shared SQL database, you might have to store
these files in a shared folder on your LAN. This is to ensure that all
Tracer Summit users can access these files.

To change default directories:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the File Locations tab. The File Locations screen displays (see
Figure 438).

Figure 438. System Options Editor File Locations Screen

3. Click the file type whose location you wish to modify in the File Types
list.

488 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

4. Click Modify to display the Browse for Folder dialog box (see
Figure 439).

Figure 439. Browse for Folder Dialog Box

5. Select a new location in which to save files.

6. Click OK to select the location and display the File Locations screen.

Changing Advanced Settings

The System Options editor allows you to change the workstation device
ID and to set options for how objects and properties are displayed. These
options are most often used when doing advanced troubleshooting. Use
these options only if you are an advanced user.

Changing the Workstation Device ID

The workstation device ID identifies the workstation to the rest of the
Tracer Summit CCS, primarily for the purposes of alarm and message
routing, notification, and acknowledgment. Take care when you change
the device ID. Changing the ID can result in intercepting messages
meant for another workstation or not receiving messages intended for the
workstation.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 489
Setting System Options

Note:
Tracer Summit provides a default workstation device ID that is
based on the number assigned during the software installation.
Generally, the first workstation created is ID 80. Each addi-
tional workstation number is increased in increments of one.
Typical workstation addressing is as follows:
• 80 – 100 for on-site workstations
• 101 – 120 for remote workstations
• 121 – 140 Trane-reserved addressing

To change the workstation device ID:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced screen (see
Figure 440).

Figure 440. System Options Editor Advanced Screen

3. In the Workstation Device ID field, click the Change button. The

Change Workstation Device ID dialog box displays (see Figure 441 on
page 491).

490 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

Figure 441. Change Workstation Device ID Dialog Box

4. In the New Device ID field, select a new ID number.

5. Click OK.

Selecting Whether Object and Device IDs Display

The Advanced screen of the System Options editor allows you to select
whether object and device identification numbers (IDs) are displayed
throughout the Tracer Summit system. If you select to display the IDs,
then whenever you select or view a UCM, area, device, object or property,
the item’s object and device IDs, as well as its name, are displayed.
This information is valuable for troubleshooting BACnet interface
projects. Most of the time, however, you do not need to display the object
and device IDs. For more information on BACnet interfaces, refer to
Chapter 36, “Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices”.
An example of where the object and device IDs display within Tracer
Summit is at the Object and Properties Selection dialog box (accessed
through the Status menu’s Object and Properties item). See Figure 442
on page 492.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 491
Setting System Options

Figure 442. Objects and Properties Selection Dialog Box

To display device and object IDs:

1. From the Tools menu, select Options. The System Options editor dis-
plays.
2. Click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced screen (see Figure
440 on page 490).
3. Check the Show Object and Device IDs check box to enable this
option. To disable the option, uncheck the check box.

Setting Connection Features of the Navigation Tree

When you double-click a site node in the navigation tree, the Tracer Sum-
mit CCS software can do one of three things:
• Connect immediately
• Prompt you whether you want to connect
• No immediate connection
The response to the double-click on a site node is determined by what you
set in system options. For more information about the navigation tree and
connecting to sites, see “Connecting to a Site from the Tree” on page 361.
To set connection features for the navigation tree:
◆ From the Advanced tab in the System Options editor (see Figure 440
on page 490), in the Double Clicks on Navigation Tree Nodes group:
• Click Connect Immediately if you want Tracer Summit to connect
immediately to a site after a double-click on a site node

492 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Changing Advanced Settings

• Click Prompt for Connection if you want Tracer Summit to

prompt the user with a dialog box that asks whether they want to
connect to the site after a double-click on a site node
• Click No Connection if you want Tracer Summit not to connect
immediately to a site after a double-click on a site node

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 493
Setting System Options

494 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 33

The BCU Operator Display

The BCU operator display is a liquid crystal display (LCD) touch screen
that is installed in Tracer Summit BMTX or BMTW BCU as an option.
The operator display makes it possible for the occasional daily user to
perform most of the Tracer Summit daily activities at the BCU.
Initially, the Tracer Summit software and PC Workstation are needed to
set up the operator display for operations. After setup is complete, the
operator display can serve as a stand-alone operator interface between
the user and the building automation system (BAS) equipment.
At the PC Workstation, the following site objects are set up for monitoring
at the BCU operator display:
• Equipment and applications
• Time of day schedules
• Alarms and events
For information on using the operator display, see the Tracer Summit
Critical Control System Operations Display guide.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 495
The BCU Operator Display

Accessing the BCU Operator Display

Editor
1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display. A list of all the opera-
tor displays that have been set up in site configuration displays (see
Figure 443).
2. Select the name of the operator display that you want to edit.

Figure 443. Select Dialog Box

3. Click OK to display the Operator Display editor (see Figure 444). The
editor opens up to the Status tab. View this screen to see the number
of objects that has been selected for monitoring at the operator dis-
play.

Figure 444. Operator Display Editor—Status Screen

496 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New BCU Operator Display

Creating a New BCU Operator Display

To create a new BCU operator display object, you perform the following
tasks:
• Add an operator display object to the selected device (as described in
this section).
• Add a BCU event log object to the device (optional). Adding a BCU
event log object enables users to view and acknowledge system
alarms and events at the operator display (see “Adding a BCU Event
Log object” on page 67).
• Select objects for viewing and editing at the operator display (see
“Setting Up the BCU Operator Display” on page 500).
The following steps show you how to create a BCU operator display object
from the Site Configuration editor. You can create an operator display
object while configuring a site (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Tracer Sum-
mit BCU Sites”), or you can add it to a specified BCU (as described in this
section).

Note:
The operator display buttons are only available for BMTX and
BMTW BCUs.

To create a new operator display object:

1. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration.
2. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab to display
the Devices screen (see Figure 445).

Figure 445. Site Configuration — Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 497
The BCU Operator Display

• If the appropriate BCU is listed, select it. Then click the Edit
Device button. The Edit Device dialog box displays (see
Figure 446).
• If the appropriate BCU is not listed, click the Create Device but-
ton to display the Create Device screen.

Figure 446. Site Configuration—Edit Device

3. Click the Operator Display Add button. The Create New Operator
Display dialog box displays (see Figure 447).

Figure 447. Create New Operator Display Dialog Box

498 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating a New BCU Operator Display

4. Type a name in the Operator Display Name field. Make the name as
informative as possible. Use a maximum of 32 characters.

Note:
You must enter a name before you can save the new operator
display object. You can modify the name at any time from the
Edit Operator Display dialog box. You can access the dialog box
from the Operator Display Edit button.

5. To change the default security access for the operator display, click
Security Classes (see “Setting Up Operator Display Security” on
page 137).
6. Click OK to close the Create New Operator Display dialog box.
7. From the Edit Device screen, click OK.
8. From the Devices screen, click Save. The operator display object is not
created until you save.
9. Click OK to return to the main screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 499
The BCU Operator Display

Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

Setting up the operator display is as easy as selecting a device and cus-
tomizing the operator display home screen. To set up the operator display
for daily operations, perform the following tasks:
• Select a device from the Devices tab or select individual object types
and their members from the Object Types tab and Members tab.
• Use the Main Screen tab to customize the operator display home
screen.

Operator Display Options

To set up security for the operator display, or to enable custom screens,
see “Setup Options for the Operator Display” on page 507.

Selecting a Device
From the Devices screen, you can quickly select all of the objects residing
in a device. The objects will then be available at the operator display for
monitoring.
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Devices tab. The Devices
Screen displays (see Figure 448).

Figure 448. Operator Display Editor—Devices Screen

500 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

2. From the Available Devices list, select the name of the device.
3. Click the Add button to add the device to the Selected Devices list.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all the object
types in that device to the Selected Objects list on the Object
Types screen (see Figure 449 on page 502). Also, the members
associated with those object types are automatically moved to
the Selected Objects list on the Members screen (see Figure 450
on page 503).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

Removing a Device
1. From the Selected Devices list, select the name of the device.
2. Click the Remove button to move the device back to the Available
Devices window.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all the object
types in that device back to the Available Objects list on the
Object Types tab. Also, the members associated with those
object types are automatically moved back to the Available
Objects list on the Members tab. All of the objects for that
device will no longer be available at the operator display for
monitoring.

3. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 501
The BCU Operator Display

Selecting Individual Object Types

Use this screen to quickly select all of the members of an object type.
To select individual object types:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Object Types tab. The
Object Types screen displays (see Figure 449).

Figure 449. Operator Display Editor—Object Types Screen

2. From the Available Object Types list, select the name of the object.
3. Click the Add button to add the object to the Selected Object Types
list.

Note:
When you select objects from the Available Object Types list,
the Tracer Summit software automatically moves all of the
members belonging to that object type from the Available
Object list to the Selected Objects list on the Members screen
(see Figure 450 on page 503). Also, the software automatically
moves the associated device from the Available Devices list to
the Selected Devices list on the Devices screen (see Figure 448
on page 500).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

502 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up the BCU Operator Display

Removing Individual Object Types

1. In the Selected Object Types list, select the name of the object you
want to remove.
2. Click the Remove button to move the object type back to the Available
Object Types list.

Note:
The Tracer Summit software automatically moves all of the
members belonging to that object type from the Selected
Objects list to the Available Objects list on the Members tab.
The members of the object type will no longer be available for
monitoring at the operator display.

3. Click Save to save your changes.

Selecting Members
Use this screen to quickly select and remove members of an object type
from the object lists.
To select members of an object type:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Members tab. The Mem-
bers screen displays (see Figure 450).

Figure 450. Operator Display Editor—Members Screen

2. From the Available Objects list, select the name of the member.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 503
The BCU Operator Display

3. Click the Add button to add the member to the Selected Objects list.

Note:
When you select objects from the Available Objects list, the
Tracer Summit software automatically moves the object type
associated with that member from the Available Object Types
list to the Selected Object Types list on the Object Types screen
(see Figure 449 on page 502). Also, the software automatically
moves the associated device from the Available Devices list to
the Selected Devices list on the Devices screen (Figure 448 on
page 500).

4. Click Save to save your changes.

Removing Members
1. In the Selected Objects list, select the name of the member you want
to remove.
2. Click the Remove button to move the member back to the Available
Objects list. That member will no longer be available for monitoring
at the operator display.

Note:
If you remove all of the members belonging to an object type,
the Tracer Summit software will automatically move the object
type back to the Available Object Types list on the Object Types
tab. The members of that object type will no longer be available
for monitoring at the operator display.

3. Click Save to save changes.

504 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Customizing the Operator Display Home Screen

Customizing the Operator Display

Home Screen
From the Main Screen you can customize the information on the operator
display home screen. Use this screen to add a title and custom data points
to the operator display (see Figure 451). Figure 452 on page 506 shows an
example of a customized home screen.

Figure 451. Operator Display Editor Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 505
The BCU Operator Display

Figure 452. Example of Customized Operator Display Home Screen

Title
Description of Custom
data point #1

Custom data
points

Description of Custom
data point #2

To customize the operator display home screen:

All fields on the Main Screen editor are optional and can be left blank
(refer to Figure 451 on page 505).
1. In the title field, type text that will display as the title of the home
screen. If this field is left blank, the title will default to the site name.
2. In the Line One Description field, type text that describes the custom
data point. If this field is left blank, no information will be displayed.
3. In the Object Type field, use the selection arrow to select the object
type from the list.
4. In the Object Name field, use the selection arrow to select the object
name from the list.
5. In the Property Name field, use the selection arrow to select the prop-
erty whose value will appear on line one as the first custom data
point.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 for adding the second custom data point to the oper-
ator display.
7. Click Save to save your changes.

506 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Setup Options for the Operator Display

The following tasks are optional when setting up the operator display:
• Setting up BCU operator display security access (see “Setting Up
Operator Display Security” on page 137)
• Enabling security for the BCU operator display (as described in this
section)
• Choosing operator display options (as described in this chapter)
• Creating custom screens (see Chapter 34, “Using the Custom Screen
Editor”)
• Setting up a custom screen (as described in this chapter)

Enabling Security at the Operator Display

Use the following procedure to set security at the operator display. When
security is enabled, users need a password and edit access to edit system
information. Passwords and edit access are set up in the Site Security edi-
tor (see “Setting Up Operator Display Security” on page 137).
To enable security at the operator display:
1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display. The Select Operator
Display dialog box displays.
2. Select the operator display you want to set up security for and click
OK. The Operator Display editor displays.
3. Click the Setup tab. The Setup screen displays (see Figure 453).

Figure 453. Operator Display Editor—Setup Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 507
The BCU Operator Display

4. Click the Enable Security checkbox to place a check in the box (see
Figure 454).

Note:
The software will automatically place a check in this box when
an operator display password is assigned in the Site Security
editor (see “Setting Up Operator Display Security” on
page 137).

Figure 454. Setup Screen—Enable Security

5. Click Save to save your changes.

Disabling Security at the Operator Display

1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 453
on page 507).
2. With the Enable Security checkbox checked, click the checkbox to
remove the check and disable security. With security disabled, users
have edit access to all functions at the operator display.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Operator Display Options

From the Setup tab, you can enable or disable certain items on the opera-
tor display touch screen. These items are shown in Figure 455. A descrip-
tion and procedures for how to enable or disable each item follows.

Figure 455. Setup Screen—Operator Display Options

508 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Disabling Non-Critical Confirmation Screens

Confirmation screens display to confirm that you want to proceed with an
operation, for example, making a change to a schedule or set point.
To disable non-critical confirmation screens:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 453
on page 507).
2. Click the Disable Confirmation Screen checkbox to place a check in
the box. Only non-critical confirmation screens are disabled.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Disable Audible Alarm

An audible alarm will beep when certain types of events and alarms are
received at the operator display. If the user exits the event log with an
unacknowledged alarm or event that has been set up to beep, the system
will reset the beep-timer to beep again in 60 minutes. If an unacknowl-
edged alarm or event exists, but that type of event does not beep, the
beep-timer will not reset. Alarms and events are set up to beep in Site
Configuration event routing (see “Setting Up Event Routing” on page 88).
To disable the audible alarm:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Setup tab (see Figure 453
on page 507).
2. Click the Disable Audible Alarm checkbox to place a check in the box.
3. Click Save to save your changes.

Enabling Custom Screens

This option is available when custom screens have been saved to the site
database. You must first create custom screens before they are available,
(see Chapter 34, “Using the Custom Screen Editor”).
To enable custom screens:
1. Click the Enable Custom Screens checkbox (see Figure 455 on page
508).
2. Click the selection arrow. The list expands to display all custom
screens saved to the site database.
3. Select a custom screen from the list. This screen will be the first cus-
tom main screen to display after the View button is pressed on the
operator display home screen (see Figure 452 on page 506).
4. Click Save to save your changes.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 509
The BCU Operator Display

Enabling the Quick-Select Function

The quick-select function automatically adds members of a selected appli-
cation to the operator display object list. Figure 456 shows applications
that use the quick-select function.

Figure 456. Setup Screen—Applications that Use the Quick-select

Function

To enable the quick-select function:

1. Click the application for which you want to automatically add mem-
bers. A dialog box displays asking you to confirm your selection.
2. Click OK.
3. Click Save. From this point forward, when the application is selected
to be included in the operator display object list, the members of that
application will automatically be included in the object list.

Note:
When the quick-select function is disabled (checkbox not
checked), only the application will be moved in the operator dis-
play object list.

510 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setup Options for the Operator Display

Selecting Custom Screens

Use the following procedure to select custom screens for use at the opera-
tor display. Custom screens are created in the Custom Screens editor (see
Chapter 34, “Using the Custom Screen Editor”).
To add a custom screen:
1. From the Operator Display editor, click the Custom Screens tab. The
Custom Screens screen displays (see Figure 457).

Figure 457. Operator Display—Custom Screens Screen

2. In the Available Screens list, select one or more custom screens.

3. Click Add to add the custom screen. An asterisk appears behind the
name of the screen, indicating that it has been added but not saved to
the site database. You will need to save the custom screen in order for
it to be available at the operator display.
4. Click Save to save your changes.
To remove a custom screen:
1. In the operator display list, select the custom screen you want to
remove.

Note:
Only custom screens that have not been saved (an asterisk
appears after the name) are moved back to the Available
Screens list.

2. Click Save to save your changes.

To add all available custom screens:
1. Click the Add All button to add custom screens to the operator display
list.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 511
The BCU Operator Display

2. Click Save to save all custom screens to the site database.

To remove all unsaved custom screens:
1. Click the Remove All button. Only custom screens that have not been
saved (asterisk appears after the name) are moved back to the Avail-
able Screens list.
2. Click Save to save your changes.

Deleting Saved Custom Screens

◆ To delete saved custom screens from the operator display list, go to
the Tools menu and select Delete Objects.

512 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 34

Using the Custom Screen

Editor

The BCU Custom Screen editor enables you to create custom screens that
you can download to a BCU operator display. Using the Custom Screen
editor, you can develop screens that meet the unique needs of users and
sites.
Situations when you might create custom screens include those where
different levels of users access the operator display during daily opera-
tions. For example, at a site where the users are not advanced, you can
create a screen that fits their needs and uses. For sites where more
advanced users access the operator display, you can create more sophisti-
cated screens than the standard screens.
Custom screens often provide quick access to frequently used informa-
tion, as well as to information that is not available on standard operator
display screens. With custom screens, for example, you can insert a
graphic of your equipment and then apply graphic and text fields that
report the status of the equipment and let you perform overrides.
With custom screens, you can:
• Create a library of custom screens and navigation schemes that can
be used at multiple job sites
• Use a combination of custom and standard screens in the BCU opera-
tor display
• Navigate from a custom screen to a standard screen
• Create a monochrome bitmap unique to your site and import it and
display it
• Define custom reports to display
• Define which object/properties that you can view on text and graphic
screens
Creating custom screens for the operator display uses procedures similar
to those for creating other Tracer Summit graphics. For more information
about creating Tracer Summit graphics in general, see “Using the Graph-
ics Editor Tools” on page 371.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 513
Using the Custom Screen Editor

About Custom Screen Graphics

Custom screen graphics are similar to graphics created with the Tracer
Summit Graphics editor. With the Custom Screen editor, you can create a
site or equipment graphic that includes text, images, target links to other
graphics, and fields that display control values.
Each time you create a custom screen, you will see a custom graphic tem-
plate (see Figure 463 on page 518). Starting with this template you add
graphics or fields that display the information you need.
A custom screen graphic template always displays two icons: the Home
target and the Back target. The Home target takes you to the main screen
of the operator display (see Figure 452 on page 506). On the Home screen
you can access the View, Alarms, and Schedules buttons. The Back target
takes you to the last screen you viewed.
You add and delete custom screens to the operator display module using
the Operator Display editor (see “Enabling Custom Screens” on
page 509). In that editor, you can assign a custom screen as the first
screen that appears when the View button is pressed (see “Selecting Cus-
tom Screens” on page 511).
Access the custom screen graphic tools using the tool bar (see “The Cus-
tom Screen Toolbar and Palette” on page 519). The tool bar provides for-
matting buttons that delete, paste, align, snap items to the grid, etc. The
tool palette contains the buttons that you click to insert fields and other
graphics, including text fields, control value fields, or bitmaps.
If you are connected to the operator display while you are creating a cus-
tom screen, you can view what values will appear in the graphic fields.
Switch to run-time screen view (see “Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen
View” on page 531) to see these real-time values.
The graphics in Figure 458 and Figure 459 on page 515 display the exam-
ple types of graphics and fields you can insert on custom screens.
Figure 458 shows an example of an equipment status custom screen,
while Figure 459 shows an example of a custom screen that was linked to
from the first custom screen (Figure 458).

514 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 About Custom Screen Graphics

Figure 458. Example Custom Screen

Static text field

Background with grid on

Bitmap image

Status text
Back Target

View equip-
Home Target ment Button

Custom screen name

Target Button

Figure 459. Example Linked Custom Screen

Binary text
Imported custom bitmaps Override
button

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 515
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Accessing the Operator Display Custom

Screen Editor
1. From the setup menu, select Operator Display Custom Screen. The
Select Custom Screen dialog box appears (see Figure 460).

Figure 460. Select Custom Screen Dialog Box

2. Select the screen you want to access.

3. Click OK to access the Custom Screen editor. The selected screen dis-
plays in the editor.

516 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Creating Custom Screens

Creating Custom Screens

1. From the Setup menu, select Operator Display Custom Screen. The
Select Custom Screen dialog box appears (see Figure 460 on page
516).
2. Click New. The New Operator Display Custom Screen Name dialog
box appears (see Figure 461).

Figure 461. New Operator Display Custom Screen Name Dialog Box

3. Type the name of the new custom screen.

4. Click OK. The Save Operator Display Custom Screen dialog box dis-
plays (see Figure 462).

Figure 462. Save Operator Display Custom Screen Dialog Box

5. From the BCU Name list, select the BCU operator display that you
are creating the custom screen for.

Note:
Tracer Summit only allows you to assign the screen to a BCU
that already has an operator display created for it.

6. Click OK to display the custom screen template (see Figure 463 on

page 518).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 517
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Figure 463. Operator Display Custom Screen Editor Template

Creating a Custom Screen from Another Custom

Screen
You can create a custom screen based on one that you have already cre-
ated.
To create a custom screen from an existing custom screen:
1. From the File menu, select Save Custom Screen As. The New Opera-
tor display Custom Name dialog box appears (see Figure 461 on page
517).
2. Perform steps 3-6 of “Creating Custom Screens” on page 517.

518 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

When the Custom Screen editor is open, two groups of tools display (see
Figure 464): a graphics toolbar and a floating tool palette that you can
move around the screen using the mouse.
Table 15 lists the toolbar buttons and what they do. Table 16 on page 521
lists palette buttons and their functions.

Figure 464. Custom Screen Editor Toolbar and Tool Palette

Switch to Runtime View

Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete Undo, Redo Align: Make Same: Center: Move Field Tools:
Top, Right, Top Height, Width, Horizontally, to Front or Snap to Grid,
or Bottom or Size Vertically Back Set X/Y Snap.
Screen Name

Status text Binary text

Override control Setpoint control

Static text Bitmap

Target button Default cursor

The Custom Screen Toolbar and Palette

The toolbar and palette contain text and graphic design buttons that help
you create custom screens.

Table 15. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions

Toolbar Button Description
Click to place the selected fields on the clipboard for use in this custom screen or
Cut Selected Field(s)
another custom screen.
Click to place the selected fields on the clipboard for use in this custom screen or
Copy Selected Field(s)
another custom screen without removing them from their current location.
Click to insert in the custom screen any fields that are currently held on the clip-
Paste Selected Field(s)
board.
Click to remove the field from the custom screen. The item is not placed on the cus-
Delete Selected Field(s)
tom screen clipboard.
Undo Click to undo the last modification to the custom screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 519
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Table 15. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions (Continued)

Toolbar Button Description
Redo Click to redo the last modification to the custom screen.
Click to align all selected fields along the left side of the primary field. The primary
Align Left field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields.
Click to align all selected fields along the right side of the primary field. The primary
field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
Align Right
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the y-coordinate of the
selected field.
Click to align all selected fields along the top of the primary field. The primary field
Align Top is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more addi-
tional fields.
Click to align all selected fields along the bottom of the primary field. The primary
Align Bottom field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields.
Click to make all selected fields the same height as the primary field. The primary
Make Same Height field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the width of the selected field.
Click to make all selected fields the same width as the primary field. The primary
field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or more
Make Same Width
additional fields. This menu selection has no effect on the height of the selected
field.
Click to make all selected fields the same dimensions as the primary field. The pri-
Make Same Size mary field is the last field you selected when pressing CTRL and clicking one or
more additional fields.
Click to align the horizontal center of one or more fields with the horizontal center of
the screen. If you select only one field, its horizontal center coincides exactly with
Center Horizontally on
the horizontal center of the screen. If you select multiple fields, their average hori-
Screen
zontal center coincides exactly with the horizontal center of the screen. This menu
selection has no effect on the y-coordinate of the selected field.
Click to align the vertical center of one or more fields with the vertical center of the
screen. If you select only one field, its vertical center coincides exactly with the verti-
Center Vertically on Screen
cal center of the screen. If you select multiple fields, their average vertical center
coincides exactly with the vertical center of the screen.
Move Field to Front Click to place the selected field on top of any other fields that it overlaps.
Move Field to Back Click to place the selected field behind any other fields that it overlaps.
Click to quickly align fields in the custom screen. When the Snap To function is
enabled (see “Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid” on page 531), the upper-left
corner of any field that is new, or has been repositioned, will be aligned with the
Snap to Grid nearest grid intersection.
The reference point is the upper left-hand corner of the field that is being positioned
on the screen. The snap-to function is activated when you release the mouse button
to insert the field onto the custom screen.
Click to modify the grid spacing to any value between 4 and 32 pixels. The default
Set X/Y Snap spacing is 8 pixels. You can select separate horizontal and vertical spacing for the
grid. They do not have to be the same.

520 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Table 15. Toolbar Buttons and Descriptions (Continued)

Toolbar Button Description
Click to change the name of the custom screen object. This will change the name of
Screen Name
the custom screen in the Tracer Summit database.
Click to view the run-time version of the custom screen. Run-time view simulates
what the custom screen will look like when it is viewed at the BCU operator display.
View Live Screen The system will also validate the objects/properties that have been added to the cus-
tom screen. Warning messages display when items are not available at the site with
which the custom screen has been associated.

Table 16. Custom Screen Palette Buttons

Field Type Field Name Palette Description

Button

Status text Inserts text drawn from the property you specify.

Status
Fields
Binary Inserts text drawn from the binary property you specify.

Override control Inserts a button that can override the present value for vari-
ous objects within a Tracer Summit site.
Control
Fields
Setpoint control Inserts a numeric text field. The field allows users to change
settings of numerical data.

Static text Inserts text that you specify.

Text or
Image
Fields Bitmap Inserts a monochrome bitmap image, no larger than 320 x
240 pixels in size

Target Target button Inserts a button that links to another custom or standard
Fields screen.

Cursor Default cursor Changes the cursor from an insertion point back to a selec-
tion cursor.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 521
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Using the Custom Screens Pop-Up Menu

In the Custom Screens editor, you can select options from the menu bar or
select them from a pop-up menu. To display a pop-up menu, right-click on
a custom screen field or on the custom screen background. You can then
make a selection from the pop-up menu (see Figure 465).
If the mouse button is positioned over a field, the pop-up menu items are
specific to the field. Otherwise, the pop-up menu is specific to the custom
screen.

Figure 465. Custom Screen Pop-Up Menu

Displaying the Custom Screen Palette

Use the following procedure to display the custom screen palette (see Fig-
ure 464 on page 519).
To display the custom screens palette:
1. From the Custom Screen editor, select Palette from the Layout menu.
A submenu appears.
2. Select the palette mode you desire.
• Click Show to display the palette
• Click Hide to hide the palette

522 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

Configuring and Using the Grid

The Custom Screen editor has a grid that helps you place screen elements
precisely on the custom screen template. Use the following procedures to
configure the grid and snap to settings that help you lay out custom
screens.

Displaying the Grid

1. From the Layout menu, select Grid Options.
2. Select On from the Grid Options submenu. The grid appears on the
Custom Screen editor and enables the Grid Spacing and Snap To
menu items. A check mark appears next to the On menu item in the
Grid Options submenu of the Layout menu.
3. To remove the grid and remove the check mark next to the On menu
item, repeat steps 1 - 2.

Configure Grid Color

1. With the grid displayed on the Custom Screen editor, from the Layout
menu, select Grid Options.
2. Select Color from the Grid Options submenu.
3. Click the color that you want the grid to display.

Configuring Grid Spacing

1. With the grid actively displayed on the Custom Screen editor, from
the Layout menu, select Grid Options. The Tracer Summit software
displays the Grid Options submenu.
2. Click Spacing. The Snap Settings dialog box appears (see Figure 466).

Figure 466. Snapping Dialog Box

3. Scroll through the values in the Snap X Value list and/or click a new
value from the Snap Y Value list. The newly selected snap X value
and/or snap Y value displays in the corresponding fields of the dialog
box.
4. Click OK to redisplay the grid with the modified grid settings.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 523
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Adding Status Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint Control

Field(s)
Use the following procedure to add fields that can display information
from sensors or equipment installed at your site.
To add control value fields:
1. From a custom screen, click the palette button associated with the
type of field you want to insert (see Table 16 on page 521). The cursor
turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 467).

Figure 467. Insert Prompt

2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and an editor that is
appropriate for that field displays.
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting Property Reference and Setup Information for Status Text,
Binary Text, and Setpoint Control Fields” below.

Selecting Property Reference and Setup Information for Status

Text, Binary Text, and Setpoint Control Fields
On the Property screen, you can specify the site name, object type, object
name, and property for the field.
• Status text displays information about a single selected property for a
specific UCM or for all UCMs of a specific object type that are
installed at a single site.
• Binary text displays a text view of the binary property of an object
that you specify. You can define which of the two logical states (0 and
1) will display.
• Setpoint control text is information that comes from a sensor or
HVAC unit. Inserting this field allows you to change the values in this
field at the operator display.
To select a property reference for these fields:
1. In the Object Type list, select an object type. The list displays only
those property types and instances that are defined for the site.
2. In the Object Name field, select the name of the object from the list.
3. In the Property Name list, select the property name. (You must com-
plete this field to exit the screen.)
4. Type or select the setup information for the field. After you enter this
information, the Editor Text field displays the values you enter.
• If you are entering Status text, use the arrow to select the right of
decimal value.

524 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

• If you are entering binary text, type the text that will appear
when the apparatus is in an inactive and/or active state.
• If you are entering setpoint information, type the minimum and
maximum value.

Note:
Using this field you can restrict the acceptable range of values.
For instance, a valid zone temperature setpoint might be
between 50 and 90°F. However, for either energy-conservation
or comfort reasons, you might want to restrict the setpoint that
can be entered from the BCU operator display to a range of
65–85°F.

5. Click OK to insert the information on the custom screen.

Inserting an Override Control Field

Use the following procedure to select one of the six preselected control
class names from the expanded selection list. The override field lets you
override the present value for various objects within a Tracer Summit
site.
To add an override control field:
1. From a custom screen, select the Override Control Field button (see
Table 16 on page 521). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see
Figure 467 on page 524).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and the Override Con-
trol Field dialog box displays (see Figure 468 on page 526).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Defining the Properties of an Override Control Field” on page 526.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 525
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Figure 468. Override Control Field Dialog Box

Defining the Properties of an Override Control Field

Note:
During daily operations, the user can override this value at the
operator display.

1. In the Object Type list, select the object type.

2. In the Object Name list, select the object name or list of objects. The
Editor Text displays the current value of the object in edit mode and
as it exists at the operator display.
• Select a specific object by its name if you want to display a
present value override control for a single unit control module
(UCM).
• Select <List Of> if you want to display a present value override
control for all UCMs of the selected object type. When you select
this value, an override button displays on the custom screen for
all UCMs configured at the BCU.
3. In the Current list, select the priority for the override control. The
BCU operator display uses pre-defined priority controls for overrides.

Note:
The default is control class 12.

When you press the override button at the operator display, the prior-
ity of the override is evaluated to see whether it cancels the priority
that is currently controlling the property.
Use the names in the Available on System list as a reference when
assigning the current control class for the override control. The list

526 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

displays the 16 control class names that were set up in site configura-
tion (see “Setting Up Control Priorities” on page 544).
4. Click OK to insert the information on the custom screen.

Inserting a Static Text Field

Use the following procedure to add a static text field. Static text is infor-
mation on the custom screen that does not change. Examples of static text
include a screen title, field title, or other item that adds information to
the screen and remains unchanged.
To add a static text field:
1. From a custom screen, click the Static Text palette button (see Table
16 on page 521). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see Figure
467 on page 524).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the graphic where you want to
insert the Static Text field and click. The field is inserted and the
Static Text dialog box displays (see Figure 469).

Figure 469. Static Text Dialog Box

3. Type the text that you want displayed on the custom screen.
4. Click OK to add the text to the custom screen. The static text string
displays on the custom screen.

Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap

Use the following procedure to add a custom or standard bitmap to the
custom screen. Custom bitmaps are created using third-party graphics
packages and imported into Tracer Summit (see “Creating and Importing
Bitmaps” on page 534). Standard bitmaps are a set of standard equip-
ment images that ship with Tracer Summit.
To insert a bitmap:
1. From a custom screen, click the Bitmap palette button (see Table 16
on page 521). The cursor turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 467
on page 524).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the screen where you want to
insert the field and click. The Bitmap dialog box displays (see
Figure 470 on page 528).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting a Bitmap” described below. The field is inserted and the

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 527
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Override Control Field dialog box displays (see Figure 468 on page
526).
From the dialog box, select the appropriate values as described in
“Selecting a Bitmap” described below.

Figure 470. Standard Bitmap Dialog Box

Figure 471. Custom Bitmap Dialog Box

Selecting a Bitmap
1. Select the type of graphic you are entering:
• If you are inserting a custom bitmap that you have created and
saved in a directory, click the Custom button.
• If you are inserting a standard bitmap, click the Standard button.

528 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Using the Custom Screen Editor Tools

2. Select the desired bitmap.

• If you are inserting a standard bitmap, select it from the bitmap
list (see Figure 470 on page 528).
• If you are inserting a custom bitmap, click the Browse button and
select the bitmap in the directory where you saved it (see
Figure 471 on page 528).
3. Click OK to add the bitmap to the custom screen. The bitmap displays
on the custom screen.

Linking a Target Button Field to a Custom or Standard

Screen
Use the following procedure to link a target button with a custom or stan-
dard screen. During run-time mode at the BCU operator display, the user
can press this target button and the LCD displays the custom screen that
is the button’s target.
To link a target button with a custom or standard screen:

1. From a custom screen, click the palette button associated with the
type of field you want to insert (see Table 16 on page 521). The cursor
turns into an insert prompt (see Figure 467 on page 524).
2. Position the cursor at the location on the screen where you want to
insert the field and click. The field is inserted and the Target Button
dialog box appears (see Figure 472).

Figure 472. Target Button Dialog Box

Defining the Properties of a Target Button

1. In the Button Text field, type the text that you want to display in the
button as it appears on the custom screen.
2. Select the button target custom screen.
• To link the field to a custom screen, click the Custom Screens but-
ton. In the Button Target list, all of the custom screens that are
available appear. Select the custom screen that you want to dis-
play when the button is pressed at the operator display.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 529
Using the Custom Screen Editor

• To link the field to a standard screen, click the Standard Screens

button. Selecting this button causes the Button Target selection
list to display only the standard screens to which the target but-
ton may be linked. At this time, you can only link to the Main
View standard screen. Selecting this target places the Main View
bitmap on the target button (see Figure 473).

Note:
Remember that if you want to use the standard screens to view
all the equipment at your site, include a target button with the
Main View on one of your custom screens. If you do not include
this button, you will only be able to access the custom screens
you set up in the Operator Display editor as the first screen to
display (“Enabling Custom Screens” on page 509), as well as
the Home, Alarms, and Schedule screens.

Figure 473. Main View Bitmap

3. If you are linking to a custom screen, from the Object Name/Type list,
select the type of object contained on the custom screen. Click None if
you are linking the target button to another custom screen that has
been developed for the site.
• Click the Object Name button to sort the Object/Name/Type by
the name of the object. The list orders the objects by alphanu-
meric name.
• Click the Type button to sort the Object Name/Type list by type of
object.
4. Click OK to insert the target button on the custom screen.

530 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Organizing Custom Screen Fields

Saving Custom Screens

◆ From the File menu, select Save Custom Screen to save your changes.

Note:
The custom screens are not added to the operator display until
you add them in the Operator Display editor and save them to
the database (“Selecting Custom Screens” on page 511).

Switching to Run-Time (Live) Screen View

Use the following procedure to see how the custom screen displays real-
time values in the fields you have added. You must be connected to the
operator display to access real-time values.
To switch to a live-screen view:
◆ Click Run-Time (Live) Screen View on the Custom Screen editor tool-
bar (see Figure 474). The editing mode is deactivated and you cannot
edit the custom screen while in live-screen mode.
• If the sensors or equipment are working correctly, their values
display. Otherwise, question marks (???) display, indicating that
the present value for the field is unknown.
• If the tools palette is active, the Tracer Summit software hides
the palette. The rest of the screen maintains the same appear-
ance.

Figure 474. Run-Time (Live) Screen View Button

Organizing Custom Screen Fields

Organizing fields includes such procedures as moving, copying and past-
ing, resizing, and related processes. For information on using the Custom
Screen editor tools, see “Organizing Graphic Fields” on page 396. The fol-
lowing procedures describe how to use tools that are unique to the Cus-
tom Screen editor.

Snapping a Bitmap or Field to the Grid

Use the following procedure when you want to precisely place bitmaps on
the grid, also called “snapping to grid.”
To snap a bitmap to the grid in the custom screen template:
1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 396.)

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 531
Using the Custom Screen Editor

2. Click Snap to Grid on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see

Figure 475). The upper left hand corner of the item is snapped verti-
cally and horizontally to the closest grid line.

Figure 475. Snap to Grid Button

Centering a Bitmap or Field Horizontally

1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 396.)
2. Click Center Horizontally on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 476). The bitmap or field aligns horizontally in the template.

Figure 476. Center Horizontally

Centering a Bitmap or Field Vertically

1. Use the default cursor to click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A
cross-hatched border displays around the bitmap or field. (You can
also select multiple fields to copy simultaneously. See “Selecting Mul-
tiple Fields at Once” on page 396.)
2. Click Center Vertically on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 477). The bitmap or field aligns vertically in the template.

Figure 477. Center Vertically

Editing Custom Screens

Use the following procedures to select custom screens to edit and to select
graphic elements on those screens for editing.

Selecting a Custom Screen to Edit When You Have

Another Screen Open
1. With a custom screen open, from the File menu, select Open Another
Custom Screen. The select Custom Screen dialog box displays (see
“Select Custom Screen Dialog Box” on page 516).
When you have not yet saved the current custom screen, the Save
Changes dialog box gives you the option to save the screen.

532 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Editing Custom Screens

2. Select an available screen.

3. Click OK to edit the custom screen.

Selecting a Bitmap or Field to Edit

1. Click the bitmap or field you want to edit. A cross-hatched border dis-
plays around the element.
2. Right-click the bitmap or field. The custom screen pop-up menu
appears (see Figure 478).

Figure 478. Example pop-up Menu with Edit Properties Selected

3. Select Edit Properties from the pop-up menu. The property dialog box
for the item appears.
• If you are editing a Status Text field, the Status Text property
dialog box appears.
• If you are editing a Binary Text field, the Binary Text property
dialog box appears.
• If you are editing an Override Control field, the Override Control
property dialog box appears (see “Defining the Properties of an
Override Control Field” on page 526).
• If you are editing a Setpoint Control field, the Setpoint Control
property dialog box appears.
• If you are editing a Static Text field, the Static Text property dia-
log box appears (see Figure 469 on page 527).
• If you are editing a Bitmap, the Bitmap property dialog box
appears (Figure 470 on page 528).
• If you are editing a Target Button, the Target Button property
dialog box appears (Figure 472 on page 529).
4. Change the properties as required.
5. From the File menu, select Save to store your changes in the data-
base.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 533
Using the Custom Screen Editor

Changing the Custom Screen Name

Use the following procedure to change the name of the custom screen.
This is the name of the custom screen as it appears beneath the custom
screen template and in the Operator Display editor.
To change the name of the custom screen:
1. Click Screen Name on the Custom Screen editor toolbar (see
Figure 479). The Screen Name dialog box appears (see Figure 480).

Figure 479. Screen Name Button

Figure 480. Custom Screen Name Change Dialog Box

2. In the Screen name field, type the new name for the custom screen.
3. Click OK to change the name of the screen. The custom screen name
that appears beneath the custom screen template changes to the new
name.

Creating and Importing Bitmaps

Using the Custom Screen editor, you can import images you create in
other software applications into graphics used in the Custom Screen edi-
tor. Tracer Summit can import bitmap (BMP) images that have been
saved as monochrome and are no larger than 320x240 pixels.
To create these image files, you can use a variety of graphics packages,
including Paintshop Pro versions 5 and later, AutoCAD, CorelDRAW, or
Windows Paint.
Once you save the files to the appropriate directory, you can insert them
into your custom screens in the same way as graphic BMP images are
inserted (see “Inserting a Custom or Standard Bitmap” on page 527).

Closing a Custom Screen

1. With a custom screen actively displayed in the custom screen editor,
from the File menu, select Close Custom Screen.
2. When you have not yet saved the custom screen, the Save Changes
dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes to store your changes.

534 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 35

Using Rover in Tracer Summit

Critical Control System

You can use the Rover Comm5 service tool within your Tracer Summit
Critical Control System (CCS) software to configure unit controllers.
There are two ways to do this:
• Start the full version of Rover from the Tracer Summit Tools menu
• Open Rover configuration screens from Tracer Summit CCS UCMs
You can use Rover to configure all supported Comm5 controllers through
Tracer Summit CCS. The Rover Comm5 service tool must be purchased
and installed separately from Tracer Summit CCS. Tracer Summit Ver-
sion 15.0 or higher and Rover Version 5.0 are required.

Note:
Rover Comm4, the Rover Flash Download application, and the
Air and Water Balancing application are not available through
Tracer Summit. All other Rover functions are available.

For more information, see “About Using Rover in Tracer Summit Critical
Control System” on page 537.

Starting Rover in Tracer Summit CCS

Note:
Changes made via Rover passthrough are not tracked in the
audit trail. You must document your changes in your facility’s
standard operating procedure (SOP).

Rover is available in Tracer Summit only when:

• Rover Comm5 Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0 or higher
are installed on your computer.
• The site security supervisor has granted you access to Rover (full
access).
To start Rover in Tracer Summit:
1. Connect locally to a Tracer Summit CCS site.
2. From the Tools menu, select Rover. The BCU Selection dialog box
appears.
If the Rover menu item is not available, check the requirements
above.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 535
Using Rover in Tracer Summit Critical Control System

3. Select the BCU that connects to the Comm5 link with the controllers
you want to configure.
4. Click Configure with Rover. Rover Comm5 starts.

Accessing Rover Configuration Screens

from UCM Editors
Rover configuration screens are available in Tracer Summit CCS only
when:
• Rover Comm5 Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0 or higher
are installed on your computer.
• The site security supervisor has granted you access to Rover (configu-
ration only).
• The software plug-in for the unit controller is available in Rover.
• The UCM is communicating with the BCU.
To open Rover configuration screens:
1. Connect locally to a Tracer Summit CCS site.
2. On the Setup menu, highlight Unit Controllers, then select the type of
Comm5 controller you want to configure. The Select controller dialog
box appears.
You can use Rover to configure the following types of controllers: Dis-
charge Air Controller (DAC), Generic LonTalk Device (GLD), Tracer
MP580/581, and Space Comfort Controller (SCC).
3. Select the controller you want to configure, then click OK. The appro-
priate UCM editor appears.
4. On the Setup tab, click the Configure with Rover button. The Rover
Configuration dialog box appears.
If the Configure with Rover button is not available, check the require-
ments above.
5. Make changes as needed, then click the Download button to save your
changes to the controller.
6. Click Close.

536 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting up Security for Rover

Setting up Security for Rover

Because the Rover Comm5 service tool makes available all configuration
options for Comm5 controllers, you'll want to restrict access to qualified
technicians and operators. Only site security supervisors can add or
remove access to Rover.
To set up security for Rover:
1. From the Setup menu, select Site Security.
2. In the Select Security dialog box, select the user for whom you want to
grant access to Rover.
3. On the Functions tab, select the Rover (Configuration Only) check box
and/or the Rover (Full Access) check box.
The Configuration Only option grants access to configuration screens
only (from a UCM editor). The Full Access option grants access to the
complete Rover service tool so that bindings can be created between
controllers.
4. Click Save.
5. Click the Open Another button to add access for other users.
6. Click Close when you are finished.

About Using Rover in Tracer Summit

Critical Control System
Do I need Rover to manage my building automation
system?
You probably don’t need Rover to manage your building automation sys-
tem on an ongoing basis. Rover is a configuration and troubleshooting tool
for individual controllers—it doesn’t have the sophisticated system-level
reporting or scheduling capabilities of Tracer Summit CCS.
If you’re a Trane technician, using Rover in Tracer Summit CCS makes it
much easier to work with Comm5 controllers on Tracer Summit CCS
sites. You can connect your computer to a BCU locally and then use Rover
to set up and troubleshoot connected Comm5 controllers.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 537
Using Rover in Tracer Summit Critical Control System

Who can access Rover from Tracer Summit CCS?

The site security supervisor must grant access to appropriate technicians
and operators before they can use Rover through Tracer Summit CCS.
There are two levels of access:
• Rover (Configuration Only), which offers access only to Rover configu-
ration screens from UCM editors
• Rover (Full Access), which offers access to the full version of Rover,
including the ability to create bindings between controllers

Note:
An operator with full Rover access can configure all supported
Comm5 controllers, even if that operator does not have access
to certain types of Comm5 controllers in Tracer Summit CCS.

538 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 36

Using BACnet for Non-Trane

Devices

BACnet (Building Automation Control network) is a standard communi-

cation protocol adopted by ASHRAE for sharing data between various
manufacturers’ equipment and building automation systems. Tracer
Summit uses the BACnet protocol for all communications between BCUs
and PC Workstations. BACnet protocol is also used to:
• Control and monitor non-Trane devices
• Communicate equipment information to a non-Trane control system
so that it can control and monitor the Trane equipment
Tracer Summit uses and supports many standard BACnet objects. Tracer
Summit also expands on BACnet by using Trane proprietary UCM
objects. Trane UCM objects follow the BACnet protocol structure, but are
not included in the BACnet standard. In order for non-Trane devices to
interpret UCM object data, you must create standard BACnet input or
output objects and reference them to UCM objects.
Connect a non-Trane device to a Trane BCU or PC Workstation through
Ethernet, ARCNET, BACnet/IP, or an EIA-232 (point-to-point) connec-
tion.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 539
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet

Devices
Tracer Summit can control and monitor a non-Trane device. To set up a
communication link with a device, you must create a BACnet object (non-
Trane device) in the Site Configuration editor and assign a device ID.
To set up a non-Trane device:
1. Install Trane device and non-Trane device hardware, communication
wiring, network cards, and software. (See the Tracer Summit Hard-
ware and Software Installation guide for instructions.)
2. If the site with the non-Trane device is not defined, follow the instruc-
tions in Chapter 6 “Configuring Tracer Summit BCU Sites” to set up
the new site. After you have set up the site, continue to the next step.
3. From the Setup menu, select Site Configuration. The Select Site dia-
log box displays (see Figure 481).

Figure 481. Select Site Dialog Box

4. Click the name of the site you want to display.

5. Click OK to display the Site Configuration editor (see Figure 482 on
page 541).

540 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices

Figure 482. Site Configuration Editor Setup Screen

6. Click the Devices tab to display the Devices screen (see Figure 483).

Figure 483. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 541
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

7. Click Create Non-Trane BACnet Device to display the Create New

Non-Trane BACnet Device dialog box (see Figure 484).

Figure 484. Create New Non-Trane Device Dialog Box

8. Type the name and the device ID for the BACnet device.

Note:
The device ID is provided by the device manufacturer. Each
device on a network must have a unique device ID. Contact the
manufacturer for instructions, if necessary.

9. Select the object type from the Object Types field. The default selec-
tion is All Types.
10. Click the Scan button to display a list of all the available objects in
the non-Trane device.
11. From the Available Objects list, select the objects that you want to
view. Then, click the Add button to add the items to the Selected
Objects list.
12. Click Okay to save the changes and return to the Devices tab.
13. Click the Communications tab and check the Disable Automatic
Updates box (see Figure 485 on page 543).

542 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Interfacing to Non-Trane BACnet Devices

Figure 485. Disable Automatic Update Checkbox

Note:
By checking this box, Tracer Summit will no longer scan non-
Trane BACnet devices for updated objects every 30 minutes.
However, Tracer Summit will get updates from the non-Trane
devices when objects are viewed in custom graphics or Objects
and Properties.

14. To set up control priorities, go to “Setting Up Control Priorities” on

page 544.

Offline Editing
When editing offline, you can add an object to a non-Trane device using
the Manually Add New Objects fields.
To manually add new objects:
1. Type the object type, instance, and name of each object.
2. Click the Add button.

Note:
If you manually add an object with the same type and instance
of a device already in the Selected Objects list, the object will be
replaced with the new name that you manually gave the object.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 543
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Setting Up Control Priorities

Control priorities identify the levels at which Tracer Summit applications
control an object.
Each control priority name is mapped to a control application. You can
change the default application for any control priority. You can also
change the control class name for some control classes.

Note:
Be careful when modifying BACnet default applications. If you
are using BACnet protocols to communicate with non-Trane
devices, you must make sure the names align for each control
class.

Selecting Control Priority Defaults

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 486).

Figure 486. Site Configuration Editor Control Priorities Screen

2. Click the Tracer Summit Defaults button or BACnet Defaults button

to select a set of defaults. The default names display in the Control
Priority Names list.

544 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Setting Up Control Priorities

Modifying the Control Application for a Class

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 486 on page 544).
2. Click the name of the control class you wish to modify in the Control
Priority Names list.
3. Click the name of the application you want to assign to the class in
the Available Control Applications list.
4. Click the right arrow to assign the application. The application name
displays in the Assigned Control Applications list.
5. To remove an application from the Assigned Control Applications list,
click the name to highlight it. Then click the left arrow to remove the
application.

Modifying the Name for a Priority Class

1. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Control Priorities tab
(see Figure 486 on page 544).
2. Click the Control Class Names button to display the Control Class
Names dialog box (see Figure 487).

Figure 487. Control Class Names Dialog Box

3. Click the field to the right of the control class number you wish to
modify. The control class names that cannot be modified are unavail-
able.
4. When you are done making changes to the class names, click OK to
close the dialog box.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 545
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Providing Information to Other Systems

A non-Trane system can control and monitor Trane equipment. To set up
communications to another system, create a BCU for the Trane device. If
you are using an EIA-232 point-to-point) connection with the BMTW you
must also create a modem object. The BMTX has an on-board EIA-232
connection. Then create BACnet analog and binary input and output
objects to reference Trane UCM properties.
After creating the BACnet input and output objects, you can print a list of
BACnet objects that exist on the site. The non-Trane device manufacturer
will use the list to configure the controlling device.
Trane provides listings (templates) of typical BACnet input/output points
for Trane equipment. Please contact Trane for more information.

Communication Flow Between Devices

Figure 488 on page 547 illustrates the communication flow between
Trane and non-Trane devices.

546 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Figure 488. BACnet Flow Diagram

1 Communication 2 BACnet input and The non-Trane The BCU responds

3 4
links gather data output objects device requests that by sending the
from Trane UCMs and reference specific the present value of an requested present value
store them in the BCU. properties of the UCMs. input or output object be to the required address.
sent to a specific address.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 547
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

To set up Tracer Summit to provide information to other systems:

1. Install Trane device hardware, communication wiring, network cards,
and software. (See the Tracer Summit Hardware and Software Instal-
lation guide for instructions).
2. Set up a site. (Follow the instructions in Chapter 6, “Configuring
Tracer Summit BCU Sites.”)
3. From the Site Configuration editor, click the Devices tab (see
Figure 489).

Figure 489. Site Configuration Editor Devices Screen

4. Click Create Device to display the Create New Device dialog box (see
Figure 490 on page 549).

548 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Figure 490. Create New BCU Dialog Box

5. Enter a name for the device in the Device Name field. Use up to 32
characters.
6. Type a number in the Device ID field.

Note:
All devices must have a unique device ID provided by the man-
ufacturer. Devices that share the same network must have
unique device numbers. Contact the device manufacturer for
instructions, if necessary.

7. Type a number in the Network Number field. The default value is 1.

Note:
Devices (BCUs and non-Trane devices) on a network must
share a network number. When you have multiple networks
(ARCNET, Ethernet, EIA-232) on a site, each network must
have a unique network number. For example, if you have a
BACnet interface using an EIA-232 connection between a BCU
and another vendor’s gateway, then the BCU must have a dif-
ferent network number than the other vendor’s gateway.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 549
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

8. From the Panel Type list box, select the device type: Enhanced BCU
(BMTX), modular BCU (BMTW) or BCU (BMTS). If the panel type is
a modular BCU (BMTW), the Capacity Cards field is available. For
high a capacity BCU, select 2. For a standard capacity BCU, select 1.
The BMTX has an on-board EIA-232 connection that does not require
configuration, skip the following steps for the BMTX.

9. To set up an EIA-232 connection, click Add Modem to display the Cre-

ate New Modem dialog box (see Figure 491).

Figure 491. Create New Modem Dialog Box

10. Enter a name for the modem in the Modem Name field. Use up to 32
characters. Assign a name that will help you identify the modem,
such as BACnet Connection or EIA-232 Connection.
11. Click OK to return to the Edit Devices screen.
12. To add a BCU I/O module to the site, see Chapter 17, “BCU Inputs
and Outputs” for instructions.

Note:
The BCU I/O module buttons are only selectable for Modular
BCUs (BMTW)

13. Click OK to display the Devices screen.

14. Click Save.

Configuring the Modem for an EIA-232 Connection

Note:
This section only applies to the BMTS and the BMTW. The
BMTX is automatically set up.

To configure the modem for an EIA-232 connection, from the Setup menu
select Communications. Additional menu selections display.
Select BCU Modem. The Select BCU Modem dialog box displays (see
Figure 492 on page 551).

550 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Providing Information to Other Systems

Figure 492. Select Modem Dialog Box

15. Click the name of the modem you created for the EIA-232 Connection.
16. Click OK to display the Modem editor (see Figure 493).

Figure 493. BCU Modem Editor Status Screen

17. Click the Setup tab to display the Setup screen (see Figure 494).

Figure 494. BCU Modem Editor Configuration Screen

18. Click the arrow to the right of the Connect By field to display a list of
modem types.
19. Select Hardwired.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 551
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Defining Input/Output Points

1. Define a list of input/output reference points you will need.
Use the Trane provided list of typical BACnet input/output points for
Trane equipment to create your point list.
2. Using the Input/Output editor (accessed through the Setup menu),
create the analog inputs, analog outputs, binary inputs, or binary out-
puts you have defined. (For instructions, see Chapter 15, “Creating
Inputs/Outputs.”)

Note:
As a BACnet input or output object is created, a BACnet ID is
automatically assigned to the object. Once you have created a
BACnet input or output object, do not delete the object. The
object address is only assigned once, and cannot be recreated
after it is deleted.

Running a Report of BACnet Objects

1. From the Status menu, select Reports. The Select Report to View dia-
log box displays (see Figure 495).

Figure 495. Select Report to View Dialog Box

2. Click Standard Live to select a standard live report.

3. Click OK. The Select Standard Live Report dialog box displays (see
Figure 496 on page 553).

552 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Running a Report of BACnet Objects

Figure 496. Select Standard Live Report Dialog Box

4. Click the arrow to the right of the Standard Report Type field to dis-
play a list of report types.
5. Click Site Reports to display a list of site reports in the Report Name
field.
6. Click Site BACnet Report.
7. Click OK to display the Sort Report By dialog box (see Figure 497).

Figure 497. Sort Report By Dialog Box

8. Click Device ID to sort the report by the device ID; click Name to sort
the report by the device name.
9. Click OK to display the Site BACnet Report in the Report Viewer (see
Figure 498 on page 554).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 553
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

Figure 498. Site BACnet Report

10. To save the report in the default reports folder, click Save. For more
information on saving reports, refer to the Tracer Summit Daily Oper-
ations guide.

554 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Running a Report of BACnet Objects

11. To print the report on a printer, click Print to display the Print dialog
box (see Figure 499).

Figure 499. Print Dialog Box

12. Click OK to print the report. For instructions on changing the default
Print dialog box settings, see your Microsoft Windows or printer docu-
mentation.

Note:
Some manufacturers can input BACnet object data directly to
their system from an electronic file. You can use the Print to file
field in the Print dialog box to create an electronic file for this
purpose.

13. To print the report to a file, click the Print button in the Report
Viewer.
14. Click to select the Print to file check box.
15. Click OK to print to file. The print file will be saved in the default
report folder and will have a .PS file name extension.
16. Click Close to exit the Report Viewer.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 555
Using BACnet for Non-Trane Devices

556 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 37

Restoring into the Tracer

Summit Workstation

After you have backed up site database files, Custom Programming Lan-
guage (CPL) files, graphics files and report files, you can restore these
files into the original PC workstation or a new PC workstation. For more
information on backing up Tracer Summit files, refer to the Tracer Sum-
mit Daily Operations guide.

Restoring a Site and CPL Files

You can restore backup site files and Custom Programming Language
(CPL) files to the original PC Workstation or a new PC Workstation.
To restore a site and CPL files:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Site. The Restore Location dialog box displays (see Figure 500).
The Restore File Path field displays the default path and name of the
backup file to be restored.

Note:
If you need help restoring a site, click Tutorial to access The
Tracer Summit Operations Tutorial (tutorial button not shown).

Figure 500. Site Restore Dialog Box

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 557
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

3. To change the Restore File Path, click Browse. The Select File to
Restore From dialog box displays (see Figure 501).

Figure 501. Select File to Restore From Dialog Box

4. Select the directory where the site backup file is saved from the file
list. The file list displays previously saved backup files.
5. Select the file name to restore from the backup file list.
6. Click Open. The Site Restore dialog box displays again. The new file
name and path display in the Restore File Path field.
7. Select the specific site or sites to be restored from the Available
Site(s) list box.
8. Use Add or Add All to copy the selected sites to the Selected Sites
window. Click Remove or Remove All to remove the sites from the
Selected Sites window.
9. Click Next to display the Restore CPL dialog box (see Figure 502 on
page 559).

558 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring a Site and CPL Files

Figure 502. Restore CPL Dialog Box

10. To change the source path for the CPL backup files, click Browse next
to the CPL Source Path field. The Browse for Folder dialog box dis-
plays.
11. Select a CPL source path from the selection window.
12. Click OK. The Restore CPL dialog box displays the selected CPL files.
13. To change the location to restore CPL files to, click Browse next to the
CPL Destination Path field. The Browse for Folder dialog box dis-
plays.
14. Select a CPL destination path.
15. Click OK. The Restore CPL dialog box displays.
16. Select the CPL file(s) to be restored from the Available CPL File(s)
list box.
17. Click Add or Add All to copy the selected CPL files or sites to the
Selected CPL Files list box. Click Remove or Remove All to remove
the site from the Selected CPL Files list box.
18. Click Restore to begin the restoring process. The Site Restore dialog
box displays.

Note:
To over write all selected locations, check the Overwrite all
selected sites check box. Any sites that fail are listed at the end
of the restore process.

The selected site database backup file and selected CPL files are
restored to the locations you selected.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 559
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

Restoring Global Graphics

You can restore backup global graphic files and expanded message files to
the original PC Workstation or a new PC Workstation.
To restore global graphics:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Graphics. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays (see
Figure 503).

Figure 503. Restore Graphic (Global Graphics) Dialog Box

3. To change the source path of the graphics, click Browse. The Browse
for Folder dialog box displays.
4. Select a file location path.
5. Click OK. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays.
6. Click Global Graphics to restore the graphics that are common to
multiple sites.
7. Select the graphics to be restored from the Details window. Click
Select All to select all global graphics.
8. Click OK to restore the selected graphics.

560 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring Site Graphics

Restoring Site Graphics

You can restore backup site graphic files and expanded message files to
the original PC workstation or a new PC workstation.

Note:
The restore function for site graphics is required only for cre-
ation of a node on the Navigation Tree. Once this node is cre-
ated, it is no longer necessary (or possible) to restore. The
updated files (.GIF, .BMP, .JPG, .HTM, .AVI) can be copied via
Windows Explorer to the correct directory.

To restore a site graphic:

1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Graphics. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays (see
Figure 504).

Figure 504. Restore Graphic (Site Graphics) Dialog Box

3. To change the path where backup graphics are located, click Browse.
The Browse for Folder dialog box displays.
4. Select the directory location.
5. Click OK. The Restore Graphic dialog box displays.
6. Click Site Graphics to restore graphics specific to a site.
7. Select the site to restore from the drop-down list.
8. Select the graphics to be restored from the Details window. Click
Select All to select all site graphics.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 561
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

9. Click OK to restore the selected graphics.

Restoring a Report
You can restore backup report files to the original PC Workstation or a
new PC Workstation.
To restore a report:
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. Additional items display.
2. Select Reports. The Select Report Backup File dialog box displays (see
Figure 505).

Figure 505. Select Report Backup File Dialog Box

3. Select the file location of the backup report from the Look In field.
4. Select the report file to restore.
5. Click Open to restore the selected report. You are returned to the
Tracer Summit main window.
6. To view the restored reports, click Reports.

562 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Restoring Operator Display Custom Screens

Restoring Operator Display Custom

Screens
Use the following procedures to restore a custom screen.
To restore custom screens
1. From the Tools menu, select Restore. A submenu appears.
2. Select Custom Screen from the Restore submenu. The Select File to
restore From dialog box appears.
3. Select the file that contains the custom screens.
4. Click OK. The Restore Custom Screens dialog box appears (see
Figure 506).

Figure 506. Restore Custom Screen Dialog Box

5. Click the Available Sites arrow to select the site whose custom
screens you want to restore.
6. Select the BCU from the Available BCUs list. The selected BCU dis-
plays in the Available BCUs field.
7. In the Custom Screens list, select the custom screens that you want to
restore.
8. Click Add to add the screens to the Selected Custom Screens list (see
Figure 506).
9. Click OK. The Tracer Summit software restores the selected custom
screens to the selected BCU.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 563
Restoring into the Tracer Summit Workstation

564 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 38

Deleting Objects and Sites

From time to time you may need to delete an object or a site from the
database because:
• An object such as analog or binary input was created for troubleshoot-
ing purposes
• An object was placed in a database by mistake
• The database has grown and you want to reduce the number of
objects in it
• A site is no longer needed
Although you can delete either an object or a site, the procedure has some
built-in safeguards:
• If you are trying to delete an object that is referenced by other objects,
the references to the object you want to delete must be replaced with
references to other objects.

Note:
Object editing should not be done while a deletion is in process
(other than editing references to a object you want to delete).

• If any user is logged on to the site you want to delete, they must log
off before you can delete the site. You cannot be logged onto the site
you want to delete.

Note:
Only users with security access can delete objects or sites. For
more information, see Chapter 10, “Setting Up Security.”

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 565
Deleting Objects and Sites

Deleting Objects
The basic steps in deleting an object are:
1. Select the objects you want to delete (see “Selecting Objects to Delete”
on page 566).
2. Search to determine if other objects are dependent on (reference) that
object (see “Searching for Referencers” on page 568).
3. If other objects are referencing the object you want to delete, you
must edit those references (see “Opening and Editing the Referencing
Object Editor” on page 569). If no other objects reference the object
you want to delete, go to the next step.
4. Delete the objects (see “Deleting the Objects” on page 571).

Selecting Objects to Delete

1. From the Tools menu, select Delete Object. Tracer Summit displays
the Delete Objects dialog box (see Figure 507).

Figure 507. Delete Objects Dialog Box

2. Make a selection:
• To delete objects (UCMs, applications, input/output devices,
graphics, and so on) from the site you are currently logged onto,
click Current Site Objects.
• To delete graphics that have been saved as global, click Global
Site Objects.
3. Click OK. The Select Object(s) to Delete dialog box displays with a list
of the object types and all instances of that object (see Figure 508 on
page 567).

566 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting Objects

Figure 508. Select Object(s) to Delete Dialog Box

4. In the Select Object Type list box, scroll to the type of object you want
to delete. All of the objects of that type are displayed by name in the
Available Names list box.
5. Click on the names of the objects you plan to delete in the Available
Names list.
6. Click Add to add the selected names to the Selected Object Names
list.
7. Use Add, Add All, Remove, and Remove All to change the Selected
Object Names list. If you want to delete all objects of the same type,
use Add All. If you want to delete several—but not all—objects of the
same type, highlight and add them one at a time.
8. Click Search. (The Search button is available only if you have selected
at least one item to delete.)
9. Continue to the next section.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 567
Deleting Objects and Sites

Searching for Referencers

After you click Search at the Select Object(s) to Delete dialog box, Tracer
Summit searches for objects that reference the object you want to delete
and displays the Search Results screen (see Figure 509).
Search results for objects are divided into two types:
• Objects that have no references display in the Objects That Can Be
Deleted list box.
• Objects that have other objects referencing them display in the
Objects That Cannot Be Deleted list box.

Figure 509. Delete Objects Search Results Screen

If there are objects that you want to delete listed in Objects That Cannot
Be Deleted list box, go to the section “Opening and Editing the Referenc-
ing Object Editor” on page 569.
Otherwise, finish deleting the objects (proceed to the section “Deleting the
Objects” on page 571).

568 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting Objects

Opening and Editing the Referencing Object Editor

To complete the process of deleting the object listed in the Objects That
Cannot Be Deleted list box, you must edit the other objects that reference
this object. These other objects are listed in the Object Is Referenced By
list box. This box displays the object name, the object or objects that have
references to the one you want to delete, and the property whose refer-
ence must be changed if you are to delete the object (see Figure 510).

Figure 510. Delete Objects Search Results Screen

To open and edit the referencing object editor:

1. Double click on the object you want to edit in the Object is Referenced
By list box. The editor for that object displays. The initial screen is
the Status screen. The Delete Object Search Results screen remains
open behind the object’s editor window.
2. Click the tab that contains the referencer edit control fields you want
to change.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 569
Deleting Objects and Sites

3. On the new screen, click the referencer button in the appropriate ref-
erencer edit control field (see Figure 511).

Figure 511. Referencer Edit Control Field

Referencer
button

Clicking the referencer button displays the Select Property Reference

dialog box (see Figure 512). The type, name, and specific property
defining the object you want to delete are displayed.

Figure 512. Select Property Reference Dialog Box

4. In the Select Property Reference dialog box, you must choose a differ-
ent object to replace the object you want to delete. Select a new object
with the Type or Name fields, then select the property you want that
is associated with that object.
5. Click OK. You return to the referencing object’s editor window.
6. If there are referencer changes in any other editor screen of this
object, click the tab for that screen.
7. Make the changes by repeating steps 3-6 for each property listed in
the Objects Is Referenced By list box, until no more fields reference
the object you wish to delete.
8. Click Save to save the changes in the object editor.
9. Click Close to close the object editor window and return to the Delete
Objects Search Results screen. The object for which you have changed
the references will now be able to be deleted and will be displayed in
the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box.
10. Proceed to the next section.

570 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting Objects

Deleting the Objects

If the search results show objects in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list
box, the Delete Object button on the Delete Objects Search Results screen
is active (see Figure 509 on page 568).
To delete objects in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box:
1. Click Delete Object. A message tells you that all editors will be closed
(see Figure 513).

Figure 513. All Editors Will Be Closed Message

2. Click Yes. For each object listed in the Objects That Can Be Deleted
box, a confirmation prompt displays (see Figure 514).

Figure 514. Confirm Delete Object Dialog Box

3. Click Yes to All to continue the deletion process. All of the objects
listed in the Objects That Can Be Deleted list box are removed from
the database.
4. Click Finish. You are returned to the Tracer Summit main screen.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 571
Deleting Objects and Sites

Deleting a Site
The procedure for deleting sites is similar to the procedure for deleting
objects. The main difference is that Tracer Summit searches for security
rights that allow you to delete a site, not for references to the objects that
you want to delete.
To delete a site, you must follow these rules:
• You must be logged onto a site in order to delete another site.
• If only one site is available, you cannot delete a site.
• You cannot delete the site you are logged onto (see the next section for
steps in how to log off of the current site).

Note:
Deleting a site removes it from the PC Workstation, but not
from the BCUs.

IMPORTANT
Deleting a site removes all graphics. If you might want the data again,
then back up the site before deleting it.

Deleting a Site You Are Currently Logged Onto

If you want to delete a site you are currently logged onto, you must log off
and log onto another site. The steps for logging onto a different site are:
1. From the Connect menu, select Log On.
2. Select another site to log onto.
3. Proceed with the steps to delete a site.

Deleting a Site You Are Not Logged Onto

1. From the Tools menu, select Delete Object. The Delete Objects dialog
box displays (see Figure 515).

Figure 515. Delete Objects Dialog Box

2. Click Delete Entire Site.

572 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting a Site

3. Click OK. The Select Site(s) to Delete dialog box is displayed. The list
of sites is shown in the Available Sites list box (see Figure 516).

Figure 516. Select Site(s) to Delete Dialog Box

4. Click the sites you would like to delete.

5. Use Add or Add All to place the sites you want to delete into the
Selected Sites list box. You can use Remove and Remove All to move
sites back to the Available Sites list box if you need to.
6. When all the sites you wish to delete are listed in the Selected Sites
list box, click Search. Tracer Summit displays the results of the
search for sites to delete process on the Search Results screen (see
Figure 517 on page 574).

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 573
Deleting Objects and Sites

Figure 517. Site Deletion Search Results Screen

The Search Results screen shows:

• The Site(s) That Can Be Deleted list box listing sites that have no
users logged on to the system and are available for deleting.
When there are sites in this list box, the Delete Object button
becomes active.
• The Site(s) That Cannot Be Deleted list box, which contains sites
that currently have users logged on and cannot be deleted.

Note:
Sites that have users logged on cannot be deleted. If you are
currently logged on to the site you want to delete, it is unavail-
able for deleting. See “Deleting a Site You Are Currently
Logged Onto” on page 572.

7. Click Delete Object. A message tells you that all editors will be closed
(see Figure 518 on page 575).

574 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Deleting a Site

Figure 518. All Editors Will Be Closed Message

8. Click Yes. For each site listed in the Site(s) That Can Be Deleted box,
a confirmation prompt displays (see Figure 519).

Figure 519. Confirm Delete Site Dialog Box

9. Click Yes if you want to continue with the deletion. The site and all
associated objects, including graphics, are removed from the data-
base.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 575
Deleting Objects and Sites

576 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Chapter 39

Resetting a BCU

The Tracer Summit Critical Control System allows you to reset a BCU at
four different levels. In order of least to greatest impact on the BCU, the
reset levels are:
1. Reset
2. Clear BCU RAM and Reset
3. Clear Database, RAM, and Reset
4. Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset
For detailed information about reset levels, see Table 17 on page 580.
The reset procedures are typically done by selecting BCU Reset/Restore
from the Tools menu in Tracer Summit.

Software Method to Reset BCU

1. From the Tools menu, select BCU Reset/Restore.
2. The BCU Reset/Restore dialog box displays (see Figure 520).

Figure 520. BCU Reset/Restore Dialog Box

3. Click the BCUs you wish to reset in the Choose BCUs to Reset box. To
select all the BCUs, click Select All. To clear the current selections,
click Select None.
4. Click the desired level of reset in the Choose BCU Reset Level field.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 577
Resetting a BCU

5. If you select Clear Code, Database, RAM and Reset, click the arrow to
the right of the Code Version field to select the version of code you
wish to download into the BCUs.
6. Click Reset to reset the selected BCUs. The Reset/Restore dialog box
closes, and you return to the previous screen.

Hardware Method for Resetting BCU

All of the “Clear. . . Reset” procedures can also be done at the BCU as
described in the following subsections.

Reset
To reset, cycle power to the BCU by unplugging and re-plugging the
24 Vac power connector at the top of the termination board.

Clear BCU RAM and Reset

The BCU normally preserves the content of RAM through power failure.
RAM contains the current status of all BCU object trend data, events, and
alarms. In most cases, this is desirable. However, there are circumstances
in which you may need to clear RAM. This is normally done from the PC
Workstation, as described in this guide. RAM can also be cleared at the
BCU as follows:
1. Turn off power to the BCU.
2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power.
4. The LED display should show 8, then 7, and then E with the decimal
point flashing.

CAUTION
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the BCU code and database may be
cleared as well as its RAM.

5. As soon as the LED display shows E with the decimal point flashing,
turn off power.
6. Set the DIP switch to its proper position.
7. Turn on power. The LED display should show the following sequence:
8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, “dancing dash”

578 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Clear Database, RAM, and Reset

Clear Database, RAM, and Reset

Database contains the user programmed data, which consists of all BCU
objects, such as areas, VAVs, I/O, UCMs, trends, CPL, etc.
In most cases, you will perform this operation from the PC Workstation,
as described in this guide. However, this can also be done at the BCU as
follows:
1. Change the DIP switch S1 position 8 to Off.
2. The LED display will show the following sequence:
J, 8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, –P
3. Change DIP switch S1 position 8 back to on.
4. The LED display will show the following sequence:
J, 8, 7, 6, 4, 3, 2, H, –, –P, Pd, “dancing dash”
When the BCU has code and detects a change in DIP switches at S1, the
BCU clears the current database and looks for a PC Workstation from
which to download a database that matches the new device ID (corre-
sponding to the settings at DIP switch S1).

Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset

Code consists of the BCU image software, which is similar to the operat-
ing system in a PC.
In most cases, you will force a BCU to accept new code from the PC Work-
station, as described in this chapter. However, this can also be done at the
BCU as follows:

Note:
You must have a PC Workstation connected, and that worksta-
tion must contain the appropriate version of BCU code. If the
PC Workstation is not connected, the procedure will have no
effect on the BCU.

1. Turn off power to the BCU.

2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power. The LED should display the following sequence:
8, 7, E (with decimal point flashing for about 10 seconds), 5, 4, 3, 2, –,
EC, Cd, –H, “dancing dash”

4. Turn off power and set the DIP switch to its proper position.
5. Turn on power and observe the following sequence: 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1,
-P,Pd, “dancing dash.”

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 579
Resetting a BCU

Clear Comm5 database

In a BMTX BCU (or a high-capacity BMTW BCU), a Comm5 database
will be cleared if a BACnet database site name is loaded that does not
match the Comm5 database site name. To force the BCU to clear its
Comm5 database, perform the following actions:
1. Create dummy site with a different name than the existing Comm5
database in the BCU.
2. If the BCU is connected, you can clear the BACnet database from the
BCU by using the Tools menu and BCU Reset/Restore. Or you can
clear the database by using the DIP switches.
3. Immediately disconnect (either unplug Ethernet or use the Discon-
nect icon) so BACnet database does not automatically reload.
4. Select dummy site.
5. Reconnect to the BCU.
6. Download the dummy site to the BCU.
7. Once the BCU begins normal operation, you can clear the BACnet
database again from the BCU (using either the Tools menu and BCU
Reset/Restore, or the DIP switches).
8. Disconnect the BCU from the PC Workstation so the dummy data-
base is not automatically sent again.
9. Select the real site.
10. Establish connection again to the BCU to download the real BACnet
database.
11. The Comm5 database will be cleared and will need to be recon-
structed.
If the BACnet database already has assigned Neuron IDs, from the
main menu select Setup, and then Site Configuration. Choose the
Device tab and click the Assign Neuron ID button. Install the Comm5
link as described in “Comm5 Links” on page 99.

Table 17. Reset level descriptions for the BMTX BCU

BCU reset/restore command Reasons to reset Notes

Reset (same as power cycle) • Initialize modem • Temporary loss of communication with
• Resets the processor on the selected • Initialize communication links the BCU
BCU
Clear RAM and reset • Update members in VAS (not applicable Same as reset plus:
• Clears the RAM from the BCU and resets for Comm5 VAS) • Loss of operator overrides. Values
the BCU processor return to Tracer Summit defaults
• If the BCU has a database intact, it auto- • Loss of pending alarms
matically reconstructs the RAM as • No loss of Comm5 database
needed and resumed processing

580 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Clear Comm5 database

Table 17. Reset level descriptions for the BMTX BCU (Continued)

BCU reset/restore command Reasons to reset Notes

Clear database, RAM, and reset • Restore a backup database from the PC Same as Clear RAM and Reset plus:
• Clears both the database and RAM from workstation to the BCU. • Takes longer to regain communication
the selected BCU and resets the BCU • Replace a database in the BCU. with the BCU and UCMs than a clear
processor. RAM or reset does.
Note: To prevent download of database • If database is restoring from a backup of
from secondary workstations, discon- the site, current trend and calculation
nect them from LAN before proceeding. information is lost and reverts to infor-
• Clear the BCU database using the BCU mation stored in backup.
reset/restore command or using DIP
switch method.
• Then disconnect BCU from the LAN
either by removing the LAN cable or
using the Disconnect button on the Tool-
bar.
• Restore the new database to the PC
workstation.
• Reconnect the BCU.
• Database will be automatically sent to
the BCU.
Clear code, database, RAM, and reset • Required when upgrading Tracer Sum- Same as Clear Database, RAM, and Reset
• Clears all memory—code (image), data- mit BCU image plus:
base, and RAM—from the BCU and • Code will load to a BCU that does not
resets the BCU processor. have an address.
• If the PC workstation is online, it auto- • If a database with a different address or
matically downloads the code. site name is loaded to the BCU, the BCU
• Once the code is successfully down- Comm5 database will be cleared.
loaded, the PC workstation automati-
cally downloads a new database.
Clear Comm5 database • Used for troubleshooting problem links • Cannot be done from a PC Workstation
• Happens automatically when site name BCU Reset/Restore menu.
in BCU changes or BCU address
changes.
• If the PC workstation is online, it auto-
matically downloads the code.
• Once the code is successfully down-
loaded, the PC workstation automati-
cally downloads a new database.
Note: For detailed instructions for the DIP switch method, refer to “The Tracer Summit Critical Control System allows you to reset a
BCU at four different levels. In order of least to greatest impact on the BCU, the reset levels are:” on page 577.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 581
Resetting a BCU

582 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

A Alarm
An audible or visual signal from a Building Management System that
warns of an abnormal and critical operating condition.

Analog
Data represented as a variable value, such as temperature control or flow.

Analog input (AIP)

A varying voltage, current, or resistive signal that can be converted to
engineering units of temperature, pressure, humidity, wattage, etc.

Analog output (AOP)

An analog output is a varying voltage or current signal used to change the
position of an external device such as an electric valve.

Application
A specific program or task to which a computer solution can be applied.

Application program
A computer program designed to meet specific user needs, such as a pro-
gram that controls or monitors a process. Examples: Time of Day Sched-
uling, Chiller Plant Control.

Array
A list of elements. In the case of Chiller Plant Control, a list of identical
properties used for each chiller identified as a member of the chiller
plant.

Auto refresh
Ability to view events in the Event Log viewer without manual interven-
tion. Any events normally seen by pushing the manual refresh button in
Tracer Summit version 12 can be seen automatically if auto refreshing is
enabled.

Auto Save
Process of saving the event log using the workstation Task Manager.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 583
Glossary

B Backup copy
One or more files that are copied onto a storage medium for safekeeping
in case the original gets damaged or lost.

BACnet
A standard communication protocol developed by the American Society of
Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers. It defines how
information will be packaged for transportation between building auto-
mation system (BAS) vendors.

BCU-ELO
Building Control Unit-Event Log Object.

BCU
Building control unit.

BCU Operator Display Object List

List of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been selected
for view at a BCU operator display. The Operator Display Setup editor is
used to define this list.

BCU Operator Display Override List

List of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been selected
to be allowed to be overridden at a BCU operator display. The Operator
Display Setup editor is used to define this list.

BCU sizing tool

A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet available in the TraneNet information sys-
tem that allows the BAS engineer to determine the number of building
control units (BCUs) that are required at a site.

Billing period
The period of time between consecutive readings of the utility company
meters for billing purposes.

Binary
• A number system with only two digits, 0 and 1, in which each symbol
represents a decimal power of two; or
• Any system that has only two possible states or levels, such as a
switch that is either on or off. (On is represented as 1 and off is repre-
sented as 0.); or
• The presence of voltage (equivalent to 1) or absence of voltage (equiv-
alent of 0) in a computer circuit.

Binary input (BIP)

An ON/OFF input to the processor to indicate status. Some typical exam-
ples are flow switches, limit switches, or other contacts.

584 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

Binary output (BOP)

An ON/OFF control output from the processor.

Building control unit (BCU)

An intelligent field panel that communicates with multiple Trane unit
control modules (UCMs).

Building automation system (BAS) or

Building management system (BMS)
A combination of controllers and other software products that communi-
cate with and control various mechanical systems to enable building
management. These include the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
systems as well as lighting systems access control, and miscellaneous
other devices within a building.

Building Management Network (BMN)

A DOS-based product for managing multiple Tracer sites.

C Calculated analog
A term synonymous with point type 11. Calculated analogs are logical or
software analog points that are similar to analog output and analog
inputs, except they are not associated with hardware. Calculated analogs
are most frequently used as setpoints for direct digital control (DDC)
loops, and various types of ICS equipment such as SCP, AHU, and TCM,
etc. These calculated analog setpoints can be set by the operator or calcu-
lated using the process control language (PCL) program.

Calculated binary
A term synonymous with point type 08. Calculated binaries are logical or
software binary points that are similar to binary outputs, except they are
not associated with hardware. Calculated binaries can be controlled by
any Tracer Building Control program, just like binary outputs (point type
05). You can use the on/off status of calculated binaries in other Tracer
Summit programs in place of binary inputs or binary outputs.

Capacity
The maximum output of the equipment. For example, “The chiller has a
capacity of 800 tons.”

CenTraVac
Trane’s registered name for the line of hermetic centrifugal refrigeration
machines that provide chilled water for comfort or industrial water cool-
ing installations. The CenTraVac chiller name has also been applied to
include certain models of Trane’s helical rotary chiller.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 585
Glossary

Chiller plant control

Tracer Summit application that allows the operator to optimally coordi-
nate multiple chillers and their related equipment to supply cold water to
the system.

Chiller sequencing
An integral part of the chiller plant control that sequences and automati-
cally rotates up to six chillers and their associated pumps to optimize
individual chiller runtime and system performance.

Code
A software program, running in the BCU, equivalent to the operating sys-
tem of a personal computer. It controls the physical operation of the BCU. It
is different from the CPL code that a technician would write.

Communication link
A set of wires connected from one device to another that is used to trans-
mit information between the devices. This link is typically a twisted pair
of wires for Trane building management systems.

Configuration
The functional arrangement of a system. Usually set by computer inter-
face or DIP switch settings.

Constant volume system

Air-distribution system that keeps the volume of air supplied to a system
constant to maintain acceptable conditions.

Context object
A UCM or an application object defined when a user launches a graphic
from the navigation tree, a graphic target, or from the UCM or applica-
tion editor.

Custom Programming Language (CPL)

Language used in Tracer Summit to write routines to accommodate con-
trol strategies. Routines are used to sequence equipment, calculate set-
points and values, and perform shutdown sequences.

Custom graphic
• A hard-coded graphic created by a user in Tracer Summit; or
• A standard graphic (template) that has been modified; or
• A site graphic available only to a specific site.

Custom screen
An operator display screen created by an installer/programmer. It always
has a Home button and might include a monochrome bitmap, data items,
and custom navigation buttons.

586 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

D DAC
Discharge Air Controller profile.

Database
A computer file that contains all site-specific information used by a BCU to
control site operation. This file is stored in the PC Workstation and in indi-
vidual BCUs on the network. In the PC Workstation, the file is named sum-
mit.mdb and is located in C:\Program Files\Tracer Summit\Database
directory.

Demand limiting
A function that reduces electrical demand by measuring incoming electri-
cal power and either turning off specified loads or adjusting temperature
setpoints to keep energy usage below a prescribed level during the
demand interval.

Device
Computer hardware that performs some specific function. Input devices
such as a keyboard are used to get information into the CPU. Output
devices, such as a printer, are used to take information out of a computer
in some usable form. Input/output devices are able to perform both input
and output of information.

Diagnostic
A program that checks the operation of a device board or other component
for malfunctions and errors and reports its findings.

Diagnostic report
A form of standard live report for displaying diagnostics. In BCU sites,
the upload is from UCMs and analog input and binary input objects.

DIP switches
Configuration switches of various components of the building manage-
ment system. Placing each individual DIP switch either on or off config-
ures the address and the function of the miscellaneous control
components of the building management system.

Direct digital control (DDC)

A higher level of programming used by building management systems to
control variable outputs, such as valves or actuators. In industry, DDC
means direct control by a microprocessor controller, with no intermediate
devices.

Discovery
The process of finding all online controllers on a Comm5 link and display-
ing their Neuron IDs and Location Labels.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 587
Glossary

Display
In this document, the term display is used to refer to the touchscreen dis-
play device.

E Economizer control
The opening or closing of various HVAC dampers to cool a building with
outside air, usually when the outside air is 40ºF to 65ºF.

EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. An electronic chip
that can store information such as control set points, be reprogrammed in
the field, and maintain its memory during a power loss.

EIA-232
Interface standard used for communications between peripheral devices
and energy management systems.

E-mail profile
A group of settings that define how the mail server is set up for a particu-
lar user. For example, a profile may include access to a mailbox on
Microsoft Exchange Server and specify that the Outlook Address Book
appears in the Address Book dialog box.

E-mail recipient
In message forwarding, just an e-mail address. A forwarded alarm mes-
sage can be retrieved by a person using a client-side e-mail program such
as Microsoft Outlook or an e-mail-supported pager service provider, or
both.

Ethernet
Networking standards that transmit data at 10 Mbps using a specified
protocol. Ethernet is a popular LAN technology.

Event log
A listing of events such as alarms and control actions that can be viewed
by the building management system operator.

Event
Generated by an alarm, a diagnostic, a user operation such as controlling
a point or object, logging on/off, or acknowledging alarms. Typically, an
event turns into an alarm if it has been set up to beep and/or require
acknowledgement.From the point of view of the user, several types of
inputs to the control system generate an event.

Extranet
Proprietary Internet site for Trane personnel to access when not able to
get to TraneNet.

588 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

F Filtering
Filtering is used to display only the rows of events that meet user-speci-
fied criteria. In other words, rows that do not match the criteria are elim-
inated from the displayed list.

G Global change
A mechanism through which a user can change the setup of many objects
of the same type in one action, rather than having to open every object to
make the change.

Global graphic
A graphic that can be used to display information for any site. A graphic
object is created in the system site and is available for use by all sites con-
nected to the PC Workstation.

Global objects
Includes the workstation modem, global graphic, keyboard macros, group
security, group configuration, and message forwarding.

Graphic
A compilation of Summit-supplied information and images that form a
display of information on the PC. A graphic requires a graphic object in
the database, an HTML file, and one or more image files to be in a specific
file structure under the \Graphics subdirectory in Tracer Summit.
Graphics can be displayed from the navigation tree, from a UCM editor,
from a graphic target field, or from the main menu.

Group
• An organization of one or more devices under a single name; or
• A collection of sites or groups in the Tracer Summit database that
exist as an object in the system. The user can perform an action on a
group, which in turn will propagate that action to every site or group
of sites that belongs to the group

H Hard-coded graphic
A graphic that contains no template fields. All the information that is
needed to display the data in the fields on the graphic is stored in the
HTML file for the graphic. This graphic does not require a context to dis-
play its information in the graphic fields. It can appear on the navigation
tree without having to be assigned by the navigation tree editor.

HTML file
A file that is written in Hypertext Markup Language, a standard coding
language used to create HyperText documents for use on the World Wide
Web or an intranet network. A file of this type is required for a graphic
object to be displayed. The file must be in the \Graphics directory under

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 589
Glossary

the standard, custom, or site name subdirectories. The Tracer Summit

Graphics Editor creates the file along with the graphic object.
Information maintained in the file includes all graphic fields (types, prop-
erties, positions, size, and order of display) and image references (names,
type, position, size, and order of display). The file also keeps the necessary
information from the graphic object to take the object from one PC Work-
station to another. This file cannot be used in a Web Browser to display
Tracer Summit information.

HVAC
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning. Building mechanical system
equipment.

I Image
File used by a graphic to display a photo or picture.

Internet service provider (ISP)

Services such as Microsoft Network, AOL, Compuserve, etc.

L LAN
Local Area Network

LCD
Liquid crystal display. The display screen that is an integral part of the
operator display.

Level 0
Security level at which the user can view the grouping structure from the
Group Setup dialog box but cannot access grouping functionality in Glo-
bal Changes, Task Manager, or Message Forwarding. User cannot access
Group Security.

Level 1
Security level at which the user can view the grouping structure from the
Group Setup dialog box but cannot edit group setup. User can access
grouping functionality in Global Changes, Task Manager and Message
Forwarding. User cannot access Group Security.

Level 2
Users have full group access. They can access and edit group security and
group setup. They can access grouping functionality in Global Changes,
Task Manager, and Message Forwarding.

590 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

M Macro
A key that is set up by the user to execute often-used keystroke sequences
on the PC.

MAPI
Messaging Application Programming Interface. A messaging architecture
and a client interface component for applications such as electronic mail,
scheduling, calendaring, and document management. As a messaging
architecture, MAPI provides a consistent interface for multiple applica-
tion programs to interact with multiple messaging systems across a vari-
ety of hardware platforms.
Source: The Free On-line Dictionary of Computing, © 1993-2001 Denis
Howe

N Navigation scheme
The way in which screens and graphics are linked together. It defines
what will happen next when the user touches a target on the BCU opera-
tor display.

Navigation tree
The panel on the left-hand side of the main Tracer Summit window that
displays all sites, buildings, areas, and HVAC equipment set up for the
system.

Night economize
Setting that uses cool, dry outside air during unoccupied periods to pre-
cool a building, thus minimizing the use of mechanical cooling.

Night heat/cool
Setting that provides mechanical heating/cooling during unoccupied peri-
ods to bring space temperature back to within a predefined range.

O Object
An element recognized by the Tracer Summit database. Objects may be
input and output points, UCMs or applications.

Object instance
At a site there may be many units of a particular object type installed:
Centrifugal Chillers, VAV II/IIIs, and Voyagers, etc. An object instance
refers to a unit installed on the link Chiller 1 or Voyager 12. Each object
instance will have a unique address used to identify it to the building
automation system.

Offline
The operational state of a device when not communicating on the net-
work.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 591
Glossary

Online
The operational state of a device when communicating on the network or
with a control device.

Operator display
A liquid crystal display (LCD) mounted on a modular BCU for basic oper-
ator functions including viewing a local BCU event log. The operator dis-
play consists of an LCD with a printed circuit to control the display.
Additional components include a time clock and external memory. The
operator display is equipped with a touch screen as a user input device.

Operator display object list

The list of objects/properties existing at a single site that have been
selected for viewing an operator display. The Operator Display editor is
used to define this list.

Optimal start
The process of efficiently starting HVAC equipment so that the occupied
setpoints will be achieved at the appropriate time. The Tracer Summit
system, for instance, may be programmed for occupied temperature at
6:00 a.m., but with optimal start, may start at 5:15 a.m. to enable temper-
ature control to be achieved by 6:00 a.m.

P PC (Personal Computer) Workstation

The primary operator interface for the Tracer Summit system. The work-
station and the Tracer Summit software serve as a communication link
between the operator and the BCUs and other equipment. The worksta-
tion provides a graphical interface to system information.

Priority control
The ability to define custom control sequences that respond to alarm con-
ditions. Priority control sequences receive the highest priority; they over-
ride all other control sequences.

Programmable control module (PCM)

A Trane-based controller (DDC) that is fully programmable. It controls
and monitors a wide range of HVAC and other applications, including air-
handling equipment, pumps, cooling towers, boilers, and water chilling
units.

Property
One element of an object’s characteristic information. This information
element can be viewed, referenced, and applied throughout the Tracer
Summit system.

592 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

R RAM
A type of computer memory located on the BCU logic board that is used to
store temporary data such as operator overrides, UCM scan data, and CPL
saved values.

Referencer
An edit control in Tracer Summit editors that allows the value of one
property to be set equal to the value of another property.

Rover Comm5 service tool

Trane’s service tool for Comm5 unit controllers. The Rover software is
used to set up and troubleshoot controllers on Comm5 links. Rover is not
designed for daily management of building automation systems. With
Rover Version 5.0 and Tracer Summit Version 15.0, you can use Rover
within Tracer Summit to configure Comm5 controllers locally and
remotely.

Rover device plug-in

A software module that Rover uses to interact with a device, such as a
Tracer ZN510 zone controller. Each type of controller requires its own
software plug-in for Rover. You can download new and revised plug-ins
from TraneNet.

RS-232
(see EIA-232)

Runtime view
The presentation of a graphic in Tracer Summit with live, updated data.

S Scan
A connection to designated BCU sites that retrieves status information,
and downloads changes to schedules, holidays, and trends, etc.

SCC
Space Comfort Controller profile.

Structured Query Language (SQL)

Pronounced either see-kwell or as separate letters. SQL is a standardized
query language for requesting information from a database. SQL sup-
ports distributed databases (databases that are spread out over several
computer systems). This enables several users on a network to access the
same database simultaneously.

Setpoint
Typically a zone sensor or thermostat (STAT) heat/cool value to be main-
tained by the system.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 593
Glossary

Shared event log

An event log database, in SQL format, stored in a SQL server and
accessed by multiple Tracer Summit workstations.

Site
A logical grouping of equipment serving a single facility. The customer
defines the site as a logical grouping.

Site graphic
A graphic that is available only to a specific site (a custom site graphic).

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol defined in STD 10, RFC 821,
used to transfer electronic mail between computers, usually over Ether-
net. It is a server to server protocol, so other protocols are used to access
the messages. The SMTP dialog usually happens in the background
under the control of the message transport system, e.g. sendmail but it is
possible to interact with an SMTP server using telnet to connect to the
normal SMTP port, 25.
Source: The Free On-line Dictionary of Computing, © 1993-2001 Denis
Howe

Sorting
To arrange the information alphanumerically in a given column of a
table.

Standard screen
The menu-driven screens that allow the user to navigate within the BCU
operator display. Depending on the context, a standard screen will have
any combination of static text, live text, and/or icons.

Static text
Text that does not come from the Tracer Summit database. The only way
to change static text is by using the display setup editor. The title for a
custom graphic screen is an example of static text.

Status
An indication of a condition which may or may not be normal. An alarm
may be a response to an abnormal status, and may be recorded in an
event log.

Syntax
A set of rules for a programming language.

System security
A method of maintaining or restricting access to the building manage-
ment system. Typically, a four-digit code enables access to override or con-
trol the system.

594 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

T Target field
A graphic field that launches another graphic from within Tracer Summit
(either a Target field, a Target image, or a Target button) or a graphic
field that links to a source outside of Tracer Summit (a Target External
button).

Target link
A graphic field (a target field, target image, or target button) that is
linked to another graphic screen. When the user touches this target link,
the screen to which the target is linked displays.

Task
In the Task Manager application, an operation or series of operations that
are performed by a workstation. Examples of tasks include automatically
initiating communications to a site or performing a backup of a site data-
base.

Template graphic
A graphic that contains at least one field for which the information
required to display Tracer Summit data depends on the object for which
the graphic is being displayed. All standard graphics are template
graphics.

Terminal emulation session

A personal computer with a central processing unit disabled so that the
keyboard and the display screen can be used to communicate with and
program another device either directly or through a modem connection.

Time of day scheduling (TOD)

The process of assigning the times during the day for defined actions to
occur for various components of the building management system. These
include typical on or off commands.

Timed override (TOV)

An operator function to override equipment operation from unoccupied
control to occupied control.

Touch
The user/operator touches a target on the BCU Operator Display. This is
the touch screen equivalent to a keyboard or mouse input at the worksta-
tion.

Touch screen
A transparent overlay on an LCD or computer screen that is sensitive to
touch by a finger or stylus.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 595
Glossary

Tracer Graphical Programming (TGP) language

The language that technicians will use to write programs to control the
Tracer MP580/581 programmable controller.

Tracer MP580/581 Controller

A multi-purpose programmable controller that offers direct digital control
and monitoring of applications through the use of generic inputs and out-
puts. Often used on air-handlers, pumps, cooling towers, boilers, water
chilling units, and non-HVAC applications.

Tracer Summit
Trane’s premier building management system that allows facility manag-
ers to operate a building in an optimized and efficient manner. Tracer
Summit gives the facility operator control of temperature, humidity,
scheduling, lighting, energy, and much more. All of these building control
capabilities can be programmed and managed as a single system through
Tracer Summit.

Tracer VV550 VAV Controller

The Tracer VV550 (factory-installed) and Tracer 551 (field-installed) con-
trollers provide digital control for variable air volume (VAV) boxes and
communicate with a Tracer Summit BAS by using Comm5, Trane’s
implementation of LonTalk® communications protocol.

Trane Data Link (TDL)

A file type used in place of the UDL (Universal Data Link) file type so the
user is limited to setting up only the information necessary to run Tracer
Summit.

TraneNet
Proprietary internal intranet site for Trane offices.

Trend log
Retains a historical record of values for specified points.

U Unit control module (UCM)

A factory-mounted microelectronic circuit board that is typically used for
control of HVAC equipment and linking to an integrated comfort system.

Unit control panel (UCP)

The factory mounted, microprocessor-based unit controller of the Trane
CenTraVac chiller for unit process control, load control and equipment
safety protection.

Universal Data Link (UDL)

A Microsoft database management tool for configuring database connec-
tions and security.

596 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Glossary

Universal programmable control module (UPCM)

Programmable ICS controller that provides direct digital control and
monitoring for a wide range of HVAC and other applications.

W Wizard
An application utility that helps you step through a particular task
related to the application. For example, the Site Connection Wizard in
Tracer Summit leads you through the steps of connecting to various sites
using different communication media.

Workstation
Refers to a personal computer, either a laptop or a desktop, that is loaded
with the Tracer Summit software and the Setup editor software.

V Variable air volume (VAV)

Air distribution system that varies the volume of air supplied to a system
to maintain acceptable space comfort conditions.

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 597
Glossary

Z Zone
The smallest area of control in an HVAC system. It is characterized by
having a single thermostat or zone temperature sensor. A room served by
a single VAV box is an example of a zone. Several rooms served by the
same VAV box also constitute a zone.

Zone control system

System that provides individual temperature control to each area in a
building using the same single zone heating/cooling unit.

598 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Symbols Defining referencer for, 182

Definition, 182, 583
. . . button, 29 Expanded message for, 185
/// or // in CPL comment lines, 318 Naming, 182
??? value, 15, 28, 30, 464 Present value of, 184
Routing of alarm, 185
Analog output
A Analog output editor, 193
Analog, definition, 583
Access, See Security access Class, entering, 194
Account Disabled Creating, 192
Security option, 131 Defining referencer for, 192
Acknowledgment of alarms Definition, 192, 583
Requiring operators to provide, 91 Global references, setting up, 198
Advanced settings, changing, 489 Naming, 192
Air handler Overriding, 201
Selecting for a Comm3/Comm4 Present value, changing, 203
VAS, 298 Annual report, setting up, 477
Selecting for a Comm5 VAS, 284 Application
Air temperature sensors, setting, 254 Application program, definition,
Airflow drive max, 301 583
Airflow valve Assigning access to, 133
Balancing, 292 Definition, 583
Alarm routing, See Event routing Denying access to, 133
Alarms and events Non-Trane device, See Non-Trane
Alarm, definition, 583 device
Analog input, setting up, 184 Setting up for Tracer Summit, 10
Binary input, setting up, 189 Unavailability of offline testing for,
Enabling and disabling for analog 15
input, 184 View only access to application, 133
Enabling and disabling for binary View/edit access to application, 133
input, 190 Viewing properties of, 35
Message forwarding and call Archive audit trail databases, 141
center, and, 207 Archive Audit Trail utility, 141
Overriding at workstation, 485 Archived database backup file
Printing, 162 Name for, 145
Routing for UCM, 159 Restoring, 145
Routing of a binary input, 191 Archiving audit trail data, 142
Routing of an analog input, 185 Backing up and archiving, 143
Setting options, 483 by schedule, 143
Showing and hiding connection to current archive SQL database,
dialog, 485 143
Telephone notification, 173 Area
Trend snapshots, 443, 453 Adding members, 252
Ambient temperature lockout, Creating, 251
selecting, 239 Definition, 247
Analog in 5 color field, setup Making a timed override request,
information for, 386 261
Analog input Overriding present value, 261
Alarm scenarios, 184 Security access to, 259
Analog input editor, 183, 228 See also Area control
Analog, definition, 583 Area control
Assigning expanded message, 414 Air temperature sensors, 254
Creating, 182, 226 Area control editor, 250

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 599
Index

Cancel timed override (TOV) BACnet Role in BACnet setup, 547

request, 262 BACnet ID, 552 Selecting for CPL program, 332
Capabilities, 247 Communications flow, 547 seven-segment LED display
Definition, 247 Control priorities, 544 codes, 577
Enabling and disabling night Creating input/output object for, Version, selecting, 85
economizing, 258 552 Viewing memory for trend
Enabling and disabling timed Definition, 539, 584 sampling, 444, 455
override, 257 Electronic file, 555 BCU I/O Module Object
Membership rules, 253 Input/output objects for, 546, Analog inputs, setting up, 230
Operating modes, standard 552 Binary inputs, setting up, 231
behavior, 248 Input/output points, 552 Calculating the pulse multiplier,
Releasing control to property, Protocol, uses in Tracer Summit, 230
262 539 Creating, 226, 497
Security access to an area, 260 Providing information to other Pulse metered inputs, setting
Start timed override (TOV) systems, 546 up, 230
request, 262 Running report of objects, 552 BCU modem
Area node, 359 Troubleshooting, 491 Configuring, 172
Array Using for non-Trane devices, Creating new, 171
Definition, 583 539 Editor, accessing, 169
Using in CPL text file, 326 BACnet device(s) Phone book, managing, 173
Audit trail data Creating in a site, 76 Redialing, 172
Archiving by schedule, 143 Default device ID, 78 Security access to, 175
Archiving to current archive Deleting from a site, 79 Setting up, 171
SQL database, 143 Editing in a site, 78 Beep
Backing up and archiving, 143 Name, dependent on device ID, Causing when event message
Audit trail report, 457 77 received, 91
Authority level profile BACnet protocols Preventing at workstation, 485
Assigning pre-defined to a user, See BACnet device(s) Billing period
130 BACnet/IP Defining, 86
Copying for a user, 130 Site connection for, 45, 46 Definition, 584
Authorizing changes to compliance Balancing, system, 292 Scheduling calculations around,
data, 3 BAS (building automation system), 273
for alarm acknowledgement, 6 definition, 585 Used as a sampling interval,
for creating multiple objects, 4 Base chiller, 242 442, 452
for object creation, 3 BBMD IP address, 47 Binary animation field, setup
for saving edits of object and BCU information for, 388
user properties, 5 Adding modem for, 67 Binary input
AutoCAD, 408, 534 clear code, database, RAM, and Alarm scenarios, 189
Autocommissioning VAVs in VAS reset procedure, 579 Alarm state, cause of, 189
Comm5, 294 clear Comm5 database, 580 Assigning expanded message,
Automatic connection of sites, from clear database, RAM, and reset 414
navigation tree, 492 procedure, 579 Binary input editor, 188
Autoselecting image size, 382 clear RAM and reset procedure, Binary, definition, 584
Average calculation, 266 578 BMTX, 223
AVI movie, 408 Connection, programming Class, entering, 191
Autoselecting size, 382 without, See Offline Creating, 187
Inserting, 372 programming Defining referencer for, 187
Setup information for, 389 Creating for a site, 64 Definition, 187, 584
Definition, 585 Expanded message for, 191
Deleting from a site, 71 In CPL routine, 200
B Deleting modem from, 71 Naming, 187
Deleting when contains objects, Routing of alarm, 191
Back button, 391 71, 75, 79 Binary output
Background Device ID, assigning, 65 Binary output editor, 196
Changing for a graphic, 376 Device ID, default, 65 Binary, definition, 584
Locating image for, 378 Editing in a site, 68 Class, entering, 197
Backing up, 557 Modem, See BCU modem Creating, 195
Backup function, 557 operation status, 577 Defining referencer for, 195
Backup copy, definition, 584 Operator display, and, 495 Definition, 195, 585
Backup during site setup, 9 Pagers and, See Pager Global references, setting up,
Restoring from a backup, 557 Required for site creation, 64 198

600 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Naming, 195 CCD, See Total Cooling Degree Non-Trane devices, types of
Overriding, 201 Days connections for, 539
Present value, changing, 203 CenTraVac, definition, 585 Connection status
Saving, 197 Changeover voting, 304 ARCNET status, 39
Standard behavior in an area, Chiller BACnet/IP, 39
248 CenTraVac, definition, 585 Determining, 38
Binary text field, setup information Failure, 235 EIA-232, 39
for, 387 Setting up UCM for, 244 Ethernet, 39
Custom screen editor, and, 524 Units, 244 Not Connected status, 39
Blank row See also Chiller plant Constant mode in referencers, 28
Adding to a report, 472 Chiller plant Constant volume system,
Purpose in a report, 469 Adding members, 241 definition, 586
BMP file format, 378, 408, 412 Base sequence, 242 Context for a graphic, 380
Custom screen editor, and, 527 Chiller object settings, 241, 243 Target fields, 393
BMS (building management Control capabilities, 235, 307 See also Template field
system), definition, 585 Creating new, 237, 309 Control application
Body text Creating new objects for, 237 Assigning, 545
Formatting for reports, 474 Definition, 586 Modifying, 545
Report members displayed in, Duplicate chiller types, 242 Control class, 545
472 Normal sequence, 242 In VAS Comm3/Comm4, 305
Boolean, 324, 325 Peak sequence, 242 Control mode in referencers, 28
Border, editing for graphic fields, Security access to, 244 Control priorities
389 Sequence types, 242 BACnet and, 544
Break in CPL program, 336 Sequencing, definition, 586 Defaults, selecting, 544
Building automation control Startup settings, 239 Definition, 93, 544
network, See BACnet Subtract settings, 240 Setting up, 93
Swing sequence, 242 Setting up for BACnet Devices,
System setup, 238 544
C See also Chiller Conversion factor
Chiller plant editor, 235 For a Cool Flow Rate
Calculation Accessing, 236, 308 calculation, 267
Adding to a report, 471 Class, See Security class For a Heat Flow Rate
Average, 266 Code calculation, 268
Billing periods, scheduling Writing in CPL, 313 For a Peak X Minute Interval
around, 273 Column heading, entering for calculation, 270
Cool Flow Rate, 266 reports, 473 Cool Flow Rate calculation, 266
Defining billing period for, 86 Comment, adding, 318 Copy a site
Editor, accessing, 273 Common space BCU, 61
Enabling, 278 VAVs, 286 Objects not copied, BCU sites,
Heat Flow Rate, 268 Communication link 61
Maximum, 269 Changing once created, 70 CorelDRAW, 408, 534
Meter Totalization, 269 Definition, 586 CPL, 313
Minimum, 269 In non-Trane setup, 546 Definition, 586
Object, See Calculation object communication status Error codes, 338
Peak for X Minute Interval, 270 between BCU and UCM, 577 How area control affects, 248
Pulse meter input, 224 Communications port Library of sample programs,
Total Cooling Degree Days, 271 PC workstation modem, 168 313, 315
Total Heating Degree Days, 272 Compile function, 330 Syntax, 317, 320
Total Run Hours/Starts, 273 Compile report, 330 Syntax, definition, 594
Types, list of, 266 Failure, 331 Templates, 315
Using in live reports, 462 Viewing errors in source files, Using CPL editor to reference
Calculation object 331 objects and properties, 320
Clearing data from, 279 Compliant environments See also Programming
Creating, 275 Reports, 457 CPL editor
Deleting, 280 Configuration, definition, 586 Closing, 314
Security access to, 280 Configuring communication Opening, 314
Setting up, 277 settings, 84 CPL files
See also Calculation BCU sites, 167 Backing up, 557
Calling card, 174 Connecting to a site from the Restoring from a backup, 558
Capacity, definition, 585 navigation tree, 361 CPL object
Connection

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 601
Index

Compiling from a CPL text file, Location, 407 Default file directories, changing,
330 Opening blank graphic, 410 488
Creating new, 332 Saving, 401, 413 Default site, 62
Downloading to BCU offline, Custom live report DEFDBL statement, 322
333 Members, adding, 470 DEFFLT statement, 322
Downloading to BCU online, See also Report DEFINT statement, 322, 324
333 Custom profile, ??–134 DEFLNG statement, 322
Need for same name as text file, Custom programming language, DEFOBJ statement, 321
332 See CPL Delete event option, using, 349
Outputs, inhibiting, 336 Custom programming routines, Deleting Tracer Summit items, 565
Replacing existing, 333 See Routines Object, deleting, 566
Running manually to debug, Custom screen editor, 513 Report, deleting, 479
336 About custom screen graphics, Restrictions, 565, 572, 574
Testing, 335 514 Site, deleting, 572
CPL program, See CPL text file or Accessing the operator display Demand limiting, definition, 587
CPL object custom screen editor, 516 Destination, 391
CPL text file, 313 Creating and importing Device
Adding an object and property bitmaps, 534 Creating for use with non-Trane
reference, 322 Creating custom screens, 517 server, 548
Adding an object reference, 320 Custom screen template, 514, Definition, 587
Adding comments, 318 518 Device ID for PC workstation,
Adding functions, 319 Editing custom screens, 532 74, 490
Adding statements, 318 Organizing custom screen Options, advanced, 491
Array, 326 fields, 531 Viewing for a site, 68
Assigning an object, 320 Restoring operator display Device ID
Assigning enumerations, 323 custom screens, 563 Assigning for non-Trane device,
Compiling into a CPL object, 330 Using the custom screen editor 540
Creating, 315 tools, 519 For BCU, 65
Creating as a database object, Adding fields, 524 Need for unique, 549
331 Displaying the custom Obtaining for non-Trane device,
Creating from existing file, 315 screen palette, 522 78, 542
Creating from template, 315 Using the custom screens Showing, 491
Creating new from blank text pop-up menu, 522 Workstation, changing, 489
window, 318 See also Operator Display Device, operator display, adding
Example of array, 326 Enabling custom screens, and deleting, 500–501
Example of saved value, 329 509 See also Operator display
Example, after enumeration Operator display options, Diagnostic, definition, 587
assigned, 325 508 Dialing prefix, 174
Example, before enumeration Custom screen editor palette, 519 Differential
assigned, 324 Custom site graphic node, 359 Definition, 255
Locating errors in, 330 Custom trend report For MWU, 302
Naming objects and properties, Members, adding, 471 Setting, 255
320 See also Report DIP switch, definition, 587
Naming restrictions, 317 Direct digital control, definition, 587
Referencing an object and Directory
property indirectly, 322 D Changing default for files, 488
Referencing an object indirectly, For storing graphics, 402
320 Daily operator, See User Disconnect remote connection
Saving, 317 Daily report, setting up, 475 security option, 131
Structure, 315 Database Drive max airflow, 305
Critical Control System, 3 Setup using offline Duct pressure optimization in VAS
Cross-hatched border on graphic programming, 15 Comm5, 289
field, 383, 384, 396 Database Sync status field, 38 Dynamic values, appearance of
Currently archived audit trail Date when offline, 15
database, 141 Inserting into report, 472
Custom global graphic node, 359 See also Time and date
Custom graphic Daylight savings, 95 E
Creating from blank graphic, Debugging, See CPL program,
409 testing Economizer control, definition, 588
Definition, 407, 586 Decimal point in graphics, 390 Edit level of security, definition, 127
Inserting main image, 411 EEPROM, definition, 588

602 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Effective period of a schedule, 352 Event receiver, 88 G

EIA-232 connection List of workstations and pagers,
Creating modem object for, 550 92 GIF file format, 378, 408, 412
Definition, 593 Event routing Global graphic
Modem object setup required, For each receiver, 92 Backing up, 557
546 Setting up, 88 Definition, 407, 589
Electronic file, using to input Events in a schedule, See Effect of selecting save option,
BACnet data, 555 Scheduling, 341 403, 404
Electronic library, 33 Events printer Navigation tree, and, 365
electronic signature, 3 Definition, 162 Restoring from a backup, 560
Ellipsis button, 29 Setting up and selecting, 162 Global references
See also ... button, 29 Exception in a schedule, 341 Setting up for analog or binary
Ellipsis, See Referencer button Exceptions outputs, 198
END statement, 317 Adding to time of day reports, Setting up for VAS Comm5
Energy conservation 356 members, 290
Accomplishing with chiller plant Expanded message Graphic
control, 235 Backing up, 557 Background, changing, 376
Monitoring pulse meter input, Creating, 414 Basics, 370
224 Definition, 414 Blank, 409
Enterprise Manager, Microsoft SQL Restoring from a backup, 560, Context for, 380, 393
server, 145 561 Custom, See Custom graphic
Enumeration Selecting for analog input Definition, 589
Assigning in CPL text file, 323 alarm, 185 Deleting, 421
Defining for priority shutdown, Selecting for binary input alarm, Deleting, renaming as
324 191 alternative to, 406, 421
Definition, 323 Editing, 371
Example, after assignment, 325 Editor,See Graphics editor
Example, before assignment, F Expanded message, See
324 Expanded message
Error codes in CPL, interpreting, FDA Field,See Graphic field
338 Audit trail report, 457 File formats for images, 378
Error-30 through Error-307, 338 historical trend report, 458 File name, 378
Ethernet FDA 21 CFR Part 11, 3 Folders, 370
communication status LEDs, FDA reports, 457–459 Global, definition, 407
577 Running, 460 Grid, See Grid
Ethernet, definition, 588 Feedback reference Hard-coded graphic, definition,
Event Definition, 189 589
Adding, 348 Selecting, 190 Home, changing, 482
Changing event time, 348 Field in a graphic, See Graphic field Inserting images, 412
Removing, 349 File directories, changing default, Jumping to, See Target field
Event class 488 Location, 378
Example user-defined classes, File name Location search order, 402
89 Auto generating for reports, 478 Options, 369
Labels for, 91 Specifying for a report, 478 Palette, See Graphics editor
Predefined classes, 89 Fill in template option, 421 palette
Recommended notifications, 89 Folder, see Directory Properties, editing, 376
Trend snapshots and, 443, 453 Fonts in a graphic, 390 Renaming, 406, 421
See also Security class Footer, entering for reports, 474 Restoring, 405, 560, 561
Event Classes For more information about Tracer Saving, 401–402
Assigning for present value, 259 Summit, 2 Security access to, 379
Assigning for timed override Frequency of running CPL program, Setup, allocating workstations
(TOV), 259 setting, 332 for, 15
Event log Frequency of trend sampling, See Site-specific, definition, 407
Adding a BCU event log object, Interval Standard, definition, 407
67 Function Template field, See Template
Creating expanded message for Adding in CPL text file, 319 field
a graphic, 414 Assigning access to, 132 Uses of, 369
Definition, 588 See also Custom screen editor
Printer selection, 483 Graphic field
Printing, 162 Aligning multiple, 398
Settings, changing, 483 Analog in 5 color field, 372

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 603
Index

AVI movie field, 372 Color, changing, 375 Definition, 590

Binary animation field, 372 Displaying on a graphic, 374 File formats, 378, 408
Binary check box field, 372 Snap to grid, disabling, 375 Inserting in a graphic, 412
Border, editing, 389 Snap to grid, enabling, 375 Locating, 378
Border, significance of cross- Spacing, configuring, 375 Saving, 408
hatching, 383, 384, 396 Using to organize fields, 374 Setup information for, 389
Border, significance of stripes, See also Custom screen editor Sizes available, 409
396 Group of sites node, 359 Inch-pound units, 63
Copying, 398 Group, definition, 589 Input
Cutting and pasting, 397 Metering for use in calculations,
Deleting, 400 270, 271
Editing, 382, 383 H See also Input object
External file sources, 394 Input object
Identifying type of, 383 HDD, See Total Heating Degree Analog input, 182, 226
Image field, 372 Days Binary input, 187
Inserting, 382 Header .cpl file, 315 Definition, 181
Making the same size, 399 Heat Flow Rate calculation, 268 Naming, 200
Moving, 397 Heat Pump Loop Control (HPLC) See also Input/output object
Moving by one pixel, 397 Loop controller member, Input/output object
Moving forward or back, 400 assigning, 311 Creating, 181, 223
Organizing with the grid, 374 Need-to-run threshold, 307, 310 Creating for BACnet, 552
Override control field, 372, 521 Need-to-run votes, 309 Modifying, 200
Primary field, 396 Night Heat/Cool operation, 307 Naming, 200
Property references for, 383 WSHP compressor referencer, Role in BACnet setup, 547
Resizing, 397 311 Security classes, 204
Secondary field, 396 WSHP member, assigning, 311 Types of, 181, 226
Selecting multiple, 396 Heat/cool Using during site setup, 10
Selection list control field, 372 Night heat/cool, See Night Using in BACnet, 546
Setpoint control field, 372, 521 heat/cool Viewing properties for, 35
Setup information, 384, 385 VAV air system control, 301 See also Input object or Output
Static text field, 372, 521 Historical trend, 430 object
Status text field, 372, 521 Creating, 432 Input/output points for BACnet, 552
Target button field, 373, 521 Enabling for a new trend, 435 Input/output, See Input/output
Target External button field, 384, Reports, 458 object
394 Security access to, 442 Insert prompt, 382
Target fields, 391 Status screen, 444 Interval
Target image field, 373 Holiday, 341 Sampling interval for trend, 442,
Target text field, 373 Adding to time of day schedule 452
Template field, See Template reports, 356 Selecting for reporting, 474
field Holiday schedules, setting IP subnet, 45, 53
Text style, editing, 389 Message forwarding and call I-P units, 63
Types of, 372 centers, 218 It, 141
See also Custom screen editor Home graphic, changing, 482
Adding control value fields, HTML file
524 Definition, 589 J
Graphic object, see Graphic Name, 401
Graphics editor Role in deleting graphic, 421 JPG file format, 378, 408, 412
Accessing, 371 Search sequence, 402
Capabilities, 369 HVAC equipment
Using, 369 Controlling with a schedule, 341 K
Graphics editor palette, 372 Definition, 590
Graphing control editor During site setup, 10 Keyboard macros
Creating a single trend object See also Navigation tree, 367
graph, 424
Creating live property graphs, I
423 L
Using historical graphs, 422 I/O, See Input/output object
Using live property graphs, 422 Image Labels, for event classes, 91
Graphs, See Graphing control Autoselecting size, 382 LAN
editor Changing state assignment, 388
Grid Creating for a graphic, 408

604 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Connection, programming Member of an object type, operator N

without, See Offline display, adding and deleting,
programming 503–504 Name
Layout See also Operator display Site, inability to modify, 43
Changing in reports, 472 Message forwarding and call User, See User name
Codes for reports, 472 centers, 207 Navigation tree
LEDs Accessing the editor, 212 Connecting to a site from the
clear code, database, RAM, and Alarms, forwarding, 220 tree, 361
reset procedure, 579 Background considerations, 208 Creating nodes, 362
clear Comm5 database, 580 Call center, definition, 208 Assigning graphics to, 365
clear database, RAM, and reset Creating a message forwarding Basic considerations, 362
procedure, 579 schedule, 217 Creating nodes inside site
clear RAM and reset procedure, Issues to consider before nodes, 363
578 creating a call center, 210 Cutting and pasting, 363
indicators for BCU Selecting alarm event classes, Finding a node, 364
communication status, 577 220 Grouping nodes, 364
seven-segment display codes, Setting holiday schedules, 218 Definition, 357, 591
577 Setting up call centers and Different types of nodes, 359
Library message forwarding, 213 Navigation tree, capabilities,
CPL examples, 313 Creating a call center, 214 357
Electronic reference, 33 Registering e-mail profiles, Using the navigation tree, 360
Lighting, how area control affects, 213 The tree menu and pop-up
248 Scheduling when recipients menus, 360
Line-feed printer, 162 receive e-mails, 215 See also System options
Live audit trail database, 141 Test e-mail forwarding, 216 Setting connection features,
Live report Meter Totalization calculation, 269 492
Calculation, using in report, 462 Microsoft SQL server, Enterprise Network adapter, See Adapter
Custom, selecting, 467 Manager, 145 Network administrator, See
Defining row for, 469 Microsoft Windows Security supervisor
Definition, 462 Modem for PC workstation, Network number, need for unique
Member types, 462 adding, 164 in BACnet, 549
Sample, 463 Printer setup, 162 New
Standard, 465 Microsoft Windows Paint, 408, 534 Site, 42
Standard, membership rules Minimum calculation, 269 UCM, 153
for, 469 MKT User, setting up, 128
See also Report Report, 459 NIC, See Adapter
Local area network, See LAN trend, 430 Night economize
Mode button, 27 Area mode settings, 249
Options, 28 Definition, 591
M Modem How area control affects, 247
Adding for a site BCU, 67, 171 Setting up, 258, 346
Main image of a custom graphic, Adding for a workstation, 164 Night heat/cool
411 Adding object for EIA-232 Area mode settings, 249
Manually adding objects connection, 550 Definition, 591
Non-Trane device, 543 BCU modem setup, 169 How area control affects, 247
Maximum calculation, 269 Deleting from BCU, 71 No access level of security,
Mean kinetic temperature (MKT) PC workstation modem setup, definition, 127
Report, 459 163 No Such Property message, 416
trend, 430 Security access to, 175 Nobody Logged On
Member of a report Setting up, 163, 169 Setting up user profile, 134
Changing order of, 472 Monthly report, setting up, 476 Node
Defining, 469 Morning warm up, See MWU Definition, 357
Member of a schedule, 350 settings Types of, 359
Member of a trend Movement cursor, 397 See also Individual node types
Adding, 449 MWU settings, 300 Non-Trane device
Definition, 449 MWU differential, 302 Communication flow between
Editing, 449 MWU setpoint, 302 devices, 546
Including in a report, 464 Selecting, 302 Connection types, 539
Limited number allowed, 450 Interfacing to, 540
Member of an area, adding, 252 Network, need for unique
number, 549

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 605
Index

Offline Editing, 543 Adding event log, 67 Palette, See Graphics editor palette
Providing information to other Creating a new BCU operator Password
systems, 546 display, 497 Before security established, 127
Role in BACnet setup, 547 Enabling custom screens, 509 Showing and hiding, 132, 139
Using BACnet for, 539 Home screen, 505 Pause in dialing, code for, 174
See also BACnet device(s) Selecting custom screens, 511 PC modem, See Modem, 41
Normal chiller, 242 Setting up security, 137 PC workstation
Normal day, 341 Setting up the BCU operator Creating in a site, 72
Not used mode, 30 display, 500 Default device ID, 74, 490
Numeric Only paging protocol, 179 Selecting a device, 500 Definition, 592
Selecting members, 503 Deleting from a site, 75
Setup options for the operator Deleting last from site, 75
O display, 507 Destination for restore function,
Enabling security at the 560, 561
Object operator display, 507 Device ID, assigning, 74, 490
And property reference, 322, Operator levels, See Security, 127 Device ID, changing, 489
491 Operator, See User Editing in a site, 74
Assigning access to, 133 Optimal start/stop, 341, 346 Enabling and disabling alarm,
Assigning in CPL text file, 320 Area mode settings, 249 485
Definition, 591 How area control affects, 247 Modem, See PC workstation
Deleting, 565, 566, 571 Optimal start, definition, 592 modem
Denying access to, 133 Optimization features for VAS Need for additional, 15
Grouping into security classes, Comm5, 289 Required for site creation, 64, 72
204 Options, system, See System Role in archiving trends, 455
Name in template field, 416 options Setting up, 9
Options, advanced, 491 Output object Synchronization among
Properties, viewing, 35 Analog output, 192 multiple, 97
References to an object, Binary output, 195 Time and zone, setting up, 93
locating, 568 Definition, 181 PC workstation modem
Referencing a property of, 30 Naming, 200 Adding in Windows, 164
Referencing indirectly in CPL See also Input/output object Configuring for BCU sites, 167
text file, 320, 322 Output of reports, controlling, 478 Creating new, 165
Releasing control for output Output, See Output object Editor, accessing, 163
objects, 201 Over-pressurization of ducts, VAVs, Name, assigning, 166
Security access for, 97, 232 286 Object, creating, 165
Security, assigning access, 133 Override Phone book, managing, 173
Showing object ID, 491 Analog output, 201 Security access to, 175
Object types, operator display, Binary output, 201 Setting up, 168
adding and deleting, 502–503 Setting for a UCM, 157 PCX files, 15
See also Operator display VAVs in VAS Comm3/Comm4, Peak chiller, 242
Occupied mode, in VAS 304 Peak for X Minute Interval
Comm3/Comm4, 302 VAVs in VAS Comm5, 292 calculation, 270
Occupy, area mode settings, 249 Phone book
Off Alarm Limits field Adding phone numbers, 174
requirements, 185 P Editing phone numbers, 173
Offline Editing Removing phone numbers, 175
Non-Trane device, 543 Page count, inserting into report, Setting up, 173
Offline programming, 15 472 PIN for pager, 179
Offline, definition, 591 Page number, inserting into report, Point-to-point connection, See EIA-
Offline programming, updating 472 232 connection
existing site, 16 Page printing, 162 Pre-defined profile
Offset, setting for schedule Pager Pre-selected access for, 128
members, 351 Advanced options, 483 Pre-defined user, deleting after
On Alarm Limits field requirements, Editor, accessing, 176 setup, 127
185 Message forwarding, call Prefix for phone numbers, 174
Online programming, 15 centers, and, 207, 209, 210 Present value
Information flow in Tracer Object, creating, 177 Changing for output objects,
Summit, 13 Protocol, selecting, 179 203
Online, definition, 592 Security access to, 179 Overriding for a UCM, 157
Operator display, 495 Setting up, 176, 179 Role in changeover voting, 304
Accessing the editor, 496 Paintshop Pro, 408, 534 Votes in VAS, 306

606 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Previously archived database, Viewing an object’s properties, Report editor, 461

name for, 145 35 Restoring from a backup, 562
Primary field, 396 Pulse meter input, 224 Running, 465
Printer Running for BACnet objects, 552
Adding in Windows, 162 Saving, 479
Events, 162 Q Scheduling, 474–477
Line-feed, 162 Selecting, 465
Operating system, 10 Quick trend report, See Trend Standard reports, 465
Page, 162 report, Standard Title, entering, 473
Recommended for event log, Tracer Summit Critical Control
162, 485 System (CCS), 460
Selecting, 162 R Trend, 455, 464
Selecting for event log, 483 Types of reports, 462
Setting up for reports, 478 RAM Report viewer, 460, 465
Setup sequence, 10 Definition, 593 Report, FDA, 457–459
Tracer Summit, 10 Redialing, 172 Mean kinetic temperature, 459
Tractor-feed, 162 Reference information in library, 33 Running, a, 460
Printing Referencer edit control fields, see Reports
Alarms and events, 162 Referencers for Tracer Summit Critical
Electronic file, creating for Referencers Control System, 457
BACnet, 555 Definition, 27, 593 Reports,Time of day schedules,
Priority class, modifying name of, Failure of, 30 353–356
545 Locating for an object to be Reset function
Priority control, definition, 592 deleted, 568 Resetting a BCU, 577
Priority shutdown Mode button, 27 Restore function
Area mode settings, 249 Not used mode, 30 Global graphics, restoring, 560
Defining an enumeration for, Referencer button, 29 Reports, restoring, 562
324 Referencer mode, 29 Site graphics, restoring, 561
Profile Report Sites, restoring, 557
Nobody Logged On, modifying, Audit trail, 457 Restoring an original graphic, 405
135 Auto generating file name, 478 Restoring custom screens, 563
Of user, 128 Backing up, 557 Right of decimal, 390
Setting up, 128 Blank row, adding, 472 Right-click capabilities, 374
Programmable control module, Body text, formatting, 474 Routines
definition, 592 Calculation, using in report, 462 Testing, 15
Programming Column headings, entering, 473 Routing
In CPL, See CPL Date, inserting, 472 Alarm for a binary output, 197
Offline, See Offline Deleting, 479 Alarm for an analog input, 185
programming Designing, 468 Alarm for an analog output, 194
Online, See Online Editing, 465, 468 Alarm for an binary input, 191
programming File format, 460, 465 Alarm for analog input, 185
Order checklist, 9 File name, 478 For chiller plant event class, 244
Setup sequence, 9 Footer, entering, 474 For UCMs, 159
Property for compliant environments, Overriding, 485
And object reference, 322 457 Rover service tool, 535–537
Definition, 592 Formatting, 472 RPT file format, 460, 465
Editing graphic properties, 376 Historical trend, 458 Runtime version
Printing out an object’s Layout codes, 472 Runtime view, definition, 593
properties, 36 Mean kinetic temperature, 459
Reference for analog input, 185 Member order, changing, 472
Reference for analog output, Members, defining, 469 S
193 Naming, 468
Reference for binary input, 189, Orientation, 468 Sampling
190 Output options, 478 Clearing samples, 444, 454
Reference for binary output, 196 Page count, inserting into Controlling by reference, 441,
Referencing when offline, 30 report, 472 450
Releasing control in an area, 262 Page number, inserting into Delaying, 441, 451
Selecting for reference, 30 report, 472 Determining whether
Selecting references for graphic Printer, setting up for reports, suspended, 444, 454
fields, 383 478 Disabled after snapshot, 443,
Purpose of reporting, 461 453

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 607
Index

In trend reports, 464 For objects, 97, 232 Configuration editor, See Site
Interval, 442, 452 For pagers, 179 configuration editor
Limits on, 450 For trends, 453 Configuring, 63
Members of a trend, 449 For UCMs, 159 Configuring by Modem or
Number of samples, 441, 451 For VAS Comm3/Comm4, 305 Hardwired, 48
Resuming, 444, 454 For VAS Comm5, 291 Configuring via offline
Setup for trend, 441, 450 Levels of, 129 programming, 15
Viewing samples, 444, 454 Match upper and lower case Connecting from navigation
Saved value in CPL text file, 327 option, 131 tree, 361
Definition, 327 No access level, 127 Control priorities, 9
Example, 329 Nobody logged on, 134 Copying a site
Reading, 328 Operator display, 137 BCU site, 61
Writing, 328 Operator levels, 128 Creating, 42
Schedules Required for uploading site, 50 Default site, 62
Creating time of day reports, Security supervisor option, 131 Definition, 41, 594
353 Setting for a UCM, 160 Deleting when currently logged
Scheduling Setting for an area, 260 on, 572
Creating a daily schedule, 343 Setting for input/output object, Deleting when not logged on,
Interval for reporting, 474 204 572
Reports, 474–477 To a class, 134 Devices, listing, 68
Save events as a normal To a function, 132 Devices, synchronization of, 96
schedule to weekdays, To an application, 133 Multiple sites, managing, 41
weekends, and holidays, 353 To an object, 133 Name, inability to modify, 43
Schedule, definition, 341 View only level, 127 Naming, 43
Screen, accessing, 342 Security class PC workstation(s), managing, 72
Second dial tone, code for, 174 Assigning access to, 134 Restoring from a backup, 557,
Second window for graphic, 393 Definition, 204 558
Secondary field, 396 Denying access to, 134 Security access, setting up, 97,
Security For input/output objects, 204 127, 232
Access, See Security access Naming, 87 Segmenting by security class,
Authority level profile, Read only access, 134 204
predefined, 130 Read/write access, 134 Selecting to configure, 62
Authority level profiles, See also Event class or Security Setting up, 9
managing, 130 access Single site setup, 41
Classes, assigning for a site, 134 Security supervisor Time and date, setting, 93
Message forwarding and call Security option, 131 UCM(s), managing, 80
centers, and, 211 Select, 402 Site configuration editor
Operator display, 137 Setpoint Accessing, 62
Security editor, 127 Definition, 593 Capabilities, 41
Site, setting up, 127 Modifying for VAS Site Connection
Supervisor, 127 Comm3/Comm4, 303 configuring a site by Modem or
System security, definition, 594 Modifying for VAS Comm5, Hardwired, 48
Security access 288–289 Site connection wizard
Account Disabled, 131 Occupied, purpose for, 255 Site connection process, 43, 52
Assigning to a user by function, Setting, 255 Site creation wizard
132 Unoccupied, purpose for, 255 Restoring a site from, 60
Changing, 97 Setpoint field, setup information Site creation process, 42
Choosing options, 131 for, 385 Site graphic
Denying by function, 132 Setup Backing up, 557
Disconnect remote option, 131 Graphics, allocating Definition, 594
Edit level, 127 workstations for, 15 Effect of selecting save option,
For a chiller plant, 244 Testing, 15 404
For an area, 259 See also Programming Restoring from a backup, 561
For analog inputs, 185 Show connection dialog, 485 Site modem editor, See Modem
For analog outputs, 194 SI units, 63 editor
For binary inputs, 191 Site Site Name status field, 38
For binary outputs, 197 Backing up, 557 Snap to grid feature, 375
For calculation objects, 280 BACnet device, 76 Custom screen editor, 531
For graphics, 379 BCUs, managing, 64 Snapshot
for historical trends, 442 Billing periods, defining, 86 Effect on sampling, 443, 453
For modems, 175 Enabling and disabling, 443, 453

608 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

Referencing a trigger, 443, 453 Changing workstation device ID, Time and zone, setting up, 93
Resetting, 444, 454 489 Time of day schedule reports
Space comfort controller (SCC), 307, Editing, 481 Adding event information, 356
311 Selecting event log printer, 483 Time of day scheduling, 341
Spacing on grid, configuring, 375 Setting, 481 Adding a member to a schedule,
Custom screen editor, 523 Setting connection features of 350
Standard graphic the navigation tree, 492 Adding event, 348
Definition, 405, 407 Viewing system status, 37 Changing a schedule’s name,
Location, 407 System, see Tracer Summit 349
Replacing, 402 Changing effective period, 352
Restoring original, 405 Creating a daily schedule, 343
Saving, 401 T Creating a time of day report,
Saving as custom graphic, 404 341
Saving as site graphic, 403 Target field, 391 Creating a time of day schedule
Saving edits to, 402 Context object for, 393 report, 353
Standard international units, 63 Definition, 391, 595 Definition, 595
Standard live report Destination, 391 During site setup, 10
Definition, 465 Displaying graphic in second Offsets, setting for members,
Members, adding, 469 window, 393 351
Membership rules, 469 Inserting, 391 Removing a member from a
Selecting, 465 Setup information for, 385 schedule, 351
Using to report on BACnet Target External button, 384, 394 Removing event, 349
objects, 552 Target image setup information, Setting up day of the week, 347
See also Report 389 Timed override
standard operating procedure, 5 Using with template field, 416 Assign to event classes, 259
Standard time, 95 See also Custom screen editor Binary trigger, BMTX, 223
Standard trend report Telephone numbers, See Phone Cancel timed override request,
Definition, 465 book 262
Role in extracting Trends, 445 Template field Definition, 595
Running automatically, 455 Context for, 380, 393, 420 How area control affects, 248
Start debug option, 335 Context object, definition, 586 Initiating TOV functionality for
Statement, adding to CPL text files, Definition, 416 area members, 253
318 Effect on display of navigation Setting up, 257
Static text field, set up information tree, 405 Start timed override request,
for Eligible field types, 416 262
Custom screen editor, 527 Filling in with permanent Title, entering for reports, 473
Static text field, setup information information, 420 to, 198
for, 385 Inserting, 417 Total Cooling Degree Days
Status text field, setup information Object name in, 416 calculation, 271
for, 385 Opening a graphic containing, Total Heating Degree Days
Custom screen editor, 524 419 calculation, 272
Status, definition, 594 Removing from a graphic, 420 Total Run Hours/Starts calculation,
Striped border on graphic field, 396 Site name in, 416 273
Supervisor of security, setting up, Template graphic, definition, Tracer loop controller, 307, 309, 310,
127 595 311
Swing chiller, 242 Using with target field, 416 Tracer Summit
Switch for billing period, 86 Template, custom screen, 517 Backing up, 557
Switching to run-time view, Custom Test message CD, 9
screen editor, 531 e-mail forwarding, 216 Definition, 596
Synchronization Text file Deleting items, 565
Automatic, 97 For CPL, See CPL text file Optional packages, 1
Of device time in site, 96 Saving report as, 460, 465 Restoring, See Restore function
Syntax of CPL, See CPL Text style, editing for graphic fields, Window sizes available, 409
System node, 359 389 Tracer Summit BCU site node, 359
System options Time Tracer Summit Critical Control
Advanced, 491 Automatic synchronization of, System
Advanced settings, 489 97 Archive audit trail utility, 141
Alarm settings, 483 Changing, 95 Audit trail report, 457
Changing event log settings, Synchronization for devices, 96 Historical trend report, 458
483 See also Time and zone Information flow, 13
Changing home graphic, 482 Time and date, setting for a site, 93

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 609
Index

Mean kinetic temperature Variables have wrong values, Setting up, 128
report, 459 335 User name
Running reports for, 460 TXT file format, 460, 465 Before security established, 127
Trend editor, 429 Deleting pre-defined user, 127
Tractor-feed printer, 162
Trend U
Archiving, 455 V
Communication requirements, UCM
455 Accessing information offline, Variable, 324, 327, 335
Creating, 447 16 Using to reference an object,
Definition, 445 Chiller, setting up, 244 321
Interval of sampling, 442, 452 Configuring, 156 Using to reference an object
Member, See Member of a trend Creating in a site, 81 and property, 322
Naming, 441, 450 Creating new, 153 Viewing, 336
Renaming, 441, 450 Definition, 596 Variable air volume (VAV) boxes,
Report, See Trend report Deleting from a site, 83 295
Samples, See Sampling Editor, accessing, 151 Variable air volume air system, see
Saving, 455 Members, standard behavior, VAS Comm3/Comm4, VAS
Security access to, 453 248 Comm5
Snapshot, See Snapshot Naming multiple UCMs in a site, VAS Comm3/Comm4, 295–306
Trend editor, capabilities, 429, 82 Accessing the VAS
445 Overriding other values, 158 Comm3/Comm4 editor, 296
Trend log, definition, 596 Overriding present value, 157 Air handler, selecting, 298
Using in a report, 464 Releasing control of, 158 Airflow drive max, 301
Trend editor Role of in a site, 80 Alarms, 305
Accessing, 431 Security access to, 159 Assigning members, 298
for Tracer Summit Critical Setting overrides for, 157 Capabilities, 295
Control System, 429 Setting up, 155 Components, 295
Trend object, See Trend Viewing properties of, 35 Creating object, 297
Trend report, 455 UCM node, 359 Drive VAVs to max flow, 305
Custom, selecting, 467 UCMs Heat/cool decisions, 301
Defining column heading for, BCU communication status, 577 Minimum flow value, 300
469 UCP (unit control panel), definition, Modifying, 300
Definition, 462 596 MWU settings, See MWU
Sample of, 464 UCP1,See Chiller settings
Sampling in, 464 UCP2,See Chiller Naming, 297
Standard, 465 UDP port number, 46, 54, 55 Security access to, 305
See also Report Unacknowledged Alarms status Setpoints, modifying, 303
Troubleshooting field, 38 Setting up, 300
BACnet, 491 Unit control module, See UCM, 41 Voting for present value, 306
Chiller marked as failed, 244 Unit Controllers menu option, 151 Voting setpoints, 304
CPL routines affected when Units of measure VAS Comm5, 281–294
input/output renamed, 200 Need for consistency in chillers, Accessing the VAS Comm5
Failure of compile function, 331 244 editor, 282
Images not displaying properly Selecting for a new site, 63 Assigning members, 284–287
in graphics editor, 378 Unoccupied mode Autocommissioning VAVs, 294
Incomplete database, 38 Area mode settings, 249 Balancing air and water flow,
Interpreting CPL error codes, In VAS Comm3/Comm4, 302 292
338 UPCM (universal programmable Common space VAVs, 286–287
Limited BCU memory for trend control module), definition, 597 Creating the object, 283–284
samples, 450 Upper and lower case Duct pressure optimization, 289
Messages sent to wrong Security option, 131 Global references, 290
workstation, 489 User Security access to, 291
Referencer failure, 30 Authorizations, list of possible, Setting up, 288–289
Runtime errors halt CPL 132 Supported controllers, 281
program, 335 Entering information for, 129 VAV auxiliary heat at night, 289
System cannot locate graphic, Modifying information for, 134 VAV calibration, 289
403 Name, See User name Ventilation optimization, 289
System cannot locate object, Nobody Logged On, 134 VAV air system
370 Operator levels, 128 Variable air volume, definition,
Profile See Profile 597

610 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Index

VAV air system, see VAS

Comm3/Comm4, VAS Comm5
VAV I, 299, 301, 303
VAV II, 299, 301
VAV III, 299, 301
VAV IV, 299, 301
Ventilation optimization in VAS
Comm5, 289
Ventilation, how area control
affects, 247
See also HVAC equipment
Version of BCU, selecting to
download, 85
View only level of security,
definition, 127
Virtual private network
Best practices, 25
Setting up, 17
Testing the VPN connection, 23

W
WAIT statement, 335
Waterflow valve
Balancing, 292
Weekly report, setting up, 475
Window sizes in Tracer Summit,
409
Workstation alarm, enabling and
disabling, 485
Workstation, See PC workstation

Z
Zone
Definition, 598
Setting up, 93
Zone control system, definition,
598
See also Time and zone

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 611
Index

612 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Reader 1. In a word, how would you describe this guide?
________________________

Response 2. Using the following scale, rate the overall quality of this guide:
(Use the following scale.)
Form 1 2 3 4 5
Dreadful Terrific

3. How do you use this guide? (Choose one.)

Our goal is to provide accurate a. I read it from beginning to end.
and efficient information b. I read only the sections that pertain to my immediate needs.
to our customers. Please use
this form to help us improve c. I read only the sections that pertain to my job.
the quality and usability
of this guide. Make copies of 4. How easily can you find information in this guide?
this form if needed. 1 2 3 4 5
Not easy at all Moderately Very easy
—very difficult easy

5. When you actually try the instructions described in this guide, how
easily can you follow them?
1 2 3 4 5
I can’t Occasionally With
follow the the content great
instructions is confusing ease
at all.

6. How well did you understand the product before reading this guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

7. How well did you understand the product after reading the guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

Please send this form 8. The best aspect of this guide is __________________________________
by fax or mail to:
_______________________________________________________________
Trane GCC
Product Communications
4833 White Bear Parkway 9. If we were to change one aspect of this guide, it should be _________
St. Paul, MN 55110
_______________________________________________________________
(fax) 651-407-4198
10. Name, e-mail address: (optional) _________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

BMTX-SVP02A-EN 613
Reader Response Form

614 BMTX-SVP02A-EN
 Literature Order Number BMTX SVP02A-EN
File Number SV-ES-BAS-BMTX-SVP-02A-EN-0704
Supersedes NEW
Trane Stocking Location Inland
A business of American Standard Companies
www.trane.com
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
For more information, contact your local Trane change design and specifications without notice. Only qualified technicians should perform the installa-
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com tion and servicing of equipment referred to in this publication.